creer HecteMt GR EN, meget OED ag tay de re : selina an aranel aa Univor. Toronto LIBRARY. 7 \ . 2 ' p , s ~~ : a" , 5 A t ad . bag ; J . x * ‘ - ’ . . ® : we . ey Ve Fe Woy f } . “hy nA 7 i Bary it iD GMA) 7 PhS il Hi yn, : ps } \ 4 " a vil ‘ - ? i i Le { } “ 4 . i u ’ - wae ; “A A ' vn ‘ kay ' on e? hi ‘ i al be 5 i i “/; ‘ ’ . Ye, We ‘ ety We Mea | c Say 9 ine 1 my PROCEEDINGS OF The Academy of Natural Sciences OF PHILADELPHIA VOLUME LXVII 1915 \ ‘\ \ \ PHILADELPHIA : THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES LOGAN SQUARE 1916 Tue AcApemy or NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, JANUARY 17, 1915. I hereby certify that printed copies of the ProceErpinas for 1915 were mailed as follows:— Lig Sgt Me ~ RE SES ERR Oe m2 OT hat Os ETD March 2, 1915. 33-80 March 24, 1915. ys 25 BE Ae IN acy ea ae Ae any Reet I, ae ee ere te April 15, 1915. PT RN Fa Oe A Zeca aba soeDick Mom atibad Felans Mtns stoss Sis sah EN 22, 1915. Ee tReet en ratte as 8 el > See. ene May 28, 1915. a A clea Nee hasan ua IN Scan RGA cou vowsong base wesint July 9, 1915. a Ag se eer RR ae lin en Re Tne Cee ay July 29, 1915. a TY Le 5 «RB bs ee Pe SES Se hee oe ae my cams OY Ferree August 24, 1915. pi Sy tie GE Re TR eS nee ee eore eee re ere November 9, 1915. ge a a re noha Me Py hd eo ne Oe Re, December 8, 1915. FO DSR OA ate ok. eRe ess iosa ives oo aanthessivbyenxtt sss radpectnes January 25, 1916. EDWARD J. NOLAN, - Recording Seeretary. PUBLICATION COMMITTEE. Henry SKINNER, M.D., Sc.D., Wirmer Stone, A.M., Sc.D., Henry A. Pussry, Sc.D., WituiaMm J. Fox, Epwarp J. Nouan, M.D. The President, SamueL Gipson Drxon, M.D., LL.D., ex-officio. EDITOR: Epwarp J. Nouan, M.D. CONTENTS. For Announcements, Reports, etc., see General Index. ALEXANDER, CHARLES P. New or little-known crane-flies from the United States and Canada: Tipulide, Diptera. Part 2 (Plates XVI-XX]).... oe 2 Barsour, T., and G. K. Nose. iiotes on the ARS snake, Natrix compressicauda..... RE eT tls Ae am CuurcHILL, WittiAM. The earliest Samoan prints he Dati, Witit1am H. Notes on the Semelide of the west coast of America, including some new species | Fretpr, ADELE M. On certain vesicles found in the tntairas i) 2 Rae eae eaeuias Concerning the sense of smell in dows. it cane A new hypothesis concerning butterflies... Fow er, Henry W. Notes on nematognathus fishes........... Cold-blooded vertebrates from Florida, the West Indies, Costa Rica, and eastern Brazil... Fishes from Eastern Canada... Stel elagath Seabigecs Seeeenas The fishes of Trinidad, Gironadss and St. Lucia, British West Indies............... Bo 5 2 IE AEE SR APR aE HARSHBERGER, JOHN W. The diversity of ecologic conditions and its influence on the richness of the flora Matsumoto, H. A new classification of the Ophiuroides With descriptions of new genera and species Meunier, STANISLAS. Observations sur la théorie génér rale des phénoménes glaciaires et sur les galets striés Théorie du gneiss et des terrains cristallophylliens en général. Morse, Autsert P., and MorGcan Heparp. Fixation of single type (Lectotypic) specimens of species of Ameri- can Orthoptera. Division III Piuspry, Henry A. Mollusca of the Southwestern States. VI: The Hacheta Grande, Florida, and Peloncillo Mountains, New Mexico (Plates V, VI, VII) PAGE 96 323 iv CONTENTS. Piusspry, Henry A., and JAmMes H. Ferriss. Mollusca of the Southwestern States. VII: The Dragoon, Mule, Santa Rita, ea ari, and Tucson Ranges, Arizona (Plates VITI-XV).... é RexHN, JAMEs A. G. A further contribution to the knowledge of the Orthoptera of Argentina... eS aed Rexan, JAMes A. G., and MorGan ‘Hmparp. “The genus Gryllus (Orthoptera) as found in America (Plate IV)....... Smita, BurNerr. The structural relations of some Devonian Shales in central New York (Plate XXID)...00000000c00u.. VanatTta, E.G. Praticolella... Rafinesque’s types of Unic:. til Pole rae Wuenrry, Epaar T., and SAMUEL G. Gonpon. “AS arrangement of minerals eis to their occurrence. Pah oPey Wricut, Atpert H., ef al. A _ biological reconnaissance rick the Okefinokee Swamp in Georgia (Plates I, II, IT1)......... PAGE 363 270 293 561 194 549 426 107 Pemac EE DINGS ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES PHILADELPHIA. 1915. JANUARY 19. Mr. CHarues Morais in the Chair. Thirty-one persons present. The Publication Committee reported the receipt of papers under the following titles: “On certain vesicles found in the integument of Ants,” by Adele M. Fielde (January 8). “The Praticolella of the United States,” by E. G. Vanatta (January 13). “Notes on the water-snake Natrix compressicauda,’’ by T. Bar- bour and G. H. Noble (January 15). “Notes on the Semelide of the West Coast of America, including some new species,’’ by William H. Dall (January 16). The death of Léon Vaillant, a correspondent, December, 1914, was announced. Amendments to Chapters II, IV, IX, and XII of the By-Laws were adopted. They provide for the repeal of the initiation fee requirement, the loaning of certain books from the library, the control by Council of the frequency of its own meetings, and the holding of six meetings of the Academy during the year. The following were elected members: Heber Wilkinson Youngken, George B. Benners. The following were ordered to be printed: 2 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF {Jan., OBSERVATIONS SUR LA THEORIE GENERALE DES PHENOMENES GLACIAIRES ET SUR LES GALETS STRIES. PAR STANISLAS MEUNIER. I: Ayant été depuis de longues années appelé 4 étudier d’une maniére trés approfondie de nombreux types de glaciers et de régions présen- tant des traces de glaciers maintenant disparus, il m’a paru qu’un certain nombre d’assertions acceptées par la majorité des géologues méritent d’étre soumises 4 une sévére révision. La conclusion de mes recherches, poursuivies avec le plus grand soin et avec le souci dominateur de me dégager de toute opinion préconcue, m’a amené & contester quelques faits, qui sont cependant classiques, et 4 leur substituer des notions qui cadrent beaucoup mieux, suivant moi, avec les grandes lignes de l'économie planétaire. J’ai eu souvent A recueillir 4 leur égard de précieux contrdles et méme des vérifications complétes. L’idée qui ressortira des pages qu’on va lire, c’est qu’un glacier considéré A part est un appareil qui, tout en remplissant son rdéle dans la physiologie générale de la planéte, est en proie, pour son compte propre, aux progrés d’une véritable évolution. Il débute dans une région qui offre les conditions favorables; il s’accroit au fur et & mesure de l’amplification de ces circonstances heureuses; il parvient ainsi 4 un moment d’apogée, aprés lequel il traverse des phases de déclin, jusqu’au moment de sa disparition totale. . Chemin faisant, le glacier peut entrer en relation avec un glacier voisin et s’engager avec lui dans une lutte ou compétition, 4 laquelle il suc- combe, ou dont, au contraire, il sort 4 son avantage. Dans un cas comme dans l’autre, il en résulte pour son histoire des incidents qui procurent l’explication de certaines circonstance, souvent mal com- prises. Enfin, aprés la cessation du glacier comme organe actif, il laisse des vestiges de son existence passée, qui disparaissent pro- gressivement, avec des détails précieux pour la reconstitution des conditions climatériques des époques reculées. Cette étude de la Fonction glaciaire présentera cette particularité de faire entrer en ligne de compte le réle de toutes les autres fonc- tions géologiques et de resserrer par conséquent les liens entre des 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. o chapitres de la Science qu’on a pris l’habitude de considérer comme complétement indépendants les uns des autres. $1. L’OrtGINE DEs GLACIERS. La formation des glaciers suppose l’existence de deux conditions tout 4 fait primordiales: 1° la continuité d’une température ambiante inférieure 4 zéro; 2° un sol suffisamment incliné pour que la masse compacte soit animée d’un mouvement continu de glissement. I] résulte de la que, sous les latitudes of la température moyenne de l’année est supérieure 4 zéro, un glacier ne peut sé former que sur des points du sol convenablement élevés et atteignant en conséquence, des zones atmosphériques suffisamment froides, en raison du degré atmothermique. Cela peut s’exprimer en disant que l’origine des glaciers dans les régions situées en dehors des zones polaires, est liée directement 4 la surrection des montagnes, ou, si l’on aime mieux, 4 l’exercice de la fonction corticale. On sait que la température de l’atmosphére decroit réguliérement, & mesure que l’on s’éléve, de 1 degré par 185 métres. Il en résulte qu’A une certaine altitude, il n’y a plus de vapeur d’eau dans lair, mais seulement des particules glacées, des aiguilles cristallines qui se comportent comme des poussiéres atmosphériques et tombent lorsque lair est calme. Quand elles parviennent dans des zones inférieures plus échauffée, elles se transforment en vapeurs et n’arrivent au sol que par les temps d’hiver. Les sommets montagneux constituent des réceptacles tout préparés pour l’eau cristallisée, et, se couvrant de neige, deviennent, par contre-coup, des centres de rayonnement de froid. Suivons done d’abord |’évolution des montagnes pour arriver : celle des glaciers. Le grand Plateau centre—asiatique, d’une altitude de prés de 6,000 métres, représente les premiéres étapes du phénoméne de surrection de montagnes assez hautes pour recevoir la neige, avec une consti- tution trés éloignée de celle des montagnes proprement dites. Il résulte de l'étude des échantillons rapportés au Muséum Na- tional d’Histoire Naturelle de Paris, par M. Bonvalot et le Prince Henri d’Orléans, que les parties les plus hautes du massif Pamirien consistent en assises jurassiques fossiliféres, qui n’ont aucune appa- rence des roches métamorphiques. Ce sont des calcaires argileux friables, trés ressemblants 4 ceux qui entrent dans la constitution des régions frangaises les moins tourmentées, comme les départe- ments du Calvados et de |’ Yonne. 4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., Leur transport vertical jusqu’aux altitudes ot ils atteignent maintenant, est le résultat de “bossellements généraux,’’ qui nous apparaissent comme des contre-coups de travaux souterrains en rapports directs avec la production des montagnes. La comparaison avec maintes localités conduisent 4 une conception qui, bien que trés directement connexe A l'histoire des glaciers, concerne cependant avant tout le chapitre orogénique. C’est que le mécanisme d’od résultent les montagnes est harmoniquement subordonné au régime général du globe qui doit traverser les phases successives d’une évolution véritable; qui doit en outre procéder aux modifications de son état général, sans compromettre les conditions d’équilibre de la surface, parmi lesquelles se signalent celles qui sont propres au développement de la vie. Sans y insister, il est digne de remarque que l’écorce, forecée de suivre, dans sa contraction continue, le noyau fluide qui la supporte, doit se refouler sur elle-méme, se doubler a la faveur de plis et de charriages, sans qu'il en résulte pour la surface autre chose que des tremblements de terre dont les plus graves ne déterminent jamais que des catastrophes locales, ne laissant aprés elles aucune trace géologique permanente. Aussi bien, on peut considérer un massif du genre du Pamir comme contenant, en profondeur, une vraie chaine de montagnes qui s’est soulevée lentement, aprés sa constitution, au titre de simple détail du grand ensemble en proie au bossellement général. Il faudra, pour que la montagne, caractérisée par sa structure bréchiforme et son état métamorphique, apparaisse au jour, que des actions externes la débarrassent de sa couverture de Sédiments ayant échappé aux efforts mécaniques et aux actions calorifiques. De 1A, cette masse formidable de débris rocheux, dont les montagnes sont toujours entourées et dont le délayage et l’entrainement par les eaux pluviaires, alimentent la sédimentation aqueuse. Bonvalot! nous a donné la description de l’érosion colossale dont le plateau du Thibet est le théatre, du fait de la pluie et des autres agents de l’intempérisme: ‘‘Aprés, dit-il, que la meige sera tombée dans les mois qui suivront et que |’été sera venu, le soleil fondra ces réserves prodigieuses d’eau et ce sera, aux alentours de la chaine Dupleix, une déba4cle de fin du monde. Une inondation diluvienne déposera des lacs sur les hauts plateaux, les traversera de riviéres qui ' De Paris au Tonkin & travers le Thibet inconnu, p. 215 et suiv. 1 vol. in 8° Paris 1892. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 5 entraineront les boues épaisses et laisseront aux flanes des collines et dans les anses, les débris des hauteurs. Ces dépédts restent la jusqu’a 1’été suivant, car l’hiver arréte le cours des fleuves. Puis, la chaleur du soleil agit; elle liquéfie les masses solidifiées; celles-ci s’ébranlent, coulent, s’emportent, reprennent les dépéts ov elles les ont laissés 4 l’entrée de l’hiver et les enlévent. D’année en année, étape par étape, elles finissent par les charrier toujours plus bas, sans cesse obstruant les vallées, élargissant les gorges, déviant les fleuves, étalant les deltas.’”? Done, les masses superficielles seront successivement démantelées, puis supprimées et le massif orogénique, refoulé et métamorphisé, se dégagera comme’ le produit d’une gestation et d’une véritable déhiscence de ses enveloppes protectrices. C’est comme un détail nécessaire du phénoméne, que nous apparait la suppression des portions superficielles d’un pays dont le sous-sol a été refoulé sou- terrainement, par des successions généralement trés nombreuses de séismes. . Ajoutons que les observateurs sont d’accord pour voir avant tout dans nos grandes chaines, Alpes, Pyrénées, Caucase, Himalaya, des résidus d’érosion pluviaire. On est allé parfois jusqu’A dire que les Alpes ont df perdre de cette maniére, autant de substance qu’elles en ont conservé. C’est au cours de cette suppression, que les chaines sont devenues peu 4 peu de vraies montagnes et qu’elles ont apparu au jour comme les ‘‘ossements composant le squelette de la terre”’ selon une expression restée célébre. Disons en passant que le tremblement de terre est la cause efficiente des montagnes qui, une fois édifiées par lui dans les profondeurs de *Le Plateau thibétain, n’est pas plus une région glaciaire que la surface plane de la Sibérie, dans laquelle se trouve le point de température minimum de toute la surface terrestre. Nous trouvons, quant au régime des neiges, un exemple analogue dans la Terre de Grinnel, explorée par Greely, en 1889 (Voir: Dans les Glaces arctiques, p. 270 in 8° Paris 1889). ‘*Cette fle, située par 82° de latitude nord, est entourée d'une ceinture de glaciers et, malgré cette circonstance, elle résente dans son intérieur des régions relativement fertiles, ol paissent toute ‘année de trés nombreux troupeaux de bceufs musqués (Ovibos moschatus). Suivant l’expression du botaniste célébre, Joseph Hooker, la Terre de Grinnel a “non pas un manteau, mais une ceinture de glaces."’ Et Greely écrivait: “La question des conditions physiques de l’intérieur de la Terre de Grinnell est résolue eet comme l’ont fait pour la Terre Verte, les découvertes de Nordens- old. Ces condition consistent, ajoute le voyageur, en ce que le terrain, montagneux et abrupt, ne permet pas aux neiges abondantes de l’hiver de se maintenir long- temps. De nombreuses vallées, longues et étroites, sont hérissées d’une quantité énorme de roches nues, dont les angles aident & concentrer la chaleur du soleil pendant |’été; ces vallées servent d’émissaires aux neiges fondues qui s’écoulent sur leurs falaises. Les riviéres de la saison chaude drainent le * rapidement et longtemps, avant le retour des fortes gelées, toute la neige a disparu.” 6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., la crotte terrestre, sont mises progressivement 4 découvert, en attendant qu’elles soient ulterieurement supprimées par le jeu des actions externes, telles que la pluie et l’Océan. Exemple remar- quable, par ses dimensions et par le contraste complet qui distinguent les unes des autres ses différentes phases, de ces cycles innombrables dont l'ensemble constitue toute la physiologie de la Terre. C’est aussi le procédé par lequel s’élabore le genre de gisement favorable A l’établissement des glaciers. Et nous voici ramenés au cceur méme de notre sujet. L’érosion s’attaquant 4 la surface des couches soulevées par un bossellement général en méme temps que le noyau orogénique q’elles recouvrent, en modifie progressivement ‘la surface, d’abord continue et uniforme comme celle des grands fonds de mer. Ce travail, paralléle a l’ceuvre de surrection qui peut se continuer pendant des périodes géologiques entiéres, favorise celle-ci en diminu- ant peu 4 peu le poids de la matiére 4 soulever. § 2. Pouvorr DE TRANSPORT DES GLACIERS. Le glacier est un merveilleux appareil de condensation de |’hu- midité aérienne, qui s’y convertit en neige, puis se transforme en névé et en glace. C’est en méme temps, un centre de dispersion aqueuse, car il s’y fait une évaporation active, méme par le froid et surtout quand le vent souffle. Cette activité qu’il manifeste dans l’atmos- phére, le glacier la déploie sur le sol, en transportant des particules rocheuses de toutes dimensions. Le poids n’intervient pas plus que la densité relative des débris: toutes les pierres, méme les plus grosses, sont portées sur le dos du glacier. Ces sortes de “ flotteurs”’ sont emportés comme les corps légers 4 la surface des riviéres, et ils vont s’acumuler sur les berges en cordons longitudinaux ou moraines latérales. Il y a cependant des différences relativement aux cours d’eau, et en particulier celles qui concernent les affluents ainsi que la terminaison du glacier, comparable 4 l’embouchure. Le mélange des filets prove- nant de deux glaciers qui se confondent n’étant pas possible comme celui des filets constitutifs des cours d’eau, les lisérés mitoyens de corps flottants s’associent en trainées longitudinales dites moraines médianes. En outre, les corps minéraux portés jusqu’éa la région de fusion, au lieu de constituer un delta ou quelque sédiment, s’accu- mulent sans ordre en un bourrelet connu sous le nom de moraine frontale et qui fait comme une fortification derriére laquelle le glacier vient mourir. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. t Enfin, les glaciers qui aboutissent 4 la mer précipitent de leur front au fond de l’eau, des quantités de matériaux que les courants ne laissent pas s’accumuler sous forme de moraine. Triés plus ou moins par grosseur et étalés en nappes qui prennent 4 certains égards |’allure des sédiments ordinaires, ils vont s’emmagasiner dans des fjords qui finissent par en étre comblés. Et les icebergs, détachés du front terminal s’en vont, quelquefois fort loin, laissant tomber au fond de la mer des débris rocheux, de gros blocs essentiellement erratiques. § 3. EROSION GLACIAIRE. L’érosion produite par le glacier est considérable et trés par- ticuliére. Il agit indirectement sur les formations qui l’environnent en activant l’intempérisme, ec’est-A-dire en donnant un grand volume aux pluies et en provoquant des congélations locales qui désagrégent les roches. De plus, par sa faculté de transport, il prive constamment les parties érodées de la protection des éboulis, si efficace ailleurs. Mais c’est surtout par son action directe sur sa vallée que le glacier travaille A la démolition de la montagne. D’aprés les observations de Dollfus-Ausset,? le glacier de l’Aar qui, avec ses affluents, n’a qu’une surface de 60 kilométres carrés, fournit par jour LOO métres cubes de sable qui sont emportés par le torrent. L’ablation des vallées par les glaciers est done bien supérieure A celle que produisent la plupart des cours d’eau, a égale superficie de bassin. Le sol sous le glacier, subit une friction considérable du fait des graviers et des pierrailles, véritable matelas interposé entre la glace et le roc. M. Vallot‘ a insisté sur ce fait que la votite gelée, A la Mer de glace de Chamonix, n'est pas moulée sur le sol, mais lui est simple- ment tangente. Le torrent sous-glaciaire s'est ménagé un véritable tunnel. L’efficacité érosive du glacier n’en fut pas moins longtemps con- testée et n’est encore admise, par certains géologues, qu’avec des restrictions et comme A regret. Lapparent, dont le T’raité de Géologie a la prétention de résumer |’opinion générale, a écrit en 18852“ Nulle part, on n’a vu les glaciers creuser, affouiller un lit composé de roches dures, ni découper leurs parois comme font les torrents . . . Un glacier n’est done pas, comme un torrent, un instrument efficace erosion... ; autant qu'on en peut juger, par ce qui se passe aujourd’ hui, un glacier ne erée pas sa vallée, ete ” 3D'aprés Ed. Cottomp memoires sur le glaciers actuels, Annales de mines (5)* XI, 198. 4 Annales de l' Observatoire météorologique du Mont-Blanc, 111, Paris, 1898. 5 2° édition p. 285. 8 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., En 1893, le méme auteur faisait parler autrement l’opinion géné- rale:® “‘On a beaucoup discuté, dit-il, sur la puissance d’erosion des glaciers. Quelques-uns la croient considérable; d’autres seraient portés A la regarder comme négligeable. La vérité semble se trouver entre ces deux extrémes’. . . En principe, puisque le glacier est un fleuve de glace dont l’allure ne différe de celle des eaux courantes que par une vitesse incomparablement moins grande, il doit comme les - fleuves tendre vers un profil d’équilibre et, tant que ce profil n’est pas atteint, le pouvoir de la glace doit s’employer 4 modifier en conséquence la forme du lit . . . Méme les roches les plus dures du fond ne peuvent échapper 4 cette action, car les blocs que trans- porte la glace, poussés par une pression considérable, agissent sur le fond et les parois comme de puissants outils, etc.” Il y a bien longtemps que, pour ma part, j’ai soutenu l’opinion que les glaciers réalisent par le frottement des pierrailles qu’ils entratn- ent sur les roches qui les supportent, un énergique travail d’érosion. J’écrivais en 1891:7 “Déja j’ai eu bien souvent l’occasion de faire remarquer que la zone des roches moutonnées au-dessus de la glace dans les glaciers des Alpes et d’ailleurs, correspond a des points ot la glace n’atteint plus, justement parce que, grace 4 son action érosive, elle a pénétré verticalement dans la masse rocheuse sous-jacente. Elle est vrai- ment comparable 4 une scie, entrant dans une piéce de bois et qui bient6ét se meut au-dessous des points qu’elle a sciés précédemment mais qui ne datent pas d’un temps ot sa lame aurait été plus large.’’ “Ceux qui, dit Tyndall? ont soutenu que les glaciers creusent les vallées, n’ont jamais dit, ni voulu dire, que ce fit le bec du glacier qui agit dans ce cas. Pour le glacier de Morteratsch (Engadine), le travail de creusement, qui s’effectue certainement dans des pro- portions plus ou moins grandes, doit étre bien plus considérable en haut qu’en bas du glacier.” ; La réalité et importance de la dénudation glaciaire est aujour- d’hui reconnue par un grand nombre d’observateurs parmi lesquels nous citerons M. Richter? et M. W. Salomon." 6 Traité de Géologie, 3° édition, p. 279, 1893. 7 Le Naturaliste, Jivraison du 15 janvier 1892, N° 118, p. 19. 8 Les Glaciers, p. 95 I vol. in 8°, 6° édition Paris 1894. * Geomorphologische Untersuchungen in den Hochalpen, Petermann’s Mittheil- ungen, 132° livraison, 1900, p. 103. ” Konnen Gletscher ein anstehendem Fels Kare Becken und Thaler erodieren? Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geologie und Paldontologie, 1900, T. 11, pp. 117-138, 2 pl. ; Peay *y 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 9 L’attaque s’exerce méme aux dépens des roches moutonnées. En effet, dans des excursions sur la Mer de Glace, aux Ponts et au Mauvais Pas, comme dans celles sur les glaciers de la Haute-Engadine et de bien d’autres régions, j’ai été frappé de ce fait que le poli des roches moutonnées qui dominent la glace, n’est pas le méme a toutes les hauteurs: méme de loin, on constate, trés nettement en bien des points, qu’il est de plus en plus imparfait, c’est-a-dire de plus en plus altéré, 4 mesure que l’on s’éléve. En outre, la limite supérieure des polis est loin d’étre aussi nette que la limite supérieure du glacier et on voit des lambeaux de roches polies séparés de la masse générale des roches moutonnées, situées plus bas. Ces circonstances curieuses s’expliquent par la pénétration verticale du glacier dans la masse des roches qui le supportent, grace 4 un mécanisme identique, a celui qui fait pénétrer dans une pierre le fil émerisé du lapidaire. En effet, l’Age des différentes parties du polissage est loin d’étre le méme: les parties hautes sont plus anciennes que les autres et, en conséquence, elles ont éprouvé plus longtemps l’action désagrégeante des intempéries; en méme temps que les roches moutonnées gagnent par en bas, 4 cause de la pénétration verticale du glacier dans le sol, elles perdent par en haut, sous l’influence de l’intempérisme. On peut done en conclure qu’elles ont pu jadis atteindre une altitude encore plus haute que celle qu’on observe aujourd’hui. De sorte que le procédé employé d’ordinaire pour restaurer les anciens glaciers devrait conduire 4 leur donner une dimension encore bien plus grande qu’on ne la suppose. L’érosion glaciaire, soit directe, soit médiate, revét si bien tous les traits essentiels de la dénudation fluviaire, qu’elle affecte une allure régressive, quant 4 son travail vertical, se traduisant par le phénoméne de Capture, que j'ai reconnu dés 1897, et sur lequel nous reviendrons dans un moment." ; $4. EvoLuTion DES GLACIERS. Les glaciers doivent leur origine au soulévement de la montagne, jusque dans les régions atmosphériques de température suffisamment basse; mais comme ils travaillent sans cesse 4 la démolir, elle subit une diminution de volume et surtout de hauteur qui entraine le rapetissement du glacier. La neige regue par le sommet ¢tant moins abondante, la glace qu'elle produit par sa compression ne peut plus alimenter un courant aussi long que précédemment et le uC, R. Acad, Se. t. CX XIV, p. 1043 (10 mai 1897). 10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., glacier abandonne, devant son front, une moraine terminale qu’il ne peut plus atteindre. Ii ne faut pas confondre le recul des glaciers avee les variations locales quils subissent du fait de la météorologie, par exemple A la suite d’une série d’hivers peu neigeux. Le recul des glaciers passe par des alternatives, comme la mer descendante, dont la vague par- fois semble regagner du terrain; le raccourcissement et l’Allonge- ment temporaire du glacier se perd dans l’allure général du phéno- méne, qui se retire peu A peu vers l’amont de la vallée, en laissant des moraines successives, trés inégalement espacées, et entre lesquelles le sol offre seulement une dissémination de débris rocheux de toutes grosseurs: le terrain glaciaire éparpillé contrastant avec le terrain glaciaire amoncelé, dont le type est la moraine. Le glacier qui diminue, change en méme temps de forme: il perd la longue trainée qui descend vers les parties basses et se réduit & la portion élargie des régions élevées. Les Pyrénées, montagnes plus anciennes que les Alpes, et qui par conséquent subissent |’érosion depuis plus longtemps, nous offrent cette sorte de glaciers larges et courts, s’arrétant au haut de vallées étroites, dont les flanes sont en beaucoup d’endroits parfaitement moutonnés et le long desquelles se montrent des moraines transversales, échelonnées de distance en distance, ce qui indique avec évidence que le glacier y a séjourné dans l’intervalle de ses raccourcissements successifs. Imaginons les Pyrénées remises en possession de tout ce qu’elles ont perdu depuis leur soulévement, leurs sommets se retrouveraient dans les zones atmosphériques de fortes condensations neigeuses, et les cirques, mieux alimentés, reconstitueraient des glaciers semblables 4 ceux des Alpes. Aprés le stade alpestre et le stade pyrénéen, nous arrivons au stade vosgien. Si l’on part de la petite ville de La Bresse, pour remonter la vallée du Chajoux, en se rapprochant du sommet de Hohneck, on se trouve d’abord en présence de particularités topographiques tout A fait comparables 4 celles que nous offre le bas des vallées des’ Pyrénées. De magnifiques moraines se présentent aux regards, d’autant plus faciles A reconnaitre qu’elles ont été recoupées par la riviére et entaillées pour le passage de la route. Sur le flane des coteaux, accidentellement dépouillés du sol arable, on apergoit des surfaces de roches nettement moutonnées. Mais, on a beau continuer son ascension, jusqu’au lac de Lispach, qui s’est établi derriére un barrage morainique, et méme arriver au sommet du Hohneck, on ne Oe a 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11 rencontre pas le moindre vestige de glace. Des plaques de neige pourront se voir encore jusqu’en aotit, dans les creux abrités du soleil; ‘mais en septembre, elles auront toutes fondu. Pour qu’elles persis- tassent, il suffirait d’un bien faible exhaussement des Vosges, d’une restitution 4 la chaine d’une partie seulement des matériaux que ’érosion lui a arrachés et qui gisent, A l’état de moraines, dans la vallée du Chajoux et dans toutes les autres vallées qui rayonnent en tous sens. Les Vosges ont été comme les Pyrénées; les Pyrénées seront comme les Vosges. Certaines autres régions frangaises, comme la Bretagne, le Cotentin, |’Auvergne, privées de glace et souvent méme de moraines, ont cepend- ant possédé des glaciers. On y rencontre en effet, 4 la surface de ter- rains variés, des blocs erratiques, semblables 4 ceux que charrient les glaciers et qu’ils abandonnent 4 leur moraine terminale. La déter- mination parait d’autant plus légitime que les monts d’Arrée, par exemple, malgré leur altitude actuelle de simples collines, se révélent par leur structure caractérisée, comme les résidus d’érosion d’une chaine primitivement batie sur le modéle des Alpes. L’intem- périsme a dispersé les moraines, attaqué les surfaces polies des roches moutonnées; il a laissé, provisoirement, quelques gros fragments rocheux particuliérement résistants. L’appareil glaciaire s’est done développé successivement dans les différents massifs montagneux, chaque fois que ceux-ci ont présenté une altitude suffisante pour y assurer la persistance de la neige. Successivement, les centres glaciaires ont occupé des régions diffé- rentes, et l’on peut croire qu’au total, les diverses époques se sont tres intimement ressemblé par le nombre et par le volume des glaciers développés durant chacune d’elles et seulement repartis differemment. L’émigration des glaciers, comparable & l’émigration des continents mais dont la chronologie est plus difficile, faute de fossiles permet- tant de les dater, doit étre substituée A la conception d’une époque glaciaire, dans laquelle les diverses traces glaciaires seraient contem- poraines les unes des autres, ot il y aurait eu beaucoup plus de glaciers que dans aucun autre temps, ce qui est essentiellement contraire a la marche, si évidemment continue et uniforme, de |’évolution de la surface terrestre. La capture des glaciers est un point particulier et d'un haut intérét de leur évolution. La capture est une analogie de plus, entre les cours d’eau solidifiée et les riviéres. Comme ces derniéres, des glaciers voisins doivent nécessairement réagir les uns sur les autres. 12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., Imaginons deux glaciers A et B, remplissant deux vallées orientées & angle plus ou moins ouvert l'une sur l’autre, et disposées de telle sorte que le bassin supérieur de A soit séparé de la partie moyenne de B par une cloison rocheuse peu épaisse, la pente de A étant plus accentuée que celle de B. Dans ces conditions, la régression de tout ensemble du glacier A, améne |’amincissement de la cloison sépara- trice en B, et plusieurs voyageurs ont directement observé le phéno- méne et en ont decrit les progrés, comme sir Martin Conway, en 1898, pour le Spitzberg,” et M. Williard D. Johnson, pour les Etats-Unis, en 1899." Lorsque la destruction de cette cloison s’est enfin réalisée, et qu’alors le glacier A, en conséquence de sa pente plus forte, exerce une véritable succion sur la glace de B et la dérive 4 son profit, B est décapité, pour adopter l’expression employée 4 |’égard des cours d’eau, et A a réalisé la capture de la portion supérieure de B. Le glacier A, conformément 4 la loi générale, avait subi une diminution consécutive A l’abaissement de son bassin d’alimentation sous l’influence de |’érosion; il avait abandonné sa moraine frontale et en avait édifié de nouvelles en arriére de celle-lA; sur le terrain glaciaire éparpillé, s’était établi alors un régime continental ordinaire: production d’un étang ou d’une tourbiére, avec débris organiques enfouis, animaux et végétaux. Mais voici la capture qui a lieu: une nouvelle contribution de glace vient s’ajouter au volume du glacier: il se gonfle, passe par dessus sa moraine frontale qu’il écrase et transforme en moraine profonde, s’avance sur la tourbiére ou sur l’étang, en recouvre les formations de son dépdét éparpillé et récupére sa dimension primitive qu'il peut méme dépasser. Puis la diminution inéluctable reprend ses droits; le glacier recule de nouveau et finalement disparait. Et si l’on est mis en présence d’une coupe du sol, intéressant les diverses formations dont nous avons résumé la production successive, on y verra: une assise fos- silifére, argileuse ou tourbeuse, contenant des coquilles lacustres, des animaux et des végétaux terrestres, intercalée entre deux niveaux glaciaires: l’inférieur datant de |’évolution propre du glacier A, le supérieur se rapportant au retour de ce glacier, enrichi par la capture. + Ces conditions se retrouvent dans un grand nombre de localités, par exemple 4 Diirtein, 4 Utznach, 4 Wetzikon auprés de Zurich. M. Kilian", étudiant la gorge de Fort |’Ecluse, entre Genéve et 12 Geographical Journal, XII, No. 2, p. 137. % An unrecognized ‘process in glacial erosion. Second Annual Report of the National Geographical Society of the United States of America—in Science (de Londres) nouvelle serie IX, No. 212. 4 Bulletin de la Société Géologique de France (4°) X. 716 (1910). 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 13 Bellegarde, y a reconnu les traces de plusieurs récurrences glaciaires séparées par des dépdts d’alluvions, indiquant plusieurs cycles d’érosion successifs. En ‘effet, le nombre des nappes morainiques supérposées peut étre supérieur 4 2, par exemple de 3 ou de 4, ou méme de 6, comme on le constate en certains points de l’Angleterre. Le fait tient au nombre de glaciers situés dans un méme massif montagneux et qui ont pu entrer en communication. Comment tous ces faits ne nous mettraient-ils pas en garde contre le danger évident qu’il y aurait 4 regarder les diminutions et les accroissements alternatifs de deux glaciers différents, comme ayant été exactement concordants dans le temps, c’est-d-dire non pas seulement de la méme époque géologique, mais du méme instant précis. C'est cependant parce qu’on eut cette idée inacceptable qu’on a cru a existence de périodes alternatives de grandes extensions et de reculs des glaciers. Manifestement il faut renoncer A cette conception qui restera dans l’histoire de la Science, comme le témoignage d’un moment d’aveuglement. §5. Le GRAND PHENOMENE ERRATIQUE DU Norp. Nous savons que les glaciers polaires, aboutissant 4 la mer, ne peuvent se construire de moraines, mais qu’ils déposent le long de la céte, sous les eaux, une épaisse formations sédimentaire, et que chemin faisant, les icebergs entrainés par les courants, pars¢ment le fond de la mer de limons, de sables, de graviers, de pierres, quelquefois d’un volume considérable. Ce phénoméne, qui s’est produit aux époques géologiques immediatement antérieures 4 la notre, a imprimé un car- actére particulier au sol de vastes régions. Une partie de |’ Europe, constituant comme une auréole autour de la Scandinavie et comprenant une large bande de |’Allemagne et de la Russie de l'Ouest dont le sol est relativement trés récent, est couverte de matériaux éparpillés offrant le caractére glaciaire. Ceux-ci consistent en débris et parfois en trés gros blocs de roches fort anciennes. Parmi ces roches, il en est de si reconnaissables qu’il est facile de déterminer leur lieu d’ori- gine. Dans le nombre sont des caleaires & Orthocéres venant, sans aucun doute, de l’ile de Gothland, dans la mer Baltique, et des syénites zirconiennes, qui ont été arrachées aux rochers des environs de Christiana: les uns et les autres ont été transportés Jusqu aux alentours de Berlin. La disposition des lieux est telle qu'on doit voir dans la dispersion de ces matériaux, le résultat de la dispersion d’icebergs ayant leur point de départ dans les Alpes Scandinaves et datant d’une époque ot ces montagnes ¢taient couvertes de. glaciers ‘ 14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., pendant que les pays sur lesquels s’est étalé le ‘‘grand phénoméne erratique du Nord” étaient submergés sous les flots d’une mer recevant les tétes des glaciers suédois. La persistance d’un semblable phénoméne A travers des périodes géologiques successives s’explique par un simple déplacement de la localité of il se développe. Si l’Atlantique venait un jour a se déssécher par suite du soulévement de son fond au-dessus du niveau des mers, la ressemblance des effets qui s’y développent aujourd’hui avec ceux qui ont pris naissance antérieurement en Allemagne et en Russie pourrait porter A faire admettre que les deux régions ont été soumises en méme temps au phénoméne glaciaire; et l’erreur, cette fois si manifeste, accentuera nos remarques de tout 4 l’heure sur la non-contemporanéité des moraines ou des roches moutonnées, des diverses régions continentales. Les traces du grand phénoméne erratique se retrouvent en Amérique du Nord comme en Europe. II irradie des sommets montagneux du Canada, qui se révélent ainsi comme ayant, dans le passé, porté des glaciers aboutissant 4 un océan étendu, dans ce temps-la, sur les Etats-Unis. Si l’on ne voyait pas |’Atlantique a l’ceuvre et si l’on ne connaissait que les régions européennes et américaines couvertes de terrains erratiques, on ne ferait nulle difficulté de supposer qu’elles ont acquis leurs caractéres spéciaux dans un méme moment. La notion fournie par l’existence de |’Atlantique montre comment |’opinion contraire est plus vraisemblable et méme comment il n’y a aucune raison de croire que toute la région européenne d’une part, et que toute la région américaine de l’autre, aient subi le phénoméne erratique chacune d’un seul coup. Tout porte & admettre que la cause de dispersion des icebergs a di se déplacer avec le temps, en conséquence de la propagation progressive des bossellements généraux et de Vémigration de la mer. if, LA QUESTION DES GALETS STRIBS. La plupart de nos lecteurs verraient sans doute une lacune impar- donnable dans |’oubli des galets striés parmi la série des caractéres propres aux formations glaciaires. K. von Zittel, cet esprit d’ordi- naire si judicieux, est allé jusqu’a dire: ‘“‘L’indice le plus infaillible de l’origine glaciaire d’une formation se trouve dans la présence des cailloux striés. On ne rencontre que trés rarement des stries sur des fragments de roches cristallisées, de grés quarteux et de jaspe; par 1915.! NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15 contre, elles se font voir de la maniére la plus reconnaissable sur les fragments calcaires, particuliérement sur ceux de couleur sombre. Dans une moraine profonde qui n’a pas été remaniée et lavée par les eaux, presque tous les cailloux calcaires portent des stries qui souvent sont aussi profondes que si elles avaient été gravées avec un burin.’’» Tout le monde 4 peu prés, était en ce temps 1A du méme avis, et cette quasi-unanimité en imposait assez aux dissidents pour qu’ils conservassent in petto les objections qui se présentaient 4 leur esprit. On s’explique d’ailleurs jusqu’A un certain point l’erreur qui consiste 4 attribuer aux stries des galets une origine glaciaire et l’on comprend qu’une fois l’erreur commise on ait tenu d’instinct A la conserver, parce qu'elle semblait un guide commode dans la recon- stitution de histoire géologique des glaciers. Quant au premier de ces deux points de vue, il faut reconnaitre que c’est surtout dans la masse des dépots glaciaires, et avant tout dans les moraines, que les galets striés ont été observés. Par exemple, e’est sur les moraines des Vosges qu’ Ed. Collomb"® a fait les obser- vations, pour ainsi dire initiales, qui ont été complétées par des expériences, prouvant que les galets striés passent 4 |’état de galets ordinaires, quand on les sommet 4a un frottement semblable A celui qui se développe dans le lit d’un cours d’eau. On a conclu de ces observations qu’un glacier constitue un appareil des plus fragiles et que sa disparition totale doit suivre immédiate- ment l’envahissement par la mer de la région ov il existait. La premiére action des flots a été sans aucun doute de démanteler les moraines et d’en laver les matériaux hétérogénes. Le frottement leur a fait perdre les traits morphologiques qui pouvaient leur étre caractéristiques et le balancement des eaux les a répartis rapidement en dépéts parfaitement classés, parfaitement distincts les uns des autres et n’ayant plus rien qui puisse les distinguer des sédiments ordinaires. D’un autre cété, comme on retrouve des galets striés au sein de formations géologiques d’ages trés divers, on a été enchanté, et a bon droit, de croire A leur autorité pour révéler l’action glaciaire 3 tous les moments de la vie de la Terre. La premiére fois que j’ai eu des doutes sur l’origine glaciaire des stries, j’en ai ressenti une espéce de consternation et j’ai fait tout — % Ueber Gletscher Erscheinungen in der bayerischen Hochebene; Bulletin de l’ Académie de Munich, 1874, p. 225. % Preuves de l’ existence d’anciens glaciers dans les vallées des Vosges. in 8° Paris 1847. 16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., au monde pour ne pas céder a l’invitation, que semblaient me faire certaines particularités des Préalpes vaudoises, de me mettre en dissentiment avec l’immense majorité des géologues. Déja, j’avais provoqué des résistances A l’occasion de bien des sujets différents, tels que la doctrine de la sédimentation souterraine qui me parait cependant de plus en plus légitme; tels que l’origine, par réactions gazeuses, des roches silicatées magnésiennes de consolidation primi- tive; tels que la capture des glaciers; tels que le mode de creusement des vallées par les riviéres et la constitution du diluvium; tels que le fait des relations stratigraphiques réciproques des divers types de méteorites; tels que beaucoup d’autres qu'il n’est pas nécessaire de rappeler. Je dois avouer que j’eus un moment d’hésitation avant de me lancer dans |’exposition des faits qui me conduisirent 4 affirmer que, si dans les Préalpes vaudoises, d’anciens glaciers ont existé, ce qui est bien possible, ils n’ont laissé aucune trace de leur existence. En d’autres termes, que tous les accidents considérés comme des témoig- nages de l’ancienne existence des glaciers dans le pays, se rattachent avec évidence 4 des causes toutes différentes, et ne comportent pas les conséquences générales qu’on a cru pouvoir tirer de leur étude. Je n’entrerai pas ici dans le détail de mes recherches, et je donnerai seulement deux observations. Des spécimens recueillis au pied des Pléiades, au-dessus du village de Blonay, 4 4 kilométres au N. de Vevey (Suisse), consistent -en- galets de caleaire poli, présentant une prodigieuse abondance de stries et une extréme variété dans leurs directions. Toutes les faces de ces galets sont striées en tous sens. En outre, tous les galets . caleaires contenus dans le sol sont semblables 4 ceux-ci par |’état de leur surface; mais les roches plus dures, grés, granulites, serpentine, etc., ne sont pas striées ou ne le sont que d’une maniére exceptionnelle et avec parcimonie. Or, si les stries étaient |’ceuvre du glacier, leur orientation générale devrait indiquer celle de la pression supposée; mais elles sont égale- ment nombreuses dans tous les sens possibles. _D’ailleurs, la pression du terrain, aussi forte qu’on puisse la supposer, ne saurait produire que des stries associées 4 des écrasements de beaucoup prépondérants, et c’est ce que démontre |’expérience. Une autre remarque qui, a elle seule, semble réduire 4 néant ’hypothése que les stries des galets calcaires sont dus a |’action des glaciers, c’est que si telle était en effet leur origine, si par conséquent elles dataient d’une antiquité de quelques milliers d’années seulement, aay 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. £Z (et dans le pays de Vevey ce n’est pas assez dire), elles auraient depuis longtemps disparu par le fait de la corrosion réalisée par les eaux d’infiltration. J’ai fait disparaitre en moins d’un an le poli et la plupart des stries de galets que j’avais abandonnés dans la terre végétale 4 toutes les alternatives saisonniéres. Une coupe rencontrée sur la rive droite du torrent appelé la Baie de Clarens, qui descend du pied 8. O. du Mont Folly, pour se jeter dans le lac Léman, m’a procuré des observations dignes de mention. Les travaux d’une route joignant Blonay 4 Charnex, avaient nécessité louverture d’un énorme placage de terrain caillouteux, recoupé en face de Brent, suivant la pente du sol, par une tranchée de 200 métres de longueur et dont les parois montraient le contact d’une surface trés inclinée de roches schisteuses, avec recouvrement épais de terrain caillouteux. Cette ligne de contact est trés inégalement inclinée selon les points: tandis que, dans certaines de ses parties, elle plonge trés vite, dans d’autres, au contraire, elle est bien moins éloignée de la direction horizontale. Et la conséquence, c’est que les eaux d’infil- tration ruissellent dans la masse avec une activité trés inégale ici et 14, et que le travail de la dénudation souterraine est d’ étre loin d’étre uniforme d’un point a l’autre. Dans le premier cas, et toutes choses égales d’ailleurs, on voit la boue beaucoup moins abondante, pendant que les galets calcaires sont trés exactement polis et trés richement striés; au contraire, dans |’autre cas, on observe des intervalles de niveaux limoneux et un excés de boue qui, bien loin de présenter la structure des moraines, permet de retrouver des formes de deltas superposés. En méme temps, on reconnait que les stries font & peu prés défaut sur les galets calcaires. Nous avons prononcé les mots “dénudation souterraine.’’ C'est la qu’en effet, est la cause des stries sur les galets calcaires. Beaucoup des caractéres morphologiques de la surface du sol lui viennent d’actions souterraines dont ils sont le contre-coup. Une partie des eaux courantes s’infiltre dans la terre végétale pour s’écouler A la surface de la roche sous-jacente. Quand la pente est convenable, l’écoulement détermine, |’usure de ce substratum, et des réseaux de dépression allongés se produisent avec l’apparence de vallées sans cours d’eau visible. Le manteau de sol arable s’affaisse peu A peu au cours de ce travail, sans cesser de persister, et tout en étant le siége d’un renouvellement incessant de toutes ses particules. 2 18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., Dans les pays A forte pente, cette dénudation souterraine, toute voisine de la surface du sol, prend des caractéres extrémement intéressants. Pour observer les faits avec leur maximum de netteté il faut choisir une localité dont la roche vive soit recouverte de ces placages boueux a pierrailles de toutes les grosseurs, comme dans l’exemple que nous venons de citer. Ces placages, quoique 4 base argileuse, sont cependant bien perméables, 4 cause du sable quartzeux qu‘ils contiennent en pro- portion trés notable et des blocs rocheux .qui y sont disséminés; aussi l’eau d’infiltration y circule-t-elle avec une assez grande facilité. Sous l’influence du liquide en mouvement, le terrain subit des pertes qui dérivent, les unes d’une dissolution de substances calcaires dans |’acide carbonique de l’eau de pluie, les autres d’un entrainement mécanique de particules argileuses qui troublent l’eau d’une fagon trés visible A la base des pentes et la rendent méme tout 4 fait boueuse, quand les pluies sont fortes et prolongées. La perte de matiére qui provient de cette double cause est trés notable et elle détermine nécessairement un tassement sur elle-méme de la matiére restante, qui glisse en méme temps sur la roche suppor- tant le placage boueux et qui, comme nous l’avons vu, est ici forte- ment inclinée. Dans ce mouvement de contraction du terrain, il s’inflige pour ainsi dire 4 lui-méme une nouvelle forme de la dénudation souterraine. A cause de son hétérogénéité, le déplacement relatif de ses grains durs et de ses éléments plus tendres améne l’usure de ceux-ci, et souvent cette usure se manifeste par l’acquisition de détails mor- pholologiques des plus remarquables. Les grains de quartz de toutes grosseurs, se mouvant trés lente- ment, mais d’une maniére continue, contre les fragments calcaires, contribuent 4 les user. Ces fragments calcaires, d’abord trés anguleux, comme on le voit dans les parties hautes de la région, s’émoussent peu 4 peu sous l’influence des actions si bien connues et qui tendent 4 supprimer dans les roches qui les subissent toutes les parties saillantes pour y substituer des contours arondis. Si bien qu’un cube ne tarderait pas A passer A une sphére plus ou moins parfaite et que des polyédres quelconques marchent vers |’état d’ellipsoides. Il y a longtemps que j’ai insisté sur ce mode de production de galets sans charriage.” Dans nos placages boueux, l’action d’émoussement di 4 l'eau % La Nature, 5° année, 1* semestre, p. 330. Paris, 1877. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19 souterraine et qui fait peu & peu des galets avec des blocs anguleux, se complique de la collaboration de ce déplacement intestin des grains de quartz par rapport aux débris calcaires sous l’influence de la dénudation souterraine. En conséquence de la soustraction de substance soluble ou entrain- able réalisée par l’eau d’infiltration, ces petits grains de quartz se meuvent sur la surface des blocs, lentement mais d’une fagon continue, et avec une pression qui est mesurée par le poids du terrain superposé. Il en résulte que les surfaces convenablement tendres et avant tout, les surfaces de calcaire compacte, se polissent véritablement: comme elles se poliraient sous l’influence d’une molette, dans un atelier de marbrier. Ce poli se renouvelle sans cesse: un galet poli enfoui dans la terre arable exposée 4 la pluie perd en trés peu de temps sa surface carac- téristique, il se ternit, il se corrode. Et ec’est pour cela que nous pouvions tout 4 heure dire que, si de semblables galets avaient été polis par les glaciers quaternaires dans les placages ot on les trouve maintenant, il y a un temps incalculable qu’ils auraient perdu le poli auquel on prétend les reconnaitre.. Mais dans leurs gisements, & mesure qu’ils sont attaqués, ils se polissent de nouveau et cela sans arrét. Si la grande masse des petits grains quartzeux arrive a polir et . 4 entretenir polis sous toutes leurs faces, les galets calcaires contenus dans les placages boueux des Préalpes, certains grains de méme nature, mais de plus forte dimension, y impriment leur contact sous la forme de stries ou de rainures plus ou moins longues et plus ou moins profondes. Or c’est 4 cause des cailloux striés que certains géologues ont essayé de faire considérer les placages boueux des Préalpes comme étant d’origine glaciaire. Mais il y a impossibilité & soutenir cette opinion, par les mémes raisons invoquées déjA a Voecasion des galets observés dans la masse d’anciennes moraines comme celles des Vosges. L’une des plus déterminante, c’est l’abon- dance méme des stries, leur présence sur tous les galets calecaires sans exception et sur toutes les faces de ces galets. Involontairement, et malgré le respect que doit nous inspirer le nom de certains des géologues glacialistes que nous combattons, on ne peut se défendre d’un certain étonnement quant au succés d'une doctrine si insoute- nable. Les effets de dénudation observés A la surface des galets glacaires se retrouvent, avec les variantes qu’on peut prévoir, & la surface des roches calcaires sous-jacentes A certains placages boueux. Le déplacement lent et incessant, sous une pression notable, des ‘ 20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Jan., grains de quartz au contact de calcaire compacte, a nécessairement usé celui-ci; toutes les aspérités y sont remplacées par de molles ondulations, par une forme moutonnée pareille 4 celle que les glaciers ont donnée aux roches qui ont subi leur friction. En vertu des circonstances mentionnées pour les galets, la surface moutonnée a été en méme temps trés exactement polie, et son poli est renouvelé constamment comme celui des galets. Enfin, cette roche a été, comme les galets encore, pourvue de stries et de sillons plus ou moins longs, plus ou moins nombreux, et tout cet ensemble reproduit dans ses traits généraux les effets déterminés par le passage des glaciers ;— car il va sans dire que si les galets sont impuissants 4 strier les galets, ils sont au contraire trés aptes 4 strier, 4 canneler et A polir les roches en place qui les supportent. Mais un fait montrera 4 lui seul qu'il y a en jeu une cause essen- tiellement différente d’un cas A l'autre. Rectifiant, il y a quelques années une route qui va de Glion au Mont Caux, on attaqua des placages boueux 4 galets striés et, dans un point, on mit 4 nu une magnifique surface calcaire moutonnée, polie et striée, offrant tous les caractéres glaciaires, du moins aux yeux de géologues trop prévenus pour voir sainement les faits. Or, on reconnut que cette surface était seulement la partie supérieure d’un énorme bloc de plusieurs métres cubes, noyé dans le placage boueux, et l’on voyait trés nettement, dans certains points de ses surfaces latérales et méme de sa surface inférieure, quej’ai pu aisé- ment dégager en un point, la reproduction exacte du méme poli et de la méme striation. Cette pierre était done un gigantesque galet pareil aux autres; elle avait été polie et striée ainsi en glissant avec une grande lenteur sur le terrain boueux sous-jacent. En outre, dans la région de la surface polie, qui semblait bien “étre en place,”’ on voyait le poli et les stries, méme dans les dépres- sions, sans qu’on pit trouver nulle part une de ces zones préservées du frottement, comme il y en a dans toutes les surfaces glaciaires. Une objection qui se présente 4 l’esprit contre la production des stries par dénudation souterraine, c’est la prétendue imperméabilité du terrain argileux 4 galets polis des Préalpes et des régions analogues. Or, cette imperméabilité est absolument illusoire: dans toute la région des Préalpes que j’ai étudiée, les placages se comportent comme de véritables réservoirs hydrauliques et de leur épaisseur sourdent d’innombrables sources parfois volumineuses. Ces sources, si visibles auprés de Blonnay, de Brent, des Avants, etec., sont essen- tiellement incrustantes. A Blonnay, il faut souvent remplacer, pour f 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21 cause d’obstruction travertineuse, les tuyaux de conduite établis pour capter ces eaux: j’en ai recueilli des échantillons trés démon- stratifs. Aux Avants et entre cette station climatérique et Mon- treux, la tuffiére et d’autres monticules, représentent des amas de calcaire concrétionné émis par les placages. Il y en a un spécialement net au lieu dit Sex que pliau (la pierre qui pleut) au-dessus d’En Saumont, non loin de |’Alliaz; des feuilles et des coquilles terrestres y ont laissé des moulages parfaits. J’ai pu assister véritablement 4 la production progressive du poli i la surface des blocs calcaires compris dans les éboulis, en étudiant successivement des escarpement choisis de plus en plus loin des sommets des Préalpes. Vers Sotodoz (1800 métres), au pied des Rochers de Naye, les fragments rocheux dont il s’agit sont nettement anguleux et n’ont rien pour attirer l’attention; vers l’altitude du Mont-Caux, les arétes vives et les parties anguleuses sont déja devenues trés rares et les blocs polis sont déja trés nombreux; leur maximum se trouve depuis les Avants jusqu’A Blonnay. Plus bas, la forme du pays cesse d’étre favorable au glissement indispensable 4 la production qui nous occupe et |’on ne voit aucun galet. Je suis arrivé 4 reproduire par |’expérience le phénoméne de stria- tion souterraine des galets et des surfaces rocheuses par un dispositif trés simple. I] était nécessaire de modifier les conditions naturelles tout en leur laissant leur caractére essentiel, de fagon A leur faire produire un effet rapide et plus tangible. Pour cela, deux choses s’imposaient: 1° recourir 4 une substance beaucoup plus facile 4 rayer que le cal- caire, puisque les forces mises en ceuvre allaient étre incomparablement plus faibles que celles qui interviennent dans les phénoménes naturels; —2° provoquer dans le sous-sol soumis 4 la dénudation, des mouve- ments plus accentués, afin de provoquer des résultats plus rapides. {Le premier point a conduit a employer des representations des galets en platre moulé, parfaitement lisses et polis. Pour cela on remplit de platre gaché de consistance trés liquide, de petits ballons de verre, les uns sphériques et les autres ellipsoidaux, c’est-A-dire du modéle dit des matras d’essayeur. Une fois le pldtre bien pris, on brise le verre avec précaution, 4 moins qu'il ne se brise de lui-méme par dilatation du plAtre, et on enléve les fragments avec beaucoup de soin pour ne pas produire de rayures. Le second point a conduit a adopter comme substance constitutive du sol artificiel, dans la masse duquel la striation devra se faire, un mélange, 4 volumes égaux, de sable quartz eux pas trop fin et de gros 22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., sel de cuisine. Soumis A l’action de l’eau, ce mélange se réduira A la moitié de son volume et il sera le siége de déplacements intestins favorables a l’effet désiré. Le mélange de sable et de sel est placé dans une boite rectangu- laire en bois, et j’ai d’ordinaire employé 10 kilogrammes de sel et le volume correspondant de sable. Pendant le remplissage, qui se fait avec une pelle, on place successivement dans le mélange pul- verisé, les boules de platre, de fagon 4 ne point les frotter et par conséquent 4 ne point rayer leur surface. Quand la caisse est bien pleine, on dépose sur le mélange une planchette qu’on surcharge d’un poids de 20 4 30 kilogrammes. Il n’y a plus qu’a faire arriver au contact de la substance, un filet d’eau qui peut venir soit d’en haut, soit d’en bas, soit latéralement, pour avoir des effets trés variés de tassements, avec glissements en sens divers. Aprés la dissolution totale du sel, on arréte l’expérience, on laisse égoutter, on ouvre la ~ boite, en empéchant tout déplacement de son contenu et, avee les précautions les plus minutieuses, on extrait les boules qui sont lavées avec un jet d’eau et mises & sécher. On observe alors 4 leur surface des paquets de stries qui ont avec celles des galets calcaires des placages boueux, les analogies les plus frappantes et les plus instructives. C’est ainsi que les stries sont dirigées indifféremment dans tous les sens et le méme sphéroide peut en présenter en plusieurs directions. Aprés une seule expérience, elles sont peu nombreuses, mais on les multiplie aisément en remettant successivement les mémes boules de platre dans l’appareil. On peut aussi y placer une dalle plane en platre convenablement inclinée et obtenue. par moulage dans une cuvette de porcelaine. Aprés l’écoulement on y voit des stries qui présentent le caractére trés remarquable d’étre fréquemment interrompues et parfois A plusieurs reprises, comme le sont de leur cdété les stries naturelles. La conclusion de ces remarques et de ces expériences a d’autant plus d’importance que le terrain 4 galets striés, jouit d’une aire de dispersion gigantesque. On le retrouve, pareil 4 celui des Alpes dans les contreforts de toutes les grandes chaines comme les Pyrénées, les Carpathes, le Caucase, |’Himalaya,!* les Montagnes Rocheuses, etc. M. Roussanoff, membre de la mission de M. le comte Bénard, a déposé au laboratoire de géologie du Muséum, des spécimens de galets calcaires et schisteux, polis et striés, provenant de la Nouvelle- 8 Climbing in the Himalayas, by Sir Martin Conway. I vol. in 8° Londres, 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23 Zemble et identiques 4 ceux qui viennent du pays de Vaud. Ils ont été recueillis dans la moraine du glacier Jacques Costier, vallée de la Christovaia, ainsi que dans une ancienne moraine du cap Stolbovos. Thomson” décrit une “moraine” avec galets striés ot la pluie détermine la production de cheminées des fées (gigantic mushrooms). “The morain is full of great polished subangular blocks in a matrix of finer material.”” On se croitait en présence des placages boueux des Préalpes vaudoises. Il faudra, quelque jour, refaire toutes les cartes de ces derniéres régions pour supprimer la qualification de glaciaire donnée 4 cette formation. Des faits complétement concordants avec ceux que j’ai décrits ont été signalés par le géologue anglais Bonney.” En en résumant ses résultats? M. Marcellin Boule a bien voulu ajouter: “On ne peut reprocher & M. Bonney que d’avoir oublié de, citer les travaux importants de M. Stanislas Meunier sur le méme sujet. Depuis longtemps, en effet, le savant professeur du Muséum a montré qu’on prenait souvent dans les Alpes pour des moraines des accumulations de blocs et de boues dont l’origine est précisément celle qu’indique le géologue anglais. M. Stanislas Meunier va méme plus loin. Il a montré par de curieuses expériences de laboratoire que les cailloux striés eux-mémes peuvent se trouver dans les pseudo-moraines. Je suis heureux de rappeler ici les titres de priorité de M. Stanislas Meunier au sujet d’une question qui est pour nous de la plus haute importance.”’ L’interprétation des galets striés que je viens de développer, et qui me parait devoir étre définitivement adoptée, conduira comme premiére conséquence, 4 modifier sensiblement la carte géologique— d’un trés grand nombre de régions. Le signe adopté pour désigner les formations glaciaires devra y étre remplacé par celui qu’il faudra choisir pour les éboulis d galets striés. Le long de la plupart des chaines montagneuses et surtout des chaines caleaires, il faudra lui réserver une zone assez large, aussi bien dans les Pyrénées et dans les Alpes, que dans une grande partie du Jura et dans les pays analogues. Cette seule modification sera éloquente pour montrer [illusion qui a conduit A supposer une ou plusieurs périodes glaciaires, en méme temps que pour faire admettre dans la série des conditiones édificatrices de formations notables de tous les temps, la dénudation intempérique qui, dans les montagnes, accumule les éboulis sur les “” Travels in the Atlas and Southern Morocco, p. 326 Londres 1889. ” Geological Magazine, janvier 1902. % L Anthropologie, livraison de mars, 1902. 24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., surfaces convenablement inclinées. On est, en effet, trés surpris & premiére vue que le phénoméne des éboulis, si prédominant dans les montagnes soumises, 4 l’époque actuelle, aux actions météorolo- giques, semble n’avoir pas existé dans les périodes antérieures. La représentation 4 laquelle on arrivera nécessairement ainsi contri- buera 4 faire ressembler, d’autant plus les unes avec les autres, les époques successives de |’évolution terrestre, en méme temps qu'elle fera disparaitre la singularité des temps glaciaires contrastant si étrangement avec la parfaite continuité qui régne sans partage dans tous les autres chapitres de la Géologie. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25 NOTES ON THE SEMELIDZ OF THE WEST COAST OF AMERICA, INCLUDING SOME NEW SPECIES. BY WILLIAM H. DALL. In revising the Pacifie Coast species in the National Collection, considerable confusion was found, due in part to the habit of Dr. Carpenter (who originally named the collection) of trusting to the specimens in the collection of Professor C. B. Adams rather than to the diagnoses of that careful author. The specimens in that collec- tion, due to several causes (especially the fact that they were kept loose in trays and not numbered), have in some cases since Professor Adams’ death become transposed or mixed, so that, without careful reference to the text, errors of identification were likely to occur. Furthermore, the collection of the National Museum since Car- penter’s time has been greatly enlarged, and the better and more numerous specimens from a much wider geographical range afford an opportunity for study not available to Dr. Carpenter. Semele decisa Conrad, 1837. San Pedro to San Diego, California. (Coll. U.S. N. Mus.) This species is also reported from Mazatlan and Tagus Cove, Galapagos Islands, but I am not able to confirm these localities. Semele solida Gray, 1528. Peru and Chile. (Coll. U. 8S. N. Mus.) This is also doubtfully reported from the Galapagos Islands. It is the crocea of Gould, 1850, and the orbicularis of Hupé, 1854. Semele corrugata Sowerby, 1832. Not of C. B. Adams, 1852; and probably the californica of A. Adams, 1853. Magdalena Bay, Lower California, to Iquique, Peru. (Coll. U.S. N. Mus.) It is possibly only a variety of the preceding or the following species. Semele flavescens Gould, 1851. Cape St. Lucas to Callao, Peru. (Coll. U. 8. N. Mus.) This is the proxima of C. B. Adams, 1852, and the flavicans of Carpenter (1857, lapsus) as of Gould. Semele striosa ©. B. Adams, 1852. Not of Carpenter, 1857. y Catalina Island, California, to Panama. (Coll. U. 5. N. Mus.) 26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., This is one of the species which was confused with the following shell by Dr. Carpenter. Semele sparsilineata n. sp. Panama, 18 fathoms. (Coll. U. 8. N. Mus., No. 96,269.) Chile, Hupé. This was confused by Hupé with S. variegata Lam., 1818, which it much resembles, but is easily discriminated from the Atlantic species by the much sparser oblique grooving. The best specimen in the National Collection is 15 by 10 mm., with the vertical from the beaks 6.5 mm. behind the anterior end; but the shell grows much larger. Semele bicolor C. B. Adams, 1852. Gulf of California to Panama. (Coll. U. 8S. N. Mus.) A thin orbicular species with distinctive purple suffusion on a white ground. Semele rupicola n. sp. This is Semele rupium of California authors following Carpenter; not of Sowerby, 1832. Santa Cruz, California, to the Gulf of California. (Coll. U. S. N. Mus.) The Galapagos species, for which this has been mistaken, when not distorted by its nestling habit, has a conspicuous furrow radiating from the beak and rostrating the posterior end, and the form of the pallial sinus is different from that of the North American form. The former character is absent in the latter shell, but they are otherwise much alike. Semele rubropicta Dall, 1871. Forrester Island, Alaska (Willetts); British Columbia to Tia Juana, Lower California. (Coll. U. 8. N. Mus.) Semele elliptica Sowerby, 1832. Not of Carpenter, 1864. Central America to Ecuador. (Coll. U.S. N. Mus.) Semele junonia Verrill, 1870. Carmen Island, Gulf of California. (Coll. U. 8S. N. Mus.) Semele jovis A. Adams, 1853. Carmen Island, Gulf of California. (Coll. U. S. N. Mus.) The preceding species and this one appear to be perfectly distinct. Semele formosa Sowerby, 1832. Gulf of California to\ Ecuador. (Coll: U, 8. N. Mus.) 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27 Semele regularis n. sp. Gulf of California, off La Paz, in 10 to 30 fathoms. (Coll. U.S. N. Mus., No. 76,433.) This is a thin, delicate, usually pure white species of elliptical outline, sculptured with low, obtuse, concentric lamellae, regularly disposed, with fine concentric lineation between them and no trace of radial striation. The beaks are nearly central and the pallial sinus is high, short, subcircular, and hardly extends behind the vertical of the beaks. Some specimens have a faint orange flush internally. The most perfect specimen measures 22 mm. long, 17 mm. high, and 6 mm. in diameter. The umbo is about 12 mm. behind the anterior end. Fragments show that the shell grows at least one half larger. Semele pacifica n. sp. Catalina Island, California, to Acapulco, Mexico, in 9 to 21 fathoms. (Coll. U. S. N. Mus., No. 211,728.) This is the shell usually referred to S. cancellata Sowerby, 1830 (S. bellastriata Conrad, 1837), but which differs from that Atlantic species in its smaller lunule, shorter and weaker right lateral tooth, and sharper and more delicate concentric sculpture. It is a rare form and doubtless the two descend from the same Oligocene ances- tors. Semele incongrua Carpenter, 1863. Monterey, California, to the Coronado Islands, Lower California. (Coll. U. S. N. Mus.) This is a well-defined species, and the Pliocene shell named S. pulchra var. montereyi by Arnold, 1903, should be referred to it rather than to pulchra as 2 variety. Semele pulchra Sowerby, 1832. Monterey, California, to Ecuador. (Coll. U.S. N. Mus.) Semele venusta A. Adams, 1853. Acapulco, Mexico, to West Colombia, South America. (Coll. U.S. N. Mus.) The S. rubrolineata Conrad, 1837, San Diego, California, has not been definitely recognized since it was originally described, and the type is said to be lost. It has been, by a lapsus, referred to by Dr. Carpenter as S. rubro- tincta, and was surmised by him to be a variety of S. pulchra, but the two have no resemblance to each other, judging by Conrad's figure. There does not seem to be any good ground for doubting 28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., the Chinese origin of S. simplex Adams and Reeve, 1848, to which S. rubrolineata has also been tentatively referred. Abra pacifica n. sp. Guaymas, Mexico. (Coll. U. 8S. N. Mus., No. 23,700.) Shell small, thin, white, finely concentrically sculptured, giving the surface a silky look; the concentric lines slightly prominent on the dorsal part of the posterior end; beaks not prominent, slightly anterior, outline elongate, attenuated and pointed behind, rounded in front; with only faint traces of microscopic radial striz or none; hinge normal, right cardinal tooth bifid, anterior right lateral stout, very short, posterior feeble, longer; left valve with a bifid cardinal and no laterals; pallial sinus obscure. Length 9, height 5.5, diameter 3.0 mm. This is the first species of the genus reported from the Pacific Coast. It was collected by Dr. Edward Palmer. _ Abra tepocana n. sp. Off Cape Tepoca, Lower California, in 14 fathoms. (U.S.N.Mus., No. 108,552.) Shell small, white, equivalve, anterior end longer; surface with a dull silky lustre due to extremely minute concentric striation; beaks rather prominent; dorsal margins descending, anterior end rounded evenly into a gently arcuate base, posterior end narrower, blunt, hardly truncate, slightly bent to the right as in a Macoma; right valve with a conspicuous resilifer, a very small cardinal tooth and the laterals obsolete; left valve with the cardinal hardly per- ceptible and no lateral lamin; pallial sinus large, 5.6 mm. deep, rounded in front. Length 8, height 6, diameter 3.5 mm., the beaks behind the anterior end 5 mm. Abra palmeri n. sp. Ballenas Lagoon on the west coast of Lower California; the Gulf of California (Dr. E. Palmer); and Panama Bay in 26 fathoms (U. S. N. Mus.). Type locality, Panama Bay. (U. 8S. N. Mus., No. 96,301.) Shell short, high, inflated, white, with a silky surface, and a very thin, polished, pale yellow periostracum; anterior end and base rounded; beaks subcentral, dorsal margins descending, posterior end attenuated and with the extremity rounded; right valve with a deeply bifid (or double) cardinal tooth, the laterals obsolete; left valve with a single cardinal and no laterals. Length 10, height 8, diameter 5.5 mm. The pallial sinus rounded, 6 mm. deep. This species is nearest to A. lioica Dall, of the Atlantic Coast of the United States. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29 NOTES ON THE WATER SNAKE NATRIX COMPRESSICAUDA. BY T. BARBOUR AND G. K. NOBLE. Natrix compressicauda' and its four hitherto described subspecies are confined wholly to Florida, where they inhabit the brackish lagoons and estuaries of the sea. Since specimens of this water snake are rare in collections, the systematic relationships of the several forms have not been thoroughly determined and any data on this subject should be of interest. Having examined some fifteen adults and a brood of fifteen young from the collection of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, we have found a remarkable variability in individuals from the same locality, while those from different localities have not shown any peculiar characters correlated with their distribution. The young from one brood are dichromatic and show many of the same variations as the adults, and seem to make it certain that there is but a single variable form to be recognized. Mr. A. G. Reynolds, of Gulfport, Fla., who has collected a large proportion of the known specimens of Natrix compressicauda, is familiar with this variability of color in fresh specimens. In a letter of September 23, 1914, he writes: “T have never found it anywhere except in brackish or salt water. Its local name is the ‘salt-water moccasin.’ The fishermen occa- sionally find it plentiful among the keys, but they never get me any specimens, although I offer a good price for them. It seems to be more or less plentiful at Key West. Here we get a straw-colored variety, also a variety with one row of spots beneath, and a variety with three rows of spots beneath.” With the exception of one specimen, the entire series in our col- lection was taken by Mr. A. G. Reynolds. All but one of these have been taken within the last few years and come from different parts of the region of Tampa Bay and Key West. One of the Tampa Bay specimens, kindly loaned for examination by the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, comes from Tarpon Springs and was collected by 8. N. Rhodes, in 1896. The others from this region were taken at St. Petersburg by Mr. Reynolds. ' Kennicott, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1860, p. 335. 30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Jan., Of the Key West specimens there is one (M. C. Z. 2,444) worthy of special note. Cope? says in speaking of N. c. compsolema: “The only known specimen of this subspecies was found at Key West, Florida, and is preserved in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass.”’ The specimen to which Cope refers cannot now be found in the museum. The only example which might be mistaken for it is No. 2,444. But this specimen came with another (M. C. Z. 2,446) of the same species, which also seems to have disappeared. Both were said to have been collected in the Florida Keys and probably at Key West by L. F. de Pourtales. They were given by him to the museum and were entered in the register by 8. Garman in 1874. That No. 2,444 cannot possibly have served Cope as the type of his V. c. compsolema is shown by several noteworthy discrepancies. The tail and body lengths of the specimen (No. 2,444) are each some hundred millimeters longer than was Cope’s type, and the dorsal rows are 21 as against the 19 given by Cope. Furthermore, the head shield characters of the two specimens are not the same. Cope’s type was probably not returned by him to the museum, and wide inquiry elsewhere has failed to locate it. Unfortunately, this is not the only specimen which suffered this fate. THe DescriBpep Forms. Cope® sums up the characters of the several races in respect to color as follows: “N. c. compressicauda (Kennicott): numerous dark cross bands, which are resolved into three rows of spots just anterior to the tail, and four longitudinal stripes on the neck. “N. c. teniata Cope four series of longitudinal spots above, those of the median pair forming two longitudinal stripes on the greater part of the length; the laterals forming stripes on the neck only. ‘“N.c. walkeri (Yarrow)® yellowish with narrow brown bands, no postocular band. “N.c. obscura Lonnberg:’ sooty above with transverse bands an- teriorly. “N. c. compsolema (Cope): above blackish brown with numerous closely placed cross bands.”’ 2 Annual Report of U.S. National M useum, 1898 (1902), p. 984. 3 The Annual Report of U. S. National Museum, 1899 (1902), p. 979. 4 Amer. Natl., 1895, p. 676. 5 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 6, 1883, p. 154. 6 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 17, 1894, p. 330. 7 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1860, p. 368. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 3l The body scale counts as given by Cope are: IE STE) ESS al a a TE 2 ; 131 RES a ne AS aD 2. 7, 2 CET 21 32 5 ; 9137 a a Se aay Sac rocsneincsvecouconcescneguredsnenconescspsbesseO (2) NE SE aa ese ly cmp isan aieeros reams jad oueias OED 126 I I res. vckevn ctcscnSsncoeiinescvriamerrotonitbiotbonns 19 67 The head shield characters of NV. c. teniata and N. c. walkeri are not treated very fully by Cope or Yarrow, while for N. c. obscura no scutation is given at all. Because the data given by Cope are incomplete, only the following can be expressed: Pre- and Labials. postoculars. Temporals. N. c. compressicaud a ..........cc0000 ads LO 1+3 1+3 TIE 8+10 14+3 1+3 1 ET 5 8+10 1+3 1+3 MOT so aremsevvenssnseaansoestsvnee Not given. Pig Ch COMEDEOUENIUG cr. scosisn coins sovnsinecnsstessresi 8+ 9 1+3 ? Again, the length of the tail in percentage to total length taken from Cope would be: N. c. compressicauda............. Pree a, Teast eee Pe Pie ike b 3. en n28.8% ESI TR Beater, a Re 25.9% ND cas ug rd Sacascges SR ev psc acter swinibyncionr niente te <2 Sa Oculars........ S08) ces ae = an Temporals Pee | bake wae EI is - ae The average count would be: Labials at Oculars ae or eat Temporals its 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 35 Regarding the relative length of body and tail, we would expect the proportion to run rather low since the brood comes from Tampa Bay. But this is not the case. The range is 25.5%-27.8%, average 27.1%. From this it may be seen that but one race of Natrix compressi- cauda can be recognized. 36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., ON CERTAIN VESICLES FOUND IN THE INTEGUMENT OF ANTS. BY ADELE M. FIELDE. During the years 1900 to 1907, I demonstrated by experiments, duly set forth in print, that the antenne of the ant are a pair of compound noses, certain segments having each a special function. The ants in my formicaries were subject to observation by day and by night, all the year round. The experiments were unhurried, very numerous, and with adequate material for every series. No ant that had not manifestly recovered normal health after the required surgical operation was engaged in the service demanded by an experiment. (See 6b, page 425, and 7, page 215.)! I found that the habitual activi- ties of the ants are guided mainly by diverse odors, produced by the ants themselves, and _ discerned through the sub-noses of the olfac- tory organs, the funicles of the antenne. These odors are: (1) the odor of the domicile, the nest aura, made up of the commingled odors of the inhabitants, and discerned through the air by the distal segment of the antenna. The normal ant, warned by an alien aura, fears and avoids the habitation of any ant com- munity other than her own, and she strives to flee or hide when forcibly introduced into the alarm- ing atmosphere of an unknown nest. But if the twelfth, the distal segment, is eliminated, the ant no longer distinguishes the domiciliary odor and stays fearlessly in 1 See bibliography at conclusion of paper. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37 the abode of her enemies until her life pays the penalty of her uncon- scious temerity. This sub-nose appears to discern many odors, diffused in the air. (See c, page 539.) (2) It is well known that ants of the same species abide in different colonies or communities so hostile to one another that an encounter between members of different colonies results in a battle, often prolonged until one or the other is exterminated. The undeveloped young of one colony are sometimes stolen and reared by the adults of another colony of the same species, but the adults of different colonies ordinarily maintain a mutual repugnance that is invincible, no matter how long an artificially enforced companionship may exist. The colony odor, depending on age, is discerned through the penultimate segment of the antenna. When this segment is eliminated, ants of different colonies of the same species live and work together in complete accord. They are then unaware of the objectionable odor of their comrades, as they no longer perceive what the normal ant discerns. The colony odor is discerned through contact of the antenna with the body of the ant subject to examina- tion. This eleventh segment is, or contains, an organ of chemical sense which might be called olfactory or gustatory. (See b, page 449; c, page 531; d, page 609; ¢t, page 1.) (3) When an ant goes out from her dwelling, she lays down from her feet an odorous substance whereby she is guided on her return journey. She discerns her own scent through the antepenultimate segment of the antenna, and through the air. When this tenth segment is eliminated she is no longer able to retrace her steps and is completely bewildered. She is as incapable as is a dog in pursuit of a master who has waded. (See c, page 522.) But in her case the track remains, while power to pick up the scent has been de- stroyed in the pursuer. (4) The next two segments of the funicle, the eighth and ninth counted from the proximal end of the antenna of Stenamma fulowm piceum, discern the odor of the queen and of the undeveloped young ordinarily her progeny. When these segments are eliminated, the worker ant, that in her normal condition evinced extreme devotion to the welfare of the inactive young and to the queen-mother, becomes wholly indifferent to all or any of those whom she has heretofore served. There are indications that the inactive young, as well as the queen, have a progressive odor, appreciable to the workers both by contact and in the air, and that the odor is a distinctive one, alluring to the workers. (See c, page 542; k, page 229.) 38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., (5) The next two segments, the sixth and seventh from the proxi- mal end of the antenna, discern the odor of ants of alien species, always regarded and treated as enemies unless acquaintance has been made in the earliest days of the individual ant’s existence. Prolonged warfare and terrible slaughter often occur between ant colonies of different species. But if the sixth and seventh segments of the antenn be eliminated, ants of different species or even of different sub-families will live together amicably and will regurgitate food to one another. I have had representatives of so many as five different genera living in close fellowship in the same nest. The specific odor is discerned by contact, the antenna being applied to some part of the body of the ant encountered. (See h, page 321; k, page 229.) The two antenn of the ant are identical in function, either one serving the purposes of both. Among the three or four thousand species of known ants the number of segments in the antennz varies from four to thirteen. In my work of ascertaining the function of the antennal segments, I used mainly Stenamma fuluum piceum, a Myrmicine ant, having twelve segments in the antenne. It is not improbable that further investigation, equally painstaking, would reveal olfactory functions in other segments than those tested by me. It is certain, however, that segments proximal to the sixth do not discern the odors appreciated by the seven at the distal end. Since the ants have given evidence that they bear in their bodies several different odors, they must have glands producing unlike odors. The nest aura requires no separate apparatus, because its creation is effected by the combined odors of the inhabitants of the nest. The colony odor, inherited from the queen and changing with age of the ants, demands a means of production that might well be inquired for along the sides of the thorax where the ants so commonly apply a caressing antenna. The scent that is laid down on the track would probably issue from the feet or legs, while the odor of the queen would be produced in some gland that would be no more than rudimentary in the workers. The diverse specific odors are easily discernible by human nostrils; and even an ant may be tem- porarily deceived by an individual of the enemy’s troop painted with the blood of a friend. There must be glands for producing this odor. Many observers have described certain vesicles in the integument of ants, as well as of many other insects, since Hicks first studied them. (1857 to 1860.) Janet, whose work on the anatomy of the Pee 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39 ant has been long continued, highly skilled and very prolific, shows these organs as a pit communicating with the external air by means of a pore. They have been variously named. I suggest to myrme- cologists the possibility that these vesicles found in groups or scattered over the body and limbs of the ant may be the producers of the . odors borne by the insect, and I urge research among Forel’s “inverted flasks,” the “pits and pegs,’ the “plates and pores,” and all papille on the ant. Dr. N. E. McIndoo, of the Bureau of Entomology at Washington, D. C., has issued two papers, one in April, 1914, The Olfactory Sense of the Honey Bee, and one in November, 1914, The Olfactory Sense of Insects. I venture a few brief comments thereupon. Dr. McIndoo quotes Dr. W. M. Wheeler’s objection to my dis- covery that ‘‘the olfactory organs of an animal may exhibit ‘regional differentiations.’’’ This objection, unsupported as it is by physio- logical tests applied to the ant, should influence no investigator. If there be error in the process of experimentation or flaw in the logic of the deduction, the critic should indicate the point of departure from a correct course. It is true that my statements are ‘‘ unsup- ported by other observers,’’ but lack of support by other observers is a misfortune that necessarily befalls the research worker who makes the earliest observation. Dr. MeIndoo’s iterated statement that his bees were ‘‘abnormal,”’ without definite indication of the cause or kind of abnormality, gives no assistance in the formation of a sound judgment concerning the changes due to mutilation. ‘‘Abnormality”’ of some sort is a natural consequent of mutilation. The question is whether a certain abnormal condition invariably ensues from a particular mutilation. In those cases where Dr. MeIndoo’s surgical operations upon his bees were performed by the pulling apart or the burning off of segments, the lesions produced in the adjacent tissues must have been such as to seriously affect the functions of the parts subject to subsequent observation. The odors of the essential oils used in his experiments must have been diffused through the air, and the reaction of the bees, normal or abnormal, may in many cases have been due to the effect of the odorous particles upon the trachea through the spiracles rather than to their appeal to the sense of smell. Dr. MeIndoo’s experiments and observations appear to me to be confirmatory rather than contradictory of the view of most ento- ‘ 40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Jan., mologists that the antenne are the organs of smell in insects. The evidence he sets forth is far from being convincing of the truth of his final asseveration that “the antennze can no longer be regarded as the seat of the sense of smell in insects’’; and equally remote from acceptance should be his conclusion that the organs he chooses to eall “olfactory pores’ ‘are the true olfactory apparatus in Hymenoptera. ”’ List oF Miss FIELDE’s PUBLISHED PAPERS ON ANTS. (a) Portable Ant Nests. Biological Bulletin, Vol. II, No. 11, September, 1900. (b) A Study of an Ant. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, July, 1901; issued September 4, 1901. (c) Further Study of an Ant. Proceedings, October, 1901; issued November 22, 1901. (d) Notes on an Ant. Proceedings, September, 1902; issued December 4, 1902. (e) Supplementary Notes onan Ant. Proceedings, June, 1903; issued September 4, 1903. (f) Experiments with Ants induced to Swim. Proceedings, September, 1903; issued October 5, 1903. : (g) A Cause of Feud between Ants of the same Species living in different Com- munities. Biological Bulletin, Vol. V, No. 6, November, 1903. (h) Artificial Mixed Nests of Ants. Biological Bulletin, Vol. V, No. 6, November, 1903. (i) Observations on Ants in their Relation to Temperature and Submergence. Biological Bulletin, Vol. VII, No. 3, August, 1904. (j) Portable Ant Nests. Biological Bulletin, Vol. VI, No. 4, September, 1904. (k) Power of Recognition among Ants. Biological Bulletin, Vol. VII, No. 5, October, 1904. (1) Reactions of Ants to material Vibrations. Proceedings, September, 1904; issued November 2, 1904. (m) Three Odd Incidents in Ant Life. Proceedings, September, 1904; issued November 2, 1904. (n) Tenacity of Life in Ants. Biological Bulletin, Vol. VII, No. 6, November, 1904. (0) The Sense of Smell in Ants. The Independent, August 17, 1905. (p) How an Ant went to Market and came Home again. Written October, 1905. In Boys and Girls’ Magazine, Ithaca, New York, April, 1906. (g) Temperature as a Factor in the Development of Ants. Biological Bulletin, Vol. IX, No. 6, November, 1905. (r) Observations on the Progeny of Virgin Ants. Biological Bulletin, Vol. LX, No. 6, November, 1905. (s) The Communal Life of Ants. Nature-Study Review, Vol. I, No. 6, Novem- ber, 1905. (t) The Progressive Odor of Ants. Biological Bulletin, Vol. X, No. 1, December, 1905. (u) Longevity of a Velvet Ant. Biological Bulletin, Vol. XI, No. 5, October, 1906. (v) Suggested Explanations of certain Phenomena in the Lives of Ants. Bio- logical Bulletin, Vol. XIII, No. 3, August, 1907. (w) The Nose of an Ant. Spinning Wheel Magazine, Vol. I, No. 2, December, 1914. A) 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 41 FEBRUARY 16. The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M.D., LL.D., in the Chair. One hundred persons present. The deaths of George J. Scattergood, July 16, 1914, and of Benjamin Sharp, M.D., January 23, 1915, members, were announced. On the announcement of the death of Dr. Sharp, the following was read by the Recording Secretary and ordered to be placed on the minutes: THe AcADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA desires to place on record its sense of the loss sustained by the society and by the scientific world in the death of Dr. BENJAMIN SHARP, on January 23. Dr. Sharp graduated in medicine from the University of Pennsyl- vania in 1879. He subsequently studied in the Universities of Berlin, Leipzig, and Wurzburg. Immediately after securing his degree of Doctor of Philosophy from the last named institution in 1883 he published his first paper in the PRocEEDINGs of the Academy, a reprint of his graduation thesis on the anatomy of Ancylus. He subse- quently published twenty communications as contributions to the ProceepinGs. They cover a wide range of subjects, but are most important, perhaps, as studies of the visual organs of mollusks. Dr. Sharp was elected Corresponding Secretary of the Academy in 1890 and served efficiently until 1902. His work as an attaché of the United States Fish Commission, as zoologist of the first Peary Arctic Expedition, and as professor in the Academy, the University of Pennsylvania, and in the Central High School, together with his explorations of Behring Sea, the West Indies, and the Sandwich Islands, was all prosecuted in direct asso- ciation with the Academy, to which he was always most generous in the expression of his obligation for encouragement and assistance. Dr. Sharp was endowed with a retentive memory and the faculty of clear and accurate statement. He was a man of singular personal charm and of an unusual range of sympathy and accomplishment. A strikingly attractive figure anywhere, he was equally at home in a scientific meeting, a drawing-room, or on the dock with his chums, the fishermen. He retained to the last the qualities of an eager, ingenuous boy without any of the disadvantages of immaturity. Although not intimately associated with the Academy since 1902, his periodical visits sustained his affectionate relations with his fellow-members and testified to his loyalty to the institution. The realization of its own loss in the death of Dr. Sharp 42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., enables the Academy to appreciate the bereavement of his wife and children, to whom is extended its heartfelt sympathy. Mr. Rospert CusHMan Murpny spoke on bird-life at an outpost of the Antarctic. The communication was beautifully illustrated by lantern views. The Secretary read the following communication from Miss Adele M. Fielde, of Seattle, Washington: Concerning the Sense of Smell in Dogs.—In the winter of 1911-12, I spent over four consecutive months in the city of Tucson, Arizona, lodging in one house and taking my meals in another, a quarter of a mile distant. The street, in the residential section of the city, traversed by me several times daily, was wide, with paved walk on both sides, in front of detached houses whose owners generally cherished watch dogs. In my earliest journeys along the sidewalks, the dogs, of various breeds, in their respective, shrubby dooryards, all barked at me, so intentionally as to make me doubt whether existence would be tolerable under such local conditions. : I persisted, however, in my course as a, pedestrian, made no acquaintance with the owners of the dogs, no calls at their residences, and no efforts at conciliation of the animals. Nevertheless, the barking of the dogs gradually subsided and then ceased, first on the west side of the street that I traversed most frequently, and later upon the east side of the street, where I walked but seldom. Some weeks before I left Tucson, all the dogs had stopped barking at me during my passage alongside their grounds, whether by day or by night. In the evenings I usually carried a lantern whose light fell upon the pavement without illuminating me. A small dog, resident in the house where I lodged, maintained hostilities toward me for several days after my arrival, but changed his mental attitude toward me with no conciliation on my part, and then habitually gave immoderate expression to his delight whenever I returned to the house. Such change in the behavior of these dogs indicates that at my earliest coming they perceived an unknown scent either upon the pavement or in the air and resented its intrusion among countless familiar odors. When accustomed to the intruded scent, having received no injury from its bearer, they ceased from audible protest against her presence. Without contact at any time, and with darkness and distance often such as to make vision improbable, the cause of the behavior of the dogs appears to lie in their sense of smell. That they could pick up the scent laid down on the pave- ment was to be expected of them. That they recognized its depositor in the dark and at a distance of many yards, and refrained from any vocal exercise save a monosyllabic assertion of being on duty, indicates high olfactory sensitivity. Joseph C. Guernsey, M.D., was elected a member. The following was ordered to be printed: 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 43 A NEW CLASSIFICATION OF THE OPHIUROIDEA: WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW GENERA AND SPECIES. BY H. MATSUMOTO. CONTENTS. PAGE WENN SIN es onsates nce icra is Soe tig se kadeccepshoCeasensadioget lave ee cae Se Be ates erpes 43 eT STEREO RS ne ce 45 rR NOIR T ANON ag 2 css 5 econ Sata dawccasina sonupaneei'srisvvanansagesacbssaotiin 45 Nanri E MPOBI USE PRUAIU TEAS. 22 cf 8 sc; coe aoe 3a sees cattneedahe ost csls¥esteeeosvug ebeuastvaonses 46 Reg RaNN Tar Oe OP NOTING EUCLED. 63265, coy 0550, ts vonsdevstovsnaeduh inves tongonee eae ae 46 SU RENEE MES PANNE ING oon cies suis Uisennes ee ee OPHIOBYRSIN ©. Subfamily 1. OPHIOMYXIN4® Ljungman, 1871 (emend.). (Characters as given above in key.) This subfamily includes Ophiohelus, Ophiosciasma, Ophiogeron, Astrogeron, Ophiocynodus, Ophiostyracium, Ophiosyzygus, Ophio- leptoplax, Ophioscolex, Neoplax, Ophiomora, Ophiomyxa, Ophiodera, Ophiohymen, and provisionally Ophiambix, besides two new genera, Ophiostiba and Ophiohyalus. OPHIOSTIBA gen. nov. Disk covered by a skin containing a number of scattered granules. Radial shields very rudimentary, forming a continuous row with the marginal disk scales, which are well developed, as in Ophiomyzxa, Ophiomora and Neoplax. Teeth and oral papilla present, with acute ends. Arms skin-covered; dorsal arm plates absent, while the lateral arm plates are subventral, so that the dorsal side of the arms is largely naked. Distal vertebrae more or less divided into halves by a longitudinally fusiform pore. Arm spines few, all converted into compound hooks. Tentacle scales absent. This new genus differs from Ophioscolex chiefly in the presence of the marginal disk scales and in the conversion of the arm spines into compound hooks; and from Neoplax in the fewer arm spines, which are converted into compound hooks, and in the absence of tentacle scales. Ophiostiba hidekii! sp. nov. Diameter of disk 3.5 mm. Length of arms 16 mm. Width of arms at base 0.8 mm. Disk hexagonal, with concave interradial borders, covered by a soft skin, which contains a number of scattered granules. Radial shields very rudimentary and_ insignificant, forming a continuous row with the marginal disk scales, which are well developed. Genital slits very small and short. Oral shields rhomboidal, with perfectly rounded outer and lateral angles, convex, slightly longer than wide; each serving as a madre- 1 Dedicated to the memory of my friend, Hideki Chiba, who met with an untimely death a few days after assisting me in dredging my material in the Sagami Sea. ; ‘ 48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., porite. Adoral shields long and narrow, but with widened outer ends, meeting each other within. Four or five oral papille on either side, triangular, with acute apices. Teeth stout, triangular, acute. Six arms, of which three are longer than the other three, as an indication of schizogony. Dorsal arm plates entirely absent; dorsal side of vertebre clearly visible. Lateral arm plates low, meeting below. First ventral arm plates very small, rhomboidal, longer than wide; the following heptagonal, with strongly concave proximo- lateral and outer sides (the former adjoining the tentacle pores), much longer than wide, widest opposite the outer ends of the tentacle pores; calcification very feeble along median line, the plates appear- ing as if longitudinally grooved. In the outer half of the arm, the vertebre are more or less divided into halves by fusiform pores. Two or three hyaline arm spines, converted into compound hooks, with four or five denticles along the abradial side; the lowest one is slightly shorter than the upper ones, which are about two-thirds as long as the corresponding arm joint. The uppermost spines of either side of successive arm joints are connected by a hyaline, web-like membrane, except on the basal and most. distal joints. Tentacle pores large, without any scale. Color in alcohol: disk deep chocolate-brown, except the granules, which are white; arms brownish yellow. Two specimens; Sagami Sea; 300 fathoms. This new species evidently reproduces by schizogony, as indicated by the hetaractiny and the occurrence of six madreporites. OPHIOHYALUS gen. nov. Disk covered by a skin, with marginal scales. Radial shields very rudimentary, forming a continuous row with the marginal disk scales. Teeth and oral papille flattened and serrate, like those of Ophiomyxa, Ophiodera and Ophiohymen. Dorsal arm plates present, but rudimentary, entire, thin, hyaline, separated from each other by naked spaces. Vertebre more or less divided into halves. Arm spines few, converted into compound hooks. Tentacle scales absent. This new genus is near Ophiomyzxa, but differs from it in the rudi- mentary radial shields, the divided vertebre, the entire rudimentary dorsal arm plates and the conversion of the arm spines into com- pound hooks. In almost all characters, Ophiohyalus is more embry- onal than Ophiomyza. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 49 Ophiohyalus gotoi sp. nov. Diameter of disk 9 mm. Length of arms 28 mm. Width of arms at base 1 mm. Disk pentagonal, with concave interradial borders, very flat, covered by a thin skin. Marginal disk scales present, feeble. Radial shields rudimentary and _ insignificant, forming a continuous row with the marginal disk scales. Genital slits small and short, extending from outer end of adoral shield to that of second lateral arm plate. Oral shields triangular, with perfectly rounded lateral angles, outer side slightly concave; two and a half times as wide as long. Adoral shields large, triangular, very long, acutely tapered inwards, but not meeting. Oral plates long and narrow. The space encircled by the oral and adoral shields and oral plates is strongly depressed. Three or four oral papille on either side, thin, hyaline, serrate along the free edge. Two or three short, wide, flattened teeth, with rounded and finely serrate ends. Deep in the oral slit on either side of each jaw there occurs one conical, rough papilla, which protects the first oral tentacle pore. Arms slender, covered by a very thin, transparent skin. Dorsal arm plates small, oval, thin, hyaline, longer than wide, wider within than without, separated from each other by naked spaces; they lie over the distal parts of the vertebrz of the corresponding arm joints, and become very small and delicate towards the extremity of the arm. Lateral arm plates low, slightly flaring, successive plates not in contact with each other, but separated by a naked space, which is widened upwards and continued into a large naked space bounded by the dorsal and lateral arm plates and the vertebra. First ventral arm plate not very small, quadrangular, with strongly curved outer side, much wider without than within; those beyond nearly rhom- boidal in outline, with a conspicuous reéntrant notch at outer end and a half pore for the tentacle at each lateral angle; much longer than wide, widest opposite outer ends of tentacle pores; successive plates not in contact with each other, except within the disk. The lateral arm plates do not, however, meet each other in the ventral median line, so that there is left here a naked, depressed space, which is especially well-marked near the extremity of the arm. Except within the disk and at the very base of arms, the vertebre are more or less or entirely divided into halves by fusiform pores, which become larger and longer in the more distal part of the arm. Arm spines two, subventral, unequal, glassy, all converted into compound hooks, with a series of hooklets along their ventral side, covered by 4 ‘ 50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Feb., a thin, transparent skin; the lower one is much larger and longer than the upper. On some basal arm joints there occurs on the lateral arm plate one more spine, which is placed on the dorsal margin of the plate and also bears a series of hooklets on one side; it is larger and longer than the other two and nearly as long as the corresponding arm joint. No tentacle scale. Color in alcohol: yellowish white. Two specimens; probably Sagami Sea. Subfamily 2. OPHIOBYRSINZ nov. (Characters as given in key, p. 46.) This subfamily includes Ophiobyrsa, Ophiobyrsella, Ophiophrizus, Ophiobrachion and provisionally Ophioschiza, besides a new genus, Ophiosmilax. The Ophiobyrsine rather approach the next two families in skeletal characters. OPHIOSMILAX gen. nov. Disk and arms covered by a thick skin. Radial shields very rudimentary and insignificant. Single oral papilla on either side and two or three dental papille at the apex of each jaw. Teeth in a single vertical series. ‘Teeth and papille all alike, stout, stumpy, conspicuously thorny at tips. Second oral tentacle pores open outside oral slits, each provided with a thorny, stumpy papilla, which arises from adoral shield. Dorsal arm plates absent, while the lateral arm plates are subventral, so that the dorsal side of the arms is merely covered by a naked skin. Ventral arm plates well- developed, in contact with each other. Vertebre short and very stout. Vertebral articulation streptospondyline, the articular peg being entirely absent. Arm spines few, converted into compound hooks. No tentacle scale. This new genus more or less resembles Ophiophrixus in the total absence of dorsal arm plates, but differs from it in the rudimentary radial shields, in the peculiarities of teeth and papillae and in the conversion of arm spines into compound hooks. The last character reminds us of Ophiobrachion, but Ophiosmilax has no disk spines, while it does have peculiar teeth and papille and fewer and longer arm spines. Ophiosmilax mirabilis sp. nov. Diameter of disk 2mm. Length of arms 12mm. Width of arms 0.8 mm. Disk pentagonal, with concave interbrachial borders, covered by a thick skin, which contains very fine, thin, transparent 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. dl scales. Radial shields rudimentary and insignificant, lying on the disk margin. Genital slits very small and short. Oral shields triangular, with convex outer border. Adoral shields large, quadrangular, meeting within. Oral slits short, fairly closed up. Single oral papilla on either side, short, stumpy, conspicuously thorny at tip, turned up ventrally, instead of projecting towards oral slit. Two or three dental papille at apex of each jaw, similar in shape and in size to oral papilla, also turned up ventrally. Teeth in a single vertical series, stout, stumpy, thorny at tips. Second oral tentacle pores open outside oral slits, each provided with a stumpy and thorny papilla, which arises from adoral shield. Arms stout in comparison with the small disk, covered by a thick, naked skin. Dorsal arm plates absent. Lateral arm plates sub- ventral, strongly flaring. First ventral arm plate large, quadran- gular, with rounded angles, slightly longer than wide, much wider without than within; those beyond also large, hexagonal; proximal and proximo-lateral sides very short; distal and disto-lateral sides long; outer angles perfectly rounded; as long as, or slightly longer than, wide, feebly calcified and transparent, except the outer and lateral margins, where the calcification is complete and opaque. Vertebre short and very stout, with streptospondyline articulation, the articular shoulder and umbo being very stout, while the articular peg is entirely absent. Arm spines two or three, lying flat on the arm, all converted into compound hooks, hyaline; the uppermost two are subequal, about two-thirds as long as corresponding arm joint, while the lowest one is about half as long as the same. The smaller spines have two or three hooklets, which lie in one plane, while the larger ones have six or seven hooklets, which lie in two divergent planes. Tentacle pores small, without scales. Color in alcohol: brownish yellow. One specimen; Sagami Sea; 300 fathoms. Family 2. TRICHASTERIDZS Doéderlein, 1911 (emend.). (Characters as given in key, p. 46.) Key to subfamilies of Trichasteride. A—More than three arm spines; madreporite single, ASTERONYCHIN &. AA—Two arm spines; all oral shields serving as madreporites. a—Lateral arm plates of opposite sides separated from each other by the ventral arm plates, distal ones projecting ventrally like hanging rods; arm spines subequal; peri- ‘ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., or bo hemal canal and genital burse communicating with each the ventral median line, distal ones not projecting ven- trally like hanging rods; arm spines unequal, the adradial one being much larger and longer than the abradial and often clavate; perihemal canal and genital burs not in communication; arms simple........0..../ ASTEROSCHEMATIN 4%. Subfamily 1. ASTERONYCHIN 4 nov. Disk very large, arms very slender and unbranched. A single madreporite is present. Perihemal canal entirely closed. Peri- toneal cavity divided into five compartments by the interradial attachments of the gastral pouches to body wall. Genital burse separated from the perihemal canal and the peritoneal cavity, but the pairs of the same radius communicating with each other, the communication passing above the outer end of the oral frames and the first vertebra, just outside the perihemal canal. Lateral arm plates of opposite sides separated by the comparatively large ventral arm plates. Arm spines, 3-8. -This subfamily includes A steronyx and Astrodia. Subfamily 2. TRICHASTERIN nov. (Characters as given above in key.) This subfamily includes Ophiuropsis, Astroceras, Trichaster, Sthenocephalus and Euryala. Subfamily 3. ASTEROSCHEMATIN 4 Déderlein, 1911 (emend.). (Characters as given above in key.) This subfamily includes Asteroschema (including Ophiocreas) and Astrocharis. Asteroschema tubiferum Matsumoto. 1911, Dobuts. Z. Tokyo, 28, p. 617 (in Japanese). This species strongly resembles A. rubrum Lyman, but differs chiefly in the much coarser granules of the arm bases, in having tentacle tubes for some ten basal tentacles, and in the relatively longer and stouter arm spines. Three or four granules lie in 1 mm. on the dorsal side of the free arm base. Oral tentacle pores, as well as tentacle pores of some ten basal arm joints, open by means of cuticular tubes, each of which, except that of the oral tentacle and the first arm tentacle, is attached to the adradial arm spine on its adradial side. The arm spines become longer and stouter distally, 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 53 till the adradial one is distinctly clavate and is about twice as long as the corresponding arm joint. The color is light pinkish brown in alcohol. The type specimen is 16 mm. in disk diameter, 230 mm. in arm length and 4.5 mm. in arm width at base. Two specimens; Okinosé (a submarine bank), Sagami Sea. One specimen; Sagami Sea. Asteroschema glaucum Matsumoto. 1911, Dobuts. Z. Tokyo, 28, p. 617 (in Japanese). This species is near A. salix Lyman, but differs from it in coarser granules on disk and arm bases, in stouter arm bases, in much shorter arm spines, and in oral tentacles being enclosed in tubes. About six granules lie in 1 mm. on the radial ribs and free arm bases. Arms very stout at base, as high as wide. Arm spines longer and stouter outwards, till the adradial one is somewhat clavate and is slightly longer than the corresponding arm joint. Oral tentacles enclosed in tubes. First two or three tentacle pores also provided with tubes, though rudimentary. The color is pale gray in alcohol. The type specimen is 11 mm. in disk diameter, 100 mm. in arm length and 4 mm. in arm width at base. Three specimens; Sagami Sea; 110 fathoms. Asteroschema hemigymnum Matsumoto. 1912, Dobuts. Z. Tokyo, 24, p. 381 (in Japanese); figs. 3, 4. Diameter of disk 10 mm. Length of arms 120 mm. Width of arms at base 3 mm. Disk rather flat, divided into ten lobes, cor- responding to the radial ribs, by ten radiating furrows; covered by a skin, which contains very fine, smooth, close-set granules. Ventral interbrachial areas rather vertical, narrow, forming a deep notch, on the floor of which opens one madreporic pore. Genital slits rather short, more or less divergent dorsally. Ventral surface of disk covered by a finely and rather sparsely granulated skin. Oral angles not markedly set off from the outer parts. Six or seven teeth arranged in a single vertical row, triangular, very stout. On either side of the oral angles, there are several coarse, flat, smooth, pavement-like grains, which correspond to oral papille. Arms very stout for the first three or four free joints, but becoming rather slender further out; their width just outside the fourth free joint is 2.5 mm. They constantly taper outwards, so that they are exceedingly slender towards the extremities, which are very acute. Dorsal and lateral surface of the arms covered by a skin, which is similar to that of the disk, containing very fine, smooth, close-set ‘ 54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., granules, of which there are about five in 1 mm. on the dorsal surface of the arm bases. The granules become much finer outwards, and almost disappear near extremity of arm. Vertebre visible through skin, but surface of arm practically smooth and without distinct demarcation of joints, except of first three or four, which are marked off by shallow constrictions. Ventral surface of arms entirely naked, and lateral and ventral arm plates clearly visible through skin. First tentacle pore unprotected; next four or five pores provided with a single arm spine, and the rest with two. Abradial spine very small, cylindrical, enclosed in skin, more or less rough at free end. Adradial one clavate, enclosed in skin, very rough at free end. Arm spines largest at middle of arm, the adradial one being one and a half times as long as, and the abradial one a little shorter than, the corresponding arm joint. They are transformed into compound hooks, with three to six hooklets, towards the very extremity of the arm. Oral tentacle pore and first three or four tentacle pores provided with tubes. Color in alcohol: grayish brown. One specimen; Sagami Sea. Like A. intectum Lyman and A. migrator Koehler, this species appears to be an intermediate form between the sections A steroschema, s. str., and Ophiocreas. Astrocharis ijimai Matsumoto. = 1911, Dobuts. Z. Tokyo, 28, p. 617 (in Japanese). Diameter of disk 4.5 mm. Length of arms 50 mm. Width of arms at base 2.5 mm. Disk five-lobed, with deeply indented inter- brachial borders, with lobes emarginate towards arms, flat, sunken at the central region, raised at the lobes, covered with very fine, smooth, irregular scales, which are very close-set and partly imbri- eated. Radial shields naked, very small, triangular, with apex turned within, tuberculous when examined under a microscope. Ventral interbrachial areas with very deep notches, exceedingly narrowed by the very wide arm bases. Two genital slits small, parallel, nearly vertical. On either side of each lobe of the disk, lies the naked genital plate, which is large, oval, and tuberculous under a microscope. Oral angles puffed laterally, almost filling up the oral slits. Teeth small, triangular, arranged in a single vertical row. No oral or dental papillz. Arms very wide at base, keeping the same width for a distance of about 4 or 5 mm., then rather rapidly narrowed, becoming slender and cylindrical, with a width of about 1 mm.; covered with fine 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 55 scales similar to those of the disk. Arm joints invisible in the proximal part of the arm, but more or less distinct distally. First tentacle pore free of arm spines; those beyond provided with a single spine, which is very small, short, peg-like, somewhat flattened, rough at the end as seen under a microscope, lying flat on the ventral surface of the arm. Half way out on the arm, each tentacle pore is provided with two spines, of which the second, or abradial one, is exceedingly small and rather inconspicuous; the adradial one then becomes a little longer and erect to the arm. - Color in alcohol: white or pale yellow. Numerous specimens; Sagami Sea. In smaller specimens, the arms are scarcely widened at the base, which is also the case in regenerating ones; for schizogony takes place in this species as in the genotype, A. virgo Koehler. Most specimens are five-armed, but the arms are often unequal, two or three being larger than the others. I have, however, one specimen with six arms, three larger and three smaller. In four-armed speci- mens, two or three arms may be larger and the other two or one smaller. Still another specimen has only three arms, doubtless indicating that it has lately undergone division, and that the lost parts have not been regenerated. Family 3. GORGONOCEPHALID Déderlein, 1911. (Characters as given in key, p. 46.) Key to subfamilies of Gorgonocephalide (I). A—Teeth, dental papille and oral papille all similar, spiniform; oral angles not strongly projected ventrally; genital slits small, often pore-like, lying near the disk border; basal vertebre not very small, not covered over by the muscles between the basal vertebra and genital plates, (GORGONOCEPHALIN 2. AA—Teeth and dental papille similar, spiniform; oral papille absent or, at least, extremely reduced; genital slits large, extending nearly from the inner corners of the interbrachial ventral surfaces to the disk margin; basal vertebra very small, covered over by the muscles, which connect the basal vertebre and genital plates ASTROTOMIN®. Key to subfamilies of Gorgonocephalide (11). A—Arms simple or branched a few times. a—Teeth, dental papille and oral papille all well developed; oral and adoral shields in direct contact with each other, without supplementary plates in the oral region, (JORGONOCEPHALIN®, pars. ‘ 56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Feb., aa—Teeth and dental papille well developed, but oral papille absent or very rudimentary; oral and adoral shields separated from each other by a mosaic of supplementary PRR noid ccceenineem caren bonatgnceuanes Certs EO Me AA—Arms branched many times; teeth, dental papillae and oral papillz all well developed; oral and adoral shields separated from each other by a mosaic of supplementary plates, GORGONOCEPHALIN®, pars. Subfamily 1. GORGONOCEPHALIN Déderlein, 1911 (emend.). (Characters as given above in keys.) This subfamily includes Astrogomphus, Astrochele, Astrochlamys, Asteroporpa, Astrocnida, Conocladus, Astroconus, Gorgonocephalus, Astrodendrum, Astrocladus, Astrospartus, Astroboa, Astrophytum, Ophiocrene, Astrochalcis, Astrogordius, Astrocyclus, Astrocaneum and Astrodactylus. Astrocladus annulatus (Matsumoto). Astrophyton annulatum, 1912. Dobuts. Z. Tokyo, 24, p. 206 (in Japanese) ; Pen Pip re 1912. Dobuts. Z. Tokyo, 24, p. 389. Diameter of disk, 22 mm. Distance from centre of disk to inter- radial margin, 8.5 mm. Distance from outer end of oral slit to first bifurcation of arm, 11 mm. Arms branched nineteen or twenty times, measuring about 125 mm. in total length. Width of ventral side of arm base within disk, 4.5 mm. Disk five-lobed, with concave interbrachial borders, covered by a thick skin, which is apparently smooth, but contains fine, close-set granules of microscopic size. On the radial ribs these granules are flattened, pavement-like and coarser, being even visible to the naked eye. Several smooth, hemispherical tubercles are scattered on the disk. Radial ribs gently raised, forming rounded ridges, with rather indistinct out- lines, not quite reaching to the disk centre; their back is marked with concentrically arranged swellings, corresponding to the imbri- cating, soldered plates, of which the radial shield is composed. The ventral surface of the disk appears smooth to the naked eye. Genital slits not very large. Madreporic shield single, at inner corner of a ventral interbrachial area, small, transversely oval. Teeth and dental papille, conical and rather stout. Oral papille and lower dental papillae, smaller and very short. Arms slender and branched, with distinction of trunk and lateral branch even at the base; covered on dorsal side by a finely and closely 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 57 granulated skin, with several scattered, smooth, hemispherical tubercles on the more proximal shafts; distinctly annulated with hook-bearing segments throughout. Ventral surface of arms entirely smooth. Arm spines, which are present beyond first bifur- cation, very fine and three or four in number at each tentacle pore. Color in alcohol: disk mottled and arms annulated with yellowish and grayish brown. One specimen; Sagami Sea. This species can be easily distinguished from other species of Astrocladus by the entirely smooth disk covering and by the arms, which are distinctly annulated with hook-bearing segments even at the very base. Astroboa arctos sp. nov. Diameter of disk, 65 mm. Distance from centre of disk to inter- radial margin, 25 mm. Distance from outer end of oral slit to first bifurcation, 32 mm. Arms branched about thirty-seven times, measuring approximately 420 mm. in total length. Width of ventral surface of arm base within disk, 17 mm. Disk decagonal, with concave interbrachial and brachial borders, the former being longer and more concave than the latter; very high and convex, but with more or less depressed central region, covered by a thick skin, which is shagreened by the presence of very fine, close-set granules. The granules are smooth, not acute, irregular in size, when viewed under a microscope, the coarser ones being more numerous on the radial ribs than in the intercostal spaces. Radial ribs long, narrow, bar-like, widest at outer end, suddenly narrowed for a very short distance, then uniformly tapered inwards, nearly reaching disk-centre. Ventral interbrachial areas covered by thick, apparently smooth skin, which, however, contains fine, microscopical granules. Genital slits rather large, adradial border protected by a cluster of close-set spinules. Madreporic shield, situated at inner angle of a ventral inter- brachial area, more or less semilunar, with semicircular inner, and distinctly notched outer, side and rounded lateral angles. Areas proximal to ventral interbrachial regions, apparently smooth, but closely covered with very fine granules of microscopic size, the granules being rather coarse and distinct at the oral angles. Teeth and papille very numerous; oral and dental papille, rather small, spiniform, and not very acute; teeth, much larger and longer than papillz, distinctly spatulated, and flattened at tip. Two main stems, outside the first bifurcation, of an arm are not A 58 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., equally developed, but one is longer, stouter and more branched than the other. Dorsal and lateral surface of arms covered by a thick skin, which is very finely and closely granulated; granules, irregular in size and roughly distinguished as of two kinds; finer ones entirely covered by skin, flat, irregularly polygonal, forming together a sort of mosaic; coarser ones, coarser than any granules of disk, hemispherical, tubercle-like, and uniformly scattered. Ventral surface of arms apparently smooth, but covered by a mosaic of flat and irregularly polygonal granules of microscopic size. First pair of tentacle pores distinct, opening in slight depressions; second often distinct; following three or four pairs entirely invisible; those beyond are again distinct. Arm spines absent on proximal joints, but oecur from fourth or fifth bifurcation outwards. They are exceedingly minute and granule-like, two to four of them occurring at each tentacle pore. The double rows of hook-bearing granules are present only on very fine twigs, the main stems within four- teenth or fifteenth bifurcation being free from them. The shaft between the first and second bifurcations usually consists of four arm joints; the outer shafts consist of six to eight, usually seven joints. Color in alcohol, as well as when dry: dark grayish brown above, and dark yellowish brown below. Two specimens; off Misaki Marine Biological Station; 5-10 fathoms. Four specimens; Sagami Sea. Among the five known species of Astroboa, A. clavata (Lyman) is distinguished from the others by the spiny granules of the disk and arms, and A. globifera (Déderlein) by the position of the madreporic shield. A. nuda (Lyman) and A. nigra Déderlein have distinct annulations of hook-bearing granules on the arms throughout, while A. erne Déderlein has no such annulations on the greater proximal part of the arms. So that the present species is near A. erna, but differs from it in the much finer and less distinct granules of the disk and arms, and in the less numerous arm joints composing a shaft. In the last character, A. arctos rather resembles A. nigra from Zanzibar and from Hirado Strait. This species is common in the shallow waters around Misaki, occurring together with Astrocladus coniferus, especially var. dofleini [A. dofleini Déderlein is, in my opinion, conspecific with A. coniferus (Déderlein), being, however, a variety of the latter]. According to present knowledge, Astroboa is represented in the Sagami Sea by A. globifera and the present species, in deep and shallow water respectively. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 59 Subfamily 2. ASTROTOMIN nov. "(Characters as given in keys, p. 55.) This subfamily includes Astrothrombus, Astrothorax, Astrotoma and Astroclon, besides a new genus, Astrothamnus. Astrothamnus gen. nov. Disk divided into ten radiating lobes by radial and interradial furrows, closely covered with coarse granules or stumpy tubercles, which are acute or thorny at tips. Ventral interradial areas strongly concave, with large, long, more or less parallel genital slits. Teeth and dental papille similar, spiniform, forming a cluster at the apex of each jaw. Oral papille absent, so that the sides of the oral slits are naked. Arms simple, distinctly annulated by zones of densely set, minute, compound hooks; the interannuli are covered with coarse granules, which are arranged more or less clearly in two series. Arm spines 3-5, peg-like, usually rough at tips, serving as tentacle scales. This genus includes Koehler’s Astrotoma bellator, A. vecors and A. rigens, besides the genotype, Astrothamnus echinaceus sp. nov. Astrothamnus is distinguished from genuine Astrotoma as follows: A—Disk covered with coarse granules or stumpy tubercles, which are acute or thorny at tip; arms annulated by conspicuous zones of densely set compound hooks; interannuli of arms covered with coarse granules, which are arranged more or less Clearly im tWO SETICS........ccccccscscsssesssenseee | Astrothamnus. AA—Disk covered with very fine, smooth granules, often beset with a number of smooth, stumpy tubercles; arms rather inconspicuously annulated, each annulus consisting of four rows of granules, the middle two hook-bearing, while the others are smooth; interannuli covered by a pavement of very fine granules, among which many oval, sunken plates are present sar Astrotoma, restr. In the arm coverings, Astrothamnus is similar to Astrothrombus and Astrothorax, while Astrotoma, restr., resembles Astroclon. Thus the Astrotomine fall naturally into two groups, one of which includes the first three genera, and the other the last two. Astrothamnus echinaceus (Matsumoto). Astrotoma echinacea, 1912. Dobuts. Z. Tokyo, 24, p. 200 (in Japanese) ; figs. 6-8. Diameter of disk, 22 mm. Length of arms, 140 mm. Width of arms at base, 4 mm. Disk distinctly five-lobed by five interradial furrows, each lobe being again divided into two secondary lobes by 4 50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Feb., the radial furrow. » Radial ribs much raised, large, occupying almost the whole dorsal surface of disk, but leaving between them ten narrow furrows radiating from the centre; closely covered with rather large stumpy tubercles with thorny crowns, between which lie thick, irregularly polygonal plates. Ventral interbrachial areas strongly concave, closely covered with stumpy tubercles terminating with one or a few thorny points. Genital slits rather large, more or less parallel. Madreporic shield small, irregular in outline. Areas proximal to ventral interbrachial regions closely covered with spiny, stumpy tubercles. Oral angles ventrally projected, covered with conical and acute tubercles, which become, near mouth, more or less indis- tinguishable from dental papille. Teeth and dental papille similar, conical, very acute. Oral papille absent; sides of oral angles naked. Arms rather slender, long, uniformly tapered outwards, distinctly annulated by double rows of coarse granules, which are entirely covered with densely set, minute, compound hooks; interannuli covered with coarse, smooth granules arranged in two irregular | rows. Ventro-laterally on either side of arm, in line with interannuli, there is a series of large, round, smooth plates. At the arm bases, the hook-covered annuli are usually broken in the dorsal median line by conical granules terminating with one or a few thorny points, Ventral side of arms with rather well-spaced tubercles, which are conical or terminate with one or a few thorny points; these tubercles become rounded and smooth distally. First and second tentacle pores free of arm spines; third with one or two spines; fourth with two or three; remainder with three. Arm spines of basal joints more or less indistinguishable from conical or thorned tubercles, but remainder peg-like, nearly as long as corresponding arm joint, and bearing two or three denticles at tip. Oral tentacle pores, as well as first and second arm tentacle pores, open by means of short tubes, which bear a few spinules on the sides. Color in alcohol: dull grayish purple. Two specimens, Sagami Sea. In Koehler’s species, vecors and rigens, the brachial ventral surfaces are smooth and the oral angles, as well as the spaces just proximal to the ventral interbrachial areas, are provided with slender spines, while in A. bellator (Koehler), as well as in the present species, the brachial ventral surfaces, oral angles and the oral spaces referred to are provided with coarse, stumpy granules or tubercles. The present species, however, differs from A. bellator in fewer and distinctly longer 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 61 arm: spines and in the presence of a series of large plates on either side of each arm. Astrotoma Lyman (non Koehler). As I have referred Kocehler’s three species, which he placed in Astrotoma, to Astrothamnus, Astrotoma, restr., now includes A. agassizi Lyman, A. murrayi Lyman, A. sobrina Matsumoto, and A. waitet Benham, the first being the genotype. Astrotoma sobrina Matsumoto. 1912, Dobuts. Z. Tokyo, 24, p. 199 (in Japanese). Astrotoma murrayt Déderlein (non Lyman, 1879), Ah: Math.-Phys. Kl. K. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., Suppl.-Bd. 1, 1911, p. 23, fig. 1, Pl. VI, figs. 1 and la, Pl. VII, figs. 14-146. Though the present Japanese form was identified as A. murrayi by Déderlein, I have failed to find any specimen from Japan that strictly corresponds to Lyman’s description and figures of the Moluc- can species, so that I am obliged to look upon the Japanese form as distinct from A. murrayi. It differs from that species in the much shorter arms, in the narrower brachial lobes of the disk (narrower outwards than inwards), in the longer genital slits, in the fewer and larger stumpy tubercles in the spaces just proximal to the ventral interbrachial areas, and in the comparatively fewer arm spines. The type specimen measures 34 mm. across disk and 200 mm. in arm length, while A. murrayi is described as 29 mm. across the disk and 280 mm. in arm length. The brachial lobes of the disk are not so wide as in A. murrayi, and are narrower outwards than inwards, instead of the reverse. The genital slits extend from the inner corners of the ventral interbrachial areas nearly to the disk margin. The spaces just proximal to the ventral interbrachial areas are beset with a few large stumpy tubercles, instead of numerous small ones. First tentacle pore free of arm spines; second with one or two; third, two or three; fourth, three or four; and succeeding, four, or sometimes three. In A. murrayi, four or sometimes five arm spines are present at each tentacle pore, even on the very basal arm joints. However, A. sobrina is very close to A. murray, the covering of the disk and arms being quite similar in the two species. But I consider that this similarity is generic rather than specific, as I have observed that the arm covering of the genotype, A. agassizi, is also precisely similar to that of the present species. Five specimens; Sagami Sea. Order ii. LAAMOPHIURIDA nov. Radial shield and genital plate articulate with each other by means of a transverse ridge or a simple facet on either plate, without 62 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Feb., well-developed articular condyles and sockets. Peristomal plates large, usually entire. Oral frames entire, without well-developed lateral wings. Dorsal arm plates often very small, while the lateral arm plates are very well developed, those of opposite sides usually meeting both above and below. Key to families of Lemophiurida. A—Disk and arms delicate and slender; disk scales or plates, as well as arm plates, not very stout, genital plate and scale of either side of a radius articulate with each other, instead of being soldered together; vertebrze not very stout, distal ones often incompletely divided longitudinally by a series of i) Eee AO Oe DRO oes seer OPHIACANTHID. AA—Disk and arms very heavy; disk and arm plates very stout; genital plate and scale of either side of a radius, firmly soldered together; vertebrae very Stout... HEMIEURYALID&. Family 1. OPHIACANTHIDZE (Perrier, 1891) Verrill, 1899. (Characters as given above in key.) This family includes Ophiotholia, Ophiomyces, Ophiologimus, Ophiophrura, Ophiotoma, Ophioblenna, Ophiocymbium, Ophiopora, Ophiotrema, Ophiomedea, Ophiopristis, Ophiolimna, Microphiura, Ophiomitrella, Ophioscalus, Ophiocopa, Ophiacantha, Ophiacanthella, Ophiolebes, Ophiochondrella, Ophiothamnus, Ophiomytis, Ophioplin- thaca, Ophiomitra, Ophiocamaz, etc. Ophiacantha bisquamata sp. nov. Diameter of disk 6 mm. Length of arms 34 mm. Width of arms at base 1.5 mm. Disk pentagonal, with nearly straight or slightly convex interbrachial borders, closely covered with fine granules, of which eight or nine liein 1 mm. Radial shields entirely concealed, very small, bar-like, separated from each other. Ventral interbrachial areas similar to the dorsal side, but proximally free of granules and covered with fine scales. Genital slits long, nearly reaching the disk margin. Oral shields small, rhomboidal, with convex inner sides and rounded outer angle, nearly as long as, or slightly longer than wide, in contact with the first lateral arm plates. Adoral shields small, triangular, pointed inwards, meeting each other. Five or six oral papille on either side of each jaw; the outermost two are flat and leaf-like, protecting the second oral tentacle pore; the others are very narrow and acute; the innermost one, which pairs with that of the other side, is infradental. Four or five teeth in a single vertical row, more 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 63 or less stout, obtuse. Arms composed of rather short and wide joints, uniformly tapered. Dorsal arm plates rhomboidal, with very obtuse inner angle, wider than long, with a more or less distinct median keel, so that the dorsal side of the arm is keeled as a whole. Lateral arm plates with prominent spine ridges, meeting neither above or below. First ventral arm plate very small, quadrangular, with concave inner side, longer than wide; those following, mod- erately large, pentagonal, with convex, but slightly notched, outer side and rounded outer angles, nearly as long as wide. Six arm spines long, flattened, more or less curved, truncate, translucent, not serrate; uppermost or upper second spine longest, about twice and a half as long as corresponding arm joint; lowest one, shortest, slightly longer than arm joint. Two oval, thin, leaf-like tentacle scales to each pore. Color in alcohol: disk grayish brown, with or without white patches on dorsal side at insertion of arm bases; arms banded with grayish brown and white. The grayish brown and white in alcohol correspond, in life, to dark green and vivid red, respectively. Two specimens: off Oshima, Sagami Sea; 75-85 fathoms. Ophiothamnus venustus sp. nov. This species is very near Ophiomitra habrotata H. L. Clark, but I have some doubt as to the identity of the two species, since certain differences are observable between them as now known. The present species has fine, acute, scattered spines on the disk, without any of the large, conspicuous spines, characteristic of O. habrotata. The arm spines of the present species are eight to ten in number to each lateral arm plate on free basal arm joints. Numerous specimens; off Inatori, Izu, Sagami Bay. The internal structure of the present species is quite similar to those of the genotype, O. vicarius Lyman, the peristomal plates being triple, the genital plates situated above the basal vertebra, the genital scales absent and the generative glands lined by an unfolded membrane, which contains fine scales, as seen under a microscope. The species referred to Ophiothamnus by modern systematists are of a type not considered Ophiothamnus by Lyman, while certain species, which are quite congeneric with Lyman’s type of the present genus, have been referred to other genera. - For examples, Ophioleda minima and Ophioplinthaca occlusa of Koehler, and Ophiomitra habrotata H. L. Clark, are, in my opinion, genuine Ophiothamnus, while Ophiomitra exigua Lyman (referred to Ophiothamnus by ‘ O+ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., Verrill), Ophiomitra dicycla H. L. Clark, Ophiothamnus levis Liitken and Mortensen, and Ophiothamnus stultus Koehler are not genuine Ophiothamnus, but belong to a distinct type, which awaits a name, being more or less related to Ophiomytis and Ophioplinthaca. Ophiolebes tuberosus sp. nov. Diameter of disk 10 mm. Length of arms 38 mm. Width of arms at base 1.5 mm. Disk five-lobed, with strongly concave interbrachial borders, deeply hollowed at the central region, covered by a thick, cereous skin, which contains well-spaced, thick, rounded seales of various sizes; beset with several short, conical, stout, obtuse tubercles, which are larger and more numerous on the radial shields. Radial shields also covered by the skin, long, narrow, bar-like, strongly raised, about two-thirds as long as the disk radius. Ventral interbrachial areas covered by a skin similar to that of the dorsal side, the scales and tubercles being, however, smaller. Genital slits large, long, but not reaching disk margin. Oral shields small, thick, rhomboidal, wider than long, with wide, rounded outer angle and convex surface. Adoral shields large, quadrangular, with perfectly rounded outer angles and strongly convex surface, wider without than within, meeting each other. Between each pair of oral plates occurs a more or less distinct buccal pore. Three, or sometimes four, oral papille on either side, conical and blunt; inner ones smaller; outermost papilla, very large and stout. Oral papille project laterally beyond radial axis, and those on opposite sides of each oral slit are placed alternately. Teeth conical, stout, obtuse. Arms slender, covered by a thin, cereous skin. Dorsal arm plates two to each joint; proximal plate small, quadrangular, wider than long, with a convex surface; on distal part of arm it becomes longer than wide; distal plate large, fan-shaped, much wider than long, and with a convex surface. Dorsal side of arm bases covered by continuation of disk covering, so that it bears thick, rounded scales of various sizes in place of dorsal arm plates. Lateral arm plates somewhat flaring, meeting below for a short distance. First ventral arm plate comparatively large, hexagonal, with concave inner side and convex surface, widest at the lateral angles, as long as, or slightly longer than, wide, in contact with the next plate; the latter is the largest of all, pentagonal, widest at lateral angles, as long as, or slightly longer than, wide, with convex surface and a conspicuous notch in distal margin; following plates separated from each other, rhomboidal, with a conspicuous notch in distal margin, with strongly convex surface; distally they become smaller, oval or rounded, and 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 65 the surface is so convex that they appear like hemispherical tubercles. Arm spines five in number on proximal joints, but four distally; they are conical, blunt, solid, terete; dorsal ones longer and stouter; uppermost about one and a half times, and lowest about two-thirds, as long as corresponding arm joint. Tentacle scales absent. Color in alcohol: yellowish brown. Numerous specimens; Okinosé (a submarine bank), Sagami Sea. In younger specimens, the skin, which covers the disk and arms, is very thick and the buccal pores are often indistinct. Family 2. HEMIBURYALID4 Verrill, 1899 (emend.). (Characters as given in key, p. 62.) Key to subfamilies of Hemieuryalide. A—Dorsal arm plates entire, without supplementary plates; lateral arm plates usually in contact above and below; five to eight arm spines, moderately long, conical; no proper tentacle scales, but lowest arm spine may serve as one, OPHIOCHONDRIN®. AA—Dorsal arm plates often accompanied by secondary plates or replaced by a mosaic of small plates; lateral arm plates usually separated above and below; three arm spines and one tentacle scale, all very short and flat... HEMIEURYALIN®. Subfamily 1. OPHIOCHONDRIN& Verrill, 1899 (emend.). (Characters as given above in key.) This subfamily includes Ophiochondrus, Ophiomeris and Ophio- gyptis. Ophiomerris projecta sp. nov. This species closely resembles Ophioceramis ? obstricta Lyman (= Ophiomeris obstricta Koehler, 1904 = Ophiurases obstrictus Clark, 1911), but differs in two important points. The radial shields are distinctly joined in pairs distally for half their length. A number of large, prominent, spherical tubercles are present on the disk, irregularly arranged along the distal margin of the radial plates, along the joining line of each pair of radial shields, and often also along the outer borders of the same. In the last character, the present species reminds us of Ophiogyptis nodosa. The type specimen measures 4 mm. across the disk, 13 mm. in the arm length and 1.5 mm. in the arm width at base. Color in alcohol: disk gray, arms banded with grayish brown and white. Two specimens; off Ukishima, Uraga Channel; 300 fathoms. One specimen; off Ujishima, Osumi. 5 66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Feb., Subfamily 2. HEMIEURYALIN nov. (Characters as given in key, p. 65.) This subfamily includes Sigsbeia, Ophioplus? and Hemieuryale. Order ili. GNATHOPHIURIDA nov. Radial shield and genital plate articulate by means of a con- spicuous socket in the former and of a large, ball-like condyle on the latter. Genital plates, as a rule, firmly fixed to the basal vertebre. Genital scales short, very wide, flattened, leaf-like. On abradial side of innermost part of each genital slit occurs another short, wide, flattened, leaf-like scale, which is firmly attached to oral shield. Peristomal plates small, or rarely large, usually entire, but sometimes double. Oral frames, as a rule, with well-developed lateral wings. Key to families of Gnathophiurida. A—tTeeth triangular, with pointed ends, not very stout; oral papille present; dental papillae wanting; peristomal plates large, entire; oral frames without well-developed lateral wings; genital scales, short, leaf-like; genital plates free, not fixed to basal vertebree; distal vertebra often incompletely divided longitudinally by a series Of POTeS 00.0... AMPHILEPIDID#®. AA—Teeth quadrangular, with wide ends, very stout; peristomal plates small; oral frames very stout with well-developed lateral wings; genital plates firmly fixed to basal vertebre. a—Oral papille present; no vertical clump of dental papillz; dorsal side of vertebrae rhomboidal, not U-shaped, AMPHIURID. aa—Oral papille absent; dental papillae well developed, forming a vertical clump at apex of each jaw; dorsal side of ver- fel oi ec tite hibcend acsvenansiionhy OPHIOTRICHID&. Family 1. AMPHILEPIDIDZE nov. (Characters as given above in key.) This family includes Amphilepis and Ophiochytra, besides a new genus, Amphiactis. Though almost similar to the next in external features, this family suggests the Ophiacanthide in many internal structures. Amphiactis gen. nov. Disk covered with imbricating scales, besides moderately large radial shields. Four or five oral papille on either side of each jaw, unequal in size, arranged almost in a continuous series. Teeth 2 Ophioplus armatus Koehler, 1907, evidently does not belong to the present subfamily, being, in my opinion, referable to Ophiolebes. 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67 triangular, with pointed ends; dental papillae absent. Peristomal plates large, entire. Oral frames long and slender in internal view, without well-developed lateral wings. Vertebr of distal arm joints often incompletely divided by a series of pores. Arm spines few. Tentacle scales present, one or two to each pore. This genus includes Amphiura canescens, duplicata, and patula of Lyman; Amphiura partita, Ophiactis dissidens and O. parata of Koehler, besides the genotype, Amphiactis wmbonata sp. nov. Certain representatives of the present genus were referred to Amphiura by Lyman, and then to Ophiactis by Liitken and Mor- tensen. Amphiactis differs from Amphiura and its allies in the absence of paired infradental papillz, and from Ophiactis in the more numerous papillze, which are arranged in a continuous series so as to close the oral slits. Further, the contrast of the present genus and the Amphiuride in many internal structures is decidedly striking. Amphiactis much resembles Ophiochytra, especially O. tenuis Lyman, but differs from it in the well-developed radial shields. Amphiactis umbonata sp. nov. Diameter of disk 7 mm. Length of arms 30 mm. Width of arms at base 1.2 mm. Disk circular, flat, covered with rather coarse, irregular scales, among which the primaries are distinct. Central plate large, circular, encircled by ten small scales, which correspond to infrabasals and basals in position. Radial plates large, larger than central plate, with strongly curved outer border, which almost forms a semicircle. The central and radial plates have each a small but distinct central boss. The second radials and the first to third interradials may also be distinguished, being larger than the secondary scales, which are irregular in size and in arrange- ment. Thus, the disk squamation is rather similar to that of Ophiozona. Radial shields comparatively small, oblong ovate, about two-fifths as long as disk radius, twice as long as wide, wider without than within, more convex abradially than adradially, separated by a row of three or four plates, of which the inner ones are larger than the outer. In each interradial area there are five to seven irregu- larly radiating rows of scales. Ventral interbrachial areas covered with more or less coarse, irregular scales. Genital slits long, nearly reaching disk margin. Genital scales invisible in external view. Oral shields small, rhomboidal, with acute inner angle, lateral and outer angles rounded, inner sides slightly concave. Adoral shields quadrangular, wider without than within, nearly or quite meeting within. Four oral papille on either side, inner ones smaller ‘ 68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Feb., and more acute. Deep in oral slits, on either side of each jaw, occurs an additional papilla, which is conical and acute. Five teeth, all obtuse, except uppermost, which is acute. Arms slender, flattened, uniformly tapering distally. Dorsal arm plates large, fan-shaped, twice as wide as long; inner sides slightly convex, forming an obtuse angle within; distal margin decidedly convex; outer angles rounded; successive plates separated by lateral arm plates, except the basal two or three, which are in contact with each other. Lateral arm plates low, not very prominent. First ventral arm plate small, divided into two secondary plates, - of which the inner one is triangular and the outer quadrangular; those following, large, hexagonal (except second, which is pentag- onal), much wider than long, widest at outer lateral angles, with concave lateral sides, distal and proximal margins slightly convex; swollen along the outer margins and especially distally, so that arm appears keeled along ventral median line. Arm spines three, subequal, about as long as corresponding arm joint (uppermost slightly longer), cylindrical, tapered and blunt. Two flat, oval tentacle scales to each pore, but sometimes three on the first. Coior in alcohol: white. Two specimens; Sagami Sea. The internal structures of the present species are essentially similar to those of Amphilepis norvegica Ljungman. The peristomal plates are simple, very large. The oral frames are entire, without lateral wings. The oral plates in internal view are very slender and long. The dental plates are absent, so that the teeth arise directly from the oral plates. The genital plates are free from, instead of being fixed to, the basal vertebre. The genital plate and radial shield of either side of a radius articulate with each other by means of a conspicuous, ball-like condyle on the former and of a large socket in the latter. The genital scales are flat, thin, leaf-like. The vertebre are very slender, the distal ones being incompletely divided into halves by a series of pores. The first five characters and the last are rather Lemophiuridan, but the other two, the sixth and seventh, are strictly Gnathophiuridan. Family 2. AMPHIURIDZ Ljungman, 1867 (emend.). (Characters as given in key, p. 66.) Key to subfamilies of Amphiuride. A—No paired infradental papill@... OPHIACTININA, AA—Paired infradental papille present............. ab eee: AMPHIURIN&. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69 Subfamily 1. OPHIACTININ® nov. (Characters as given above in key). This subfamily includes Ophiactis, Hemipholis3 Ophiopus and Ophiopholis. Subfamily 2. AMPHIURIN®. (Characters as given above in key.) This subfamily includes Amphioplus, Amphilimna, Amphiodia, Ophiophragmus, Ophiocnida, Amphipholis, Ophiostigma, Amphiura,' Ophionema, Paramphiura, Ctenamphiura, Ophiocentrus,® etc. The first two genera may be grouped as an Amphioplus-group, the next three as an Amphiodia-group, the following two as an Amphipholis-group, and the last five as an Amphiura-group. The Amphipholis-group are very easily distinguished, while the other three groups are less so. These groups may be distinguished as follows: Three classes of oral papille may be recognized: the first arising from the adoral shields, the second from the oral plates, and the third from the dental plates and being infradental in position. but in addition show two interfrontonasals, one anterior to the other, as in the subspecies compressus (Ophisaurus ventralis compressus-Cope). These speci- mens also agree with compressus in having but two rows of plates between the labials and the canthal row; in having two large superior labials touching the orbit below, and in having the caudal plates at the extremity of the tail longer than wide—characters which are given as peculiar to compressus. The coloration, however, does not agree with that given for compressus, and the body does not 14 Rep. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1898, p. 497. 15 Loc. cit., p. 496. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 129 show in the least the typical compression which distinguishes that subspecies. In coloration these two specimens apparently agree with U.S. Nat. Mus. Cat., No. 10,584, which Cope said restrained him “from regarding the form compressus as a distinct species.”’ It is, nevertheless, interesting to note the gradation, since it makes these forms from the swamp seem to stand between the typical ventralis and its unique subspecies, the standing of which may be subject to question. The largest of the three specimens is quite distinct in color and form, although found in exactly the same locality, and may be briefly characterized as follows: Body very stout and thick; dark brown above with many small white spots irregularly placed on the head, and in more or less regular longitudinal and transverse rows or lines on the dorsal surface of the body and tail, giving the whole a checkered appearance. The stripes are obsolete. Under surface of body sordid yellow-white; the tail clear lemon-yellow beneath. There is but one interfronto- nasal, and the superior labials do not touch the orbit. Superior labials ten in number. Length 525 mm., maximum width 20 mm., length to vent 265 mm. 13. Cnemidophorus sexlineatus Linn. Plate II, fig. 2. Apparently common throughout the islands of the swamp. Cer- tainly one of the most common lizards on Billy’s Island. Also numerous on Honey Island and Minne Lake Islands. This lizard, in spite of its swiftness, was easier to secure in the field than the other common species on account of the fact that it did not possess the disconcerting habit of dashing along fences and through the underbrush. It is locally known as the ‘‘race-nag,’”’ a name which, like many of the other names used by the inhabitants of the swamp, was strikingly descriptive, since the lizard is so remarkably active and scurries over the ground with surprising speed when disturbed. It appeared most abundantly in the plowed fields where the Lees had planted corn, peas and goobers, and since these plowed fields are very sandy, the common name of “sand lizard or swift” is quite appropriate. They were commonly seen among the “goober”’ vines where their colors blended well with the lights and shadows under the leaves. These lizards seemed to prefer the bare furrows for sunning themselves, and in the raised earth between the furrows had dug their holes, into which they darted when disturbed. These burrows extended in irregular directions to a depth of 8 or 1) inches, 9 130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Mar., which made the digging up of the lizards a comparatively easy task. Between the plowed furrows, also, in holes from 4 to 12 inches deep, were deposited the eggs, usually four or five together. The eggs were about 16 mm. in length by 10 mm. in greatest diameter, ellipsoidal, comparatively soft, semitranslucent, and almost salmon- colored; not smooth or shining, but slightly rough and subpubescent. Little data were secured on the life history or the breeding habits, but from the fact that eggs were secured at this time—June—and also the fact that several of the specimens taken showed the blue abdomen characteristic of the breeding male, it is evident that this month represents at least a part of the breeding and egg-laying season. Since, moreover, the reptilian developmental period is comparatively long, the bulk of ovulation must have been practically over, or some of the females taken would have been found with eggs, which was not the case. Specimens of C. sexlineatus were found in the stomachs of two blacksnakes (Zamenis constrictor constrictor, C. U., Nos. 6,157 and 6,155), a fact which shows that this species of lizard, like many others, shares the fate of providing food for the larger reptiles of the swamp. The variations of the specimens taken are especially interesting from the fact that all those described are from one locality and were all taken within a period of approximately a month, so that the variations cannot be explained by season or habitat. A number of striking differences may be observed in the Okefinokee forms as compared with Cope’s description and figure,'® which were used as a basis for study. It should be noted that the figure shown . by this author (p. 594) does not agree with the description (pp. 594- 596). This is particularly true in the discussion of the head and analregions. For example, the figure (cf. Cat. No. 4,878, U.S. N. M.) shows a small plate between the frontoparietals, while no mention is made of such a structure in the text; the figure shows seven supralabial plates, while the text notes five; four anal plates are figured, while the description states that three is the correct number. On the whole, the specimens examined conform much more closely to the text of Cope than to his figure. The following variations are to be found in the Okefinokee speci- mens, these variations being chiefly in scale and plate arrangement rather than in size or comparative measurements, although none were collected in the swamp which were as long as 235 mm., the 16 Rept. U. S. Nat. Museum, 1898, pp. 593-598. = - 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 131 length of No. 9,256, U. 8. N. M., which is given by Cope as typical. A table of measurements of various parts of the body shows a close agreement in the relative sizes of body parts. The plates of the head agree fairly well in number, but differ greatly in size and shape. One of the most variable of the plates is the first supraorbital, which may be entire, cleft, parted or completely divided, cutting off a small caudolateral portion as a separate plate. The frontoparietals are usually subequal to the parietals, but are sometimes smaller, seldom larger. The frontal is usually pentagonal in shape, but the surface varies from a deeply three-ridged condition, which is the most common, through an obsoletely three-ridged surface to one practically flat or slightly convex. The interparietal plate is sometimes bifid, sometimes flat, but oftenest high at the centre and at the edge, with a submarginal depression or moat which is well defined. Pos- ft, . . * . terior to the parietals and interparietal the plates are most irregular and variable. In some specimens one or two distinct rows of plates are found in this region, with from five to eight plates in a row; in others only one well-defined row is-present, and this is often inter- spaced with very small plates or scales; more often all of the plates of this region are small and indefinite in arrangement. The super- ciliaries of the orbit vary from three to six, the usual number appear- ing to be five. Of these the anterior two are carinate and the others are convex or flat. The inferior orbitals range from three to five, the anterior and posterior being usually small. The superior labials are generally five in number; one specimen examined showed seven, two had six, and one, four. One of the most constant of the charac- ters of the species seemed to be the femoral pores, of which fifteen were found in the most typical specimens, the range being from thirteen to seventeen, but other numbers than fifteen appearing very rarely. The anal plates, on the other hand, were decidedly variable. In the majority of cases these plates agree with Cope’s description: ‘‘three large scales, placed in a triangle, two posterior to the other and with smaller scales behind.” This arrangement seems to be typical, but even in the comparatively small series from the Okefinokee one specimen was found with only one anal plate, four with two—one posterior to the other—one with three in a longitudinal row, and several showed a wide granular space between the plates and the vent. In other regions the plates are quite uniform and agree well with the arrangements noted by Cope. The color is quite constant and the stripes persist through life, never becoming obsolete. A faint brownish band, sometimes 132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., double, is often found extending down the median dorsal line of the body. The scales of the fore leg, hind leg and thighs are practically without variation in the specimens studied. It might be noted that in many of the specimens recorded from the Okefinokee the plate arrangement agrees much more nearly with the figure and description of Cnemidophorus septemvitattus Cope than with C. sezlineatus. This is noticeably true of the anal plates, the general head structure and, in some cases, the femoral pores. In fact, if the median dorsal longitudinal line which some- times appears were more distinct, some of these specimens would seem to merge into the typical septemvitattus. None of these speci- mens, however, are as large as the type of septemvitattus (No. 2,872, U.S. N. M.), nor do any show the colors of the unique specimen of Cope’s species, which appears quite distinct, resembling western forms in general appearance and coloration, although the locality given for the type specimen is denied by Van Denburgh,” and the species does not seem to be as firmly established as might be wished. 14. Lygosoma laterale (Say). Not common. Only eight were taken in the swamp and but a few others were seen. Of the eight specimens collected, one was found under the bark of a log, one at the edge of a small stream, almost in the water, one under leaves in the woods, and the rest on the ground in open places. This species seemed comparatively slow of movement and was not particularly difficult to capture. The specimens showed no peculiarities of markings or of plate arrangement. The colors of the alcoholic specimens seemed to be more or less obscured, but the dorsal surface usually retained the characteristic bronze sheen, and the lateral stripes, although some- what faded, were distinct. The ventral surface of the head and pectoral region was normally yellowish-white, the throat and vent lighter, the belly and under side of tail blue. The following note taken of a living specimen in the field gives, perhaps, the most accurate color description: Six rows ventral scales yellow from vent to fore limbs; chin and gular region pinkish-white; a row of yellow scales above yellow ventral rows on either side; then five rows of dark-edged grayish scales followed by a lateral black stripe; seven rows of reddish-brown scales across the back. Reddish-brown of back marked off from black lateral stripe by a thin reddish line. . “ Occasional papers. V. Cal. Acad. of Sciences, 1897, p. 133, note. » 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 133 The specimens were remarkably uniform in both comparative and in actual measurements, the differences being chiefly in general body and tail lengths, rather than in variation in size of limbs or in distances between fixed points. In the discussion of the plates and scales of this species it should be noted that Cope’s description’ is most unsatisfactory, the ter- minology being confused, if not actually inaccurate. The description given by G. A. Boulenger in his Cat. Lizards Brit. Mus., 1887, Vol. III, p. 263, proved the most useful and accurate. In the Okefinokee specimens the dorsal plates of the head are absolutely uniform and may be described as follows: Rostral short; internasal pentagonal; nostrils piercing nasals; no supranasals; frontal in contact anteriorly with internasal, and two prefrontals widely separated posteriorly from interparietal by two broad frontoparietals; interparietal kite-shaped, much longer than wide; parietals 2; supraorbitals 4; superciliaries 7; superior labials 7. Little data were obtainable regarding the life history of Lygosoma laterale. No eggs were found. 15. Plestiodon quinquelineatus Linn. Fig. 4. Common throughout the higher portions of the swamp and on the islands. Seemed to be particularly fond of deserted buildings and chimneys where any such structures occurred, and often found along fences. The larger forms were called by the local names of “red-headed scorpion”? and ‘“red-headed lizard,”’ while the smaller striped forms seemed to have no common local name, being probably confused by the natives with Cnemidophorus sexlineatus Linn. Plestiodon quinquelineatus was seldom seen on the ground or on the trees, but was often found stretched out in the sun on dead logs, stumps or fallen timber. Although this was one of the most common of the lizards noticed in the Okefinokee, comparatively few specimens were collected on account of the fact that their habits made it a difficult matter to secure them, since they dashed into crevices and holes or darted along the fences or into the brush on the least provocation. ‘They were abundant in the deserted log buildings on Billy’s Island and were seen in large numbers in and around the old, abandoned house on Mixon’s Hammock, where they scurried over the ruined floor and over the decayed timbers of the walls, only to dart into the cracks 8 Rept. U. 8S. Nat. Museum, 1898, p. 622. 134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., at the approach of the collector. In fact, had the object been the securing of ‘‘tails’’ rather than lizards, the collecting would have been far more successful, since the small blue-tailed form, particularly, was prone to leave a tail wriggling in the collector’s hand while its owner scurried to safety. Enough specimens were collected, however, to show practically all of the stages usually recorded, from the small, black, brilliantly marked form with the clearly bifurcated median stripe to the large, brown, red-headed stage with the plain brownish coloration, broad head and obsolete bands. The specimens naturally varied much in size as well as in colora- tion, the smallest taken being 92 mm. long while the largest measured 237mm. The coloration of the ventral surface of the body and head seemed to vary according to the colors shown by the dorsal region. For example, in the distinctly five-lined form, in which the dorsal 6333 6336 63 39 S228 BREN Fig. 4.—Plestiodon quinquelineatus Linn. surface was nearly black, the ventral surface of the head and throat was usually tinged or mottled with blue, while in the older brown specimens with the brown dorsum and red head, the sides of the head generally showed a tinge of orange and the white of the under surface was permeated with red or yellow rather than with blue. The belly in both forms was usually bluish, with the plates around the vent approaching white. Although the size varied considerably, the relative length of the body parts was remarkably constant, except in the width of the head, which is of course unusually broad in the older males. The scale and plate arrangement of the Okefinokee specimens varied but little. The supraorbitals usually showed six plates; the superior marginal plates of the orbit nine, of which the middle three or four were often very narrow; the superior labials seven or eight, the most posterior being the largest. All of the specimens but one, however, showed two large distinct occipital plates, rather i a L Eee Eee 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 135 than the irregular arrangement figured by Cope. One specimen— the largest—agreed with Cope’s specimen (No. 9,234, U. S. N. M.) in this respect. A variation was also noted in the plates of the mental region. Cope’s figure (ibid.) shows two unpaired plates posterior to the mental. Of the specimens taken in the swamp, just half of the number collected conformed to this arrangement, while the other half showed only one unpaired plate bétween the mental and the first pair of inferior labials. It can hardly escape the notice of the herpetologist that these peculiarities (the single postmental plate and the two occipital plates) here noted as variations of P. quinquelineatus are, except for the postnasal, among the chief structural characters usually given for the species P. anthracinus Baird, and the single or double postmental enters into Cope’s four main divisions of the genus. Normally, one would expect two postmentals in P. quinquelineatus, and it so proves by examination of a large series of extra-Okefinokee specimens from other parts of southeastern United States, but this single postmental in the Okefinokee specimens is not limited to small forms, as are most of the supposed species with single post- mentals. The largest red-headed specimen (No. 6,339) has this character, and another good-sized individual has only one _ post- mental, but there is on one side of this plate the merest beginning of a suture to suggest where the subdivision might come if it were to be. We suppose Cope would be obliged to make these “ post- nasal—one postmental’’ specimens members of his first division, in which he places his Bermudan species, E. longirostris, but we could hardly grant such a solution, and this restricted collection of Oke- finokee skinks prompts a doubt of the actual rank of EF. longirostris and possibly of 2. anthracinus and E. pluvialis, or, in other words, we have our specimens referable to two of Cope’s four main groups for the genus, and if the postnasal character be proven variable this P. quinquelineatus may yet offer variants referable to the other two divisions. Certainly, the status of the species of Plestiodon is in a most unsatisfactory state at the present time. The species .P. quinquelineatus ranges through a wide series of coloration during life, particularly as pertains to the stripes and markings. The same bands appear in some specimens as are found in P. anthracinus, with a difference only in colors and brilliancy. Since the structural plate characters overlap, as has been noted — 4 ” Rept. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1898, p. 634, fig. 125. 136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., above, the suggestion can hardly be avoided that if environment and climate be considered as affecting markings, it may lead to a reconsideration of the value of such a basis for specific distinctions. An interesting illustration of regeneration was found in one of the specimens taken (No. 6,339) in which the tail had been injured 75 mm. from the vent and a new tail 65 mm. long regenerated. The old tail, however, still persisted, and projected at almost right angles to a distance of 10 mm. with a small shriveled stump on the end suggestive of a spine or barb. Several of the specimens of Plestiodon quinquelineatus were infested with red mites (Acarina), which appeared attached under the fore legs. One individual had eight of these parasites under one fore leg and twelve under the other. CROCODILIA. 16. Alligator mississippiensis Daudin. Pilate II, fig. 1.. The alligator was found to be extremely common throughout the Okefinokee, and after the novelty of watching their interesting habits had worn off, no particular attention was paid to them by members of the party. Alligators were constantly being seen in all parts of the swamp, and a short trip in any direction from Billy’s Island usually resulted in the noting of several specimens. Outside of a few shot for their skins and those killed for food, no adults were collected, as it would have been entirely impracticable to have transported their heavy bodies out of the swamp. A number of young were taken, and of these a half dozen or more were preserved. A trip down Billy’s Lake, from Billy’s Island to Mixon’s Hammock, was always the occasion for more or less sport in endeavoring to approach the alligators as they lay on the banks, in following their courses as they swam across the placid stretch of water, leaving broad ripples in their wake, or in listening to the interesting vocal gymnastics of the Lees as they endeavored by “grunting” to induce a specimen to rise to the surface. The reptiles were often seen sunning themselves in the rank masses of vegetation which lined the shores and were not infrequently surprised at very close quarters while they were swimming. p Whoever has heard the bellowing of “gators” on Big Water or on Floyd’s Island Prairie will ever remember it as one of his most distinct memories of the swamp and need ask for little else more blood stirring or thrilling upon first acquaintance. The Lees claim the young ones can bellow nearly as loud as the older ones and that they ———————— 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 137 distinguish them by the intervals, which are much shorter in the younger ones. Mr. Harper saw a five-foot alligator at the north edge of the swamp with his jaws tied with a cord which for several days it could not break. Later he observed that Bryant Lee could hold shut the two jaws of a wounded “gator.”’ Since these animals were found in every part of the swamp, no mention of particular localities is of importance. They were most abundant, perhaps, in Billy’s Lake, in Floyd’s Island and Honey Island Prairies and in the head waters of the Suwanee River. “Gator holes,’’ however, were to be seen in all waters deep enough to afford seclusion for the animals. These holes ranged in size from a few feet across to large areas extending from 25 to 75 yards in diameter. Throughout the swamp and in the prairies, also, were long open tracts in which no water-lilies grew, and these were pro- nouneed by the natives to be ‘gator trails.” The methods of hunting the alligator, as practised by the Lees and other inhabitants of the region, consist mainly of going out at night in small boats and locating the animals by means of a lamp fastened to the head of one hunter in the bow of the boat. Another hunter in the stern paddles or poles and uses the sharp end of the push pole to “stick” the body after the animal has been shot and has sunk to the bottom. According to these hunters, who every year take out a large number of skins, the eyes of the small alligators appear red by the light thus used, while those of the large specimens are yellow. The hunter carrying the light swings his head from side to side through an are of 180 degrees, and when an alligator is sighted shoots it by the light of the lamp on his head. The common sup- position that the skin of an alligator will turn the bullet of a gun is, of course, unfounded. Since, however, only the head of the animal is usually exposed when it is in the water, they are commonly shot through the eyes. The hunters generally use a shotgun loaded with buckshot. That a large number of alligators are annually secured in this manner is evidenced by the fact that the fields of the Lees are strewn with the skeletons and dorsal strips of skin which have been thrown away after each expedition. Only the ventral part of the skin is saved, the upper portions being too thick and spiny to admit of the primitive methods of tanning, and therefore the crest and dorsal scales are not retained. Plenty of evidence was secured to prove that the alligator is a formidable antagonist when in the water. The powerful tail is the chief weapon of defence, and with it the animal can deal a terrific 138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF {Mar., blow. On June 13, 1912, a large-sized alligator was seen to slowly sink below the surface as several members of the party in a small boat were making a trip on Minne Lake. Bryant Lee “grunted” the animal to the surface, where it was shot, but not killed. It rose within a foot or two of the boat and performed a most remarkable series of spinning movements, revolving rapidly on its tail with its body directly upright and the head out of the water. Several shots and repeated blows of the paddle were required before it finally sank. The alligators of the Okefinokee showed no variation, so far as our observations went, from the ordinary form of A. mississippiensis, which has been sufficiently well described by various authors to make a description in this record unnecessary. The young which were preserved agree also with the published descriptions and are most brilliantly marked in the smaller specimens. As the animal increases in age, the fifteen transverse yellow bands become fainter and the dorsal crest more pronounced. In the very young specimens the dorsal tubercles of the neck are entirely absent. No nests of eggs were found, but a number of eggs were taken from the bodies of those killed. In one specimen (No. 6,493) were found twenty mature eggs, ready for depositing. These eggs have completely formed shells which are thin and soft, not brittle, and grayish-white in color, with a granular coating which rubs off on handling. The average length of these eggs is 3 inches and the average diameter 12 inches. From a female 83 feet long, taken on Billy’s Lake, June 11, 1912, were taken 42 embryonic eggs ranging in size from 4 to 12 inches in diameter, almost spherical and of a dark orange color. The skin of these eggs is soft and smooth and covered with shreds of connective tissue. With this female was a large male about 11 feet long. Both the eggs and the flesh of the alligator are eaten by the inhabi- tants of the swamp, and the tails of the young proved to be a very acceptable article of diet. The meat is firm and white and in taste somewhat resembles that of pike. One alligator was taken by Mr. John Needham on Billy’s Lake in December, 1913, but this was the only specimen seen on the trip made at that time. Evidently, however, the alligators do not entirely disappear even during that season of the year. 17. Crocodilus americanus Laurenti. No crocodiles were found in the Okefinokee. Nevertheless, there is a persistent idea throughout the region of the swamp that these 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 139 animals have been seen in its waters and are still occasionally to be encountered, although the evidence offered is very meagre and the descriptions given of the so-called crocodiles are far from satisfactory. The natives describe the crocodile as being much darker in color than the alligator and state that in the crocodile the upper jaw is movable instead of the lower. This latter notion, it may be ob- served, is common throughout this part of the country, and is insisted upon by many hunters, although the basis for the idea is not evident. On the other hand, the chief points of scientific distinction between the two animals is never touched upon by those who profess to have seen the crocodile, and even such striking differences as the longer snout and the more active movements of the latter animal appear never to have been noticed. Bryant Lee states that crocodiles have been taken in the region around Cow House, but that he has never seen one south of Honey Island. Joe Saunders insists that he has seen crocodiles in a creek flowing into the Suwanee River in Clinch County, while Jackson Lee says that he knows of at least two crocodiles being taken in Billy’s Lake. These hunters, when pressed for details, state that the chief distinctive character of the crocodile is the color of its eyes, which they describe as red or orange, and the much darker color of the body. These men have spent their lives in the swamp and are remarkably close observers, and it is evident that the form which they have in mind is in some way different from the common alligator, but it seems unlikely that it is Crocodilus americanus. II. SNAKES. BY A. H. WRIGHT AND 8. C. BISHOP. No State in the United States has furnished more distinctive and peculiar snakes and no area has received more herpetological atten- tion than Florida, yet none of these numerous ophidian collectors and students has ever entered Okefinokee at Florida’s northern border. The nearest approach came about twenty-five years ago in the visit of the ornithologist, Mr. C. F. Batchelder, of Cambridge, Mass. He spent a day or two on Mitchell and Black Jack Islands. To the eastward, at St. Mary’s, Ga., and at Fernandina, Fla., he took the following species: Cyclophis estivus, Osceola doliata doliata, Osceola elapsoidea, Ophibolus getulus getulrs. In Florida, at Gainesville, the snakes secured by James Bell in 140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., 1879, July, 1880, and April 7-18, 1882, prove most instructive, for this locality is not far south of Bay Swamp, the Floridan extension of the Okefinokee Swamp. Mr. Bell has the following list: Abastor erythrogrammus,* Osceola elapsoidea, Farancia abacura, Ophibolus getulus getulus, Heterodon plat yrhinus, Natrix fasciata fasciata, Heterodon simus,* Natrex fasciata pictiventris, Cyclophis estivus, Natrix fasciata sipedon, Zamenis constrictor, Natrix fasciata erythrogaster, Zamenis flagellum,* Eutenia sackenii, Coluber quadrivittatus, Elaps fulvius,* Compsosoma corais couperii,* Ancistrodon contortrix,* Pityophis melanoleucus,* Crotalus adamanteus. Osceola doliata parallela, Of the above 22 species, seven (with asterisks) are not in our list. All of ‘these seven we might expect in southeastern Georgia, and were in our working hypothetical list before the trip was taken. They represent the remaining Austroriparian forms which were not taken by us, and with the truly Floridan peninsular snakes almost complete the whole list of southeastern United States forms. Fur- thermore, these seven (with Abastor erythrogrammus, a mud and aquatic snake eliminated from consideration) represent the assem- blage of southeastern species which most prefer the dry pine forests of the Atlantic coast or dry open or sandy fields where the gopher turtle occurs. We have no doubt that these seven occur on the Atlantic seaboard to the immediate east of Okefinokee and also in its outskirts. In fact, the natives held that there were several kinds of snakes outside the swamp which were not within it, and, among these, they named the coachwhip snake. Besides, the gopher turtle, the associate form of the above seven, occurs outside the swamp, but not within it. To the northwest about forty aii: at Nashville and Alapaha, Ga., William J. Taylor, from July 19 to November 18, 1881, took seven species of snakes, of which Elaps fulvius does not appear in our list. The seven are: Farancia abacura, Sistrurus miliarius, Heterodon platyrhinus, Ophibolus getulus getulus, Haldea striatula, Elaps fulvius.* Natrix fasciata sipedon, In addition to these collections from Messrs. C. F. Batchelder, J. Bell and W. J. Taylor, Cope also had material from St. Simon’s Island. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141 In the earlier days, Holbrook received some material from the region to the eastward of the swamp (vide Tropidonotus taxispilotus) In another place (Vol. IV, p. vi), he writes: “J. Hamilton Couper, Esq., of St. Simon’s Island, Georgia, has also furnished me with several Serpents of that state; and to him I owe a knowledge of the Gopher Snake, perhaps the largest and most beautiful of our Serpents.”” Of this form, Mr. Couper says:! “‘I have only seen it in the dry pine hills, south of the Alatamaha; and I have never met with it in the low grounds even of the same vicinity.”’ This may explain its absence in the Okefinokee. In this connection, it is interesting to observe that the same seven absent forms (except Compsosoma corais couperii) occur in Dr. Holbrook’s Catalogue” of the Ophidia of Georgia. In it 33 species of snakes are listed. In C. S. Brimley’s*® Records of Some Reptiles and Batrachians from the Southeastern United States we find 21. species recorded from Georgia. Five (Compsosoma corais couperii and Abastor erythro- grammus being absent) of the seven species missing from Okefinokee are given in his list as taken either at Riceboro to the northeast or at Mimsville to the west. In 1871 and 1876, Paul Fountain visited this area and he writes :4 “T can assure the lover of Nature, if he is prepared to run the risk of fever, that the farther he forces his way into its gloomy depths, the more remarkable and beautiful will be the forms of animal and vegetable life he will discover.” Later he says: ‘“‘A greater number of reptiles may be found in this swamp than in any other spot I know of in the States.’’ And he reserves his discussion and digression on snakes in general for his chapter on A Day in a Cypress Swamp (Okefinokee). In 1888, Cope published On the Snakes of Florida, and this paper has considerable bearing on some of the Okefinokee species; but, inasmuch as it is embraced in Cope’s great work,% The Croco- dilians, Lizards, and Snakes of North America, we will not consider it in detail. In 1896, the next list of some pertinence is Remarks on Some of the Floridan Snakes, by Charles B. Cory.” He enumer- ates 15 of the commoner species of this State. » N. A. Herpetology, 1842, Vol. 1V, p. 36. 2 N. A. Herp., Vol. III, pp. 76, 77. = White’s Statistics of the State of Georgia, 1849, Appendix, p. 14. * Biol. Soc. Wash., 1910, Vol. XXIII, pp. 8-18. * Fountain, Paul. The Great Deserts and Forests of North America, New York, 1901, pp. 65, 66. ‘ * Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., Vol. XI, pp. 381-394. * Rep. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1898, Washington, 1900, pp. 153-1270. * Hunting and Fishing in Florida, Boston, 1896, pp. 124-131. 142 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., From September, 1892, to July, 1893, Prof. Einar Loennberg,* of University of Upsala, Sweden, was engaged in collecting in Florida and his Notes, etc., published in 1895, proves one of the most important herpetological papers on southeastern United States in the last quarter of a century. He secured 30 species of snakes. Nine of his 30 species are not represented in our collections, three being genera peculiar to Florida, one, Tantilla coronata, occurring in Georgia as well, not being recorded, however, from the Okefinokee Swamp, and five proving of the same assemblage as Bell’s seven (Gainesville) species missing from the Okefinokee Swamp, because they are more especially dry pine land forms. The 21 species taken in the swamp represent a distinctly Austro- riparian element which does not entirely shun moisture. The collection of 165 individuals apportioned numerically among the 21 different species of snakes indicates very roughly the degree of abundance on Billy’s Island or its immediate environs. The list follows: Heterodon platyr Rinse... B38 —-_ Hlaphe obsolets.n......cccccsccccssnsssneresen 6 Ancistrodon PisCtvorUs ccc» 16 OD pheodrys CStUUS..u..eccccscsssiorsenesien 5 Thamnophis sirtalis ordinatus.. 15 Farancia abaewtdbee.c.ccocc.scoceeeeeoe 3 Coleaber CONSETIUCHOR ...cceccccseesseseese-e 13. Diadophis punctatus... 00. 3 Lampropeltis getuls ccc 13: Crore horridus..c3 secs teavat 2 Tropidonotus taxispilotus.......... 11 Elaphe guttatus.................. ° ude 2 Thamnophis s. sackeni................. 10 Storeria dekayi................. uti 2 Tropidonotus fasciatus.......... ... 10 Storeria occipitomaculata............. l Lampropeltis doliatus coc- CeMmophora COCCUNEA. ..0...ccceccoreee 1 CiNeUS......... site Se One Te eee 6 Crotalus adamanteus 0.0.0.0... 1 STStrUrUs MAUAT TUS ooo ccooresscenoee 6 Haldea striatula............ feel Sane a 1 None of Cope’s (1900, p. 1207) four peculiar snake genera (Stilosoma, Seminatriz, Rhadinea and Liodytes) of the Floridan region enter the swamp, and none of the Floridan sauria, unless the other limbless lizard described by the Lees proves to be Rhineura. One lone speci- men of Hyla gratiosa of the amphibians was taken, and, with the birds, there is a Floridan tendency, but it is not very pronounced. Of the above 21 snakes, Thamnophis s. sackenii of Cope’s Floridan snakes occurs in the swamp, and there are forms which might be termed T’.. compressicaudus and T. f. pictiventris. The largest portion of the Okefinokee material in this report represents the collection made by:the Cornell University expedition during the summer of 1912 (May 28-July 13). The party included % Loennberg, Einar. Notes on Reptiles and Batrachians collected in Florida in 1892 and 1893. Proc. U.S. N. Mus., Vol. XVII (1894). Washington, 1895, pp. 317-339. ] 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 143 Profs. J. C. Bradley and C. R. Crosby, of the Department of Ento- mology; Dr. A. H. Wright, of the Department of Zoology; Head- master W. D. Funkhouser, of the Ithaca High School; Messrs. 8. C. Bishop and M. D. Leonard, of the class of 1913, and Paul Battle, of Bainbridge, Ga. During the first week, Mr. E. L. Worsham, State Entomologist of Georgia, and Mr. C. 8. Spooner, Assistant State Entomologist, were also with the party. Later, from July 15 to November 1, 1912, the Lees judiciously collected material which added four species to our list and nicely augmented our series of previously known forms. In the fall of 1913, Prof. J.C. Bradley and Paul Battle spent a week on Billy’s Island and brought out afew reptiles. In December, 1913, Profs. J.G. Needham and J. C. Bradley, Messrs. John Needham and Paul Battle made a trip of ten days into the Okefinokee and collected considerable data on the winter conditions. Some of their material they brought out, but they left a container which was filled by the Lees by August 1,1914. This collec- tion has not been received and is not incorporated in this report. All the members of these various parties and, particularly Prof. Bradley, collected snake material and data and, to each of them we are deeply indebted for aid, good communal spirit and material encouragement. Acknowledgments are due Dr. Leonhard Stejneger, of the United States National Museum; Dr. Witmer Stone and Mr. H. W. Fowler, of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, for the privilege of examining types in their respective collections, and to Messrs. R. W. Bennett and Cornelius, of Fargo, Ga., without whose courteous assistance it would have been impossible to have transported our material out of the swamp. The Lees proved very efficient collectors. They enjoy life in this naturalist’s paradise and do not live in constant fear of the numerous venomous snakes and dangerous animals of the swamp. They do not alter their course in life because of them, though they respect and appreciate the danger and know what bad wounds some can inflict. They bathe in the lakes where many accidents might befall them, but usually do not. The children go barefoot and were our best and most vigilant scouts about the Lees’ clearing. Many a snake, both large and small, they “stepped on,” if they did not “cromb” it with a stick. They knew not the noose, and to it we had little recourse except on rare occasions. The gun proved very serviceable in the thickets. The Lees’ fields and clearing were the resort of turtles, lizards and oviparous snakes which sodght them for breeding purposes. 144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., Hither, as in other parts of the swamp, the bears, raccoons, opos- sums and other mammals come for the eggs buried in the sand. Over this same ground the king snake, black snake and pilot snake search for the same quarry and the reptiles which lay the eggs. The natives have a very good idea of the economic value of the various snakes and spare most of them, except the truly poisonous forms and what they call the ‘Water’ and “Highland Moccasins” (Tropidonotus and Thamnophis). One of the many réles which the natives accredit the black and turkey vultures is that of enemies of snakes and some birds of prey, e.g., the Buteos engage in the same practice. The snakes also suffer from the herons, ibises and cranes, but with these the reptiles are a second choice when frogs and toads are available. The number of snakes with internal parasites is surprisingly large, 37 of the 165 being thus afflicted, or 8 of the 21 species. They are: Heterodon platy Qinus 00:00 14. Thamnophis 8. SACKENG.ooeccscooe 2 ANCISLTOdON PUSCLVOTUS .....co0:eerese 6 — Lampropeltis Getuls.aeccccccccccosecoe 1 Colttber Constr ihr sc sicecdsctoscirincce DO SUSEPUTES QNUGATIUS. csticumatene i Tropidonotus taxispilotus............ 5 —— Thamnophis s. ordinatUs.......... 3 37 No doubt, other species also suffer, for this list represents the species of which we had the largest series. The above species are about equally distributed between the terrestrial and aquatic groups. In number, the former are 24 and the latter 13; but, if the spreading adder be eliminated, the terrestrial forms lead by 3. It is a significant fact that the species which are the worst sufferers are also inveterate feeders on toads and frogs of all kinds, and it is quite possible that these nematodes and other parasites reach the snakes through their food. According to habitat, these snakes may be divided as follows: ISLANDS. Heterodon platyrhinus, Elaphe obsoletus, Coluber constrictor, Opheodrys estivus, Lampropeltis getulus, Diadophis punctatus, Crotalus adamanteus, Elaphe guttatus, Crotalus horridus, Storeria dekayi, Sistrurus miliarius, Storeria occipitomaculata, Thamnophis s. ordinatus, Haldea striatula, Lampropeltis d. coccineus, 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145 Cypress Bays. Ancistrodon piscivorus, Tropidonotus taxispilotus, Farancia abacura, Tropidonotus fasciatus. Thamnophis s. sackeni, PRAIRIES. | Thamnophis s. sackeni, Tropidonotus fasciatus. WATER COURSES. Ancistrodon piscivorus, Elaphe obsoletus. Tropidonotus taxispilotus, TRANSITION ZONE BETWEEN ISLANDS AND Cypress Bays. Farancia abacura, Diadophis punctatus, Heterodon platyrhinus, Storeria dekayi, Crotalus adamanteus, Haldea striatula. Coluber obsoletus, If these snakes be considered from the point of view of locomotion, they fall into the same four groups which Loennberg (1895, pp. 336, 337) made, and the snakes are quite similarly, but not absolutely, arranged as he found them: SWIMMING Forms. T. taxispilotus, A. piscivorus, T. fasciatus, F. abacura. T.s. sackeni, BURROWING Forms. H. platyrhinus, L. d. coccineus, F., abacura, L. getulus. CRAWLING Forms. T. s. ordinatus, E. obsoletus, C. constrictor, D. punctatus, L. getulus, E. guttatus, L. d. coccineus, S. dekayi, S. miliarius, S. occipitomaculata, C’. adamanteus, H. striatula. C. horridus, CLIMBING Forms. E. obsoletus, ' C. constrictor, : E. guttatus, L. d. coccineus. O. estivus, 10 146 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., Or, viewed from the standpoint of breeding, they are about equally divided: the poisonous snakes, Tropidonotus, Thamnophis, Storeria and Haldea, being ovoviviparous, and all the rest oviparous. Finally, if the Okefinokee snakes be grouped according to food, based largely on stomach contents, but also on observations of the haunt, time of activity in the swamp and on the keen knowledge of the natives, these snakes are arranged as follows: Mammats, Brrps OR THEIR EGGS. E. obsoletus, C. horridus, L. getulus, A, piscivorus, C. constrictor, E. guttatus S. miliarius, (mammals only.) C. adamanteus, LizaRDs (OR THEIR EGGS). C. constrictor, L. getulus, S. miliarius, (C. coccinea). L. d. coccineus, FisH. T. s. sackeni, A. piscivorus, T. taxispilotus, L. d. coccineus. (T. fasciatus), TURTLES (OR THEIR EGGS). L. getulus, E. obsoletus. A. piscivorus, FRoGs. T. fasciatus, A. piscivorus, T. taxispilotus, S. miliarius, H. platyrhinus, T. s. sackeni, C. constrictor, T. s. ordinatus. E. obsoletus, Insects, Worms, MOLuusKs, ETC. H. platyrhinus, D. punctatus, T. 8s. sackeni, H. striatula, T. s. ordinatus, S. occipitomaculata, S. miliarius, S. dekayi, _ L. d. coccineus, O.7. estivus. It is apparent at once that insects, etc., prove the important food of the smaller snakes, ten of the 21 species falling in this group and 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 147 only one of the larger snakes being in this category. Doubtless, all the 21 species will eat insects to a certain extent. The species which are almost exclusive insect feeders are Haldea striatula, Sto- reria occipitomaculata, Storeria dekayi and Opheodrys estivus. The reader must bear in mind throughout this discussion we are treating Okefinokee snakes and not the species throughout its entire range. With the larger snakes, the food most generally sought is Anura or Amphibia in general. It is par excellence the food of the aquatic snakes, and with these four or five species it usually is some species of Rana, though Acris, Chorophilus or Hyla may rarely appear as their prey. Equally important are frogs in the food of the larger land snakes, 5 species being addicted to them. With these the southern and oak toads (Bufo) are easily of first importance, with the tree frogs (Hyla) and the narrow-mouthed frog (Engystoma) oceupy- ing second and third places. In fact, these 10 snakes prefer the soft-bodied frogs and toads to any other food of the swamp (reptilian eggs not considered), and if they were to be restricted to any one of these categories they belong to this group. Fish enter into the food economy of all the aquatic species, the bream and killifishes proving the common bait. L. d. coccineus ate fish, as doubtless some of the island forms do when the smaller fish become cut off in landlocked pools on the islands. In general, the lizards are swift (except the ground lizard), and fall prey only to some of the swifter coursers of the islands. How- ever, at least 5 species ate them or their eggs. The turtles when young and soft are occasionally taken by the moccasins and possibly by the other aquatic snakes, the young soft-shelled turtles (Platy- peltis ferox) being the species most attacked. On the land, the turtles’ eggs are eaten by at least 2 species, if not by many more. This source of food is one of the commonest of the swamp for man, mammals and snakes. At least one-third of the species are canni- balistic and will eat snakes, either adults or young, or eggs. The warm-blooded groups, birds and mammals, suffer from the same foes. Seven species of the largest snakes of the swamp assail them, their eggs or young. Four of these seven are the four poisonous snakes of the swamp, while the other three are the pilot, black and king snakes. In addition, the mammals have an inveterate foe in the corn snake, which apparently does not molest birds. None of these seven or eight species are aquatic but one, the moccasin. The three omnivorous coursers on the islands are the king snake, pilot snake and the black snake, while in the water the only snake 148 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., which includes insects in its diet to any extent is the southern riband snake. One must be impressed with the immense abundance of the reptilian forms, the restricted island quarters for these reptiles and the need of great numbers to keep each species existent under such strenuous vicissitudes. Each form, fish, amphibian, reptile, bird or mammal, has untold foes which are close at hand, fellow-travellers of the same course and seekers of the same breeding grounds already crowded. Never have we been so struck with the incessant warfare of primeval nature as on these islands of the Okefinokee. Another very interesting fact is the isolated nature of the place where these 165 snakes were taken. They are virtually a collection of Billy’s Island ophidians with a few other islands and portions of the swamp represented. Our series of each species becomes, therefore, very significant if several variants appear. They cannot be designated as geographical subspecies or varieties and must be considered only as indicating the inherent range of variation which a species may manifest in one limited geographical region, not what might appear in an extensive or expansive stretch of territory. Hence, the value of the material, though not as numerous as might be desired. Without doubt, many of the conclusions and observations in this paper are not new and are only corroborative of previous work, but they may have interest because of their independent nature. The more significant conclusions are: 1. That. Tropidonotus fasciatus and most of its subspecies, 7’. compressicaudus, T. ustus, T. bisectus and T. rhombifera, need to be restudied before they can be finally accepted. 2. That Elaphe obsoletus confinis, E. 0. lemniscatus, E. spiloides, FE. letus and E. quadrivittatus are too closely intergradient to be so distinctly designated. 3. That Lampropeltis getulus getulus, L. g. sayt and L. g. splendidus are possibly variations within one region. 4. That Thamnophis sirtalis ordinatus is the color form of the Okefinokee, though its recognition as a good subspecies may be questionable. 5. That Lampropeltis d. coccineus and Osceola elapsoidea are to be considered one and the same. 6. That Diadophis a. stictogenys is not deserving of separation from Diadophis punctatus. 7. That Farancia abacura may have white-bellied forms as well 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 149 as those with the typical red ventral coloration, and that this albin- istic character is not solely an adult or young variation. 8. That our specimens of Heterodon platyrhinus are one-third platyrhinus, one-third intermediate and one-third niger; that possibly niger is an adult end phase, and that one platyrhinus specimen agrees perfectly with Heterodon brownii Stejneger, both in. the absence of the azygous plate and in coloration. 9. That the two specimens of Storeria dekayi have not 17, but 15 rows of seales, like S. occipitomaculata, and one of the two speci- mens has the oculars not 1-2, but 2-2, as usual in the red-bellied species, the lone representative of which has the ocular formula 3-2. 10. That the range of the southern ribbon snake, 7’. s. sackeni, is not restricted on the Atlantic coast to Florida. 11. That C. horridus of the Okefinokee is distinctly the light canebrake form of this species. 1. Farancia abacura (Holbrook): Horn Snake; Red-bellied Snake; Hoop Snake; Rainbow Snake; Mud Snake; Checkered Snake. Three specimens were taken, and from native accounts it appar- ently is fairly common, but hard to secure. In distribution this species reaches from Virginia to Florida and from Indiana and Illinois to Louisiana and rarely into Texas. The nearest records are from Allapaha, Ga., to the northwest, and from Gainesville, Fla., to the direct south. Coloration.—The horn snake is one of the most beautiful snakes of North America. The ground color is a blue-black, the smooth and shining scales have an enamelled surface, and the gastrosteges and the scales along the sides have a fluted appearance. Every labial, mental and gular plate has a blue-black spot in its middle. The color of the back extends to the gastrosteges in vertical bars or inverted triangles, the apices being on the gastrosteges. Usually, at each one of these apices appears an oblong spot, and in the cephalic half of the body, the venter, as a result, presents a row of these spots on either end of the gastrosteges, thus giving a distinct light- colored band down the middle. In the caudal half of the body the vertical bars of opposite sides usually meet or alternate on the mid-ventral line, producing a checkered appearance. The vertical black bars are two scales wide at the end of the gastrosteges and three or four seales wide on the 4th row of scales. The lighter intervals between the dark bars are two scales wide at the end of the gastrosteges and one wide at the 4th row of scales. Each gular gastrostege has a black band across it. 150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF Mar. a The lighter color of the venter extends to the 4th row of scales in the younger specimens. In these, usually at the neck of the light interval, there appears one or two blue-black spots to suggest the almost complete invasion of the body color upon these areas in the large specimens where the light areas seldom reach the 2d row of scales and where there are large central black spots on the scales. Our specimens have 63, 64 and 65 light vertical bars or wedges, respectively, or from 50-53 from the anus forward. Curiously enough, the two specimens which we first took alive, one 151.7 em. long and the other 43 cm., were white beneath, and not red. The other preserved specimen has also the whitish appearance. Two of the specimens in alcohol may possibly have a slight tinge of pinkish, but it is faint if present at all; surely, it is not yellow. These three white-bellied Farancias are noteworthy. H. H. Brimley?® took a large white-bellied adult male, which was coiled with a normal . male and female in coitu, but our specimens, however, are not all adults, one being only 43 cm., the largest, 151.7 em., and another intermediate 81.1 cm. The native present when we caught the largest specimen asserted that he had seen red-bellied forms of this snake, and, in December, 1913, Profs. Needham and Bradley saw a beautiful red-bellied individual of this species. Dimensions and Variations.—The gastrosteges were 194, 195 and 196, respectively, in our three specimens; the urosteges, 39, 39, 42; the scales 19-19-19; supralabials 7; eye over 3d and 4th supralabial; infralabials 8; loreal elongate; temporals 1-2; nasal with groove below nostril; in C. U., No. 6,108, a groove above the nostril as well; anal plate and the gastrostege before it divided; in the caudal half of the body 6 or 8 rows of scales on the dorsum with a suggestion of a keel on them. Habits —The largest specimen (No. 6,108) was taken in a dark cypress thicket (between Billy’s and Gallberry Islands), wherein a Florida barred owl had retreated. In water ankle deep or more our guide accidentally stepped on the snake, thinking it at first a moccasin. He recoiled and then quickly shot it. The smallest specimen (No. 6,107) was secured in the most difficult tangle (Minne Lake trail to Minne Lake Islands) of the whole swamp, where the mag- nificent cypress trees and associated undergrowth were thickest. On a mat of sphagnum it rested, and when alarmed quickly shot down *” Brimley,C.8. Zoology of Lake Ellis, N. C., Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., Vol. XXII, 1909, p. 134, 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151 into it. Our first hold of this snake was not secure and it as quickly began burrowing the second time. From all that we observed of the living snakes of this species we would consider them timid, harmless burrowers. They are decidedly inhabitants of the twilight parts of the swamp, and their eyes suggest such a habitat. If found during the day, they appear in the dark, gloomy cypress ponds on the islands or amongst the dense vegetation of the deepest and most inaccessible regions of the swamp. We discovered no par- ticular superstitions regarding its horny tip. It is curious to find the hill hoop-rolling story also associated with this species, which to my mind is one of our most aquatic species, and the names “eypress”’ or “sphagnum” snake would be equally appropriate with some of the names suggested by its structures. Food and Breeding—None of the specimens had food in their alimentary tract and no parasites were found. The natives relate how the thunder snake (L. getulus) digs beneath rotten logs and other cover for the adults and young of this species. Of the breeding habits of this oviparous form we know little. The natives assert that the progeny of one female sometimes reaches 40 to 45. 2. Diadophis punctatus (Linneus): Ring-necked Snake. Plate III, fig. 1. Fig. 5. This species is probably fairly common on the islands of the swamp. Three specimens were secured on Billy’s Island between June 11 and 15, 1912. Coloration.—All three specimens are bluish-black or brown above, the color extending on to the end of each gastrostege. These black spots on either extremity appear as a row on each side of the yenter. In No. 6,105 they are very obscure on the neck region. In all three the dorsal scales are with pale edges and with numerous fine light specks. In No. 6,104 the edges of the dorsal scales are opalescent. In No. 6,106 there is a median row of body-colored spots down the venter to the anus, all the urosteges and gastrostege No. 2 being without spots; the same applies to No. 6,105 with the urosteges and gastrosteges Nos. 1-5, 8 unspotted; in No. 6,104, the median row is very interrupted, no spots being on gastrosteges Nos, 1-20, except No. 3, and none beyond No. 133, while between Nos. 21-133 there are several missing. In No. 6,105, the nuchal half collar is 1-2 scales wide; in No. 6,106 it is the same width, but interrupted by a median dorsal row of black scales, while in No. 6,104 it is faint except on the lower sides. In No. 6,105, the mental and labial regions are almost immaculate, a few infralabials being with faint black spots; in No. 6,104, each infralabial is well marked with one 152 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., or more black spots as the symphyseal is; in No. 6,106, the geneials as well have these spots. Dimensions and Variations.—The total length of these three snakes reaches from 19.5-29 em.; the tail from 4.7—5.8 em. or 44-5} in the total length; the gastrosteges are 143-150; the urosteges, 39-46; anal divided, and in one the gastrostege ahead is also divided. Tail very spike-like and sharp. Scales 15-15-15; temporals 1-1; oculars 1-2 in No. 6,106, the preocular large on the right side and small on the left side, the prefrontal taking the place of the normal upper preocular, 2-2, in Nos. 6,104 and 6,105. The supralabials in No. 6,106 are 8, with the eye resting on the 4th and 5th; in No. 6,105 on the right side they are 8, with eye on the 4th and 5th, while on the left side there are 7, with the eye on the 3d and 4th; in No. | 6,104 there are 7 supralabials on each side, the eye being over the 3d and 4th on each side. In Nos. 6,105, 6,106 the supralabials ° have the clear band of ventral color, but’ in No. 6,104 this color is heavily encroached upon by black. CPR ayn Eo e710) 6105 Fig. 5.—Diadophis punctatus (Linn.) In view of Cope’s establishment of D. amabilis stictogenys upon three specimens from New Orleans, Pearl River, Miss., and Savannah, Ga., the last locality not far from Okefinokee Swamp, our three specimens prove interesting. To find these three showing such a gamut of differences is rather fortunate. Our specimen No. 6,104 is almost a duplicate of Cope’s D. a. stictogenys. It has 7 supra- labials, a speckled gular and labial region and the eye resting on the 3d and 4th supralabial; but like his specimen, the three abdominal rows of ventral spots, the 150 gastrosteges and other characters suggest D. punctatus. It was taken under the same log as an almost jmmaculate-chinned D. punctatus, which has 8 supralabials on the right side and eye on the 4th and 5th and 7 supralabials on the left side and eye over 3d and 4th. No. 6,106, captured in a similar habitat, is a good D. punctatus in scutellation, but has the gular and labial regions spotted as in Cope’s subspecies. The numerous variations in these three specimens, the circumstances of their eapture, the isolated character of their habitat (Billy’s Island), an inspection of Cope’s type and Dr. Stejneger’s previous decision and 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 153 concurrence (study of Diadophis in manuscript)—all force the authors to consider this subspecies untenable. Habits —This attractive snake was found during the day under cover, usually under logs near the cypress edges of Billy’s Island. It seemed to prefer localities near the edge of the thicker woods. In one case it was under a log in a place near and exactly similar to the situation described for Haldea striatula. In the other instance, - the two were taken (June 11, 1912) under a log near Biily’s Island _landing at the woody edge of cultivated fields. The D. a. stictogenys specimen was first taken and a few minutes later the other specimen was found under the same log. The former may have been seeking the sandy fields of the Lees where lizards, snakes and turtles resort in great numbers to lay their eggs. This specimen had six unlaid eggs which measured as follows: 18x9 mm., 19x 9, 19x 9, 20x 9, 20x 9, 21x10. The covering is thin and quite pinkish in alcohol. This species seems as nocturnal in Okefinokee as our experiences with it elsewhere suggest. These specimens had insect and worm remains in their alimentary tracts. 3. Heterodon platyrhinus Latreille: Hog-nosed Snake; Hog-nose; Spreading Adder; Spread- ing Viper; Blowing Adder; Blow Smake; Blowing Viper; Spotted Adder; Flatheaded Adder; Puff Adder; Sand Viper; Black Viper. Plate III, fig. 7; fig. 6. Thirty-eight specimens were secured, of which 16 were young snakes; one was a cast skin. Coloration.—In coloration our series show all possible patterns. The 16 young were all of the spotted phase and manifested the following pattern: The ground color may be yellowish, brownish or reddish. Down the back is a series of 26-32 spots and on the tail 7-9 spots which become transverse bands. The color around these dorsal spots is brighter or lighter than the surrounding body color. Alternating with and almost touching the corners of the dorsal spots is a series of lateral spots. In the cephalic region, one of these spots of each side with a pair of successive dorsal spots form a quartette—an arrangement soon lost in the caudal part of the body and seldom seen in adults. Beneath these spots may be seen one or more series of small spots, not very distinct in form. The venter is grayish or greenish-white, heavily blotched with black or brownish. The head has a black bar connecting the upper anterior edges of the orbits; another bar from the eye to the angle of the mouth; and a third, on occipital plates, posterior margins of supra- orbitals and frontal. This black spot has a backward extension on either side of the nape or neck and usually a small median extension 154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., just back of the occipital plates. Often this median prolongation is cut off and surrounded by body color. Usually on the occipital suture and occipitofrontal suture appears a light spot. In some of the adults the same schema of coloration obtains as in the young, except that dorsal and lateral spots are less distinct as such and become more transverse areas with light intervals. Furthermore, the supralabials are more prominently spotted in the young. Of the 21 specimens of adults, 8 were of the black (niger) type with slaty-gray below. In most of these 8 the gular scales and whole chin except in two become the darkest portion of the whole venter. Of the spotted forms (platyrhinus), we had a few with the brick-red on the head and neck and somewhat on the body. In the intermediates, the approach to the black phase begins in the head region and the head first becomes black, or it and the neighboring cephalic region. In this process the transverse light intervals remain brightest and persist longest in the tail region. Some of the specimens are almost niger in the cephalic region, but platyrhinus in the caudal half, or three-quarters niger with the scales of the light intervals of the caudal region with incoming black centres. About 7 of the adults were true spotted adders and 6 intermediate. Thus, of the adults we have an almost equal division of 7 spotted, 6 inter- mediates and 8 blacks. Most of our largest specimens were black or fast approaching that stage. The black seems to be an end phase of size or age, possibly not always attained in an individual, but certainly the spotted phase is most prominent in the smaller speci- mens of the collection. Besides, it might be remembered that none of the 16 young were black, but all true spotted forms. Dimensions and Variations.—The 16 youhg vary in length from 13.7-19.6 cm., while the adults are from 35-104.2 em. (1 ft. 2 inches— 3 ft. 5 inches). Possibly the species may reach 4 feet in length and a circumference of 6 inches, largest specimen being 5 inches in girth. The gastrosteges range from 120-146, average 130; the urosteges 30-59, average 48; the anal is divided, in several with half a gastro- stege ahead; the scale row formula of 18 individuals is 25-25-19, the other formule being 23-23-17, 24-22-17, 24-24-19, 25-21-19, 25-22-21, 25-23-18, 25-23-19, 25-25-18, 25-25-20, 25-25-21, 25-25-23, 26-25-21, 27-24-18, 27-25-19, or in the middle of the body from 21-25, exceeding the usual range of the 3 species of Heterodon by the loss of two rows (in 21-rowed condition) or in the cephalic region extending from 23-27, two rows beyond the normal a = —-— 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 155 25 rows of Heterodon platyrhinus and simus. The temporals are 3-4 on both sides in twenty-seven specimens, 3-4 on one side and 3-5 on the other in three specimens, and 3-4 and 4-5 in one specimen; the supralabials are 8 in twenty-seven specimens, 9 in seven speci- mens and 9-8 in three specimens; the infralabials are 11 in fifteen specimens, 10 in three specimens, 12 in five, 13 in one, 10-11 in four, 10-12 in three, 11-12 in five and 12-13 in one. The orbital ring exclusive of the supraocular is 10 on both sides in thirteen specimens, 11 in one, 9-10 in two, 9-11 in two, 10-11 in fourteen, and 8-10 in two, 7.e., 22 of the 38 with number of oculars different on the two sides. Rarely, the azygous plate may be cut off from contact with the rostral by the prenasals (No. 6,186). One spotted specimen. (No. Rormal 6197 6186 ae a nee Osi>. BD 6204 6202 Fig. 6.—Helerodon platyrhinus Latr. 6,197) has not the characteristic azygous plate at all. Unlike Dr. Stejneger’s Heterodon brown’, this specimen has the posterior projec- tion of the rostral more than one-half of the suture between the inter- nasals and their mutual suture, therefore less than that between the prefrontals. Otherwise, it is very much like it. The specimen has the following scutellation: gastrosteges, 123; urosteges, 55; anal divided; scales 25-21-19; supralabials 8; infralabials 11; orbital ring 10, not including the supraocular; temporals 3-5 on the right side and 3-4 on the left side. These characters and a very similar coloration bring it in almost perfect agreement with Dr. Stejneger’s H. browni from the other end of Florida, namely, Lemon City. . A black individual (No. 6,194) has the frontal transversely divided into two plates. One specimen (No. 6,202) has 2 loreals on either » Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., XVI, pp. 123, 124. 156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., side, and two others (Nos. 6,178 and 6,205), both small individuals, have 2 loreals on one side and 1 on the other. Another (No. 6,204) has 2 loreals on one side and 3 on the other, if an extra scale between the oculars, loreals and 3d and 4th supralabials be called a loreal. This small extra scale also occurs in No. 6,170. Habits—This interesting snake proved very common around the Lee’s sandy clearing and in all dry parts of the swamp. It was the first form to be observed and of it more specimens were taken than of any other species. One might find it beside the trails or on the islands where no human courses led. They were often taken about and in the corn, ‘chufa,” “goober” and “yam” fields of the Lees, where the snakes probably resort for breeding. Here it did not seem to be solely a case of light-spotted phase for dry and sandy places and dark phase in more woody and moist situations. In the same open fields we find one phase one day and the other the following day. In two instances we took ‘adult spotted and black phases within 40 feet of each other. We dare not make a distinction between the two as to habitat, sex, food, etc., unless it be size or age. In this case, often the oldest ones are not always black or blackish, but they seem to tend that way. Of its “spreading” or flattening we saw evidences, and the natives are well aware of the assorted defensive repertoire of this curious snake. They had none of the superstitions about the emanations from it affecting the atmosphere, nor did they believe that it “spat” its poison when hissing. In all our captures we saw no particular signs of ill temper. Breeding.—This snake is oviparous. All through the month of June we were finding the snakes in the planted fields of the Lees and more than once almost stepped on the clumsy females of this species. To these fields they came to lay their eggs, and throughout June and later the boys were continually turning the eggs up to the surface as they cultivated their fields in their primitive fashion. The eggs invariably were in sandy soil and were usually 4 or 5 inches beneath the surface. Sometimes in one set as many as 11 or 12 would be found. One specimen (No. 6,175), taken June 3, 1912, had 22 eggs far from ready for ovulation. Another specimen (No. 6,171) had 30 eggs, 16 on the right side and 14 on the left side. But the egg complement may go beyond this 12-30 range. On June 19, Mr. Paul Battle took a large Heterodon, from which he and one of the authors squeezed 42 eggs. The females were not all of one phase: some were black, others spotted. The above eggs were white with much thinner integuments than those of the black snake and without 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 157 the granules of the latter. These 42 eggs average +2 (30 mm.) x +3 (21 mm.) inches and are not far advanced in development. Food.—We can hardly hold that the black forms eat frogs and toads and that the light ones will refuse frogs. Of course, if one grants the more moist situations for the dark phase, such a differen- tiation of diet preference might possibly occur. . Our specimens preferred toads. Three had each a southern toad (Bufo lentiginosus lentiginosus) in their stomachs. Another had eaten three southern toads, two full grown and one half grown. Three had partaken of beetles and two had taken grasshoppers. Parasites.—Fourteen of the 21 adults had parasites in their stom- achs or intestines. Sometimes the sole contents of the alimentary tract might be a bundle of parasites; in individual cases the stomach would be absolutely filled with them. No snake compares with the spreading adder as a host for these animals, and it may be due largely to its strong Anuran diet. 4. Opheodrys estivus (Linneus): Green Snake; Southern Green Snake; Keeled Green Snake; Rough Green Snake; Green Whip Snake; Magnolia Snake; Summer Snake; Green Summer Snake. Fig. 7 Three specimens of this species were secured from Billy’s Island, on June 5, 1912, and the other two from July 15-November 1, 1912. Coloration—This species is bright green above and usually yel- lowish-white below and on the labials. In two of our specimens the green of the back extends across the caudal two-thirds of each gastrostege, but the chin and the labials are more or less yellowish- white. eee a 6100 6240 6143 YX I> C) —s ADD GAS Po ER _ oo 6242 6249 6143 Fig. 7.—Left and middle figures Lampropeltis doliatus coccineus. Right-hand figures Opheodrys wstivus (Linn.) Dimensions and Variations—The total length varies from 31.2- 68.1 em.; the tail, from 12.0-26.7 em., or 2.5-2.6 times in the total length; the gastrosteges are from 151-160; the urosteges, 130-148; anal divided, in No. 6,233, the ventral plate ahead divided and one of the halves also horizontally subdivided; scales 17-17-15; loreal 158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., present; oculars 1-2, in No. 6,143 caudad of the lower postocular is a small seale hardly a temporal; if this be not a temporal, the temporal formula for all three is 1-2; infralabials 8, the fifth largest; supralabials 8 in one specimen and 7 in the other two, eye resting on the 3d and 4th supralabial; scales 17-17-15, the lower row smooth, the second row very faintly keeled. Habits, Food.—In our experience this species is decidedly arboreal, and Profs. Crosby and Bradley record the same habitat for it. The specimens were taken from small bushes, and it is a close second to Elaphe obsoletus and its allies in its tree-climbing proclivities as the records and its long, slender body testify. This species is quite thoroughly insectivorous, one specimen having undeterminable insect remains in the rectum; another, a partly digested beetle larva, and the largest, parts of a tree cricket and other orthopterous remains with insect eggs presumably belonging to the prey captured. 5. Coluber constrictor L.: Black Snake; Black Racer; Racer; Black Runner; Blue Racer; White-throated Racer. Plate III, fig. 5; fig. 8. This slender snake was one of the most common species of the islands, but only thirteen of them were captured because of their speed. Coloration.—In coloration this smooth-scaled snake is shining black above and slaty or plumbeous beneath; the white chin and throat in most of the specimens occupy the mental, infralabials, geneials, first 2-3 gular gastrosteges, the cephalic gulars and the lower edges of the supralabials; two or three of the larger specimens have slaty chins except for a small white spot, which in one case covers parts of the mental, inner border of the 1st and 2d infralabials and the anterior geneials, while in the other it occupies Ist gastro- stege and two gulars. One medium-sized specimen (No. 6,152) has more of a brown tinge, and the gastrosteges are slaty except for the caudal borders which are distinctly white; another specimen was decidedly whitish on the caudal ventral third of the body. A young specimen taken June 23, 1912, had spots on the back vaguely discernible and on the venter had a series of pink spots near the ends of the gastrosteges. These spots were lost entirely in the region of the 90th-100th gastrosteges. Dimensions and Variations.—These snakes vary in length from 71.4-127 em.; the tail from 18.1-35.4 em. or 3.4-3.8 times in the total length; the gastrosteges are 176-189, average 182; the uro- steges, 92-110, average 103; anal plate divided; in three specimens, ' the gastrostege ahead of the anal plate is divided or a quarter gastro- 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 159 stege is cut out of it; in eleven of the thirteen specimens the scales are in 17-17-15 rows; in No. 6,206, 19-17-15, and in No. 6,207, 19-15-15; preoculars 2, the upper one often with a transverse furrow extending across it for } to 4 of its width; postoculars 2, except in No. 6,152, where 3 are on the left side; temporals 2-2-2, rarely 3-3-3, or 3-2-2, or 1-1-2; infralabials 8, in four specimens 9 on one side; loreal 1, but in No. 6,157 there are two, the upper. one being cut off from the prefrontal; rarely the postnasal is transversely divided; supralabials 7, in No. 6,154 there are only 6 on the left side, the normal 5th and 6th having united; in Nos. 6,150 and 6,156 8 supralabials are on both sides, while in No. 6,151 there are 8 on one side and 7 on the other; whenever eight supralabials occur, the eye rests on the 4th and 5th supralabials, not on the 3d and 4th. This eight supralabial condition Cope thinks rather peculiar to the Plains (flaviventris) or Pacific (vetustum) forms of C. constrictor. SES ey mmo eee Tie GES a SSS GPRD Lay 6154 6151 6154 Ye. Nor ws ae YoRzZ THES CArREO 6157 . 6152 * Fig. 8.—Coluber constrictor Linn. The presence of three specimens with 8 supralabials and 1 loreal and one specimen with 7 supralabials and 2 loreals suggests that in C. slejnegerianus these characters are hardly of enough value for the establishment’ of this new form on these slender grounds alone. In fact, distinctive scutellation characters between C. constrictor and C. flagellum become scarce in the light of this large percentage of 8 supralabials in our collection. The characters of the frontal and color become more than ever the main reliance. Habits.—This species and the spreading adder are the two most common snakes of the drier parts of the swamp. It seems to prefer the cover of the blueberries and saw palmettoes, where it swiftly pursues its prey. It, however, also appeared commonly about the Lee’s clearing, where it was often seen but seldom captured. Only when we could get it in the open did we stand a fair chance of taking it alive, so lightning-like are its movements. In fact, it is fast enough to catch anything which moves on the ground of its environ- 160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., ment, and no doubt its omnivorous appetite is partly due to its speed. It can climb among the bushes, though we usually found it on the ground. The natives think it beneficial and allow it to climb into their corn cribs because it catches the troublesome rats and mice. Food.—It is considered harmless, and of its antipathy for rattle- snakes we neither saw nor heard any evidence. It doubtless will attack the poisonous snakes, but not to the extent that its arch- enemy, the king snake, does. Its speed is marvellous, and all the lizards of the swamp prove its prey. This even includes the “race nag’’ (Cnemidophorus sexlineatus), which suffers most; at least two of our specimens had the tails of these lizards in their stomachs, indicating that the lizards were swallowed head first. One cannot help wondering how the blacksnake captures these speedy reptiles. Another species which the blacksnake uses for food is the slowest lizard of the islands, the ground lizard (Lygosoma laterale). In some of the specimens we found sand in their stomachs. This species is very fond of frogs and toads, all the dry-land forms being in the list, the toad (Bufo l. lentiginosus) occupying first place. One snake had 4 adult Carolina tree frogs (Hyla carolinensis) and 1 pine-wood’s tree frog (Hyla femoralis) in its stomach; all being taken head first. It seems not to scorn insects, beetles being the principal group identified. Parasites—This species is quite badly troubled with internal parasites, five of the thirteen specimens having such in their ali- mentary tracts. The first snake captured—a young one—had mites all along the edges of the gastrostegal plates, a condition subsequently observed in one or two other specimens. Breeding.—The black snake is oviparous. One individual taken June 1, 1912, had 14 half-sized eggs; another taken June 8 had 11 eggs in about the same condition. On June 21, a specimen was taken with 5 mature eggs. On June 19, Mr. Farley Lee went out to get some smudge wood at 7 P.M., when darkness had just begun. Upon lifting a rotten log he found a female blacksnake which was laying its eggs under the log. It had laid three eggs, and we suc- ceeded in forcing another from the specimen. In the female were five more, making the complement 9 in all. Only two kinds of reptilian eggs exceed these in abundance and ease of discovery, namely, those of the Florida cooter (Chrysemys floridana) and of the spreading adder (Heterodon platyrhinus). The four eggs above mentioned measured as follows: 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161 32 mm. (1+ inches) x 18 mm. (4; inch) See i Se) 16 mm. (s “* ). 36 mm. (1,5 s wo Ved yam (a7 "SY; 30 mm. (13, “ )x18mm. (#3 “ ) Three others quite fresh in appearance when ploughed up were: 36 mm. (1;'; inches) x 17 mm. (44 inch). 36 mm. (1,4, “ )x18 mm. (41 oF 41 mm. (12 pea eS VG ERI, (BO. e Dy Another batch of four taken in a similar way had been developing for a time and at preservation measured: 36 mm. (1;‘; inches) x 22 mm. (J inch). 33 mm. (1,5 -“ )x23 mm. (J P 34 mm. (12 Venema (), o6 mm: (1,5. “° )x22 mm. (f° “ ). In all these eleven eggs the usual shape is elliptical with blunt, rounded ends. In the first and second sets, one egg is much more elongate and one end more pointed than the other. This tendency toward the ovoid form also comes in the third set, where development has progressed and the increase in size has been in girth. All these eggs when laid are white with tough, coracious shells which are covered with small crystal-shaped or cup-like granules. These make the egg quite distinctive. 6. Elaphe guttatus (Linn.): Corn Snake; Rat Snake; Chicken Snake; Red Chicken Snake; Mouse Snake; House King Snake; House Snake; Spotted Snake; Spotted Racer; Spotted Coluber; Red Coluber. Only two specimens (Nos. 6,229, 6,230) were taken “July 15- November 1, 1912, after our departure. Beyer*! thinks of them as fairly common in pine-wood regions, but says, “It is not found in the swamp lands, being strictly terrestrial in its habits.’’ Certainly, this form must have travelled through swamp to reach Billy’s Island and doubtless encounters moisture enough on the islands. Coloration.—This beautiful snake is light red or ashy-gray, with + - a series of dorsal dark red, crimson or brick-red saddles or transverse bars. These are 3-5 scales wide, occupy from 10-13 rows and have dark-edged borders. On one specimen there are 50 in all, 36 before the vent and 14 beyond it; in the other, there are 41 blotches, 29 before the vent and 12 beyond it. On either side appears an alter- re row of smaller dark-bordered red spots. Anteriorly, these ¥ _ $$$ ___—__ __—_- a Raven Geo. E. La. Herpetology, Proc. La. Soc. Naturalists, 1897-1899, New Orleans, 1900, p. 39. ll 162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., become very narrow and the elongate black borders constitute most of the spots. The third row on the first four rows of scales only shows distinctly in the anterior region. The venter has a tinge of the color of the back, but appears to be mainly white or yellowish- white, tessellated or checkered with quadrangular black spots. In markings of the head these specimens very well agree with Elaphe guttatus quttatus. Dimensions and Variations.—These two specimens are, respect- ively, 97.3 and 111.8 em. long; the tails, 16.2 and 18.7 em., or 6 in the total length; the gastrosteges are 218, 227; the urosteges, 69 and 68; anal divided; the scales are 24-27-18 and 23-27-19; the oculars 1-2; the temporals 2-3 (4) and 2-3; the supralabials 8; the infralabials 11 and 12. Food.—This species belongs to the group known as rat snakes, and each specimen proves true to racial reputation. In the stomach of each we found a full-grown rice-field rat (Oryzomys palustris) and other remains. Both of the rats had been swallowed head first, and we firmly believe them to have been taken alive. This requires considerable dexterity in nature where the prey is not cornered and may also be another bit of evidence to show this species more aquatic than usually thought. No parasites were found in the alimentary tract of either specimens. 7. Elaphe obsoletus (Say): Pilot Snake; Chicken Snake; Spotted Chicken Snake; Gray “Coluber; Gray Rat Snake. Fig. 9. Six specimens of this puzzling form were taken, and we regret this series is not larger. However, this small collection confirms us in the belief that Scotophis confinis B. and G., Coluber obsoletus lemniscatus Cope, Coluber spiloides Dum and Bib., possibly Scotophis letus B. and G., and Coluber quadrivittatus Holbrook are individual variations of Elaphe obsoletus. This conclusion in its main features is in agreement with Boulenger and Rhoades and partly in accord with Hay’s and Brown’s diagnoses of these forms of the genus Elaphe. Coloration—The ground color of the specimens is an ashy-, brownish- or yellowish-gray with a series of 30-36 dorsal grayish- brown to dark chocolate-brown spots on the body and 9-16 on the tail. In the cephalic half of the body these spots have their anterior and posterior edges concave, 7.e., their angles produced, thus giving the spot the shape of a ray’s egg; in the caudal part of the body the dorsal spots are more or less quadrate. Occasionally, the 1st and 2d or the 2d and 3d dorsal spots are more or less united. In one speci- men for its entire length (No. 6,136) these dorsal spots are connected . - 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 163 at the angles by a longitudinal stripe on each side, as in Coluber obsoletus lemniscatus Cope. The dorsal spots are 3-4 scales long and cover 8-10 rows of scales. On the 2d—6th rows occurs a lateral row of spots which alternate with the dorsal spots. In the anterior region they become very elongate and linear. In No. 6,136, with two faint dorsal longitudinal bands, this lateral row is connected by a longitudinal band on each side, the band obscuring the spots in the caudal half of the body. Thus, in this specimen, we have the four bands of C. quadrivittatus, but the spots of C. spiloides or C. 0. confinis, in other words, a good C. 0. lemniscatus Cope. To add to the confusion, the temporals on one side are 2-3-5 while on the other side they are 2-1-2. Beneath the lateral row of spots occurs another row just above the gastrostegal keel of each side. Each of these spots is opposite a dorsal spot and occupies the first row of scales and the ends of 2 sometimes 3 gastrosteges down to the gastrostegal keel. Sometimes, however, this lowest row of spots does not alternate with the lateral row and sometimes this lowest row is obscure. The venter in the large specimens is yellowish-white or straw-color (most yellowish in the quadrivittatus-lemniscatus specimen), while the two smallest specimens have it whitish or ashy-white. In some, irrespective of size, the venter in the cephalic fourth or fifth of the body is immaculate, while in others it is with spots like the ground color of the dorsum; the venter posteriorly may be almost solid in color like the dorsum. In some, the chin and throat area may be immaculate yellow, yellowish-white or white or the gulars may be slightly grayish. In all the infralabials have black borders as have the supralabials, but the intensity of this: color varies. Two specimens have no postocular band at all, one of the smaller ones has it indistinct, another has it on one side and absent on the other and two have it very prominent. Only two have the darker black prefrontal cross band (on posterior margins). The presence or absence of head bands in this assemblage of snakes is ‘too variable and individualistic a character to be of much weight in separating species. Some of our specimens have the head uniform like the body color; others are with distinct head bands. Dimensions and Variations.—The six specimens vary in length from 68.7-144 cm., the tail from 12.8-27 em. or 5.0-6.2 times in the total length. The gastrosteges range from 231-243, or average 236; the urosteges are 71-92 or average 85; anal divided, in No. 6,135 entire; the oculars are 1-2, except in No. 6,135 where 1-2 and 2-2, the upper preocular coming from the forward part of a normal 164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., supraocular; supralabials 8, except in one specimen where 8 on the left side and 9 on the right side; eye resting on the 4th and 5th supralabials; infralabials 11 or 12; temporals variable, in three specimens 2-3 as in C. spiloides Dum. and Bib., in one 2-3 on one side and 2-1 on the other, in another 2-3 and 2-4, in a sixth 2-3 and 3-4, the last a duplicate of Cope’s figure 196, p. 851, for C. lactus B. and G., and, strangely enough, the 2-3 condition barely escapes being 1-2; in fact, in just these six specimens on one side or on the other we practically have duplicates of the temporal scutellations of Cope’s figures 191-196, namely, for C. rosaceus, quadrivittatus, spiloides, obsoletus obsoletus, obsoletus lemniscatus, and laetws—rather too strong an individualistic a variation in a localized collection of - six to make it a stable and cardinal character of primary dictinction. (132 Sr ASY 4 pes. BrP FL Fig. 9.—Elaphe obsoletus (Say). The scale formulas are 29-29-19 for two specimens, 29-27-19, 27-27-19, 26-29-19, 25-27-17; from 9-23 keeled rows of scales; anterior chin shields touching 4th and 5th infralabials. Our specimens agree best with Coluber spiloides Dum. and Bib., although equally well with C. obsoletus confinis if Cope’s first temporal scale be considered abnormal for this form. One specimen seems a. good C. obsoletus lemniscatus, if not more than an incipent C. quad- rivittatus. All in all, if the supposed diagnostic characters of these four break down in a collection of six snakes from one isolated envi- ° ronment, one must question the weight to be attached to such dis- tinctions. Habits —This agile and slender’ snake is the most arboreal snake of the swamp. Its compressed body with the gastrostegal keels on either side where the sides abruptly meet the venter suggests an arboreal form and its habits confirm the belief. This species was. V7 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165 found along the water courses near Billy’s Lake. Here they climb up the bushes and small trees which skirt some of the streams of the swamp. Our first specimen was 6 feet up above the water, and they have ascended 10 or more feet in our few experiences with them. They are probably far more common than our collection might imply, but their position, the cover of the dense herbage and the color of the body, all make them rather difficult to find. Breeding.—This is an ovoviviparous snake and three specimens taken June 1, 3 and 15, 1912, had the eggs quite immature. One had 18 on the left side and 15 on the right side; another had 14 in all, 8 on the right side and 6 on the left side. Food.—No doubt this form secures much of its food in the bushes and trees it so commonly frequents, and true to the reputation of E. obsoletus of the north this Okefinokee representative proves an enemy of the birds. The natives steadfastly held that it ate birds’ eggs and young. One specimen had partaken of some kind of eggs and a second individual had birds’ feathers in its stomach. A third snake had eaten the pine-wood’s tree frog (Hyla femoralis). This species also frequents the islands and feeds on the ground. Here they do damage to the ground-nesting birds, as many of the other species of snakes do. They also often enter poultry yards for rats and mice as well as the hens’ eggs. One of the native boys brought us a pilot snake which he claimed was caught in the act of swallowing a hen’s egg, and stomach contents substantiated his claim. They report that they have taken some which had eaten as many as ten at onetime. None of these six snakes had parasites. 8. Lampropeltis doliatus coccineus (Schlegel): Scarlet King Snake; Red King Snake; ‘Coral Snake.” Fig. 7. Six specimens of this fine, beautiful snake were taken on Billy’s Island. The nearest records are from Fernandina, Fla. (C. F. Batchelder), and from Gainesville, Fla. (J. Bell). Each of these _ Cope accredits to the form Osceola elapsoidea Holbrook. Coloration.—Ground color searlet (fainter below) covered with 14-20 pairs of black rings on the body from head to anus and with 3-6 pairs on the tail. These rings inclose white or yellowish intervals, which are 1-1} seales wide on the dorsum and 2}—3 scales wide on the side, the black rings themselves each being 2-4 scales wide. In only one specimen, No. 6,240, do the rings completely and perfectly encircle the body for its entire length, and, in the caudal region, the abdominal white interval has a black spot between the black rings. In the other specimens the rings just fall short of meeting each other 166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., on the venter and sometimes their ends alternate. Frequently, the black bands of a pair have their ends uniting with each other and not with opposite ends. Occasionally the process goes farther and on the sides a black bar extends from one black band to another across the white interval and we have part of a white interval com- pletely encircled by black dorsally and ventrally as well as on the sides. The black band on the neck is not complete on the ventral side in any of the six individuals; ahead of it, comes a white or yellowish-white interval, narrower on the dorsum but wider on the sides where it extends across the angle of the mouth onto the upper posterior labials and on the lower surface of the head. The black occipital bar in one specimen is limited to one occipital; in the others it generally reaches to the temporals and the posterior edge of the frontal and the supraoculars. In one specimen there is a black band back of the eye, and in another the occipital black bar covers the occipitals, most of the frontal, all of the supraoculars, postoculars and Ist temporal and the upper surface of the two posterior supralabials. Sometimes the supralabials near the eye and rarely a few infralabials immediately below may have dark margins. Dimensions and Variations.—The total length varies from 23.7— 57.6 cm.; the tail, 3.4-8.9 em. or 6—7.2 times in the total length; the gastrosteges are 172-189; the urosteges 39-48; anal entire; the supralabials 7; infralabials 8 except on one side of No. 6,240, where there are 9; the oculars are 1-2. From a study of these six specimens from one locality we were led to conclude that Lampropeltis doliatus coccineus and Osceola elapsoidea were the same form, and this conclusion came independ- ently of the previous judgments of Brown, Brimley and others. Brown says, “the head plates and scales are becoming variable, specimens being found without a loreal and with the scales reduced to nineteen rows. This extreme reduction is Osceola elapsoidea B. and G., and is not common, but intermediate stages are frequent; out of some thirty specimens colored as in coccineus I have met with two without a loreal and with 19 rows. The case is peculiar. If constant, the distinction would be a generic one; on the other hand, the importance of the character involved would seem to lift it out of the ordinary category of intergradation, for we appar- ently have a subspecies being transformed under our eyes. On # Brown, A. E. A Review of the Genera and Species of American Snakes North of Mexico, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci, Phila., LIII, 1901, p. 74. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 167 the whole, it may accord best with a sound method to take no note of this form at its present stage.” C.S. Brimley says that in his experience ‘‘the normal formula is, scales in 19 rows, occasionally 17 or 21, one temporal in first row, occasionally two, and loreal usually present, but sometimes absent on one or both sides.’’** Only in his Florida specimens were the scales in 17 rows. Like these, our specimens have a greater reduction in number of scale rows than Cope’s material, the formule being 17-15-15, 17-19-15, 17-— 19-15, 17-19-17, 17-19-17, 17-19-17. This is a reduction far beyond the 21 rows of Cope’s and Brown’s descriptions and if any- thing below the better normal of Brimley. So, in this respect, our specimens incline towards Osceola elapsoidea. Furthermore, only in the specimen (No. 6,100) with this reduction carried farthest (17-15-15) do we have the loreals of both sides absent, but it is one of the largest of the six specimens. In this individual the prefrontal has descended to the level of the labial and in the forms (L. d. coccin- eus) with loreals these plates must be derived from the prefrontal. In No. 6,242 the loreal is very small and linear, while in No. 6,240 it is normal and quadrangular on one side and triangular on the other, the apex not even touching the preocular. In 3 specimens (Nos. 6,101 the smallest, 6,241, 6,249 the largest) the loreal is present on both sides and a prominent quadrangular plate from the pre- ocular to the nasal. Habits —This species is more or less of a burrower, but a glance at some of the largest specimens suggests Elaphe snakes in their compressed deep bodies with sides sharply defined from the venter by a ridge. Such elaphine snakes climb well and of such evidence in L. d. coccineus we have only the capture of a snake taken June 6, 1912. It was found on one of the frames of an old building, the snake being 34-4 feet above the ground. Food.—In food habits this species is more or less of a constrictor. It feeds on ground lizards, skinks, swifts and other snakes and insects. In the stomach of No. 6,242 we found an angleworm and the remains of two killifishes, suggesting more of any aquatic nature than usually ascribed, but after every rain Billy’s Island is covered with little water pools containing fish which as evaporation goes on become stranded. Such would be easy of capture. Our specimens yielded no clue to the oviparity or breeding of this species. ® Brimley,,C.S. Notes on the Scutellation of the Red King Snake, Ophibolus doliatus coccineus Schlegel, Jour. Elisha Mitchell Soc., XX1, No. 4, December, 1905, pp. 145-148. 168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., 9. Lampropeltis getulus getulus (Linn.): King Snake; Common King Snake; Chain Snake; Thunder Snake; Thunder and Lightning Snake; Wamper; Wampum Snake; Rattlesnake Pilot. Plate III, fig. 2; fig. 10. Thirteen specimens of this fine snake were taken and many more seen. It is common throughout the drier parts of the swamp and frequents the outskirts of the swamp as well. It keeps to the islands and none were taken in other situations than the saw palmetto or heath societies of the piney woods where it courses through the low cover after its living prey or eggs. Okefinokee swamp comes within the supposed range of L. g. getulus and is considerably east of Louis- iana where L. g. sayi is recorded. The nearest records of L. g. getulus are from Fernandina, Fla. (C. F. Batchelder), Gainesville, Fla. (J. Bell), and Nashville, Ga. (W. J. Taylor). Coloration.—Most of the specimens at hand vary from a light to a deep brown. Five are shining blackish-brown in body color, but these are among the smallest specimens of the collection. All thirteen have white or yellowish cross-bands which may be from 23-25 in number on the body proper, rarely as low as 18, and from 5-10 on the tail. Often these bands are incomplete and appear only on one side with none corresponding on the other side, and frequently in such specimens the cross-bands may be diagonal—not strict cross- bands; in many of the specimens the bifurcations on the sides are absent and the cross-band scales of the dorsum have dark body color tips which at times so blacken the scales as to interrupt the bands completely. In one specimen the band was very indistinct. These bands are normally 13-2 scales wide on the dorsum or rarely 2, rarely 3-5 scales wide on the sides where the bands bifurcate bordering a spot of body color. These lateral spots alternate with similar dorsal areas and are from 3-7 scales wide and occupy the lower 2 or 3 rows of scales as well as the ends of 3-5 gastrosteges. The dark dorsal areas are 7-10 scales wide; in some they are a beautiful shining black or deep brown; in two or three of the specimens each scale of the cephalic half of the body has a pale central spot; in three specimens with shining black body color the first four to six dark areas back of the head had patches of scales with white centres as conspicuous as the cross bands themselves (suggestive of L. g. splen- didus); finally one brown (No. 6,218) king snake has all the scales with every centre of the same intensity of color as the conspicuous cross-bands (very suggestive of L. g. sayi). The venter is of the same color as the cross-bands and is heavily blotched with black due in part to the extension of the lateral spots on the gastrosteges. All the head plates are conspicuously marked with white or yellowish 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169 spots, particularly so in No. 6,218. The three subspecies getulus, sayi and splendidus intergrade so imperceptibly and specimens from one region sometimes reveal all the supposed distinguishing characters. Dimensions and Variations.—These specimens vary from 67.6— 144.4 cm. (2 ft. 1 in—4 ft. 9 in.) and the tail from 9.1-19.3 em. (7.4— 9 in the total length); the gastrosteges are 214-223 or average 218; urosteges are 41-54 or average 49; the scales are 21-21-19 in eight of the specimens and the other formulas are 21-23-19, 22-21-19, 23-21-19 twice, 23-23-19; the oculars are 1-2; supralabials 7; infralabials 9 or 10; temporals may deviate from 2-3, the formula for ten specimens, one specimen has them 1—3, another has 2-2 and a third 2-3 on one side and 2-4 on the other; the loreal is present in all and in No. 6,218 (sayi-like specimen) there are two on the left side. The anal is entire, in No. 6,139 it is entire, but the gastrostege ahead is divided and in No. 6,140 the anal plate is divided into three parts. 6138 6142 Fig. 10.—Lampropeltis getulus getulus (Linn.) Habits —This species is one of the most strikingly marked snakes of the swamp. The shining black or brown with the contrasting white or yellow cross-bands makes its appearance very attractive. In nature, it is mild, proves an interesting and safe pet, and in no instance during our stay in the swamp did it display any tendency toward belligerency or sullenness toward any member of the party. Food.—The natives recognize its good nature and consider it harm- less, though the king of the snakes. They are aware of its usefulness as an enemy of moccasins and rattlesnakes and report several combats which always resulted successfully for the king snake, but these unlettered people, unlike many sentimental writers, do not hold that the king snake deliberately searches for the poisonous snakes in particular. We, as they, believe it the enemy of every species of snake in the swamp, preying of course more on the terres- trial species of its own haunts. All the smaller snakes sufer, and of the larger species, the blacksnake and spreading adder are the commonest prey. It is surely a good ‘‘pilot’’ to the naturalist 170 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Mar., whenever one finds it digging, for it almost invariably means other snakes, eggs or some good capture. It will seldom fail to react per schedule if you leosely hold it in one hand and a live blacksnake in the other. Almost before you can predict the outcome, the former may be far within its captor—a demonstration we have tried more than once in the field. It is especially fond of young snakes. One of our specimens had taken a newly hatched Heterodon and the natives recounted several occasions when they had found it working beneath a log for what proved a brood of young snakes. We do not doubt but that it feeds on mice, rats and other small mammals, but of such evidence we found little in the swamp. Possibly, in early spring or in the fall these are more its reliance. The principal food of this species is turtles’ eggs, with snakes or their eggs a second choice. Four of our specimens had eaten Florida cooters’ (Chrysemys floridana) eggs which they dug out of the sand and two had mud turtle (Cinosternum pennsylvanicum) eggs in their stomachs. Mr. Francis Harper tells us that he and David Lee almost stepped on a king snake. After their recovery, what should they find but a Kinosternon digging in sand probably preparatory to laying and the king snake was close at hand. In fact, so addicted are they to this egg diet, that the natives consider that it is a common happening to find the snake awaiting the egg deposition. Unless it be the Florida bear, there is no form in the swamp which eats turtles’ eggs in such quantity as the king snake. It will take a whole nest of eggs at one time, as many as 14 being found in the stomach of one snake. Breeding.—Of the breeding habits of this species we have a few scant notes. Mr. Harper reports a pair of them mating on May 19, 1912, and says another king snake was watching the pair. One of our specimens (No. 6,145), taken June 13, 1912, had 7 fair-sized eggs. Only one of the specimens had parasites, and this had two large parasitic worms 30 mm. Jong fastened to the outside of the esophagus and lying in the body cavity. 10. Cemophora coccinea Blumenbach: Scarlet Snake; ‘Coral Snake’; Red Snake. Plate III, fig. 3. One specimen of the scarlet snake was captured on Billy’s Island by one of the native boys. This appears to be one of the rarer snakes of the swamp, six of the scarlet king snakes being taken to the lone one of this species. This species extends from Maryland to Florida and westward to the Mississippi Valley. Coloration—The color of the back is a salmon-pink, brighter 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 171 anteriorly; the back and sides with 20 pairs of black half-rings, the first on the head, the 16th just back of the anus and the last two rather indistinct. The black half-rings are widest dorsally, on the sides the black rings of a pair approach each other soon to diverge again as the 4th—2d rows of scales are reached. An irregular black spot on the 1st row of scales at the lower end of each white interval sometimes unites the ends of two half-rings; bands between half- rings ivory-white with very fine dots aH over the scales. Width of each black half-ring usually two scales, but one scale wide half way down the sides; the interval usually three scales wide. The first black band narrow and extending from 1st temporal along the anterior margins of the occipital plates to the 1st temporal of the other side. First temporal may be entirely or half black. The gastrosteges almost entirely free of markings. Dimensions.—The total length is 36.4 em.; the tail 5.4 em. or { in total length; the gastrosteges 169; urosteges 19; anal entire, but a half gastrostege ahead of it; temporals 1-2; the nasal divided below nostril; supralabials 6, eye resting on the 2d and 3d supra- labials; infralabials 7; loreal point almost enters eye’s orbit on the left side, but is more remote on the right side. Breeding.—This specimen, taken June 20, had three white eggs which were very elongate and with thin membranous integument. They were, respectively, 34, 35, 35 mm. long. 11. Tropidonotus taxispilotus (Holbrook): ‘Water Moccasin"’; Pied Water Snake; Brown Water Snake; Water Rattle; Water Pilot; Aspic. Only eleven specimens of this species were taken, yet it is common along Billy’s and Minne’s Lakes, Log River and all the more open water courses. It was not far from the Okefinokee Swamp that Holbrook secured one of his two specimens for his original descrip- tion, namely, from Altamaha River. The natives were not anxious to help us in the captures of this species. Coloration.—The coloration is a light chocolate- or reddish-brown, sometimes rusty with a series of three rows of large subquadrate or rectangular spots, the dorsal row varying from 23-27 dark brown or black spots before the anus and 15-18 behind the anus, the averages being 25 and 16, respectively. Anteriorly, the spots are 3-4 scales wide and posteriorly 2-3 scales wide. In transverse width the larger spots cover 8-10 rows of scales. Alternating with the dorsal spots is a row on either side. These spots cover from the Ist tothe 10th row of scales. Normally, the lateral and dorsal spots do not touch as the descriptions assert, but in almost every specimen one or two 172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., sets, particularly in the middle of the body, are connected by a black line 1 seale wide. The venter is white or yellowish. Hol- brook’s description, ‘‘ Most of them (gastrosteges) with a black spot at either extremity and the centre dotted minutely with black,” applies to some of the younger specimens very well, and in almost all the older individuals the same coloration can be discovered, namely, two rows of squarish black blotches with a dusted lighter line down the middle of the belly. Rarely, the black obscures all semblance of pattern. The gular gastrosteges usually are without the lateral spots and the whole anterior edge is black bordered; the head is like the body in color; the lower labials have a fine dusted appearance. Dimensions and Variations.—The specimens vary in length from 63-150.5 em., all except four being over 100 cm.; in the largest specimen (130.5 em.) the tail is 30.5 em. long and the tail is con- tained in the length in the eleven specimens from 34-5} times, 4 or 43 being the normal. The gastrosteges are 130-142 or average 135; the urosteges are 62-70, the average 67, far below the 70-90 of Cope and Brown. Anal plate usually divided; in three specimens _with a half gastrostege ahead of it and in one or two a whole gastro- stege divided, otherwise this plate anterior to anal plate is entire; in No. 6,111 the anal is entire and in No. 6,224 it is also entire with a faint transverse median furrow extending halfway backward toward the anus. The scale rows are far below 31-33 rows, the combinations being 27-27-21, 28-28-22, 29-31-22, 29-29-21 twice, 29-30-23, 29-30-22, 30-30-25, 30-29-22, 30-28-23, 31-31-21 or in the middle of the body from 27-31—not 29-31 or 31-33 as dis- covered in other members of this genus. In fact, only two have 31 and only three 30 in the middle of the body. The oculars are 1-2; the supralabials 8, the eye resting on the 4th, except in rare cases when over the 4th and 5th; the infralabials 10-12; temporals 2-4 in eight instances, 2—5 in six and 2-3 in three cases. Habits.—This snake is par exccllence the snake of the open water courses in the swamp or narrow runs just wide enough for a boat. Either along Log River or Minne Lake Run one can hear a succession of pied water snakes as they drop off into the water. They may climb upon the dead branches or live shrubs which line the water courses or rest on the little islets or verdant hummocks where many an individual is hidden. Particularly does one find them in the latter situations on the hottest days, and not infrequently we have approached close enough on such days to club them. As they a 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 173 shoot into the water sometimes the pied belly reveals that it is T. taxispilotus, and not T. fasciatus or any of its subspecies. The pied water snakes are very large and in general very shy and elusive. We had been in the swamp for 25 weeks before we cap- tured our first specimens, although some of us passed them daily. At first we had to shoot them as they rested in the open on branches 2-35 feet above the water. Then their capture was not always certain, for we often lost them beeause of our caution in landing them. The natives are afraid of them, and whoever has wounded or had experiences with this species in its wild state knows they are vicious and belligerent when hard pressed. The natives call them “water moccasin” and consider them as poisonous as rattlesnakes or true moccasins. Once when one of us was bitten by a medium- sized specimen the Lees awaited the result with considerable solicitude for the supposed unfortunate. After two weeks of attempts, we were growing impatient because we had taken none of the largest individuals, and “Alligator Joe,” one of the visitors, when fishing, stunned a “‘water moccasin”? and considerately put it in the prow of his boat. We had almost reached him when the snake revived, and in the twinkling of an eye he had thrown his present into the lake with his oar. Man and live “water moccasin” in the same boat was not conceivable. And there is plenty of reason for our common respect for this large water snake, which reaches 5 or barely 6 feet. The largest specimen secured measured 43 feet. Several specimens in hand measure in girth from 7-8 inches, and we are positive we have seen individuals with a circumference of 10-12 inches. Especially is this true of the females as the embryos develop. Then the skin is so distended that ;’, to { of an inch or more separates sach of the scales. Breeding.—This species is ovoviviparous. The specimens taken in the middle of June showed the developmental stages little ad- vanced. One specimen (No. 6,113), 2 feet 10 inches long, had only 14 embryos, while another, 44 feet long and about 8 inches in cireum- ference, had 40 embryos. It is rather a significant fact that all the larger individuals taken are females. LKither the large males were too fast for us or the females are larger or occupy more exposed positions and may prove more sluggish or braver. The individuals taken from July 15-November 1, 1912, showed the embryos much farther advanced and some had unborn embryos 26 or more cm. long. One specimen (No. 6,256) had 58 embryos, 32 on the leftsside and 26 on the right side. The normal number seems to be 35-40 embryos. i74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., Food.—This animal will eat almost any animal which it finds in the water or above it, provided it can swallow or capture it. One specimen (No. 6,116) had two frogs (Rana sp.) in its stomach; another (No. 6,260) had a small warmouth (Chenobryttus gulosus) and a third had other fish remains which were not to be identi- fied. Five of the individuals had internal parasites in the stomach, or about + of all the snakes so troubled were of this species. 12. Tropidonotus fasciatus (Linn@us): ‘ Moccasin"; ‘Water Moccasin”; Southern Water Snake; Banded Water Snake. Fig. 11. Ten snakes not of 7’. taxispilotus were taken in the swamp. These are so variable in coloration and also in scutellation that we hesitate to add to the confusion which obtains in the interpretation of the fasciatus group. Many varieties, subspecies, geographical races, forms or phases have entered the literature of North American Natrices, and these are based mainly on temporal and ocular scutellation, number of scale rows and coloration. These cannot all be assigned faunistic or geographical areas and most of them are as yet likely to appear in one region if a large series be taken. The group is very variable and some of the forms designated may be variants struggling to assume a stable varietal form or geographical place. As yet, how- ever, this gamut of variation apparently appears independent. of geographical environments and is almost possible if not actually existent in one region. Therefore, the safer and more conservative course is to place them together and not take any Crategus course until more certain of our ground. Intensive localized study and possible breeding as well as extensive geographical collecting with few personal equations seem the hopeful solution of the question. Coloration.—The smallest specimen (No. 6,227) in coloration is T. rhombifera Hallowell. There are 32 dorsal diamond-shaped rhombs from the vent forward. These are formed by oblique bars which connect the upper angles of the lateral row of spots with the alternating dorsal row. The species 7’. rhombifera is considered to be a Mississippi Valley and Texan form, yet this specimen certainly accords with Cope’s and Brown’s descriptions of 7’. rhombifera and Ditmar’s figure of it. Cope held that it rarely had 25 scales, but Brown finds that more than half of his specimens were with 25 rows, and we firmly believe 23 not out of the range of this color variation. Thus, its limit clearly overlaps the supposed 23-25 range of T’. fasciatus. The specimen at hand has 23-23-18 scales. The venter has each gastrostege yellow with the border black. Posteriorly, each urostege is black-bordered, thus giving two rows of yellow spots, 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 175 and the under surface of the tail consequently looks darker than the anterior ventral region. These black-borders unite on either end of the gastrostege and thus enclose a transverse elliptical central area of yellow. Also along each end of the gastrostege opposite the lateral spot of the side the gastrostegal black border encloses another small area of yellow. Thus, we have a central row of transverse yellow gastrostegal spots and a row on either end of smaller encircled yellow spots, very much like the venter of 7. compressicaudus Kenni- cott (see description Brown, p. 34). This species is Floridan and might enter the Okefinokee. Furthermore, 7. compressicaudus walkeri has 23 rows of seales as has our specimen. Finally, our specimen (rhombifer-like on dorsum except for the neck) has on the neck four black longitudinal bands, the two of either side being connected posteriorly. The labials are yellowish with dark borders. There are no bands on the head. Many of our specimens—in fact, practically ali—have the tail quite strongly compressed at its base and heavily carinated, and an examination of supposed 7’. f. erythrogaster, T. f. transversa, T. cyclopium and T. rhombifera material from other localities does not impress us that this relative character is sufficient to set 7’. compressicaudus apart as a separate form from T. fasciatus. Hight of the ten specimens have no more than 23 scales, and always this number in the middle of the body; three having 23-23-19, two 23-23-17, one 23-23-18, one 23-23-20, and one 21-23-19. Some of these may well be 7. f. pictiventris, and were so identified in the field with only Cope’s work at hand. This form he restricts to Florida, and he has specimens from Gainesville and Palatka, not far from the Okefinokee. He considers it close to T. compressicaudus in coloration of the belly. But some of our specimens clearly have the compressicaudus-pictiventris coloration to which there is added the reddish abdominal spots of 7. fasciatus fasciatus. One specimen (No. 6,228) has no lateral or dorsal spots apparent, the belly an immaculate salmon-pink, except under the tail where a bluish-gray _ enters, and the scales strongly carinated—all characters of 7’. fasciatus erythrogaster. Some specimens show the lateral space with reddish or reddish-brown of T. fasciatus fasciatus. Some of the ten showed the yellowish labials with strong black borders and most of these individuals have the two light dots close to the suture of the occipitals. One specimen (No. 6,119) is a uniform grayish or greenish-brown on the back including the head which has no postocular band, and the belly is whitish or yellowish-white with hardly any suggeStion of gastrostegal borders (faded-out brown). Another very large speci- 176 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF ' [Mar., men with a few reddish bars evident on the sides has a yellow venter with black gastrostegal borders not strong, but on the end of each gastrostege the blue-black of the back encroaches for 4—3 of an inch and makes a striking lateral border for the yellow of the middle of the venter. Finally, we have another specimen (No. 6,231) with scales 21-25-21 and dorsum grayish-black above. The only marks evident are transverse white dorsal bands } scale wide which become less distinct as the belly is reached. The entire underparts are grayish-white with gastrostegal borders grayish-black. These bor- ders surrounding the urosteges make two rows of encircled spots on the under surface of the tail. It is, we believe, a 7. fasciatus, yet far from the ordinary coloration. Dimensions and Variations—These specimens vary in length from 28-118.7 cm., the tail from 7.9-29 cm., or 3.5-4.5, average 3.7 in the whole length; gastrosteges are from 123-133, the urosteges Ro oo ROS, ors Ti? = GER 6225 rst 6119 “ate Lh téi‘—i TTC sw OS ayia He ES Res 6225 awe re Fig. 11.—Tropidonotus fasciatus (Linn.). from 67-85; supralabials 8; infralabials 10, rarely 11, sometimes 10-11 as in two specimens or 11-12 as in one; the temporals are 1-3 in seven specimens, in one of which on both sides the first temporal has captured the normal third temporal of the second row; in No. 6,118 the temporals are 1-2; in No. 6,226, 1-2 on the undestroyed side; in No. 6,225, 1-3 on the right side and 1-2 on the left side. The oculars are 1-3 in eight specimens, but one of these (No. 6,116) has the upper and lower postoculars with a strong start towards subdivision, which if completed might give 5 oculars in all; in No. 6,119, the oculars are 1-2, and No. 6,231 on its undestroyed side has 1-2. Thus, we see in ten specimens a strong tendency for the temporal and ocular formule to-vary. The published evidence and material at hand at the present date is not sufficient to determine whether 7’. compressicaudus and its subspecies, 7’. bisectus, T. fascia- tus and its subspecies and 7’. rhombifera are other than of the T. fasciatus assemblage, and thus we would be inclined to treat them 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ELE until the group is very carefully collected, bred and studied from a large series from several of their supposed geographical habitats. Habits.—This species was not so common as the pied water snake. Like it, however, this snake is called ‘‘water moccasin” by the natives who fear it. One evening, one of us accidentally punctured his thumb on the teeth of a recently killed snake of this species. The next morning several of the native family very concernedly wished to see how bad the thumb would be. Unlike the pied water snake, it is fairly common on the water prairies and about the edges of the islets (“‘houses” or “heads’’) of the prairies. We also took this species in the water ditches on the outskirts of the swamp and along the lumber railroad ditches. We were unable to find a single snake of this species along the larger water courses where the pied water snake apparently replaces it. It seems to be more a form of the moist situations on the islands and possibly in the wooded, swampy parts. In disposition it is like other water snakes, but is a poor second to its relative, 7’. laxispilotus, in pugnacity. Food.—It feeds largely on aquatic animals. One specimen (No. 6,116), taken May 30, 1912, had two frogs of the most aquatic species of the swamp (Rana sp.) in its stomach and two (Nos. 6,231 and 6,115) had taken a southern meadow frog (Rana pipiens spheno- cephala). Only one of the ten had parasites in its stomach. 13, Storeria dekayi (Holbrook): DeKay's Snake; DeKay’s Brown Snake; Little Brown Snake; Brown Snake; Ground Snake; Spotted Snake; Spotted Adder; BrownGrassSnake. Fig. 12. Two specimens (Nos. 6,237, 6,239) were secured between July 15 and November 1, 1912, by Mr. Jackson Lee, of Billy’s Island. This form and its congener, the red-bellied snake, are commonly asso- ciated with dry grounds, but certainly at some seasons within the swamp it must find it impossible to find such a habitat, and it may be less averse to wet situations than once thought. Coloration.—Both specimens have the usual grayish-brown or ash-gray on the upper surface with the pale vertebral line bordered - by black dots. The venter is white or yellowish-white in alcohol and the row of dots near either end of the gastrostege is present. Besides these, there are finer dots widely separated over the whole belly. The neck has a black band extending from the ends of gastrosteges Nos. 3-5 across the angle of the mouth to the mid-dorsal line where it meets its fellow of the other side. In front of this bar a white band of belly color reaches across the sixth and seventh infralabials and on the sixth and seventh supralabials. The’ 3d-5th supralabials and the same infralabials are almost entirely black. 12 178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., Several of the other labials are with large black spots or margins. The dorsal head plates of body color are with a strong sprinkling of black. One specimen (No. 6,239) superficially looks almost as black as the specimen of the red-bellied species did. Dimensions and Variations.—The gastrosteges were 135 and 138, respectively; the urosteges 62 and 48. The total lengths were 24.4 em. and 29.3 em.; the tails 5.8 and 5.2 em. or 44 and 5? in the total length. There are 7 supralabials with the eye resting on the 3d and 4th; the infralabials 7; no loreal; temporals 1-2; anal plate divided, in one specimen with a half gastrostege in front of it. The oculars of No. 6,237 are 1-2 on both sides, but on the right side the ° preocular is almost divided into two, while No. 6,239 the oculars are 2-2. This character coupled with the scales 15-15-15 in both specimens raises the query whether 15 or 17 rows of scales and 2 or 1 o> eae 6237 6237 6239 cE 6238 6238 normal fig. 12.—Upper figures, Storeria dekayi (Holb.). Lower figures, S. occipito- maculata (Storer). preoculars are constant differences between S. occipitomaculata and S. dekayi as commonly held. Besides, the red-bellied specimen shows greater variation in preoculars by being 3 instead of 2. Habits—This species is nocturnal, spending the day beneath logs and stones in rocky situations as well as in meadows. Several times the authors have found it in low fields near a marshy stream. Food and Breeding—The DeKay’s snake is not wholly insectivo- rous, as one specimen had 8 gastropods (shells missing) in its stomach. One specimen had 17 small developing eggs, 14 being on the left side. Inasmuch as this was taken after July 15, this would doubtless indicate that this particular specimen of this ovoviviparous species would not have given birth to young until late summer or early fall. 14. Storeria occipitomaculata (Storer): Red-bellied Snake; Storer’s Snake; Brown Snake; Ground Snake; Storer’s Grass Snake. One specimen (No. 6,238) taken on Billy’s Island between July 15 and November 1, 1912, after our departure. This comes well within 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179 the range of the species. This small, largely nocturnal inhabitant beneath stones, logs and other cover usually averages smaller than S. dekayi, and our specimen proves smaller than the two specimens of the latter species taken in the swamp. The tail is lost, the speci- men measuring 17.9 cm. to the vent. The gastrosteges are 120; scales 15-15-15; temporals 1-2; supralabials 6; infralabials 7. Unlike most of the descriptions, the ocular formule are 3-2 for both sides, instead of the 2 preocular condition usually noted. On the right side of the head appears a small supranasal above the nostril and at the common corner of the internasal, prefrontal and two nasals. On the left side is a similar plate not touching the internasal. Other specimens from other Georgian localities (Dr. J. C. Bradley, collector) reveal no such condition, and the present specimen may have had some accident, although it is not especially apparent. The head in front of the three occipital color spots is much darker than the rest of the body; in alcohol it looks black—in fact, darker than any other specimen of the species we have ever recorded. The characteristic light spot of the fifth supralabial is, however, not wholly obscured. This specimen, like Hay’s record, had a slug in its stomach and insect remains in its rectum. 15. Haldea striatula (Linn.): Brown Snake; Worm Snake; Ground Snake; Little Striped Snake. Plate III, fig. 4. One specimen was secured on Billy’s Island. In the Central States this small snake extends from Minnesota to Texas, while in the Eastern States its range from Virginia southward has not its southern limit well determined. We can find no definite locus beyond W. J. Taylor’s (Cope, 1900, p. 1010) record for Nashville, Ga., which is 50 miles northwest of the Okefinokee Swamp. Ditmars* gives it as extending to Florida, where it might well be, but in this State Loennberg (1895, pp. 317-339) did not secure it. Coloration.—The field description of the color of this specimen is as follows: Color of the back with the skin bluish and scales brownish or opalescent; each scale with fine speckings, which sometimes assume a black edge on the cephalic end of the scale. The color of the dorsal scales extends onto the ends of the gastrosteges, fine speckings accompanying it. The gastrosteges are greenish-yellow or opalescent. A pinkish-like area occurs on the side of the head. It crosses the last lower labial, the 4th and 5th upper labials and first temporal and cephalic ends of the second row of temporals. It then fades as it crosses the middle of the oecipital platés. The 41907. The Reptile Book, p. 271. 180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., venter of this adult did not impress us as salmon-colored. The total length is 223 mm. and the tail 34 mm., or 6} times in the total length. In other specimens from other regions the short tail ranges from 53-7} in the total length. The longest specimen of this species we have seen reached 283 mm. There is no particular deviation from the normal in the scutellation of this specimen. The eye rests on the 4th supralabial and on the posterior end of the third supralabial. The ventral plates are 134, the subcaudals 37. Habits.—This specimen was found a rod from the thick, swampy cypress edge of Billy’s Island. Associated with it was one of the few salamanders found on the trip. The ground was decidedly moist, yet the vegetation was of the pine-barren type. Inasmuch as it was under the cover of a more or less disintegrated log when taken (mid-forenoon), we conclude that it is distinctly a nocturnal form. This specimen had no food within its alimentary tract, but its habitat and previous assertions regarding its food suggest that it feeds on worms, larve of insects, etc. Breeding.—It is well established that this species is ovoviviparous. Hay® (p. 397) discovered a female with 5 embryos. Strecker (p. 50)%6 has a specimen with seven embryos, and Ditmars (1907, p. 272) records that a captive “gave birth to seven young on the 20th of August.’”’ This lone female, secured June 15, 1912, has six embryos. These masses in length range from 15-18 mm.; in width from 6-7 mm. The membrane about each is practically transparent; the embryo lays in the middle of one side presenting an apparent cephalic and caudal yolk mass which actually on the opposite side proves continuous from one end to the other. In this species we discovered no parasites, external or internal, and of its enemies know nothing. 16. Thamnophis sauritus sackeni (Kennicott): Southern Ribbon Snake; Southern Riband Snake; Osten-Sacken’s Snake. Fig. 13. Ten specimens in all were taken within the swamp. Its occurrence in Okefinokee Swamp proves interesting in the light of Ruthven’s distribution map for this species. He considers it still a question whether this species goes north of the Florida-Georgia line. Of it he writes” % Hay, O. P. The Batrachians and Reptiles of the State of Indiana, pp. 409- 610, a Sd Dept. Geol. and Nat. Resources, 17th Ann’l Rept. 1891. Indianapo- lis, 1892. % Strecker, J. K.,Jr. Contributions to Texan Herpetology, Baylor Univ. Bull.,; Vol. XII, No. 1, January, 1909. a Ruthven, A.G. Variations and Genetic Relationships of the Garter Snakes, U.S. N. M. Bull., No. 61, p. 108. ie 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181 “As at present known, the range of sackeni is confined to the southern part of the coastal plain, in southern Mississippi and Florida. This physically recent feature with its low altitude (nowhere more than a few hundred feet above sea level) is characterized by scores of stagnant rivers, lakes, lagoons and swamps. The tem- perature and humidity are high and the rainfall-evaporation ratio exceeds 110 per cent. (Transeau, 1905). The vegetation is rich, and consists of such forms as white cedar, sweet bay, magnolia, tupelo gum, swamp cottonwood, cypress, Quercus texana, etc., in the swamps, and several species of pines on the higher ground. As far as I have been able to find, the form has never been recorded outside of Florida, although Ditmars (1907, p. 219) states that it is distributed in the ‘coast regions of South Carolina and Georgia; Florida generally.’ Certainly, typical sackeni may be expected to occur somewhat north of the latitude of the northern boundary of Florida, but in this general region it comes in contact with sauritus, and the status of the two forms in the intermediate region must be examined before the northern boundary of sackeni can be even approximately fixed. I must confess to have examined but few specimens from the debat- able region, but the fact that sauritus specimens from the coastal plain from North Carolina northward show a much closer affinity to sackeni than those from central Alabama would seem to indicate that true sackeni pushes farther up the Atlantic coast than in the interior, possibly into Georgia and South Carolina, as Ditmars indicates, which might also be expected in view of its more aquatic habits and its association with the coastal plain conditions through- out the greater part of its range.” Coloration.—A color description of a live specimen captured on Billy’s Lake is as follows: The venter is opalescent with an opalescent coppery brown on the ends of the gastrosteges. In water the two lower rows of scales look greenish-brassy and the lateral stripe straw-colored. The row above the lateral stripe is bordered by a line of black specks; the back seales are olive and the dorsal row, much like in color the two lowest side rows, is defined on either side by fine black specks. The dorsal row is practically absent on the caudal two-thirds of the body. Black postocular stripe over the upper labials. Three other specimens in life did not impress us as rich brown or dark as 7’. sauritus and appeared more slender. ‘ Supplementary notes of color from alcohol and formol specimens are: In some specimens, the dorsal stripe extends to a position 182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., opposite the anus; in one individual also along the tail; in most, however, it is prominent only on the neck. Nowhere does it have the color of the lateral stripes except possibly on the neck region. When the body is distended the intervals between the scales have regular light specks or lines as 7. sauritus. Rarely the lateral stripes become more or less obscure, but not wholly absent. The dorsal stripe covers the median dorsal rows and two half rows and the lateral stripe is on the 3d and one half on the 4th row of scales. Dimensions and Variations.—The specimens vary in length from 31-71.5 em. (123-28 inches). The latter length compares favorably with 7. sauritus lengths, but the specimens may average smaller than that species, though the average of the ten specimens is 48 em. (193 inches). The extreme slimness of the species adds to its diminutive appearance. The tail ranges from 11.2—23.5 em. in length or 2.9— 3.25 (average 3) times in the total length. The gastrosteges vary from 149-159, average 154, where Ruthven’s extreme begins and almost coincident with his lower extreme for 7. sauritus. In all a eID Cet oe — 6235 Fig. 13.—Thamnophis sauritus sackeni (KKenn.). the anal plate is entire. The urosteges range from 95-114, in better accord with the range of Ruthven’s T. proximus and far below his range for JT’. s. sackeni. The scale formula is 19-19-17, except in one where only 19-17-17 obtains. The oculars are 1-3 except in two instances, in one specimen (No. 6,123) they are 1-4 on both sides, in another (No. 6,235) they are 2-3 on the right side and normal on the left; the supralabials remain constantly 8 for all the specimens and the eye rests on the 4th and 5th supralabials; the infralabials are 10 except in two specimens where 11 were recorded on the right side. The temporals are usually 1-2, rarely 1-3;. if the third row be counted, it may be 2 or 3 or rarely 4 in number. All in all, the relationships of 7. proximus, sauritus and sackeni become closer as possible intergrading localities are studied, and no distinction proves so constant as the supralabial character which is not absolute. Habits.—This attractive snake is, to our minds, even more aquatic than T. sauritus, and may be found about the open water courses, on the open “prairies,” along the wooded parts of the Suwanee > 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183 River, in the moist situations of the wooded parts of the islands, if not also in the dense cypress thickets. It is beautiful and is extremely lithe of body. It frequents the edges of the little ‘‘houses”’ or islets on the prairies, coursing among the water plants like a true water snake. Of its expert swimming ability we had one fine illustration. On the widest part of Billy’s Lake we noticed a small snake several rods ahead. It was halfway across in its course. We raced to head it off, and swift and straight it did make its course. It had almost reached the other shore when one of us hit at it, only to see it dive deftly. It remained under water for a short time and soon re- appeared on its back trail. We circled slowly towards it and when near it stopped. It came immediately to the boat, apparently more from curiosity than from exhaustion. This species must be accredited with very good aquatic skill and endurance. Food.—Its food is mainly small aquatic animals. In one specimen were insect remains. Frogs seem to be a prominent food with this species. Four of the ten had eaten frogs, one having two southern meadow frogs (Rana pipiens sphenocephala) in its stomach and another had one of this same species. Another snake had captured the cricket frog (Acris gryllus) and a fourth had eaten a pine-wood’s tree frog (Hyla femoralis), all these frogs except the last suggesting an aquatic foraging ground for the species. Besides the frogs, there were indications that they occasionally eat fish and other animals of the water. Breeding.—Three specimens taken in the early part of July showed the egg development to be not far advanced. One had 5 eggs, another 8 and one 10. The number of young of this ovoviviparous snake is comparatively few and must be born in late summer or early fall. Parasites.—This species and its relative, 7. sirtalis ordinatus, were badly afflicted by internal parasites. In one specimen there were parasites in the stomach, others partly in the abdominal cavity and ' partly through the peritoneum and still others solely between the peritoneum and the skin. In another specimen these occur in the cephalic region and appear from the outside like large protuberances. They lie just beneath the skin or imbedded in the muscles. 17. Thamnophis sirtalis ordinatus (Linnwus): ‘Highland Moccasin"; Garter Snake; Com- mon Garter Snake; Grass Snake; Little Green Grass Snake; Spotted Garter Snake. The garter snake is common in the swamp, and the local name, e . . . . . . “highland moccasin,” indicates that the natives consider it more upland and terrestrial than the Natrices or Thamnophis s. sackeni. 184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF {Mar., Coloration—The specimens at hand all correspond very closely with J. sirtalis ordinatus (Linnzeus), though our use of the sub- specific name above does not commit us to full recognition of the worth of this subspecies. The lateral stripe is absent or very indis- tinct in one or two specimens. The dorsal stripe is very distinct in only one specimen (No. 6,221). In all the others it is entirely absent or indistinct. In some specimens the three rows of spots of each side show very beautifully; on the venter the snakes are bluish-gray, except for the throat and chin which are yellowish-white. There is a black spot near the end of each gastrostege. In some specimens the cephalic gastrostegal borders are black and thus connect the gastrostegal spot of either end of the gastrostege. In two specimens these spots are practically absent or obscured. One example, the largest, is melanistic in appearance and the end of each gastrostege and its gastrostegal spot is covered with the dark body color. In all the supralabials are dark edged, but the infralabials are immaculate except in two or three of the largest specimens, where there are dark edges as on the supralabials. Dimensions and Variations.—The fifteen specimens vary in length from 32.7—78.2 cm. (13-283 inches); the tail is 7-17.6 cm. or 3;%- 4+ in the total length (average 4,°;); the gastrosteges have a small range from 136-146, or average 141 (ten of the fifteen have 141 or 140); the urosteges are 66-77, or average 70. The scale rows are very constant, being 19-19-17, except in No. 6,223 where they are 19-19-15; the supralabials 7; the infralabials 10 except in one case of 11. In all the loreal is present and the oculars are consistently 1-3, except in two specimens where they are 1—4 on one side; six of the specimens have the temporals 1-2 on both sides, one specimen 1-3 on both sides, and eight specimens with the temporals 1-2 on one side and 1-3 on the other side. The anal plate is entire. Breeding.—Of this ovoviviparous snake we took only two females with embryos developing. The largest specimen (No. 6,160), taken June 26, 1912, had 25 embryos or eggs little advanced in development. Another small specimen had only 8 embryos in it. From the con- dition of these eggs, birth could not come before the middle of August or later as with our garter of the North. Food.—This form was found to be one of the most terrestrial of the snakes of the swamp, both in the places where captured and by local reputation and by examination of their food contents. One snake had eaten the small dwarf or oak toad (Bufo quercicus) and another had two of this species. In two instances, the larger southern >? 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185 toad (Bufo l. lentiginosus) proved the prey. Two others had eaten the narrow-mouthed frog (Hngystoma carolinense) and the pine- wood’s tree frog (Hyla femoralis). In two specimens many small beetles were found in the stomachs with the frogs and one had nothing but beetles. All except one of the specimens with food had Anura, and beetles seemed the second important food.of this species. Parasites—Three of these snakes were afflicted with imternal parasites. The natives call this species “highland moccasin,” because of its habitat and because of its supposed poisonous nature. Certainly, it is strange that in their crude way this observing and simple people should have associated it with Tropidonotus, as they surely do in calling it “highland moccasin,’’ in contradistinction to “water moccasin.” 18. Ancistrodon piscivorous Lacepede: ‘Moccasin’’; ‘“Green-tailed Moccasin’’; Water Moccasin; Cotton-mouth Moccasin; Cotton-mouth; Stump-tailed Moccasin. Fig. 14. The water moccasin is common in the swamp. In the three collections from the swamp we have sixteen specimens, seven taken between May 29-July 15, 1912, seven from July 15-November 1, 1912, and two taken in the fall of 1913. Coloration.—The smallest specimen taken, measuring 38.3 cm., shows a decided similarity to A. contortrix in coloration, only the body color is more brownish than the light brown or drab of the copper- head. There are thirty-two vertical bars in twos, these individual bars being one or two scales wide. In the cephalic half of the body two bars of one side alternate with two of the other side. Two bars form a diamond inclosing an area of the lighter body color. In this lighter area there is usually a small spot of color like the bars. In the caudal half of the body the two bars of one side may be opposite two of the other side and unite across the back, making a cross-band. On the tail are seven cross-bands. The caudal half of the tail, both dorsum and venter, is greenish-yellow in this small specimen. This stage of the moccasin the natives consider another species, ‘the ‘green-tailed moccasin.’”’ Opposite the intervals between two sets of bars and opposite the space inclosed by two bars there is on the end of the gastrostege a black spot 1} the width of the gastrostege. In the front half of the body the black spots of one side of the venter alternate with those of the other side. In the caudal region where the sets of bars are opposite each other as are the intervals, these gastrostegal spots also are opposite, merge and are not so conspjcuous. As the snakes get older the dark ventral blotches become less dis- tinct and the yellow or yellowish-white ground color of the venter 186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., more dominant, the cross-bands of the back almost disappear or persist last in the cephalic half of the body, also occasionally near the anus. In all (except two) of the large specimens the tail is perfectly black on the venter, and this usually extends ahead of the anus for 20-30 gastrosteges; in one large specimen (No. 6,214) the same ventral area both ahead of the anus and on the underside of the tail was merely heavily blotched with black. In the young speci- mens the labials are heavily marked with rich brown which is more or less obscure in adults. Usually the upper labials in the adults are immaculate or with few dark spots, but the infralabials retain more or less of the brownish markings of the young stage. The postocular brown band bordered below by the yellowish labial line and above by a pale streak is persistent in all. —_ SE p> ax BG): COT ERR TD 6210 6210 SAL OK IN ERRRD ocak 6129 XO SEG) anew CHAD Sige sn, en ee eee 6127 6215 Fig. 14.—Ancistrodon piscivorus Lacep. Dimensions and Variations.—These specimens vary in length from 38.3-96.7 cm., the tail 6.5-15.1 em., or usually 6 times in the total length, the range being 53-6} times; the gastrosteges are 133-144, the average 141; the urosteges 45-52, the average 48; anal entire; usually the first urostege is divided, then follows 25-30 entire individual urosteges, with the remaining caudal ones divided. The strongly keeled scale rows range from 28-25-23 to 25-25-21, in all the count being 25 around the middle of the body; usually the supralabials are 8 in number, five of the sixteen specimens, however, have variations. One has 7 on the right side and 9 on the left side, two specimens 9 and 8 and two 8 and 7; the 3d and 6th supralabials are largest; eye resting on the 3d, except in three instances where 9 supralabials occur. Then, the eye rests on the 4th, because the extralabial comes in the normal second or third area. The approach a 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187 to Toxicophis pugnax B. and G. is carried even closer in several. In No. 6,210 with 7-8 supralabials the triangular point of the second labial has been forced just above the labial border on the right side and on the left side just reaches it; in Nos. 6,213 on the left side and 6,133 on the right side it enters the labial border, while in No. 6,129 the point is just excluded from the border. The infralabials range from 10-11, the latter number predominating. Besides the inferior loreal, this species occasionally has another loreal in front of the pit, as in the copperhead, and the absence of this plate is not so constant for A. piscivorus as it might be thought. In No. 6,215 it appears on both sides cut off from supralabial No. 2; in No. 6,127 it appears on the left side; in Nos. 6,130 and 6,132 it is on the right side. Thus, in five of the sixteen this distinguishing character between A. contortrix and A. piscivorus appears in the latter. The temporals may be 2-2, 3-3, 4-4, 4-5, 5-4, 6-4, 6-5. The oculars are usually 2-3, though 2-2, 2-4, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4 and 4-3 also occur. Habits—The “moccasin” is the Crotaline snake of the swamp. It frequents the thickety edges of the cypress ponds on the islands, occurs around the wooded edges of the water stretches and where the woods of the island’s border meet the piney woods, also along the water-courses and quite generally through the swamp. On the prairies they are not so common as in the wet, woody parts. . They lie on the little hummocks above the water and slide in at one’s approach. The Okefinokee Swamp is no place for the collector who has been reared in harmless snake country where the method of capture is to step on your prey. One of the authors instinctively tried it on a supposed T. taxispilotus, and fortunately just missed one of the biggest of the sixteen moccasins captured. They are rather sluggish, yet those who know poisonous snakes handle them very carefully. In spite of the presence of so many moccasins, the children go barefoot. On the hunting trips for bear and deer the men of the Lee family frequently travel all day barefoot, and Mr. Bryant Lee has twice been bitten in the large toe by a moccasin. In such cases, usually the dogs which are ahead avoid the snake, but the hunters immediately behind step on them. In both of these injuries the patient’s leg and part of his side swelled to twice their normal proportions. He recovered from both experiences. These simple people could find no cure for it and in the second case thought some ‘Cuban relief” efficacious. We suspect the ingredignts of this nostrum to be alcohol, although we are not positive of it. The presence of such creatures as alligators, alligator snappers and 188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., moccasins do not deter the family from swimming. One day our whole camp and the male members of the Lee family took a swim at Billy’s Lake landing, and soon a moccasin swam from one hummock to another through the party’s midst and the snake was captured as well. In another instance one of the small boys came into camp with a large dead moccasin in one hand and a live spreading adder in the other. Upon inquiry we found that the boys went in bathing in a small pool 2x6 feet near their house only to find two large moccasins there before them. One they killed, the other escaped. These side lights which we would think make life precarious shows how the natives view existence in such an environment. None of our specimens is more than 63 inches in circumference, but the Lees assert that they reach 9 or 10 inches or even more. This snake is dangerous, pugnacious and ill-natured if tormented or pinned beneath a log or pushed into a corner, and care needs to be exercised after your game is supposedly dead, for the striking pro- pensity is one of the last to leave the reflexive dead reptile. As one member of the party, a hater of snakes, said, ‘After it is dead, » give it two more licks for safety’s sake.”’ Breeding—This snake is ovoviviparous Two females taken June 10 and 22, 1912, respectively, each (Nos. 6,131, 6,130) had 5 embryos not far advanced. Another taken June 12, 1912 (No. 6,127), had 10 embryos in about the same stage, and another specimen (No. 6,213) taken between July 15 and November 1, 1912, had 5 embryos, some of which were not far from hatching. Food.—The food of this species is considered to be fish, frogs and | other aquatic animals. They seek the transient pools of the islands for stranded killifishes and tadpoles. One individual had a young soft-shelled turtle (Platypeltis feror) in its stomach and others fish remains. The other individuals had each a frog (Rana sp.) in the stomach. . Parasites.—Several of the snakes had in the stomach and intes- tines parasites amgng the food and at other times the parasites alone. In fact, only the spreading adder excelled it in the number of specimens with parasites, six of the sixteen moccasins having them and these six being } of all the snakes thus afflicted. 19. Sistrurus miliarius (Linnzus): Ground Rattler; Ground Rattlesnake; Small Rattlesnake; Pigmy Rattlesnake; Southern Pigmy Rattlesnake. One specimen was taken May 31, 1912, four specimens from July 15—-November 1, 1912, by the Lees, and another September, 1913, by Prof. J. C. Bradley and Paul Battle. ‘ 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189 Coloration—In coloration they agree very well with the descrip- tions for the species, the red vertebral line being very conspicuous, as are the three rows of alternating black spots of either side. The venter is whitish with numerous black blotches and spots. Dimensions and Variations—The measurements of the six are as follows: Gastro- Total No. steges Urosteges. length. Tail. iS Se heh 143 27 39.1 em. 3.7 em. La St OC ee alge 136 36 PAT i eb 3 Os ae ee i ess 132 34 A OS Sw LS a ee el 143 sik oe eco LY ee Se ree 135 33 GY. as AS il Ls | A a ee aie 146 32 1 Sk | es Supra- Infra- No. Scales. labials. labials. Rattles. ee! 1 Ne es a 23-23-20 10-11 11-11 2 EL es 22-21-21 10-10 11-11 1 Ns ER eae 21-21-19 10-11 11-11 1 Ee ee 23-23-17 10-10 11-11 5 et AS ns 25-23-18 10-10 11-11 3 Si ee 25-23-17 10-10 11-11 5 In all the loreal between preocular and postnasal is present; the ocular ring of scales from 6-9 in number; the anal entire. Habits——This species apparently appears second in abundance of the four Crotalids recorded in the swamp, the moccasin exceeding it in abundance. It was the first form of the four to be seen and the first specimen was stepped upon and calmly picked up back of the neck by one member of the party, he not being aware that it was poisonous at all. Breeding.—Like the other poisonous Crotalids this species is ovoviviparous, but the number of young is few, usually from five to nine being the range. One 14-inch specimen (No. 6,243) taken between July 15—-November 1, 1912, has eight medium-sized embryos, -the caudal one being the smallest. Another, the largest specimen (19 inches long), taken September, 1913, has nine embryos. Food.—This species is supposed to feed on frogs and field mice. One individual had in its rectum the remains of several beetles, grasshoppers, spiders and the ribs and pieces of skin of a very small snake or lizard. Another specimen had in its stomach the hind legs and tail of the ground lizard (Lygosoma laterale), the tail jointing forward. This conforms to the rule with almost all the snakes of the Okefinokee collection. In almost every instance vertebrate 190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., food is swallowed head first. The largest specimen (No. 6,251) had the stomach full of parasites and in the intestine just back of the stomach were a few more. 20. Crotalus adamanteus Beauvais: Diamond Rattlesnake; Diamond-back Rattlesnake ; * Rattlesnake.” One specimen was taken during our stay in the swamp. On June 21, 1912, Mr. Jackson Lee secured it in the late afternoon in the Pocket. His dog had discovered it and Mr. Lee ‘‘crooned”’ (threw a chunk) it with a chunk of wood, but the rattles were broken off in the process. The specimen must have been 43-5 feet long, for the length to the anus is 115 cm. The gastrosteges are 181; anal entire; scales 29-27-21; three rows of scales between suboculars and labials; seven rows between supraoculars which are transversely ridged; loreal, one on the right side and two on the left side. Two or three other diamond-backs were killed on the west border of the swamp near Fargo while we were in the swamp. This largest of our poisonous snakes proves a serious economic factor to the inhabitants of Okefinokee Swamp. The Lees assert that in 1910 alone they lost 10-15 head of hogs killed by this species and other rattlers. In some seasons the rattlers and bears com- bined compel the Lees to go outside the swamp for new hog stock. They further contend that hogs are not wholly immune, but that the hogs will eat dead rattlers, preferring the heads. At other times they eat the heads first and later the body, or in some instances the whole snake at once. They are not so certain that the hogs are such mortal enemies of the rattlers as they are reputed to be. In some seasons the rattlers are very common; during the season of 1912 they were scarce, as the one capture shows. They occur throughout the swamp. On Minne Lake Islands they are frequent. Doubtless this is due to the infrequent visits of the swamp’s inhabitants who almost invariably record them there on their hunting trips, having counted as many as 14 on one expedition. On our last trip to the Minne Lake Islands one of the native dogs was bitten by a rattle- snake, but reached Billy’s Island two days after our arrival. It travelled two miles throughout the thickest swampy tangle of the swamp, swam Billy’s Lake and appeared with its fore leg badly swollen from the bite, but it soon recovered, as they frequently but not always do. 21. Crotalus horridus Linnzus: Banded Rattlesnake; Timber Rattlesnake; Common Rattle- snake; Rattlesnake; Cane Rattler; Cane-brake Rattler; ‘‘Siminole Rattler.” One specimen was recorded June 25, 1912, by Prof. J. C. Bradley and Mr. P. Battle on the short-cut trail to Gallberry Island. The 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 191 snake was about 5 feet long. Im the collection made by Messrs. Jackson and Lemuel Lee, July 15-November 1, 1912, we have a fine specimen. The other specimen was secured in the fall of 1913 by J. C. Bradley and Paul Battle. Coloration.—The coloration of the larger specimen (No. 6,255) is a pinkish-gray. In the cephalic end of the body there is on either side of the back and sides a series of three rows of alternate spots for a distance corresponding to four zigzag bands. The upper row of each side is separated from the one of the other side by a reddish- yellow band 3 scales wide which runs along the middle of the back for quite a distance until the chevron bands begin. Then it con- tinues along the back between the chevron spots almost to the anus. This dorsal band shows better in the small specimen (No. 6,250). Beyond the series of three rows of alternating spots on the neck region come three bands which have not the lower row of spots united with them. Then follows 18 zigzag cross-bands to the anus and 4 on the tail, which is not completely black. The first of these four does not completely encircle the tail as the subsequent ones do. In the smaller specimen there are 5 black bands on the tail, the first three not complete on the venter, and ahead of the anus there are 26 bands, six of which are not wholly united. The median point of the chevron is directed backward and the angle on the sides points forward, the latter point usually being on the 7th—9th row of scales. The black bands are 2 scales wide and the ground- color intervals 5-6 scales wide. Occasionally half black bands appear with no counterpart on the other side. The venter is lighter than the back, yet heavily speckled with the ground color of the back. These specimens well agree with the so-called cane- brake form of the South. Dimensions and Variations.—The total length of the larger speci- men is 118.7 em., the tail 14.5 em., or 8} in the total length, and with 14 rattles; anal entire; gastrosteges 178; the urosteges 22; scales 26-24-20; oculars 7; supralabials 14, the 4th the largest; infralabials 18 on the right side and 17 on the left side; two loreals. The smaller specimen is 38.5 em. long; the tail 3.3 em., or 117 in the total length; anal entire; scales 27-(23-25)-21; orbital ring 8 on one side and 7 on the other side; infralabials 14. In both specimens there are three rows of scales between the eye and the supralabials; the larger specimen has the first row of body scales smooth. ‘ The natives described to us a large rattler as large as a diamond- backed rattler and called it the “Siminole rattler,” which we pro- 192 _ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Mar., visionally identified as C. horridus, and later Prof. J. C. Bradley’s capture verified this identification in the fall of 1913. On Mixon’s Hammock, June 16, 1912, we also found beneath an old roof on the ground the cast skin of this species. EXPLANATION OF PLates I-III. PLATE XLVI, 1882, Dy 15 Ei 8, DR 2, 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 239 Head elongate, depressed, broadly convex above and more or less flattened below. Snout depressed, somewhat acuminate, length about equals greatest width, and upper profile slightly concave in front. Eye moderate, with eye socket well notched behind, general form ellipsoid, and center falls about last third in head length. Mouth anterior or slightly before middle in snout length, transverse, and jaws firm. Teeth apparently few, minute, close-set and uni- serial. Buccal disk (damaged) apparently more or less rounded? Tongue broad, depressed, scarcely free. Nostrils together within an aperture about half length of orbital aperture, to which close before in lateral profile, and hind edge of aperture slopes up gradually. es : SSS af apdeaee: Fig. 10.—Loricariichthys hauzwelli Fowler. (Type.) Internasal space slightly less than half of interorbital. Cheeks very slightly concave, and interorbital similar. Opercle large, porous. Supraoccipital process broad basally, though forms narrow point about $ basal width. Gill-openings lateral, extend forward about opposite eye center. Gill-rakers 4+8 ? short firm points, much less than filaments and latter little less than eye. Branchiostegals with outer broad. Scales, or scutes, all more or less minutely spinescent. Predorsal region with 3 scutes to occipital. Three series of scutes transversely across middle of belly, with inner series broad. Anteriorly, or on breast, scutes smaller or more numerous. Two scutes between ventrals. Anterior 2 predorsal scales each with strong keel on each 240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., side, and scales on each side with keel, which becomes obliterated after second scale along dorsal base, and posteriorly till near middle in length of caudal peduncle it forms only slight convexity on each scale. Lateral keels on each side made up of minute serra, straight in their arrangement, and graduated longer to last, which largest. Each lateral scale of belly with rather obsolete keel. Head all more or less roughened with minute asperities, though slightly more conspicuous along lower edge of snout. All fin spines and outer rays of caudal finely spinescent. Dorsal origin falls behind first third in length about an eye- diameter, spine slender and not larger than longer rays. Anal inserted well behind dorsal base, or slightly nearer snout tip than caudal base, spine scarcely larger than rays, and depressed fin extends 24 to caudal base. Caudal small, median rays short, and outer or upper and lower ones slightly enlarged. Pectoral reaches ventral, spine flexuous, longer than rays. Ventral inserted slightly before dorsal origin, spine long and flexuous, and reaches back about oppo- site middle of third scale along anal base. Vent about midway between ventral and anal origins. Color in alcohol largely uniform brownish, apparently greatly faded. Lower surface of body pale. Fins all pale, uniform, and caudal with several pale irregular cross streaks. Iris dark. Length 180 mm. (caudal tips damaged). . Type, No. 8,301, A. N.S. P. Ambyiacu River, Ecuador. John Hauxwell. This example is close to Lericariichthys maculatus (Bloch), and may ultimately be found identical. Bloch’s poor figure” does not show much detail fit for comparison, and the synonymous Loricaria amazonica Castelnau” is not much better. The snout, in both cases, is shown as more obtuse, similar to my examples of Loricariichthys typus. From Regan’s description, my specimen differs in the longer snout and the abdomen with but a single series of plates between the lateral series. The carinate anterior plates are also characteristic, as his specimens are given at 190 mm. in length, and said to have all the predorsal plates weakly carinate in the young and without distinct keels in the adult. (Named for John Hauxwell, who collected fishes in the Acniysaen River many years ago.) 21 Loricaria maculata Bloch, Naturg. Ausl. Fische, VIII, 1794, p. 73, Pl. 375, fig. 1. 2 Anim. Amer. Sud, 1855, p. 46, Pl. 23, fig. 2. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 241 Loricariichthys anus (Valenciennes). Rio Jacuhy, Brazil. One of the smallest examples, 210 mm. long, differs in having the lateral scutes 25+9, which is more in accordance with the characters distinguishing Loricaria spizrii Steindachner. In other respects it agrees with the present species. Loricaria cataphracta Linnzus. é One from Surinam, 228 mm. long (caudal tips damaged). Head width 14 in its length. Internasal region slightly elevated convexly. No lengthwise keels on interorbital and anterior occipital region. Ventral plates medianly in 3 or 4 irregular series. Lower naked surface of head extends rather well back on clavicle region. Loricaria carinata Castelnau. One from the Rio Maranon, 185 mm. long (caudal tips damaged). Head width 1} in its length. Internasal region not elevated. Two low lengthwise keels within interorbital space, approximating behind, where they continue closer as better marked supraoccipital keels. Ventral plates medianly in 4 or 5 irregular series. Naked surface of head below not extending on clavicles, which covered with many small plates. This specimen agrees with Eigenmann’s photograph. The species is apparently not previously known from the Maranon, Cope having confused it with L. cataphracta. Harttia platystoma (Ginther). Warraputa Falls, British Guiana. Sturisoma guentheri (Regan). Peru. This example agrees with Regan’s figure and account. Scutes 20+16. Sutures on predorsal shield weak, so that it appears as rather large single plate, preceded by 2 more plates to supra- occipital process. Dorsal with traces of faint spots on fin-rays. Caudal with uppermost and lowermost rays produced (tips damaged), and with several dark spots, arranged mostly as transverse bands. CYCLOPIID 45. - Cyolopium sabalo (Valenciennes). Rio Urubamba, Peru. Cyclopium chimborazoi sp. nov. Fig. 11. Head 3; depth 4; D. I, 5; A. I, 6; P. I, 10; V. I, 8; head trifle longer than wide; snout 2 in head length; eye about 12; mouth width about 3; interorbital about 5}; dorsal spine 13; anal spine 13; pectoral nearly 1; ventral 1}. ‘ Body moderately long, compressed, deepest at dorsal origin. Caudal peduncle deep, compressed. 16 242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Apr., Head depressed slightly. Snout long, depressed. Eye high, midway in head length, without distinct eyelids. Mouth broad, transverse, slightly crescentic, falls little before first third in snout length. Buccal disk broad, especially lower lip, which extends back opposite front edge of pupil, and its surface finely papillose. Lateral barbel emanates about midway in snout length, and extends back about opposite hind eye edge. Teeth moderate, most of upper simple, pointed and with slender acuminate tips. Lower teeth bifid, and lateral prong smaller, otherwise like upper. Nostrils moderate, little closer than eyes are to one another, together, and placed about first third in snout length. Interorbital slightly convex. Fig. 11.—Cyclopium chimborazoi Fowler. (Type.) Gill-opening lateral, mostly above insertion of pectoral. Enlarged rays of fins all with small denticles or spinescent, body otherwise smooth. Humeral process unarmed, smooth, extends back about midway in pectoral fin. Dorsal inserted little nearer snout tip than caudal base, spine rather flexible terminally, longest of radii, and extends back little over half way to adipose fin. Latter rather large, placed mostly behind anal. Anal base entirely before adipose fin, and origin nearly midway between last dorsal ray base and caudal base. Caudal deeply emarginate, median rays much shorter than outer, so that _hind edge lunate. Pectoral low, extends back slightly beyond dorsal base. Ventral inserted slightly before dorsal, reaches } to anal. Color in alcohol pale brownish, clouded with darker irregularly. Fins mostly pale. Iris pale slaty. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 243 Length 24 mm. Type No. 43,523, A. N.S. P. Junction of the Chanchan River and Chiguancay River, Province of Chimborazo, Ecuador. March, 1911. S. N. Rhoads. Purchased. Only the type known. Since the appearance of Regan’s work in 1904 a number of species have been described and referred to the genus Cyclopium.* Possibly the nearest approach to the present is C. cirratum (Regan)** from southwestern Columbia, which, however, would differ in having the ventrals nearly reaching the anal, the pectoral reaching to the ventral base, a smaller head, and a black bar on the caudal fin medianly. (Named for the Province of Chimborazo, in which the type was secured.) % Pellegrin, Arc Mérid. Equator., IX (2), 1912, pp. 1-15, Pl. 1. Eigenmann Indiana Univ. Studies, X, No. 8, September, 1912, pp. 13-16. 24 Arges cirratus Regan, Proc. Z. Soc. London, 1912, p. 670. 244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., COLD-BLOODED VERTEBRATES FROM FLORIDA, THE WEST INDIES, COSTA RICA, AND EASTERN BRAZIL. BY HENRY W. FOWLER. The Academy has received a number of small collections from the above countries during the past ten years, which I have recently studied. Some include interesting records or new species, and thus they are gathered together to form the present paper. I am indebted to Dr. Thomas Barbour for a review of the amphibians and reptiles listed. FLORIDA. The most important collections from this State were made during several winters, in 1904-5, 1906, and 1907, by the late George Bacon Wood, while at West Palm Beach. The marine species were all collected on the ocean front at Palm Beach. Mr. Wood sent photo- graphs or drawings of many of the larger and more abundant and ~ he also ascertained the vernacular names when possible, which are given below in quotations. Under date of March 26, 1909, Mr. Wood wrote me of an example of Trachypterus recently taken in a net in the sea. He says it measured 7 feet 2 inches in length and was 14 inches in depth. Later this example was noted in Forest and Stream, LXXII, May, 1909, p. 699, with a photograph, and doubtfully referred to as 7. gryphurus. It was not secured for the Academy. Lieutenant Hugh Willoughby made a collection at Stuart, in| Dade County, in 1908. A small collection was made at Lake Kerr, in Marion County, and along the St. Johns River, in 1909, by Mr. John Trimble. Mr. Morgan Hebard collected some amphibians in southern Florida in 1910. In 1912 and subsequently, Mr. O. F. Baynard collected some interesting material at Clearwater, in Hillsboro County. Dr. H. A. Pilsbry obtained several species there in 1904, though unless otherwise indicated, the records pertain to Mr. Baynard. During the winter of 1914 Mr. F. J. Keeley collected a few fishes at Hawks Park, in Volusia County. Scoliodon terre-nove (Richardson). Clearwater. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 245 Sphyrua zygena (Linneus). ‘‘ Hammer-head.”’ Palm Beach. Mr. Wood reports one obtained at Boca Grande Pass, thirteen feet long, which contained 35 young. Mr. Keeley also reports it and Carcharias littoralis at Hawks Park. Mr. Wood noted two other sharks, not preserved, Ginglymostoma cirratum and Galeocerdo tigrinus, at Boca Grande Pass, the first apparently not before recorded from the east coast. I may also mention that a large example of Rhineodon typus A. Smith, was taken at Knight's Key on June 1, 1912, though it has already been recorded by Dr. Gudger. I examined it while on exhibition, in August, 1913, at Atlantic City, N. J. Pristis pectinatus Latham. ‘Saw-fish." Two large examples taken at Fort Pierce, and the photograph sent by Mr. Wood. ZEtobatus narinari (Euphrasen). ‘ Stingaree."’ Mr. Wood obtained it at Boca Grande Pass and sent photographs. Lepisosteus osseus (Linnzus). I have examined numerous examples in the Philadelphia markets alleged to have been obtained in Florida. Mr. Trimble reported it from the St. Johns River, and also Amiatus calvus, from the Ocklawaha. Tarpon atlanticus (Valenciennes). Mr. Wood obtained this species at New River, Indian River and Boca Grande Pass, and Mr. Keeley reports it from about Hawks Park. During 1913, from April 25 to May 7, Mr. Herman T. Wolf made the following interesting measurements (in inches) from 21 examples, freshly killed, from Boca Grande and Captiva Pass, and the Caloosa- hatchee. 246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF : [Apr., is | |asied [Bo+ | | lg | |S Sige xg Se ena fe cian SS\S4 Fa | a j= || 2) Sol] | SIE > SB) SeQig 3-20] fh | th Cipla al Sl ela] @2|/Pooosi¢ ga > Siog|M\/ He li5p ie | 8 ee ipa | 2 Ss : | SQ) Fi |e) S/E18 Jo Scie Blige 3") gia (S| 2la! (SBlS\sl3iB] eid] Beas sisével aia S| a) & ale: i'Si8io0/%/8/8s! & le2reosi8 sxe! 3/| S Ole) Slal|si sl ela lela! Stent S te Sera ere es RIA/Al4iAimialiaiaialalaio |AlaA - ° O|}e& 11 /123/112/20'45, 5| 6:22 | 9 | 18) 5z/ 23) 144)... .| 14 56 | 283 554 12}/143/13 |20'46| 5) 6/25 | 84) 12) 7 | 3 | 15 | 103] 18 | 96 934 | 343) 624 16 |20 (13 |20'50| 5] 6/24 | 92) 24) 93) 4%) 204) 173| 2% | 187 190 | 433] 794 15 |16}12 |2046 6 622 | 9 | 2k) 93) 4 | 133) 17 | 23 | 150 149 | 39 | 78 9$/144/13 |21/48| 6| 7/21?) 9 | 2 | 9 | 34) 154] 122)....] 92 953 | 34 | 66 144/174 13 |20\50| 6 622 | 83) 2%) 8 |...| 18 | 153) 2. | 152 156 40 | 78 103/153/13 |21/49} 6) 6/28 | 9 | 2h|,..| 3§; 174) 113) 28 |...... 121 353] 77 124|15 (12 |21/48) 6] 6/23 | 83] 12) 8 |...) 153) 108)... .) 95 974 | 35 | 644 124/163|13 |20/48) 6} 6/24 | 93)...]...] 43/....] 12 | 2 | 111 116 | 36| 72 133]. ..|13 |22/48| 6) 6/25 | 9 | 23) 82). ..| 164)....] 12?) 1833 | 1385 | 38 | 75 . ..|122]. . .|21/50| 6} 6124 | 92)...) 94) 441 174) 163) 25 |...... 126 | 353] 78 10}|14 |13 21/50) 5| 6/23 | 8?|...| 6 | [4 |... 2]o" 3) ae 524 | 29 | 50 15 |. ..|21/49) 5) 6/25 | 84! 23)...)...).... 133}. . 65 683 | 343| 58} 133}... .|13 |20/48| 6] 7/24 | 82/...| 83/44) 16 | 123) 22 |...... 113 | 363] 68 167/123). ..).. 49) 6] 6123 |...| 2 |...| 34) 1541 14 | 28 | 1163 | 121 37 | 71 11418 13 2050, 6 6...)... 14) 53/ 3.|....| 103} 13 |. 52 | 283) 52 ae ee 13 |... 49) 6 7 82/...| 9 | 44]....] 15 | 28 | 150 1544 | 41 | 734 124). . 12 |21|50) 6).".|. .. A. .1. TH... | 15RT 132) 1F |. 90 | 343! 60 92 SEIS 120). 2) Bh: es) DEL GH, 2 [Fo a ivonk) weet 85% | 344) 574 13 |...|13 |2050) 6 6/24 | 94, 23) 93 43) 19 | 164) 22 | 140 1403 | 384) 76 6) 6\25 | 9 | 23; 83 162| 143] 24 | 124 37 | 74 In all these examples Mr. Wolf found the belly rounded, the tubes of the |. 1. much branched, the dorsal always inserted behind the ventrals, and but few color variations. He writes: “River fish are darker in color and may be distinguished at once: the scales are yellowish or yellow, in marked contrast to the brilliant mat-silver of the fish taken in the Gulf and passes. The color is not due to a nuptial change, more probably a muddy-water discoloration or effect of fresh water. Fishes varying greatly in weight swim in the same schools. The smallest tarpon taken in these passes weighed 26% pounds, the record largest fish 210 pounds. It is girth and condition, more than length, that controls the weight of a tarpon. The best catches are made at full and new moon, day and night fishing. From May 10 to the end of July they are most numerous in the passes. Tarpon have been observed cleaning spawning-beds, but no spawn or young have been taken. The beds are made in rivers and sheltered bays of brackish and fresh water, in the Caloosa- hatchee and Peace Rivers, etc.” 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 247 Elops saurus Linneus. ‘‘ Ten-pounder.”’ Palm Beach. Several related forms, not preserved, were found in Florida by Mr. Wood. Pomolobus pseudoharengus and Alosa sapi- dissima were both found in the St. Johns River; the last also at Palm Beach. Mr. Wood also found Albula vulpes in Biscayne Bay, and Mr. Keeley reports it at Hawks Park, although not very plentiful. Harengula humeralis (Valenciennes). Clearwater and Palm Beach. Mr. Wood also found Abramis crysoleucas in fresh ponds near the latter locality, and Hrimyzon sucetta in the St. Johns River. Dorosoma cepedianum (Le Sueur). Clearwater. Synodus fetens (Linnzus). Clearwater. Ophichthus ocellatus (Le Sueur). Petersburg, in January, 1914 (D. McCadden). Felichthys marinus (Mitchill). ‘ Sea-cat.”’ Palm Beach and in salt-water at Sea Breeze. Mr. Keeley found it and Galeichthys felis at Hawks Park. Mr. Trimble found Ameiurus catus in the St. Johns and Hsox americanus in sulphur springs near Lake Kerr. Fundulus seminolis (Girard). Lake Kerr. Lucania goodei Jordan. Lake Kerr. Jordanella florid Goode and Bean. Big Cypress in Lee County (Baynard) and sulphur wells at Hawks Park (Keeley). Gambusia holbrookii Girard. Same localities as the preceding species. Heterandria formosa Agassiz. Sulphur wells at Hawks Park. Mollienisia latipinna Le Sueur. Clearwater. Tylosurus notatus (Poey). Palm Beach and Stuart. Tylosurus marinus (Walbaum),. Tarpon Springs. 248 . PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Labidesthes sicoulus (Cope). Lake Kerr. Mugil curema Valenciennes. Palm Beach. Mugil cephalus Linneus. ‘ Mullet." Palm Beach and Stuart. Sphyrena barracuda (Walbaum). Palm Beach. Sphyrena borealis De Kay. Palm Beach. Syngnathus louisiane Ginther. Palm Beach. Hippocampus hudsonius De Kay. Useppa Island, on west coast in Lee County (H. T. Wolf). Scomberomorus oavalla (Cuvier). ‘‘ Kingfish.”’ Palm Beach, Boca Grande Pass and Stuart. Mr. Wood also found S. maculatus, Sarda sarda and Istiophorus nigricans at Palm Beach. Trichiurus lepturus Linneus. Palm Beach. Elagatis bipinnulatus (Quoy and Gaimard). Palm Beach. Caranx hippos (Linneus). Clearwater. Reported at Palm Beach, and occasional at Hawks Park. Caranx latus Agassiz. Palm Beach. Seriola lalandi also reported from the same locality by Mr. Wood. Selene vomer (Linn#us). ‘‘ Moon-fish.” Palm Beach. Trachinotus glaucus (Bloch). Palm Beach. Mr. Wood also reports 7’. falcatus at this locality. Trachinotus carolinus (Linneus). ‘‘ Pampano.”’ Palm Beach. Occasional at Hawks Park, according to Mr. Keeley. Mr. Wood found Pomatomus saltatriz at Palm Beach and Rachycentron canadus in Lake Worth. Pomoxis sparoides (Lacépéde). Clearwater. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 249 Chenobryttus gulosus (Valenciennes). Clearwater: Lepomis incisor (Valenciennes). ‘‘ Bream.” West Palm Beach, Lake Kerr and Clearwater. Mr. Keeley reports it, and the large-mouth bass from near Hawks Park. Mr. Trimble found Eupomotis holbrooki in Lake Kerr. Mioropterus salmoides (Lacépéde). West Palm Beach and Lake Kerr. Centropomus undecimalis (Bloch). ‘ Snook." Palm Beach. Epinephelus morio (Valenciennes). ° Palm Beach. Mr. Wood reported E. striatus at this locality. Promicrops guttatus (Linneus). “ Jew-fish.” Stuart and Boca Grande Pass. Mr. Keeley says it has been reported near Hawks Park. Mycteroperca microlepis (Goode and Bean). “Calico Grouper.” Palm Beach. Centropristis striatus (Linn#us). Hawks Park. Diplectrum formosum (Linnzus). Clearwater (Pilsbry, Baynard). Rypticus saponaceus (Schneider). Palm Beach. Priacanthus arenatus Valenciennes. Palm Beach. Previously only known in Florida from Key West. Lutianus griseus (Linneus). “ Mango Snapper.’ Palm Beach, Lake Worth and Hawks Park. Lutianus apodus (Walbaum). Palm Beach. Mr. Wood reported the ‘‘red snapper,” L. aya, from Captiva Pass. Lutianus analis (Cuvier). “ Mutton-fish.” Palm Beach. Lutianus synagris (Linneus). Clearwater. Hemulon macrostoma Ginther. Palm Beach. Hemulon parra (Desmarest). Palm Beach. 250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Anisotremus virginious (Linnwus). ‘ Pork-fish."’ Palm Beach. Orthopristis chrysopterus (Linnmus). Clearwater. Reported with the next two species from Hawks Park. Lagodon rhomboides (Linneus). ‘Sailor's Choice."’ Palm Beach and Clearwater. Archosargus probatocephalus (Walbaum). ‘‘Sheepshead.”’ Palm Beach and Stuart. Diplodus holbrooki (T. H. Bean). Stuart and Clearwater. Eucinostomus gula (Valenciennes). Stuart. Kyphosus sectatrix (Linnzus). Palm Beach. Upeneus maculatus (Bloch). Palm Beach. Cynoscion nebulosus (Valenciennes). “Trout.” Palm Beach. Also reported at Hawks Park. Mr. Wood secured Scienops ocellatus at Sea Breeze, and Mr. Keeley reports it, and the three following species at Hawks Park. Leiostomus xanthurus Lacépéde. ‘‘Spot.” Palm Beach. Micropogon undulatus (Linneus). ‘‘ Croaker.” Palm Beach. Menticirrhus americanus (Linneus). Palm Beach and Stuart. Pogonias cromis (Linnzus). Stuart. Harpe rufa (Linnzus). Palm Beach. Tridio radiatus (Linnzus). Stuart. Iridio bivittatus (Bloch). Palm Beach and Clearwater. Sparisoma flavescens (Schneider). Palm Beach. Pseudoscarus guacamaia (Cuvier). ‘Green Parrot.” Palm Beach. bo eb | 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Chetodipterus faber (Broussonet). Palm Beach. Hepatus bahianus (Castelnau). Palm Beach. Balistes carolinensis Gmelin. “ Trigger-fish.”’ Palm Beach and Stuart. Alutera schepfii (Walbaum). Palm Beach. Lactophrys tricornis (Linneus). Palm Beach. Lagocephalus levigatus (Linnxus). Palm Beach. Spheroides spengleri (Bloch). “ Puffer."’ Palm Beach. Pine Island in San Carlos Bay (Baynard). S. macu- latus was also reported at Palm Beach and Hawks Park. Spheroides harperi Nichols. Pine Island in San Carlos Bay. Spheroides testudineus (Linneus). Palm Beach. Mr. Wood also found Diodon hystrix at this locality. Chilomycterus schepfi (Walbaum). Palm Beach. Scorpena brasiliensis Valenciennes. Palm Beach. Scorpena plumieri Bloch. Palm Beach. Echeneis naucrates Linneus. ‘ Shark-sucker.”’ Palm Beach. Paralichthys lethostigmus Jordan and Gilbert. Stuart. Achirus lineatus (Linnmus). Palm Beach. Labrisomus nuchipinnis (Quoy and Gaimard). Palm Beach. Hypsoblennius hentz (Le Sueur). From among barnacles at Hawks Park. Ogcocephalus radiatus (Mitchill). Palm Beach. 252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Siren lacertina Linneus. A larval example, with numerous examples of Gammarus and Palemonetes from the Kissimmee River, about fifty miles below Kissimmee, by Mr. W. M. Meigs. Gastrophryne carolinense (Holbrook). Found at Homestead by Mr. Morgan Hebard. They were dis- covered under a coquina boulder. Likely the many toads Mr. Hebard saw under stones and boards at Key West in March, 1910, were also this species. Acris gryllus (Le Conte). Mr. Hebard found this species exceedingly plentiful in the prairie conditions of the everglades at Miami. Pseudacris nigritus (Le Conte). : Found under boards, in swampy places, about Miami. Hyla squirella Bosc. Atlantic Beach. Only one beaten from the prairie grasses at Miami. Hyla cinerea Daudin. Found at Atlantic Beach in the forest undergrowth, where speci- mens were taken while beating for insects. Rana sphenocephala Cope. Clearwater. Hemidactylus mabouia (Moreau de Jounés). One taken at Key West, March 14, 1910, by Mr. Hebard. It was found on the plaster wall of a building, where the light shone directly on the wall. These animals hide in crevices during the day. Though three individuals were seen, only the above was captured. Anolis principalis (Linneus). Atlantic Beach. Eumeces fasciatus (Linnzus). One found, dead, under a coquina boulder at Key West. Stilosoma extenuatum A. E. Brown. Lake Kerr. Natrix fasciatus (Linnzus). Clearwater. Opheodrys estivus (Linnzus). Palm Beach. Diadophis punctatus (Linneus). Clearwater. In life the belly was rich orange-yellow and ver- milion on lower surface of the tail. bo ou wo 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Coluber constrictor Linnzus. Palm Beach. Coluber flagellum Shaw. Clearwater. Thamnophis sackeni (Kennicott). Orange Lake in Marion County (Baynard). Heterodon platirhinos Latreille. Clearwater. Agkistrodon piscivorus (Lacépéde). Young from Lake Kerr. Adult from Orange Lake (Baynard). Sistrurus miliarius (Linneus). Two from Lake Kerr. Crotalus adamanteus Beauvais. Palm Beach. BERMUDA ISLANDS. Mr. Stewardson Brown secured a small collection of fishes in Hungry Bay during September, 1905. Another small collection was made early in 1910 by Mr. E. G. Vanatta, and during July, 1914, Mr. C.5. Abbott, Jr., secured a few fishes near Hamilton. Holocentrus adscensionis (Osbeck). Two rosy examples from Harrington Sound. Amia sellioauda (Evermann and Marsh). One secured in 1905 and presented by Miss 8. F. Streeter. Hemulon sciurus (Shaw). Hungry Bay. Diplodus argenteus (Valenciennes). Hungry Bay. Many taken. Eucinostomus harengulus Goode and Bean. Common in Hungry Bay. Abudefduf mauritii (Bloch). One from near Hamilton. Chetodon capistratus Linnmus. One from Harrington Sound. Hepatus hepatus (Linnmus). Hungry Bay. > Mapo soporator (Valenciennes). Hungry Bay. 254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Labrisomus nuchipinnis (Quoy and Gaimard). Near Hamilton. Labrisomus lentiginosus T. H. Bean. One caught on hook, like last, and in same locality. Bufo marinus (Linneus). Adult from Victoria Park and eight young from Hamilton. Eumeces longirostris (Cope). Two examples from the Ducking Stool, taken in February, 1910, and larger 125 mm. long. CUBA. Most of the material from this country was presented to the Academy during 1914 by Mr. Charles T. Ramsden, of Guantdnamo. A small collection was also received recently from Dr. J. W. Ross, made at Varadero, on the north coast. In 1904 Dr. Henry A. Pilsbry made a small collection at Sancti Spiritus. Anguilla chrisypa Rafinesque. One adult from Guantanamo. Gambusia punctata Poey. Many from Bahia Honda, about ten miles south of Havana, were obtained by Dr. P. Wiksell, in Jung, 1913. . Glaridichthys uninotatus (Poey). One female, same data as preceding. A dark blotch above the anal origin conspicuous. Girardinus metallicus Poey. Many examples of both sexes from the Arroyo Honda River at San Carlos in Guanténamo. My specimens show obscure darker vertical streaks in some cases, as in certain males and smaller females. Eleotris pisonis (Gmelin). Large example from the preceding locality. Hyla septentrionalis Boulenger. One adult from Guantdénamo. Eleutherodactylus ricordii (Duméril and Bibron). Rio Seco at San Carlos, Guantdnamo, in April, 1914. Also two from Bayate, and one from Arroyo de San Felipe, Monte Toro. Eleutherodactylus dimidiatus (Cope). San Felipe at Monte Toro and La Cueva de la Lichuzo, Guan- ténamo. April, 1913. Also one from Bayate, and said to be uncommon. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 255 Phyllobates limbatus Cope. Two examples of this rare toad were presented by Mr. Ramsden, who obtained them at Monte Libano in Guantdénamo in 1913. Gonatodes albogularis Dumril and Bibron. Four from San Carlos in Guantdnamo. Tarentola cubana Gundlach and Peters. One example of this rare species was secured July 6, 1914, by Mr. Ramsden at Puerto Escondido, Guantanamo. Anolis equestris Merrem. One from Varadero. Anolis lucius Duméril and Bibron. One from Sancti Spiritus, which agrees with Cocteau’s figure, except that the occipital plate is large and with several scales inter- posed anteriorly. The occipital plate is also colored as a large conspicuous white spot. Anolis argenteolus Cope. Two from tree trunks at Sierra del Maguey at San Carlos. Anolis sagre Duméril and Bibron. Two from Monte Libano in Guantanamo. Anolis loysiana Cocteau. One from La Victoria at Monte Toro in Guantdénamo. Anolis argillaceus Cope. One from Bayate in Guantanamo. Anolis alutaceus Cope. One from La Union near Monte Libano and another from Bayate. Anolis porcatus Gray. One from Guantdnamo in 1913. Anolis angusticeps Hallowell. Many from Guantanamo, at Bayate Cerza de Concepcioncita, La Coloura, La Colima, Mal Paso at El Palmar, Alto de La Union, and El Peru at Monte Libano. Dr. Pilsbry also obtained it at Sancti Spiritus. Leiocephalus carinatus Gray. Varadero. Leiocephalus vittatus (Hallowell). ‘ One received from the town Ceigo de Availlia, presented by Mr. E. R. Casey, and one from Sancti Spiritus. 256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Apr., Celestus sagre (Cocteau). One example of this rare species was obtained at Sancti Spiritus by Dr. Pilsbry. It is much paler than Cocteau’s plate, and -largely grayish above at present. Ameiva auberi Cocteau. Road from Guantanamo to Baracoa. Uncommon. Amphisbena cubana Peters. One from Cienfuegos, obtained by Dr. Pilsbry in April, 1904. Mr. Ramsden also sent one from San Esteban, La Demejagua in Oriente Province. He says it is found under rubbish, and to a great extent under or in the ground, and comes up in ploughing and in deep hoeing. Typhlops lumbricalis (Linnzus). Cienfuegos, San Juan di Latran and Majajua, from Dr. Pilsbry in 1904. Mr. S. H. Hamilton also secured it at Santiago de Cuba. Tropidophis melanura (Schlegel). Two from Guantdnamo, one reddish and the other dark brown. Tretanorhinus variabilis Duméril and Bibron. Varadero. Alsophis angulifer (Bibron). La Vigia hill at Trinidad, from Dr. Pilsbry. Leimadophis andree Reinhardt and Litken. Sancti Spiritus. Arrhyton vittatus (Gundlach and Peters). Sancti Spiritus. Sr. THomas Isuanp, West INDIEs. The following fishes were obtained by Mr. Henry Warrington in 1900: Gymnothorax moringua (Cuvier). Trachurops crumenophthalmus (Bloch). Vomer spixii (Swainson). z Epinephelus maculosus (Cuvier). Bathystoma rimator (Jordan and Swain). Spheroides testudineus (Linneus). : Sr. Vincent IsLtanp, West INDIEs. Mr. R. M. Abbott secured a small collection of fishes here in February of 1914. Ocypode albicans (also found by him at St. Kitts) and Remipes scutellatus were taken with the fishes. — 1915.]} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 257 Harengula macrophthalmus (Ranzani). Holocentrus adscensionis (Osbeck). Decapterus punctatus (Agassiz). Trachurops crumenophthalmus (Bloch). Caranx latus Agassiz. Upeneus maculatus (Bloch). Upeneus martinicus Valenciennes. Cryptotomus roseus Cope. Fig. 1. Head 22 to 3; depth 34 to 4; D. IX, 10; A. II, 8, 1 or II, 9, 1; scales 23 or 24 in |. |. to caudal base and 1 or 2 more on latter; 13 scales above |. 1.; 5 scales below |. 1. to anal origin; snout 2? to 4 in head; eye 33 to 52; maxillary 3% to 44; interorbital 5% to 52. The two larger examples, when fresh in alcohol were generally olivaceous above and brighter or more brilliant on sides. Just UY Sibel Fig. 1.—Cryptotomus roseus Cope. below lateral line two lengthwise parallel brick-red to deep rosy streaks, upper of which obsolete after falling of 1. 1. In similar fashion, though reversed, a similar pair of more or less yellowish lengthwise parallel streaks, lower more or less obsolete, especially behind, or broken irregularly into small ill-defined spots. Head dark above, with a reddish streak from front of eye to maxillary, and another parallel one more inferior. Postorbital region with rosy or red blotches, irregular, rather large and well spaced. Upper lip dusky-olive, lower pale or whitish. Each of teeth with me ‘dian warm brown streak or blotch. Branchiostegal region on ‘throat brilliant rosy-carmine. Obliquely parallel with pectoral base, above or inside and below outside a reddish streak fading out below. Origin 17 — Ke aE - a3 oe Ke os ze - 258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., of pectoral above with blackish spot. Dorsal reddish. Pectoral, ventral and anal mostly yellowish. Caudal olivaceous-green with faint vertical streaks. Iris reddish. Color later faded, generally brownish above, whitish below. Fins all brownish. Iris slaty. Teeth whitish. The smaller examples lack most of the brilliant colors of the adults. Length 64 to 110 mm. This brilliant species was taken in a large seine near Kingston on February 12,1914. As it is apparently rare and little known, I have given the above notes, and also a figure of the largest example. Cope originally gave a very crude figure and incomplete account of the coloration. His type has been examined and compared in the present study, and although greatly faded there is no doubt as to the identification. Cryptotomus crassiceps T. H. Bean,! from Ber- muda, is also a synonym. Sparisoma abbottisp. nov. Fig. 2. F Head 32; depth 24; D. LX, 10, 1; A. 17,9; P. 1.10; Vi ieee scales 25 in |. |. to caudal base, and 2 more on latter; 2 scales above |. 1. to spinous dorsal origin; 6 scales below |. |. to anal origin; 3 median predorsal scales; 3 median scales on breast before ventral origins; head width 2 in its length; head depth at occiput about 1; snout 22; eye 44; maxillary 4; interorbital 4; first dorsal spine 3; first dorsal ray 22; first anal ray 27; least depth of caudal peduncle 21; caudal 14; pectoral 12; ventral 14. Body moderately ovoid in general contour, compressed, deepest about opposite middle of pectoral, edges mostly rounded, though postventral with slight median keel and one on each side. Caudal peduncle compressed, about long as deep. Head compressed, deep, profiles similarly convex, and flattened sides very slightly constricted above. Snout convex over surface, slightly so in profile, and length about % its width. Eye rounded, high, close to upper profile, and hind edge midway in head length. Mouth terminal, with commissure extending about half way to front eye edge, and inclined slightly down anteriorly. Maxillary mostly concealed. Lips thin, little free. Teeth as nearly even cutting- edges, incisor-like, smaller in upper jaw, and in lower as about 4 oblique appressed series along each mandibular ramus as seen exter- nally. Upper dental area with 6 external canines placed on outer surface, all flare outward, canine-like, slightly curved, inner pair ' Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., XIX, February 26, 1906, p. 37; Field Columb. Mus. Pub., 108, Z. Ser., VII, No. 2, 1906, p. 70, fig. 9. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 259 smallest and somewhat approximated, and posterior on each side largest and flare backward. Both inner buccal folds broad. Tongue large, thick, fleshy, not free. Nostrils simple pores, slightly separated, level with upper part of eye and anterior about last fourth in snout length. Interorbital slightly convex. Preopercle ridge not very distinct, inclined little forward. Gill-opening extends forward about opposite middle of eye. Gill- rakers about 5+11, slender, fine, scarcely pungent, nearly 3 in filaments, and latter about equal eye. Pseudobranchie large as filaments. Branchiostegals slender, graduated. Isthmus convex. Scales large, cycloid, in even lengthwise series, more or less equal in size, though largest on middle of sides and breast. Ventral with Fig. 2.—Sparisoma abbotti Fowler. (Type.) free pointed axillary scaly flap, about 4 length of fin. Fins naked, except large scales covering caudal base. L. |. complete, high, mostly concurrent with dorsal profile, and falls midway along side of caudal peduncle. Scales in |. |. slightly smaller than those adjoin- ing. Tubes all more or less branched. Dorsal origin nearly at first third between snout tip and last dorsal ray base, spines all pungent, and edge of fin entire. Anal with spines small and mostly flexible, fin otherwise similar to dorsal. Caudal with hind edge rounded. Pectoral small, first rudimentary ray short and as concealed thorn, fin extending { to anal. Ventral inserted about opposite pectoral origin, fin reaching 3 to anal. * Vent close before anal. Color in alcohol generally dull olivaceous, much brighter and 260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., with mottled appearance, due to obscure whitish spots and shades of brownish, when fresh. Lower surface of head and breast with ochraceous tints. Head with dull purplish-brown tints above. A narrow bluish line extends from lower front eye edge to corner of mouth. Iris greenish-yellow. Throat or branchiostegal region brownish or sooty-black. Breast clouded with deep brownish, this shade appearing as a few scattered spots also on lower surface of head and lower sides. Dorsals, caudal and anals dusky-brown. Membrane between first and second dorsal spines dusky, and rayed dorsal largely mottled with dusky on its greater outer portion. Anal pale basally, though outer portion of fin largely blackish its whole extent. Caudal with 5 obscure vertical dark cross-streaks. Pectoral with its entire base, both inside and outside, slaty, fin slightly yellowish basally otherwise, and becomes dusky terminally. Ventral dusky in front, whitish behind. Length 113 mm. Type, No. 39,868, A. N.S. P. Kingston, St. Vincent Island, West Indies. February 12, 1914. R. M. Abbott. This species is allied, if not likely to prove identical, with Scarus radians Valenciennes, as interpreted by Jordan and Evermann. Sparisoma radians? thus differs in the presence of 4 posterior canines, its reddish-brown color, axil with little or no blue, but with a dusky blotch partly hidden by the fin, caudal nearly plain, and one or two more or less distinct whitish bars across the chin. Scaruws lacrimosus Poey is too imperfectly described to permit of positive identification, though the pectoral is without an axillary spot. Jordan notes’ a specimen sent by Poey to Cambridge, which had no dark axillary spot, the head plain, though it possessed two strong posterior canines with several smaller pointed teeth in front. At present Sparisoma abbotti has a dusky front and throat, on each side of the cheek below a whitish horizontal area which does not extend across the chin. Behind the dark area of the throat the scales on the isthmus form a pale or whitish transverse streak completely across. (Named for Mr. Richard M. Abbott, who collected the type.) Chetodipterus faber (Broussonet). Hepatus bahianus (Castelnau). Balistes vetula Linneus. 2 Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 47, II, 1898, p. 1631. Bahia, Brazil. 3 Rep. U. S. F. Com., XV, 1887 (1891), p. 678. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261 TRINIDAD. Mr. Abbott also made a small collection from this island in Febru- ary, 1914. Grapsus maculatus was obtained on the shore west of Port-of-Spain. Bithynis ensiculus and Pseudothelphusa garmani were secured in the San Juan River near San Juan. Pecilurichthys bimaculatus (Linneus). Adult from the San Juan River near San Juan. When fresh the back was olivaceous, and lower surface paler. Sides of head silvery. Iris reddish. Blackish humeral blotch horizontally ellipsoid, and in pale area. Caudal blotch blackish, large, and includes middle caudal rays. Streak of leaden along middle of side. Dorsal and pectoral like back, also anal with exception of front edge which orange, like ventrals. Caudal yellowish basally, tips grayish. Lebistes reticulatus (Peters). Many females and a few males from the San Juan River near San Juan. Also three males from the Blue Basin in Blue Basin ' Falls. These examples are very variable. Conodon nobilis (Linn#us). One secured by Mr. Warrington in 1900. ZEquidens pulcher (Gill). Adult from the St. Joseph River near St. Joseph, and a young example from the Blue Basin. Eleutherodactylus urichi (Boettger). One from near Port-of-Spain. In life the throat was brilliant lemon-yellow, though has now faded white in alcohol. Costa Rica. Dr. Philip P. Calvert placed a small collection, made in 1909, in my hands for study. It has not been presented to the Academy. I am indebted to Dr. Calvert for the favor of examining the col- ‘lection as well as for the notes pertaining to it. Several interesting crustaceans are also contained init. These are Palemon jamaicensis for the Rio Bananito, Pseudothelphusia richmondi from Quebrada Honda near Juan Vifias, and Potamocarcinus nicaraguensis from Peralta. Rivulus isthmensis Garman. Two from Laguna at Juan Vifias. ‘ Priapichthys annectens (Regan). Three from the Rio Bananito. 262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Dendrobates typographus Keferstein. Two examples, one in life a bright vermilion color and the other gray. Both taken at Philadelphia South Farm. Dendrobates tinctorius (Schneider). Holanda Farm. Agalychius helene Cope. Cartago. Dr. Calvert gives the following note: “There was an exceedingly handsome frog here, one of which we took to the hotel and kept for some days. When ‘‘asleep”’ its body, exclusive of legs, is 63 mm. (23 ins.) long. Ordinarily the upper surface of body and legs is a bright pea-green, below the body is speckled white and reddish-brown, with a band of brilliant beautiful blue on each side of the abdomen. We photographed it as we noticed great color changes. When first caught it was pale green. When we took it out of the vasculum at the hotel it was a dark dirty green with pale spots on the back. While we photographed it, it grew light again with paler spots over the back. After night-fall it was again very dark, but although it spent the night in a dark cupboard it was pale green when we first looked at it in the morning and again at 4.30 P.M. When caught it secreted a quantity of sticky mucus having a powerful and disagreeable odor, which it was difficult to remove from the hands. It was able to cling without other support than its toes on the vertical side of our glass graduate. The tips of all the toes (4 on front, 5 on hind feet) are expanded into large fleshy disks with which the frog climbs.’’ Homalocranium virgatum (Ginther). Juan Vifias. Leptodeira albofusca (Lacépéde). La Emilia. STATE OF CEARA, BRAZIL. During November of 1913, Mr. C. F. Derby made a small collection in the Rio Jaguribé at Barro Alto, in the municipality of Igatu, and about 413 kilometers due south from Fortaleza. When the fishes were captured the water in the river was a trifle salty, owing to a very light rainy season the year before. Curimatus cyprinoides (Linnzus). Two examples 137 and 152 mm. long. Prochilodus nigricans Agassiz. Two examples 135 and 129 mm. long. They show dark vertical streaks, as well as the dark lengthwise lines, like those of P. stein- 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 263 dachnert. In the earlier accounts of P. nigricans little note is taken of the color. Prof. Starks states that Madeira River specimens have the lengthwise lines and cross-bars more distinct than those from Para. Peoilurichthys bimaculatus (Linneus). Head 3 to 3}; depth 2} to 24; scales 32 to 35 in I. |. to caudal base and 2 or 3 more on latter; 7 scales above |. |., rarely 6; 7 scales below l. l., rarely 6; 12 to 15 predorsal scales; snout 3% to 4 in head; eye 2¢ to 3; maxillary 22 to 24; interorbital 2? to 3; length 45 to 58 mm. Six examples. Among my earlier material belonging to this species, the specimens from the Tocantins headwaters each have a cluster of dusky dots at base of each lateral scale, no other dots on outer portions of scales, where apparently none were ever present, and thus lengthwise series of inconspicuous spots are evident. In these the predorsal scales are interrupted on the anterior median line, though closely and irregularly approximated, several being saddled over the ridge of the posterior half. In the larger of my examples of Astyanax bartlettii the predorsal line is more or less interrupted, though in the larger the squamation is mostly destroyed. The Paramaribo A. orientalis is pale in color, and in agreement with the Ceara material, though without pigmented dots on the sides at present, and the fallen predorsal scales have left pockets showing they were probably more or less completely placed as saddles. A. lacustris shows the scales of the predorsal closely approximated, though only those of the posterior half formed saddles. A. jacuhiensis shows the pre- dorsal scales with a nearly complete naked strip in front and without the dark pigment dots, or only very faint sparse ones, at the bases of the scale exposures. The body is also much deeper. Prof. Starks mentions that Lake Extremos, Lake Papary and Ceara Mirim examples have fewer anal rays (25-27), while in the Para material they were more numerous (31-32).4 Of the first he says: ‘‘These are perhaps referable to Astyanaxr bimaculatus nove EKigenmann, though the lateral band is not so definite as in the picture of the original specimen.”’ A. bimaculatus nove | have been unable to find noticed elsewhere. Finally I have deseribed A. rupununi® from British Guiana, which in no way differs from Ceard4 material. It shows the predorsal scales nearly completely forming saddles over the,median ‘Stanford Univ. Publ. (Fishes Stanford Exp. Brazil), March 17, 19134, p. 16. * Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1914, p. 242, fig. 6. 264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., line, thus allowing for the error of its inclusion in Astyanaz, though as a synonym of P. bimaculatus it must be suppressed. Serrasalmus rhombeus (Linneus). One 112 mm. long from Barro Alto. The back, above the lateral line is marked with rather numerous, and in most cases more or less dark brownish or dusky vertical spots. Pygocentrus piraya (Cuvier). Two examples, 160 and 214 mm. In the smaller specimen the spots are larger, more distinct, and more sparse, also pale, and on basal region of tail larger. Pimelodella gracile (Valenciennes). One 172 mm. long. Maxillary barbel reaches anal origin. Outer mental barbel extends only for first fifth in depressed pectoral spine. Adipose fin 22 in combined head and length. Plecostomus jaguribensis sp. nov. Fig. 3. Head, measured to hind edge of occipital process, 3; depth 42; D. 1,7; A. 1,4; P. 1,5; V.I, 5; lateral scutes from pectoral axilla 25 to comital Bade and 2 more on latter; 5 scutes between dorsal base and that of anal; 3 predorsal scutes; head width equals its length, when measured from occipital process medianly behind; head depth at occiput 12; snout 12; eye 64; mouth width 33, mandibular ramus 63; interorbital 24; adipose fin 27; pectoral spine nearly 1; least depth of caudal peduncle 3}; ventral spine 14. Body elongate, moderately depressed with convex surface above and lower surface flattened, anterior profile well convex, and greatest depth at dorsal origin. Caudal peduncle well compressed, and length little less than least depth. Head large, moderately depressed, lower surface dattenedt with sides sloping up for about 4 greatest width of head, leaving wide and broadly.triangular abetted region, as seen in vertical section. Snout wide, outline broadly triangular as seen from above, and its length 2 its greatest width opposite front edges of eyes. Eye rounded, well elevated or close to upper profile and center falls about 2 in head length as measured to occipital process. Pupil small, appar- ently vertical ellipsoid. Mouth moderately wide, anterior below. Buccal disk orbicular, its transverse diameter 14 in snout length, edges entire, and surface of lower portion outside with numerous papille, of which innermost larger or better developed. Inside jaws apparently more or less smooth. Inside upper jaw large fleshy median papilla. Teeth slender, uniserial, long, bent over 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265 at ends, bifid, 44 in upper jaw and 47 in lower jaw, one of bifurcations always shorter and smaller than other. Inner buccal folds rather wide. Tongue broad and fleshy. Each lateral corner of buccal disk with slender barbel about equal to eye in length. Nostrils large, together, dividing frenum falls little before last fourth in snout length, socket much less than that of eye, and both fall within confines of internasal space. Anterior nostril simple pore with Fig. 3.—Plecostomus jaguribensis Fowler. (Type.) cutaneous flap behind forming valve completely covering slightly larger posterior nostril. Interorbital rather wide, double concave, due to slightly elevated supraoccipital median ridge and each supra- orbital also being little elevated. Hind edge of occipital ridge broadly triangular. Opercle large, moderately porous. : Gill-opening small, lateral, oblique, and extends forward about opposite first third in eye. Isthmus broad, about 1,;'5 in snout. 266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Body everywhere minutely spinulose. Scutes on back slightly carinate, and lateral series obsoletely so anteriorly. None of scutes carinate below adipose fin. Six scutes between dorsal and adipose fin. Occipital process bordered only by median scute behind. Edge of gill-opening bordered with slightly enlarged spinules. Lower surface of head and abdomen covered with small granular scales, all densely and minutely spinulose. Fin spines all spinulose, those on outer edges of pectoral and ventral larger and form rather regular rows more pronounced terminally. Outer surfaces of fin rays minutely spinulose. L. |. evident as simple small pores extending back, one in each suture, between scutes forming series from median hind edge of opercle. Dorsal origin nearly midway between snout tip and origin of adipose fin, and depressed spine (damaged) apparently moderate. Adipose fin with strongly compressed large bent spine, 13 to caudal base, and inserted little behind last third in space between dorsal origin and caudal base. Anal inserted slightly before hind edge of dorsal base, or about midway between pectoral axil and caudal base, depressed fin extending 2% to latter. Caudal moderate (damaged), well emarginate behind ? and lower lobe longer. Pec- toral spine large, compressed, reaches about 1? to anal origin. Ven- tral inserted close behind dorsal spine base, spine long, tapers to rather flexible point which extends back opposite hind anal ray base. Vent at last fifth in space between ventral and anal origins. Color in aleohol brown above, paler or more or less whitish below, faded with creamy tints. Iris slaty, pupil darker. Head above rather finely spotted with pale dusky, spots closer, smaller and more numerous on muzzle, interorbital and cheek. Back and costal region marked with similar colored, though larger, spots and seldom more than one on a scute. Belly and lower surfaces of trunk with similar, though much more obscure, spots, mostly of very dull brown in tint. Fins all dull or pale-brownish, and all spotted with darker. Dorsal with large dusky spots on membranes, usually a single row which may occasionally be slightly irregular on each. On front edge of dorsal spine series of small inconspicuous pale dusky spots. Caudal with median hind portion dusky, and with several obsolete transverse streaks. Membranes of pectoral and ventral with spots similar to those on dorsal, only smaller. Anal membranes with several dusky dots, also adipose fin. Length 116 mm. (caudal tips damaged). Type, No. 39,930, A.N.S.P. Rio Jaguribé at Barro Alto, Brazil. November, 1913. Mr. C. F. Derby. 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 267 Also No. 39,931, A. N.S. P., paratype, same data. Head 3; depth 4+; D. 1,7; A. I, 4; lateral scutes 26 to caudal base and 2 more on latter; snout 13 in head; eye 52; mouth width 3; interorbital 22; length 103 mm. Related to P. auroguttatus (Kner). In that species the dorsal spots are larger and ill-defined and the space between the ventrals is mostly granular. Kner’s figure shows the granules sparsely irregular on the breast, whereas in the present species they are mostly uniform. Other allied species, which agree in having the occipital bordered by a single nuchal scute, are P. wuchereri Giinther and P. une Steindachner. The former has two series of spots on each dorsal membrane and the region between the ventrals is naked or with but few granules. In the latter species the scutes on the belly are reduced to a minimum. P. lexi R. Von Ihering, P. variipictus R. Von Ihering and P. ancistroides R. Von Ihering all differ in coloration. (Named for the Rio Jaguribé.) Lorieariichthys derbyi sp. nov. Fig. 4. Head, measured to hind edge of gill-opening 5}; depth 9}; D. I, 7; A. I, 5; P. I, 6; V. I, 5; seales 31 in lateral series to caudal base, lateral keels united or approximated after 19 scales; 22 scales behind dorsal; -3 predorsal scales; head width 1,'; in its length: head depth at occiput 2}; snout 13; eye 5; mouth width 4; inter- orbital 33; dorsal spine 1}; anal spine 1}; pectoral spine 14; ven- tral spine 12. Body slender in profile, deepest at dorsal origin, and well depressed. Caudal peduncle well depressed, long, and surfaces similarly widely convex above and below. Head moderately long, depressed, broadly convex above and more or less flattened below. Snout convex over surface, profile also very slightly convex, and length about } greatest width opposite front of eyes. Eye moderate, with eye-socket well notched behind, general form ellipsoid, and center falls about last third in head length. Mouth anterior or slightly before middle in snout length, transverse, and jaws firm. Inner edge of each mandibular ramus with 5 fine, slender teeth, close-set and uniserial. Upper jaw with 10 similar smaller, inconspicuous teeth. Buccal disk elongate, hind edge and outer surface of lower lip entire, though front edge of disk laterally and before each barbel fringed. Lateral barlsel short, about } in eye. Tongue broad, fleshy, apparently not free. Nostrils together, within an aperture, but slightly less than eye length, also 268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., extend well into front interorbital region. Internasal space 2¢ in interorbital. Cheeks level or very slightly convex. Interorbital mostly flattened medianly, and as supraorbital ridges slightly elevated of somewhat concave appearance. Opercle large, rather porous. Supraoccipital wide, completely divides truly first predorsal scale. Gill-openings lateral, extend forward about opposite hind edge of eye. Gill-rakers about 3+8 short, firm points, about + length of gill-filaments, and latter about 2 in eye. Isthmus broad. Bran- chiostegals broad. Seales or scutes, all more or less minutely spinescent. Scutes on belly in rather irregular rows, anteriorly 5, antero-medianly 3, laa 70ers. Fig. 4.—Loricariichthys derbyi Fowler. (Type.) postero-medianly 2, and posteriorly 1. Single preanal scute. Lat- eral keels on each side made up of a series of minute denticles, straight in their arrangement, and graduated longer to last, which largest. Lateral belly scales with scarcely obsolete keels. Head all more or less roughened with minute asperities, though slightly larger along lower edge of snout. All fin spines and outer surfaces of fin rays finely spinescent. Dorsal origin at first third in length between snout tip and caudal base, spine slender, and shorter than longest rays when depressed. Anal inserted well behind dorsal base or nearer snout tip than caudal base, and spine shorter than longest depressed rays, fin extending 33 to caudal base. Caudal small, median rays short, and 1915.! NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 269 outer or upper and lower enlarged, especially former, which con- spicuously compressed and osseous. Pectoral reaches ventral, spine rather flexuous at tip, equals longest rays. Ventral inserted slightly before dorsal origin, spine long and flexuous, and extends back slightly beyond front of anal. Vent slightly nearer ventral than anal origin. ’ Color in alcohol dull brownish above, mottled obscurely with dark towards upper lateral regions. Lower surface of body immacu- late whitish. Fins pale brownish, rays and spines all rather finely spotted dusky. Several dusky spots along side of head. Iris slaty. Length 175 mm. (caudal tip damaged). Type, No. 39,932, A.N.S.P. Rio Jaguribé at Barro Alto, Brazil. November, 1913. Mr. C. F. Derby. Also No. 39,933, A. N. S. P., paratype same data. Head 5}; depth 9; D. I, 7; A. I, 5; scales 31 to caudal base and 1 more on latter; scales approximated after first 19; snout 13 in head; eye 44; mouth width 4; interorbital 32; length 150 mm. (caudal tip damaged). This species appears to be related to Loricaria spixit Steindachner, which differs in having the lateral keels approximated after the twenty-third scale, fewer scales in transverse series across the belly, and in the nasal sockets not extending into the anterior interorbital region. From most all other species L. derbyi differs in the en- larged uppermost caudal ray. (Named for Mr. C. F. Derby.) Lebistes reticulatus (Peters). : Three examples 15 to 30 mm. They all show a blackish ocellus on side of back just before dorsal fin. The largest example also has about a dozen vertical streaks made up of the darker olive ground-color and a dusky streak transversely over dorsal near base. These examples were obtained near the coast. Tropidurus torquatus (Wied). One example, 187 mm. 270 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., A FURTHER CONTRIBUTION TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE ORTHOPTERA OF ARGENTINA. BY JAMES A. G. REHN. In these ProcrEpINGS there recently appeared a paper by the present author entitled, ‘‘A Contribution to the Knowledge of the Orthoptera of Argentina.’’! This study was based wholly on material collected by Mr. P. Jorgensen, of Buenos Aires, and submitted to us for study by that gentleman and Mr. Esben Petersen, of Silkeborg, Denmark. Since the appearance of the above-mentioned paper, several additional collections from Argentina, made almost wholly. by Mr. Jorgensen, have been received from the same persons and, in addition, a small but very interesting series from Mr. Carlos Lizer, of Buenos Aires. The combined material represents quite a few localities supple- mentary to those given in the previous paper, while thirty-eight — species are additional to the one hundred and sixty-two there discussed. SF) The total number of species here treated is one hundred and four- teen, of which nineteen are now recorded from Argentina for the first time, while three species are new to science. The number of specimens in the present series is four hundred and fifty-eight. In the tabulation given on page 275 of our previous paper, there can be added to the forty-nine species known in Argentina only from the Misiones Territory, ten of the eighteen here first recorded from Argentina. This is directly in line with the previously indicated evidence of the richness and Brazilian affinity of the Misiones region. The forms here first recorded from Argentina are indicated by an asterisk preceding the specific name. The types of the new species and an adequate representation of the other forms in the collection have been retained for the Academy series. We wish to thank Messrs. Jorgensen, Lizer and Petersen for their interest and courtesy in submitting the present material to us for study. 1 These Proceedings, 1913, pp. 273-379. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 271 DERMAPTERA. Family LABIDURIDZ. Labidura xanthopus (Stal). La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One male. This individual is identical with, though very slightly smaller than, the specimen from Puerto Bertoni, Paraguay, recorded by us as Demogorgon batesi.2 Burr? now considers the genera Labidura and Demogorgon to be inseparable and synonymizes batesi of Kirby under the older name xanthopus, which action, as far as we can determine from our material and the literature, is correct. StAl described the species from Rio Janeiro and Buenos Aires, while Borelli has recorded it from Salta, province of Salta, Argentina. Family LABIIDA. Labia minor (Linneus). Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One male. The only previous Argentine record for this widespread species is from Concordia (Borelli, Bollet. Mus. Zool. Anat. Comp. Torino, XVII, No. 418, p. 6). Family FORFICULIDZ&. Doru lineare (Eschsch.). Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Two males, four females. ORTHOPTERA (s. s.). Family BLATTIDZ, Subfamily PSEUDOMOPIN®. Pseudomops neglecta Shelford. Misiones. January 1, 1911, March 31, 1909, December 10, 1909. (Jorgensen.) Three males, one female. Florincia, Rio Tapenaga, Province of Santa Fé. Two females. Alto Pencosa, Province of San Luis. December 20-22, 1908. (Jorgensen; from composite Ximenedia microptera.) Five males. In none of the above-listed males is there any trace of the pale antennal annulus referred to by Shelford and Rehn as occurring in the female. The single female here listed lacks the greater portion of the antenne. The latter specimen has the tegmina quite piceous, with only the marginal field and the edging of the region of the costal A ?Entom. News, XXII, p. 247. * Trans. Entom, Soc. London, 1910, p. 185. 272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [|Apr., veins straw colored, although the coloration of the pronotal disk and of the limbs is normal. The Alto Pencosa and Florincia speci- mens have the region of the costal veins of the tegmina almost as yellowish as the pronotal margin. The range of the species is extended considerably westward by the Alto Pencosa record. Ischnoptera rufa Brunner. Misiones. December 8, 1909. (Jorgensen.) One male. Ischnoptera vilis Saussure. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One male. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One male, one female. Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. The above males have been compared with Paraguayan specimens of the same sex. The Buenos Aires individual has the interocular portion of the occiput quite rufescent, a condition not found in any of the other specimens examined. The female, which sex was previously unknown, has abbreviate lateral non-attingent sublanceo- late tegmina, much as in the North American I. johnsoni, from which it can be readily separated by the slenderer build, relatively larger and broader head, more transverse pronotum, more tapering tegmina and shorter, more robust cerci. The measurements of the female are as follows: length of body, 14.8 mm.; length of pronotum, 4.2; ereatest width of pronotum, 5.5; length of tegmen, 3.6. The only previous record of the species from Argentina is that from Corrientes by Saussure. Ischnoptera marginata Brunner.‘ Misiones. January, 1911, December, 1910, December 1 and 20, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Two males, four females. Ischnoptera brasiliensis Brunner. Misiones. January 5 and 29, 1910, December, 1909. (Jorgen- sen.) Three males. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) Two males. Mendoza, Prov. of Mendoza. (A. C. J. Haarup.) 1904-1905, November 20, 1906. Two males. The La Cumbre and Mendoza records are the most southern for the species. ‘Very probably Blatta fusca Saussure (Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, (2), XXI, p. 110 (1869)—“ Ager Argentinus,” later given with exactness as Corrientes) is a synonym of this species. Shelford places it in Blattella, but the description and measurements agree very completely with Brunner’s marginata, which has four years’ priority. = al form, the anal sulcus reaching the sutural 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ; 273 Blattella germanica (Linnzus). Misiones. July 30, 1909. (Jorgensen.) One male. Mendoza, Prov. of Mendoza. (A. C. J. Haarup.) One male. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One male, one female. *Blattella conspersa Brunner. Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. This specimen fully agrees with the original description of the species, previously known only from Brazil and Sapucay, Paraguay. Ceratinoptera puerilis new species. Type: o&; Misiones, Argentina. July 30, 1909. (P. Jorgensen.) [Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., type no. 5230.] In general form this species is apparently closest to C. otomia (Saussure)® from Mexico, from which, however, it differs in the larger size, the more extensive tegmina, which reach to the base of the fifth abdominal segment, the more rounded distal margin of the tegmina, the emarginate supra-anal plate and the different coloration. Size medium; form subovoid; surface polished. Head with only the outline of the occiput visible cephalad of the pronotum; eyes separated by nearly twice their width; antenne in length exceeding the body. Pronotum transverse; cephalic and lateral margins regularly arcuate, very faintly flattened dorsad of the head, caudal margin arcuato-truncate. Tegmina slightly more than one and one-half times as long as the pronotum, reaching to the base of the fifth abdominal segment, broad, the greatest width subequal to the length of the pronotum and contained one and one-half times in the tegminal length; costal margin very gently arcuate, strongly rounding distad to the broadly rounded distal margin, sutural margin nearly straight; marginal field broad and short, anal field subpyri- margin nearly two-thirds the length of the latter from the base; venation distinct, discoidal vein with six rami toward the costal and = disto-costal margin. Wings minute. Abdomen from near the base Fig. 1.—Ceralinoptera " : x 8 “a a. : puerilis news eCIES, narrowing in width distad; supra-anal plate Dorsal outline of type. transverse, moderately produced mesad, (Xx 3.) 5 Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, (2), XX, p. 98 (1868). 18 274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., arcuato-emarginate laterad, distinctly but shallowly V-emarginate mesad; cerci damaged; subgenital plate transverse, emarginato- truncate mesad, provided laterad with articulate styles of moderate length. Cephalic femora with the ventro-cephalic margin having four median and three distal spines, between which groups the margin is provided with a number of spinulations. Median and caudal femora well spined ventrad; caudal metatarsi subequal to the remainder of the tarsal joints in length. All of the tarsi with distinct arolia between the claws. General color of head, disk of pronotum, of greater portion of tegmina when in repose position over the thoracic segments, cox and of limbs raw sienna, the lateral portions,of pronotum and marginal! field of tegmina subhyaline. Dorsum of abdomen largely blackish mesad, the lateral portions of the segments increasingly of the general color distad; ventral surface of the abdomen mesad of the general color, broadly bordered laterad with blackish, very narrowly edged with the pale color, subgenital plate quite solidly and contrast- ingly blackish. Head with the eyes blackish brown; face marked with bone brown as follows: a clouded bar between the eyes, ventrad of this between the ocelli traces of another weaker one, between the antennz arcuate line of six spots with another spot ventrad of each antennal scrobe and on each side a single similar one ventrad of this line; palpi tipped with bone brown; antenne of the general color becoming darker distad. Pronotal disk with six pairs of points and a pair of small clouds of bone brown. Limbs marked with bone brown at the insertion of the spines and at the distal extremity of most of the tarsal joints. Measurements. TRH OI se se schon tins mcs endnal sneer hge anos EE Léngth of promonum o_o. ccc cic sdaittiopenssglempenas R Sees PG Bs Greatest width of pronotum Byes i oyiactssecdlvhidg lend tar ep ba LgriStls OF Meg isis rman adden dint dieascwsstbn de taieafon oon” a Greatest width of tegmen.. ee Le RE Te ee cw ee 5) The type of this species is unique. Subfamily NYCTIBORIN/E. *Nyctibora glabra Giglio-Tos. Alto Pencosa, Prov. of San Luis. Elev. 660 meters. December 22, 1908. (Jorgensen.) One male. This species was described from Caiza and San Francisco, Bolivian Chaco,® and is here recorded from Argentina for the first time. The 6 Bo'l. Mus. Zool. Anat. Comp. Torino, XII, No. 302, p. 9 (1897). “am 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 275 specimen fully agrees with the original description and bears a great superficial resemblance to species of Periplaneta. Subfamily EPILAMPRIN&®. Epilampra stigmatiphora Rehn. Misiones. January 1, 1911, February 14, 1911, November, 1910, December, 1909, 1910 and 1911. (Jorgensen.) Ten males. These specimens are almost all darker than the type, several with the markings considerably darker. Epilampra verticalis Burmeister. Misiones. December, 1909 and 1910. (Jorgensen.) Two males. Both of these specimens have the subgenital plate strongly asym- metrical and, in similar fashion, a projection extending toward the right side. Subfamily BLATTIN®. Blatta orientalis Linnzus. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One male. Subfamily PANCHLORIN AE. Panchlora thalassina Saussure and Zehntner. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One female. Misiones. January 3, 1910 (at light), November 16, 1909. Two females. The Buenos Aires record is the most southern known for the species. *Panchlora exoleta Burmeister. Misiones. January 3, 1910, November, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One male, one female. This is the first Argentine record of this widely distributed species, which previously had been recorded from localities extending from Mexico to Brazil. Subfamily BLABERIN®. Monastria biguttata (Thunberg). Misiones. May 20 and 23, 1909. (Jorgensen.) One male, two nymphs. Blaptica dubia (Serville). Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) Two males, one female, one nymph. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One nymph. ‘ Specimens have also been examined from Cruz del Eje, Prov. of Cordoba; Cordoba, Prov. of Cordoba; Carcarafia, Prov. of Santa Fe and Rosario. 276 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Subfamily CORYDIIN &. Melestora fulvella Rehn. Misiones. January 1, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Two males. Latindia argentina new species, Type: o; Misiones, Argentina. January 14, 1910. (P. Jorgen- sen.) [Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., type no. 5231.] Apparently closer to L. pusilla Saussure and Zehntner (Biol. Cent.-Amer., Orth., I, p. 112) from Tarma, Peru, than to any other ~ member of the genus, agreeing in having the ulnar vein similarly ramose toward the costal margin, but differing in the pronotum being more transverse elliptical with no truncation to the caudal margin, in the-more numerous costal veins Fig. 2.—Latindia to the tegmina, in the subreniform shape of the Reet tonal anal field of the same and in the non-annulate outline of prono- antenne. eee EX Re: Size small; form elongate elliptical; texture of surface coriaceous, largely short pilose. Head with entire width of vertex visible cephalad of pronotum, the outline of occiput subtrunecate; eyes large, interspace between them slightly greater than the depth of a single eye; antenne moniliform. Pro- notum transverse elliptical, the greatest length contained about one and three-eighth times in the greatest width; cephalic margin subtruncate, caudal margin gently arcuate, not at all truncate; a distinct medio-longitudinal sulcus present on almost the entire disk, the latter subimpressed and defined caudad by a subrectangulate indentation, the surface of the disk with about four pairs of oblique, very low strumose ridges; lateral portions of the pronotum sub- deflected, the margins there distinctly cingulate. Tegmina elongate, surpassing the apex of the abdomen by more than a third of their length, their greatest width (at distal third) contained nearly three times in their greatest length; costal margin very gently arcuate, distal margin rather narrowly rounded, sutural margin nearly straight; costal veins about fifteen in number, ulnar vein sending three rami toward the costal and distal margins, anal field abbre- viate, occupying less than a third of the tegminal length, anal sulcus arcuate, oblique adventitious vein and impressed sulcus decided. Wings reach- Fig. 3.—Latindia . - . P argentina new ing to the tips of the tegmina. Subgenital plate species. Outline broad, ample, with short lateral styles; cerci of left pag of elongate, articulate. Oe eae 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA 277 General color bone brown, the limbs paling to fawn color. Pro- notum with the lateral portions sayal brown. Antenne of the general color, non-annulate; eyes blackish. Measurements. - NEE RETRO gn cncdnn ha ee. Nasoatork 5.8 mm. Th WO MINOR a I hn Ms cpt asec tke doch sctgeors lich Lee rss Greatest: widths Of promenade hssniescsinssctersscteonneeteaorine moet f.. DON DG OS pat eS Coe ke ee ee i Greatest width of tegmen................ 0 rae et eet: Ro The type is unique. Subfamily OXYHALOIN®. Chorisoneura minuta Saussure. Misiones. 1909. (Jorgensen.) One male. This and Saussure’s record of a specimen from Corrientes are the only ones with exact locality known for the species, which was originally described from the Pampas. Family MANTIDZ. Subfamily ORTHODERINE. Mantoida burmeisteri (Giebel). Rio Salado, Prov. of Buenos Aires. Two males. These specimens fully agree with the individuals from the Misiones previously examined by us, except that the coloration is somewhat darker. The present record considerably extends the range of the species, previously known only from Nova Friburgo, state of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, and the Misiones territory of Argentina. *Mantoida tenuis (Perty). Mendoza, Prov. of Mendoza. January 17, 1905. (Haarup.) Three males. This species was previously known only from Brazil. Orthoderella ornata Giglio-Tos. Jujuy, Prov. of Jujuy. December, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. This individual is the second male and third specimen known of this remarkable genus and species. Originally described in 1897 from the female sex, taken at Caiza in the Bolivian Chaco, the next record of its capture was made by Chopard,’ who first described the male sex from a specimen taken at Santiago del Estero, Argentina, in 7 Bull. Soc. Entom. France, 1911, pp. 141-143, figs. 1, 2. 278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Apr., January. The present individual fully agrees with Chopard’s description and figure, except that our specimen is of a brownish instead of greenish phase of coloration. Subfamily MANTINZE. Brunneria brasiliensis Saussure. Misiones. February, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Three males. Mendoza, Prov. of Mendoza. (Haarup.) One male, one female. The Mendoza male is somewhat smaller than the Misiones individ- ual of that sex, but otherwise inseparable. Two of the Misiones males are of a brownish phase of coloration, while the other specimens are greenish. Mendoza is the most southern locality from which the species is known. Coptopteryx argentina (Burmeister). Misiones. January, February, 1911; February 4, 1910, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Eleven males. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One female. These specimens vary considerably in size. The individual from Buenos Aires is the smallest female of the species we have seen, its measurements being: length of body, 52.5 mm.; length of pronotum, 17; greatest width of pronotum, 5.5; length of tegmen, 9; length of cephalic femur, 14.1; length of caudal femur, 16.8. The form of the pronotum in several is similar to or strongly approaches that of the Cordillera de Mendoza individual previously mentioned by us.’ In all of the present series the proximal portion of the marginal field of the tegmina is opaque rufous. Coptopteryx gayi (Blanchard). Mendoza. (Haarup.) One male. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One female. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One male, one female. The Mendoza male has the limbs uniform greenish, while the Buenos Aires pair has them of the same color much mottled with brownish. Miopteryx argentina Saussure. Mendoza. November 18, 1904. (Haarup.) One male. San Cornelia. November, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. These apparently are the first exact records of this species, which was described from the ‘‘Argentine Pampas” and since reported ' from Brazil. The triangularly attenuate form of the cephalic section of the pronotum of this species is distinctive. ® Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1913, p. 287. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 279 Thesprotia vidua Saussure and Zehntner. Misiones. January, 1911, January 15, 1910, March 21 and 26, 1910, April 30, 1910, May 5, 1910, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Four males, five females. Subfamily VATIN 2. Parastagmatoptera unipunctata (Burmeister). Tapia, Prov. of Tucuman. Elev. 800 meters. March-April, 1903. (G. A. Baer.) One female. [Hebard Coll.! Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One female. The former is the most elevated locality from which the species has been taken. The distal extremities of the median and caudal femora and the adjacent portion of the tibia in the Tapia female are dark brownish, with which color the external face of the cephalic coxe is also in large part blotched, the proximal portion of the corresponding femora also suffused with the same. The external face of the cephalic femora also has a median spot of brownish on the usual yellowish ground. Stagmatoptera hyaloptera (Perty). Tucuman, Prov. of Tucuman. March 16, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. Misiones. March 11, 1907. (Jorgensen.) One female. Family PHASMID 2. Subfamily ANISOMORPHIN 2. Agathemera crassa (Blanchard). La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One female. A pair from Cruz del Eje in the same province have also becn examined. Subfamily CLITUMNIN#. Steleoxiphus catastates Rehn. Misiones. April 12, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One female. The present individual is slightly larger than the specimen pre- viously recorded by us from the Misiones.’ *Ceratites laticeps Caudell. Misiones. January, 1911. One female, one immature female. These specimens agree completely with the original description of the unique type of the species and genus from Sapucay, Paraguay. The adult is of almost exactly the same dimensions as the type, ® Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1913, p. 301. 280 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., while the immature specimen is about three-fourths as long, with the subgenital opercule relatively less developed. Family ACRIDID&. Subfamily ACRYDIIN AS. Prototettix lobulatus (Stal). La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One female. This is the first exact Argentine record from south of the Misiones. Apotettix bruneri Hancock. Jujuy, Prov. of Jujuy. February, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. Previously recorded by us from Embarcacion, Salta. Subfamily EUMASTACIN. *Masyntes tigris Burr. Embareacion, Proy. of Salta. April; 1911. (Jorgensen.) One female. This specimen fully agrees with a male of the species from Corumbéa, Brazil. Bruner’s M. brasiliensis" appears to be very doubtfully distinct, as the differential characters given are very slight, the presumably different measurements being largely accounted for by different general size, and in consequence they are hardly proportional. The present specimen shows the following measurements: Raseig ih: OF BODY ase c5 oe tea ha eae 26.5 mm. Licneth OL gOMOUUII..." i: Miecan tation sok eR TRE: Dee a Coie: _ ine Sek ee eens soar ie cen Ae Faaiariee Depeth OF CAUGHT CCONEE oii6 cnt ce eee Rate ee, 14503 This is the first Argentine record for the species. Subfamily PROSCOPIN AS. Tetanorhynohus humilis Giglio-Tos. Misiones. September 7, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One male. This specimen has been compared with a paratypic male from Caiza, Bolivian Chaco, and is identical except for its smaller size, which is a secondary matter in this group. The only previous Argentine record for the species was from San Lorenzo, Province of Jujuy (Giglio-Tos). Tetanorhynchus borelli Giglio-Tos. Jujuy, Prov. of Jujuy. April and October, 1911. Two males, two females. 10 Ann. Carneg. Mus., VIII, p. 6 (1911). > ) ; 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 281 Cephalocema costulata Burmeister. Misiones. January, 1911, February 1, 11 and 14, 1911, March 22 and 24, 1910, April 5, 1910, November 1, 1910, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Four males, nine females, one immature male, three immature females. Posadas, Misiones. (C. Schrottky.) One male. Rio Tapenaga, Prov. of Sante Fé. One male. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) Five males, two females. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) Four immature males, four immature females. Cephalooema calamus Burmeister? Tucuman, Prov. of Tucuman. March, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. _We refer the present specimen to this poorly understood species with a query. The fastigium is faintly tapering with the apex little blunted, which feature is not in accord with the original description, but this seems of minor importance, as there is some individual variation in this respect in the group. The size is appreciably less than that originally given for the sex (3? inches), but in this our specimen is very close to the male from Brazil measured by Brunner and tentatively referred by him to calamus." The original localities for this species were Villa Occidental, Gran Chaco and the Rio Apa. . Cephalocema lineata Brunner. Mendoza. (Haarup.) One male. Tapia, Prov. of Tucuman. Elev. 600 meters. March-April, 1903. (G. A. Baer.) One female. [Hebard Coll.] The Tapia record extends the range of the species to the northward. Subfamily ACRIDIN 2. Hyalopteryx rufipennis Charpentier. ; Misiones. January, 1911, October, 1911, November 2, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Three males, four females. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One male. The La Cumbre record is the most southern known for the species. Truxalis brevioornis (Johannson). San Lorenzo, Prov. of Jujuy. October, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One female. . 282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Orphula pagana (Stil). Misiones. January 15, 1911, February, 1911, October, 1911, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Four males, six females, one immature male. Amblytropidia robusta Bruner, Misiones. April 26, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One female. Amblytropidia australis Bruner. Buenos Aires. One female. {Hebard Coll.] Parorphula graminea Bruner. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One female. Orphulella punctata (DeGeer). Misiones. January, 1911, April 5, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One male, three females. Posadas, Misiones. (Schrottky, no. 17.) One female. Jujuy, Prov. of Jujuy. February, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. Buenos Aires. One female. [Hebard Coll.] Fenestra bohlsii Giglio-Tos. Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One female. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) Three males, one imma- ture female. The males and adult female are of the usual brownish color phase, while the nymph has the head, pronotum and rudimentary tegmina and wings green with a fine medio-longitudinal yellowish line on the head and pronotum. Staurorhectus longicornis Giglio-Tos. Misiones. January and February, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Eight males, four females. One of the above females is of the phase with the dorsum of the head and pronotum unicolorous. Scyllina picta (Bruner). Misiones. January and February, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Six males, three females, one immature female. Subfamily GSDIPODIN A. Trimerotropis pallidipennis (Burmeister). Jujuy, Prov. of Jujuy. December, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One female. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One male. i i ee a ae 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 283 Papipappus clarazianus Saussure. Tucura Catanlil, Department of Limay Centro, Territory of Neuquen. (Lizer.) Two males, one female. This species was described from the region between the Rio Negro and the Rio Chubut, which area lies southeast of where the present material was taken. No other records are known for the genus and species. Paulinia acuminata (DeGeer). [Celopterna acuminata of authors.] Buenos Aires. One female. [{Hebard Coll.] Subfamily OMMEXECHIN 2%. Ommexecha servillei Blanchard. Misiones. January, February and October, 1911, November, 1910, December 20, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Four males, eight females [three pairs in copula}. From this material it is evident that the species is dimorphic in wing length, all three pairs taken in copula differing individually in this respect, two pairs having the males brachypterous and the females macropterous and the other pair having the male macropter- ous and the female brachypterous. Of the unmated specimens one male and one female are macropterous and four females brachyp- terous. In the brachypterous individuals the apices of the tegmina vary from straight to strongly uncinate. From the present evidence it would appear that germari Burmeister is merely the macropterous phase of the present species, but we do not wish to establish this synonymy until we are better acquainted with Brazilian material of the genus. All of the present series are of a brownish coloration, some more blackish brown than others. Spathalium stali Bolivar. Posadas, Misiones. September, 1912. (Schrottky.) One female. Grea monstrosa Bruner. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One adult female, one immature female. This striking form was previously recorded from the country be- tween Bahia Blanca and Cordoba. Subfamily LOCUSTIN“&. Coryacris angustipennis (Bruner). ‘ Posadas, Misiones. April 8, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One female. Misiones. April 8, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One male. 254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Diedronotus levipes (Stal). Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Two males, three females. Diedronotus discoideus (Serville). Misiones. March 19-29, April 13-30, May 30, June 12, July 1, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Five males, seven females. All of the above specimens have the discoidal field of the tegmina more or less maculate. Elexochlora viridicata (Serville). Misiones. January 12-18, 1910, January, 1911, February 11, March 12 and 24, November, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Eight males, ten females. La Cumbre, Proy. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) Two adult males, one immature male, one immature female. The Misiones specimens bear out the facts previously stated by us” regarding the divergence of material from this locality from typical Buenos Aires individuals, the only difference from the points ° there noted being the lack of dull purplish on the humeral regions of two males and the but very faint indication of it in another. The La Cumbre adults are similar in form and coloration to Buenos Aires individuals, but the tegmina and wings are shorter. The nymphs show that the reduction of the median carina in this genus is a feature of specialization, as they have it strongly elevated and considerably arcuate. Chromacris miles (Drury). Misiones. March 21, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Three males, five temales. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One adult female, two immature females. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One male, one female. Zoniopoda iheringi Pictet and Saussure. Misiones. January 12, February 10-28, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One male, four females. * Zoniopoda tarsata (Serville). La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One male, one female. These specimens appear to be true tarsata, agreeing with material from Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil. Apparently this is the only Argen- tine record of true tarsata. 2 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1913, p. 331. , ' 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285 Zoniopoda cruentata (Blanchard). Misiones. December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One male, one female. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) Two males, three females, five immature specimens. Zoniopoda omnicolor (Blanchard). San Luis. One male. [Hebard Collection.] Diponthus paraguayensis Bruner. Misiones. January, 1911, February 11, March 16 and 19, 1910 (Jorgensen.) One male, five females. Leptysma filiformis (Serville). Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male, one female. Leptysma obsoura (Thunberg). Misiones. January, 1911.~ (Jorgensen.) One male, one female. *Stenacris interior Bruner. Misiones. September 25, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One female. This species was previously known only from Corumbaé and Cuyaba, Brazil, and Puerto Suarez, Bolivia. *Inusia gracillima Giglio-Tos, Misiones. January 30,1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. Buenos Aires. Two females. [{Hebard Collection.| These are the first records of the species from Argentina. Inusia pallida Bruner. Misiones. «January and January 30, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male, two females. " These specimens are of the pale green phase of the type. *Zygoclistron superbum Rehn. Misiones. February 14, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One female. This is the first record of the genus from Argentina. The species was described from Sapucay, Paraguay, and the present specimen has been compared with paratypes. *Aleuas gracilis Stal. Misiones. February, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One immature male. The present specimen appears referable to this species. The general characters are those of gracilis, although the caudal tibie are blackish distad. This is the first record of the species from Argentina. ‘ Abracris signatipes (Bruner). Misiones. December, 1910. One male. 286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Schistocerca paranensis (Burmeister). Yuto, Prov. of Jujuy. November, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One female. Dichroplus elongatus Giglio-Tos. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) Two females. Buenos Aires. One male, one female. [Hebard Collection.] Dichroplus punctulatus (Thunberg). Misiones. January 14, 1910, January, 1911, February 8, 1910, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One male, three females. One La Cumbre female has decided clear buffy patches on the caudal femora. Dichroplus dubius Bruner. Misiones. January, February, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Five males, nine females. ; Dichroplus robustulus Stal. Misiones. January, 1911, February 11, 1910, March 16, April 5 and December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One male, eight females. These specimens fully agree with the material previously recorded by us from the same locality.’ Dichroplus bergii (Stal). Misiones. January and February, 1911, March 24, May 4 and 12, 1910, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Four males, eleven females. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) Two males, one imma- ture male. The caudal tibie are decidedly glaucous in all of the Misiones specimens and oil green in the La Cumbre individuals. Leiotettix sanguineus Bruner. Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. This specimen is no larger than the Misiones male previously measured by us." Leiotettix pulcher Rebn. Misiones. January, 1911, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Three males, one female. These individuals fully agree with the type and allotype. *Scotussa rubripes Bruner. Misiones. November and December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Two females. 3 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1913, p. 345. it [hid., p. 346. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 287 - This is the first record of the present species from Argentina. The material fully agrees with topotypes from Sapucay, Paraguay. Osmilia violacea (Thunberg). Misiones. March 19, April 26, May 3-6, July 1, August 31, October 1, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Four males, ten females. San Lorenzo, Prov. of Jujuy. October 30, 1911. (Lizer.) One male. Family TETTIGONIID 2. Subfamily PHANEROPTERIN®. Burgilis missionum Rehn. Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Two females. Hyperophora major Brunner. Yuto, Prov. of Jujuy. November, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. Ligocatinus olivaceus (Brunner). Misiones. February, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Two females. *Homotoicha fuscopunctata Caudell. Misiones. October, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One female. This specimen fully agrees with a female from Sapucay, Paraguay, the type locality, from which point alone the species was previously known. Theudoria melanoonemis (Stal). Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. This specimen has the cephalic femora without black, which color is present elsewhere as usual in the species. The only previous Argentine record is that of the type from Buenos Aires. The other known records are from Montevideo, Uruguay, and Puerto Bertoni, Paraguay. Scaphura nigra (Thunberg). : Tapia, Prov. of Tucuman. Elev. 600 meters. March-April, 1903. (G. A. Baer.) Two females. [Hebard Collection.} One of these specimens is of the usual atro-chalybeous type, the other approaches variety B of Brunner. Grammadera clara Brunner. Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One male. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) Two males, one female. This species was previously known only from Buenos Aires, and Montevideo, Uruguay. Grammadera albida Brunner. Misiones. February, 1911. (Jorgensen:) One male. 288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Phylloptera spinulosa Brunner. : Misiones. January 26, 1910, January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) ‘Two males. *Phylloptera alliedea Caudell. Misiones. January, 1911, December, 1910. (Jorgensen.) Two females. When compared with a topotypic female from Sapucay, Paraguay, the present material is seen to agree completely, except that the ovipositor is somewhat smaller, in length being 6.5 and 6.7.mm., instead of 8, as described and as in the topotype. This difference is probably geographic. The species is new to Argentina, previously being known only from the type locality. *Microcentrum angustatum Brunner. Misiones. October, 1910. (Jorgensen.) One female. This is the first Argentine record for the present species, the previous records being Puerto Cabello and Brazil. Subfamily PSEUDOPHYLLINE. Dasyscelis normalis Brunner. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One female. Subfamily CONOCEPHALIN &. Caulopsis gracilis Redtenbacher. Buenos Aires. One male. [Hebard Collection.] The species has been recorded from localities extending from Cuba to Buenos Aires and Montevideo. Neoconocephalus procerus Redtenbacher. Buenos Aires. February, 1912. (Jorgensen.) One female. This is the first record of the species subsequent to its description in 1891 on the basis of Buenos Aires material. The specimen in hand agrees perfectly with the description, but is slightly larger than the measurements there given for the same sex. Neoconocephalus redtenbacheri Karny. Tucuman. «March 16, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One female. This specimen is of the green phase. The tegmina are considerably and the caudal femora and ovipositor appreciably longer than the maximum measurements given by Karny, but otherwise the specimen fully agrees with individuals which are within the original measure- ments. Neoconocephalus saturatus (Griffini). Posadas, Misiones. (Schrottky, no. 16.) One male, one female. The recent acquisition of this and other material from various 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 289 portions of South America has enabled us to correct several of our previous identifications of specimens as belonging to this species. The material from Sapucay, Paraguay,!* reported in 1907, we find on re-examination to be N. vicinus Karny, subsequently described from Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil, and Paraguay. The Buenos Aires female recorded by us" we now find to be the very closely related N. fusco-marginatus Redtenbacher. *Neoconocephalus fuscomarginatus (Redtenbacher). N. saturatus Rehn (nec Griffini), Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1913, p. 375. Buenos Aires. January 14, 1909. (Jorgensen.) One male. This is the first record of the species from Argentina, the previous records being from Curitiba, Brazil, and Montevideo, Uruguay. Homorocoryphus viridis (Redtenbacher). Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.). One female. The only previous Argentine record is from Buenos Aires. The other known records are from Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil, and Monte- video, Uruguay. Homorocoryphus kraussi (Redtenbacher). Posadas, Misiones. Elev. 80 meters. March 6, 1909. (Jorgen- sen.) One female. The only previous exact records of this species are those of the types from Theresopolis and Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil. Family GRYLLIDZA. Subfamily GRYLLOTALPIN ©. Gryllotalpa claraziana Saussure. Mendoza. 1904-1905. (Haarup.) One female. This is the first record of the species since its original description in 1874 from Argentina without exact locality. The types were males without apparent wings, while the present specimen has cau- date wings, but in every other respect our individual is in accord with the description. *Scapteriscus camerani Giglid-Tos. Buenos Aires. One male. This is the first record from Argentina for the species, which was previously known only from Paraguay. Scapterisous borellii Giglio-Tos. Jujuy, Prov. of Jujuy. December 1, 1911. (Jorgensen,) Two females. 15 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1907, p. 390. 8 [bid., 1913, p. 375. 19 290 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., Embareacion, Prov. of Salta. February, 1911. (Jorgensen.) One nymph. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) One male. Mendoza, Prov. of Mendoza. February 12 and 27, 1908. (Jor- gensen.) Two females. The above records, with our previous ones from the Misiones and Chacras de Coria, Mendoza, and that of Giglio-Tos from San Lorenzo, Jujuy, constitute all the Argentine records of the species. Nemobius (Argizala) hebardi new species. When compared with N. (A.) brasiliensis, the present species is found to have a proportionately deeper pronotum, to be decidedly darker in general coloration and to have a decidedly shorter ovipositor. Type: 2; Buenos Aires, Argentina. (C. Lizer.) [Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., type no. 5276.] Size very large for the genus; form.compact; head rather large and rounded, but a little flattened in front. Maxillary palpi as in brasiliensis. Pronotum decidedly transverse, but not as much so as in brasiliensis, length con- iy i PCT PR Ty tained nearly one and _ seven- ae tenths times in greatest (caudal) Fig. 4.—Nemobius (Argizala) hebardi dorsal width, narrowing evenly, of pe (xX on of ovipositor but not decidedly cephalad, and with a slight medio-longitudinal sulcus on the cephalic portion. Tegmina elongate, with apex medio- dorsal in position and sharply rounded; longitudinal veins conspicuous, cross-veinlets neither as heavy nor as conspicuous as in brasiliensis. Wings very long, considerably more than twice the tegminal length. Ovipositor much shorter than in brasiliensis, scarcely more than half as long as’ caudal femur, rigid, straight, apex as in brasil- iensis and very narrowly sub- lanceolate, with the margin of that portion formed by the Fig. 5—Nemobius (Argizala) hebardi dorsal valves straight and armed new species. Outline of internal face ; ; : of caudal tibia and tarsus of type. evenly with serrulations. Sub- (x 5.) genital plate as in brasiliensis. Spines of caudal tibize 4 and 4 in number, long, but not as long as in brasiliensis, 6 distal spurs placed as in that species and of same pro- portions to each other and to the metatarsus, these portions being all distinctly more abbreviate than in brasiliensis. | | OO SS eae OS . 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 291 Measurements (in millimeters). Buenos Aires. eT eee Misiones. 2 (Paratype.) (Type.) (Paratype.) Length of body... Oh taki. es 10.2 10.2 Length of pronotum —.... ey 4 1.8: 1.9 Greatest (caudal) width of pro- SY ee ea Sia 3 3.1 Length of tegmen......iconwnn 6.9 7 6.4 Length of wing... npn OM 14.7 14 Length of caudal femur. 7 ff 7.2 Length of ovipositor.... 3.8 3.6 3.9 Though the color pattern is very obscure in these dark specimens before us, it shows a distinct similarity to that of the usually pale brasiliensis, in which species the color pattern is, as a result of the pale general coloration, usually decidedly recessive. In the present species the general coloration is bister, with intermediate channel of tegmina, under parts of body and limbs buffy, the latter flecked with bister dorsad. The occiput is bister striped with three narrow buffy longitudinal lines. The maxillary palpi are pale, clothed with dark hairs and with distal portion of terminal joint briefly infuscated. The entire lower portion of the face and lateral lobes of the pronotum are buffy. In addition to the type we have examined, a female bearing the same data and one from the state of Misiones, Argentina, taken in February, 1911, by P. Jorgensen. These specimens are all in the collection of The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. We take pleasure in dedicating this species to our co-worker, Mr. Morgan Hebard, whose masterly paper on the North American species of this genus has placed the study of the group on a permanent basis, making possible, by its comprehensive treatment of the sub- ject, the study of the genus as a whole. . Gryllus argentinus Saussure. Misiones. January, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Two females. Jujuy, Prov. of Jujuy. April and December, 1911. (Jorgensen.) Two females. La Cumbre, Prov. of Cordoba. (Lizer.) Three females. Chacras de Coria, Prov. of Mendoza. Elev. 936 meters. January 9 and 11, 1907 and 1908. (Jorgensen.) One male, two females. Of this series the Jujuy and Misiones individuals have caudate wings, the others have abbreviate wings. The La Cumbre specimens are more uniformly colored than the others, the Chacras de Coria 292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Apr., individuals showing more contrast between the general coloration and that of the tegmina, one with strongly marked pale tegminal bases; the Misiones representatives are generally pale, while the Jujuy ones are dark with marked pale humeral lines. It seems very probable that fuloipennis Blanchard is but a form of this species. The abbreviate wings, supposed to be characteristic of fulvipennis, we find to be individual in this as in numerous other species of the genus, and sufficient specimens are in hand to show that the relative proportionate length of the caudal femora and ovipositor varies appreciably, as in other forms of the genus. Gryllodes laplatz (Saussure). Mendoza. 1904-1905; February 20, 1907. (Haarup.) One male, one female. These specimens are inseparable from individual taken at Car- caraha, Province of Santa Fé. *Phylloscyrtus canotus Saussure. Buenos Aires. (Lizer.) One male. This is the first Argentine record of the species, which was originally described from “Brazil.” | 4 | 1915.]} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 293 THE GENUS GRYLLUS (ORTHOPTERA) AS FOUND IN AMERICA. BY JAMES A. G. REHN AND MORGAN HEBARD. To the systematic orthopterist, the crickets of the genus Gryllus have proven to be one of the greatest stumbling-blocks in the order. This is true of the forms found in both hemispheres, but this assertion has especial emphasis when the American forms alone are considered. This is not due to a lack of study, as Scudder and Blatchley have in recent years both endeavored to diagnose certain or all of at least the North American species, using what might be called “‘conventional”’ morphological characters, while Lutz, approaching the subject from a biometric point of view, concludes that species in an anyway natural sense do not exist in the genus, in this skepticism representing the other extreme from Scudder, who categorically defines a number of species. The present authors have been unable in the past to approach the subject with sufficient material to enable them to do more than endeavor to assign certain of their series to various of the forms recognized by Scudder. There has been constant and increasing difficulty in doing this, as, while some individuals would fit certain of the specific descriptions, others would be found agreeing in various features with two or more of the specific diagnoses, the sum total of almost any representation showing an endless complexity of the characters used to differentiate the numerous described forms. The fact is quickly recognizable that almost all of the descriptions of these species were chiefly concerned with size, coloration (not color pattern), venation (in number of transverse (oblique of Saussure) veins in the male tegmen and number of branches of the mediastine vein in both sexes), tegminal length, degree of development of wings and ovipositor length. Such factors have been found to be of minor importance or of no specific value whatsoever in certain other related genera, and the natural uncertainty of the status of the American forms has led us to undertake a more searching study of these. This work is based on all of the American material of the genus before us, 1,504 specimens. The results explain to our complete satisfaction the reasons for the past confusion, a summary of Which is given below. 294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, The genus Gryllus is found in America everywhere from southern Canada to Patagonia. Many forms are developed, distinctive in appearance to different degrees, but possessing in not a single instance valid and constant specific characters, with the exception of Gryllus domesticus, a distinctive introduced species. The different manifestations of the only native American species, Gryllus assimilis, are in no case sufficiently differentiated or constant to be considered geographic races. They constitute mere variations, the adaptation of this exceedingly plastic species to local environ- mental conditions. All are in varying degrees unstable,! but certain geographic limits naturally bound the distribution of each, thus desert adaptations, such as those described as personatus and armatus, are never found in the well watered portions of the continent, nor is the tropical adaptation, assimilis, found in the extreme northern or southern portions of the range of the species. This is of course explained by the fact that the environmental conditions producing these variants are not found over portions of the range of the species. The work of Lutz? has already demonstrated the error of using length of tegmina, wings and ovipositor as characters of specific importance in the genus Gryllus. The mass of evidence upon these features in Lutz’s paper is absolutely convincing; from studies of other genera we have found such characters to be of minor importance generally throughout the Orthoptera. Finding no other characters which could warrant specific distinctions in the mass of American material which he carefully bred and studied, Lutz has, however, stated that all the forms of Gryllus are conspecific. His examination of the series of females of the genus in the British Museum should have shown him the error of this opinion, but he apparently con- fined his studies to the variations in organs of flight and ovipositor,’ 1 Of these, the personatus variant, showing the maximum condition of desert adaptation, constitutes the nearest approach to a geographic racial development. No intergradation is to be found with the more northern variants or with the other desert adaptation, armatus, found also in the arid regions of the south- western United States, which latter appears to be derived from the northern variants, various conditions of which are found in the higher mountains every- where in the region under consideration. The personatus variant, however, normally very pale in general coloration, is found to be occasionally much darker, and from along the Mexican border such specimens are before us showing the transition to, and the typical condition of, the mexicanus variant. 2 The Variation and Correlations of Certain Taxonomic Characters of Gryllus, pp. 1 to 63 (1908.) 2In length of ovipositor, however variable, different extremes are found for each distinct species. For many species these differences may be negligible, but for some species the maximum and minimum are very different. Such features, however, can only be accurately ascertained after specific units have been located through the use of definite valid specific characters. Thus, in the study of females 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 295 overlooking characters of real specific value in the exotic series of Gryllus.* Gryllus assimilis (Fabricius), 1775. [Acheta] assimilis Fabricius, Syst. Ent., p. 280. [Jamaica.] 1838. Grlyllus| pennsylvanicus Burmeister, Handb. Ent., II, abth. II, pt. 1, p. 734. [Pennsylvania.] ; ; 1839. Gryllus luctuosus Serville, Hist. Nat. Ins., Orth., p. 335. [@, @: North America. |} 1839. Gryllus abbreviatus Serville, ibid., p. 336. [2: North America.] 1841. Acheta nigra Harris, Ins. Inj. Veget., lst ed., p. 123. [New England.] 1854. Silo gd a ag Blanchard, Hist. Chile, Zool., VI, p.32. [o, 2 : Valparaiso, Coquimbo, etc., Chile.} 1858. Gryllus lineaticeps Stal, Kongl. Svensk. Freg. Eug. Resa, Zool., I, p.314. [9:San Francisco, California. ] 1859. Gr{yllus] aztecus Saussure, Rev. Mag. Zool., 2° ser., XI, p. 316. [9: Mexico. | 1859. Gr{yllus| cubensis Saussure, ibid., p. 316. [Cuba.] 1859. Gr\yllus| mexicanus Saussure, ibid., p. 316. [Mexico.] 1862. G[ryllus) angustus Scudder, Bost. Journ. Nat. Hist., VII, p.427. [3 9, Cambridge and Cape Cod, Massachusetts. ] 1862. G[ryllus| neglectus Scudder, ibid., p. 428. [@, 2: Massachusetts and Cape Cod, Massachusetts. } 1864. G[ryllus| personatus Uhler, Proc. Ent. Soc. Phila., II, p. 547. [1 9: Kansas.]} 1869. Gryllus septentrionalis Walker, Cat. Dermapt. Saltat. Br. Mus., I, p. 18. [o, 9: Oajaca, Mexico; west coast of South America; San Domingo. |} 1869. Gryllus luridus Walker, tbid., p. 18. [9: Vera Cruz, Mexico.]} 1869. Gryllus determinatus Walker, ibid., p. 19. [@%, 9: Jamaica; St. Vincent; San Domingo.| 1869. Gryllus parilis Walker, ibid., p. 20. [c: St. Vincent; Brazil.] 1869. Gryllus similaris Walker, ihid., p. 20. [9 :San Domingo.| 1869. Gryllus augustulus Walker, thid., p. 21. [o, 9: Jamaica; St. Vincent.} 1869. Gryllus contingens Walker, tbid., p. 21. [9:St. Vincent; Brazil.] 1869. Gryllus signatipes Walker, thid., p. 22. [co": west coast of America.] 1869. Gryllus comptus Walker, ibid., p. 23. [o@: Constancia, Brazil.] of Gryllus in the British Museum, Lutz confined himself to biometric observa- tions and failed to recognize the specific units involved. The extremes of ovi- positor length for this series showed a minimum of 5 mm., which is decidedly shorter than ever found in Gryllus assimilis (10.5 to 25.5 mm. in material studied by him, unquestionably referable to assimilis, and in our present series 11.2 to 23.2 mm. In most series of the species we find the great majority of specimens to show an ovipositor length measuring between 12.5 and 21.5 mm.). 4 Lutz also briefly discusses the genus Atlanticus in his paper, where from a few specimens it is assumed that similar variations in length of ovipositor and caudal femora exist, such variations demonstrating, in his opinion, the invalidity of the two species for which the names Altlanticus pachymerus and dorsalis had been used. This conclusion is without foundation, as he totally overlooked the fact that independent of general bulk these two species are separable by excellent morphological characters. Recent studies based upon examples of Atlanticus show that at least nine distinct specific units exist, each showing some variation, it is true, in the length of the ovipositor and to a lesser degree of the caudal femora, but the forms have excellent genital and other morphological characters, each species being far less plastic than Gryllus assimilis, This would be, in part, the explanation of Lutz’s position regarding the Old World forms of Gryllus. A deeper study than biometric measurements of two dimensions in these forms would have shown excellent morphological characters for a number of species. . 296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, 1869. Gryllus mundus Walker, ibid., p. 23. [9: Brazil.) 1869. Gryllus signatus Walker, ibid., p. 24. [9: Venezuela.] 1869. Gryllus vicarius Walker, ibid., p. 24. [o”: Parad, Brazil.] 1871. Gryllus debilis Walker, Cat. Dermapt. Saltat. Br. Mus., V, Suppl., p. 4. [o: Chontales, Nicaragua.] 1874. Gryllus argentinus Saussure, Miss. Sci. Mex., Rech. Zool., VI, p. 399. {[a, @: Brazil; Tarna, Peru; northern Patagonia; Buenos Aires, Bahia Blanca and Rio Negro de Patagonas, Argentina.] 1874. Gryllus scudderianus Saussure, ibid., p. 402. [c", 9 : North America.]} 1874. Gryllus capitatus Saussure, ibid., p. 405. [c: Peru; Chile.] » 1874. Gryllus bicolor Saussure, ibid., p. 405. [c, 9: Monte Rico, Guiana.] 1874. Gryllus peruviensis Saussure, ibid., p. 406. [c: Moyabamba, Peru.] 1874. Gryllus forticeps Saussure, ibid., p. 407. [o*, 9: Brazil.] 1876. Gryllus insularis Scudder, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., XVIII, p. 268. {1 &, 2 2°: Guadelupe Island, Lower California.] sa nue miopteryx Saussure, Mélang. Orthopt., fase. V, p. 320. 9 >. Peru. 1893. Gryllus galapageius Scudder, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., XX XY, p. 22. { 2: Albemarle Island, Galapagos Islands.] 1897. Gryllus assimilis variety pallida Saussure, Biol. Cent.-Amer., Orth., I, p. 226. {Durango, Mexico; Presidio de Mazatlan, Sinaloa, Mexico.]} 1897. Gryllus chichimecus Saussure, ibid., p: 226. [o, 9: Ciudad, Durango, Mexico, 8100 feet.] 1901. Gryllus barretti Rehn, Trans. Am. Ent. Soc., XX VII, p. 221. (May) {1 7, 3 2: Cuernavaca, Mexico.] 1901. Gryllus vocalis Scudder, Psyche, IX, pp. 267, 268. (Nov.) [o’, 9: Palm Springs and Los Angeles, California.] 1901. Gryllus integer Scudder, ibid., pp. 267, 268. [c, 9: West Berkeley to San Diego, California.] 1902. Gryllus armatus Scudder, Psyche, IX, p. 293. [o, 9: Beaver Dam, Utah; Ehrenberg and Fort Whipple, Arizona.] 1902. Gryllus rubens Scudder, ibid., pp. 294, 295. [1 9: Auburn, Alabama. j 1902. Gryllus firmus Scudder, ibid., pp. 294, 295. [@, 9: Brookville, Indiana; Smithville and Pungo (nec Dingo) Bluff, North Carolina; Georgia; Sanford and Key West, Florida.] 1903. Gryllus alogus Rehn, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1902, p. 726. (Jan.) [1 2: Albuquerque, New Mexico.] 1903. Gryllus bermudensis Caudell, Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash., V, p. 330, (June) [1 2, 2 juv. o&: Bermuda.] :; 1903. Gryllus americanus Blatchley, Orth. Indiana, p. 433. (Sept.) [%, 2: eight counties in Indiana.] 1903. Gryllus arenaceus Blatchley, ibid., p. 434. [@, 9: sand dune region of Lake County, Indiana.] Of the names which have been placed under this species by Saus- — sure, we find that verticalis of Serville® unquestionably belongs under Miogryllus and there preoccupies both laplatew and saussuret. | When compared with other distinct exotic species of the genus, this insect is found to differ in the extremes of size, relative propor- tions, color pattern (where this is developed, this feature being in the present species very frequently lost through intensive coloration and rarely through recessive coloration) and form of the male titilla- tores. In Grillus domesticus, bordigalensis and mitratus, the color pattern — —-, Oon— 5 See footnote 13. 1915.]_ . NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 297 is in each wholly different. Other species, such as Gryllus desertus, chinensis, afer and servillei, show less striking features, but exhibit a complex of characters which prove them to be distinctive forms, worthy of specific rank. It would be ill advised, however, to attempt detailed diagnoses of the exotic species except in a monographic study of the genus. i Specific Description.—Size variable (length ranging from 14 to 28.8 mm.°); form robust (two general types are developed, one, particularly found in typical assimilis, somewhat more robust and compact than the other, which latter is the normal condition in the great majority of variants developed in the temperate regions). Head slightly broader than pronotum (except in a rare megacephalic condition; in this there is no flattening of the face at the clypeal suture as found in megacephalic males of Miogryllus, and to an even greater degree comprehending the entire face in males of several species of the genus Scapsipedus’). Pronotum with proportionate length of disk somewhat variable, but with this dimension usually contained in the width about 1.4 times, caudal margin of disk straight to distinctly bisinuate, lateral lobes with ventral margin straight and horizontal, or occasionally weakly declivent cephalad, ventro- cephalic and ventro-caudal angles rectangulate, the former rather broadly rounded, the latter more decidedly so, the caudal portion of the lateral lobes is somewhat pressed inward, particularly ventrad. In length the tegmina vary from less than half to fully the ab- dominal length, in some phases their apices are situated externo- laterad, though normally mesad. The wings are either developed as complete organs of flight (though never to the extent found in the ® These extremes are nearly equalled in two male specimens before us, both of the seudderianus variant and both from Miami, Florida: length of body, 14.5 and 28.5; pronotum, 3.1 and 5.7; caudal femur, 9.1 and 16; tegmen, 9.3 and 17.9; wings, (concealed) and 27; caudal width of pronotum, 4.6 and 8.1 mm. 7 It is with considerable surprise that we find material of Scapsipedus limbatus Saussure (referable to the variety africanus, if valid), in material before us from Cuba and Jamaica. The males are easily separable from those of Gryllus by the very peculiar head, but the females are instead perfectly normal in this respect; no dark form of Gryllus found in America, however, having the transverse yellow markings between the eyes found in the species of Scapsipedus. In the present insect the males have a sharply defined band of this ae Be between the ocelli, while the females have an additional band just below, between the ventral margins of the eyes and an elongate triangular mesal spot of the same color below, the apex of which touches this latter band. We mention this species here as females collected at some future time in the West Indies, where the species has almost certainly been accidentally introduced from Africa by man, might easily be confused with Gryllus. The genus Scapsipedus is African and Oriental, Peg is described from Madagascar, the variety africanus by inference from Africa. 298 PROCEEDINGS OF THE: ACADEMY OF |[May, species of Mvrogryllus) or are greatly reduced, though perfect and concealed by the tegmina’ (when greatly reduced in Miogryllus, the wings constitute small rounded flattened pads, not folded as in the macropterous condition, and may be termed vestigial rather than reduced). The transverse veins of the male tegmina are normally 3, sometimes 4 (particularly in some South American series where this number is the normal), rarely 5, and very rarely 2 or 6; the speculum is broadly ovate, but somewhat variable in outline, with normally a curved vein dividing it into nearly equal sections. The number of branches of the mediastine vein is variable in the present species and useless as a specific character. The caudal tibix have the dorsal! margins armed normally with 6 or 7 heavy rigid spines (the number of these spines is seldom 5, except in a very few series and very rarely 8 or more’), the distal spurs are 6 in number, the medio-external, medio-internal and dorsdé-internal being decidedly the longest, of which the medio-internal is normally slightly longer than the others, equalling slightly more than 3 to 2 the length of the metatarsus. The male titillatores are very different from those found in either Gryllus domesticus or Gryllus mitratus, with which species we have alone been able to make this comparison. This organ is found within the subgenital plate of the males of this group and constitutes the repository of a small globular seminal sac which rests upon the subgenital plate, but is enveloped laterad and dorsad by the thin but corneous organ, the parts of which afford the diagnostic features described below. This corneous portion constitutes a thin complex plate, semi-circular in transverse section and composed of a medio- dorsal and two lateral parts. The first of these is produced mesad in an upeurved, rather narrow, triangular plate, with margins weakly convex and with length nearly 13 times the basal width. The lateral, nearly perpendicular, portions are fused with this portion dorso-proximad and are produced in shorter, narrow, vertical and blunt projections, inside of which from their proximal point of juncture with the dorsal portion extends on each side a single finger- like projection which is also corneous and is slightly curved toward the apices of the lateral projections which it almost reaches. (See Plate IV, figs. 8 and 9.) The coloration and color pattern is discussed below under the treatment of the varietal developments. ’ This is carefully discussed and figured by Lutz, The Variation and Correla- tion of Certain Taxonomic Characters of Gryllus, p. 8. (1908.) ° In one specimen before us of the personatus variant, the dorsal margins of the caudal tibie are irregularly armed with 10 and 12 spines. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 299 Treatment of the Specific Variants—In order to place properly the material of this species examined, we have found it quite impossible to group the specimens under any number of varietal units, and in con- sequence we have devised a system of symbols as given below, by which the coloration, color pattern, tegminal and wing development and size of each specimen recorded at the end of this treatment is defined. We have found that in general certain types do predominate over certain regions. These constitute the bases of many of the supposed species, but in our opinion should be characterized by symbols rather than varietal names, owing to their complexity and the evident fact that none of these are distinct either specifically or as geographic races, and really show only the various phases resultant from varied environmental conditions. In other widely distributed and plastic species we have found similar environmental adaptations,” but nowhere in the Orthoptera of America is this carried to the multiplicity and extreme diversity of such variants as in the present species. Should varietal names be used without qualification for such units, even for convenience, the frequent and varied combina- tions of features, already proven worthless for either specific or geographic racial distinction, would preclude the possibility of proper use of even such names of minor importance for many specimens in every large series studied. Symbols used to designate the material of this species here recorded. Coloration of head and pronotum. A. Black. B. Black, mouth parts and margins of lateral lobes of pronotum pale. ©. Very dark brown, paler dorsal postocular bar and marking on infra-ocular portion of genx. D. Like C, but with mouth parts also pale and between eyes a pale inverted T-shaped marking. E. Pale, with color pattern strongly defined. F. Pale, with color pattern weakly defined. Coloration of caudal femora. U. Black. V. Black, with ventro-proximal portion briefly reddish. W. Black, with ventro-proximal portion widely reddish. X. Very dark, with reddish suffusion. Y. Buffy, suffused with darker distad. Z. Buffy. “4 » Noncbica ‘Sraclehas fasciatus, Nemobius Taiahus socius, Orchelimum concin- num, Conocephalus saltator and others. 300 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Coloration of tegmina. a. Unicolorous, dark. b. Dark, intermediate channel pale. e. Dark, base and intermediate channel pale. d. Unicolorous, slightly pale. e. Slightly pale, intermediate channel very pale. f. Slightly pale, base and intermediate channel very pale. g. Unicolorous, very pale. Macropterism and brachypterism. u. Tegmina large, wings fully developed organs of flight. v. Tegmina large, wings much reduced and concealed by tegmina- w. Tegmina slightly reduced, wings as in v. x. Tegmina slightly reduced, wings very much reduced. y. Tegmina decidedly reduced, wings as in x. z. Tegmina greatly reduced, wings as in x. Size and form of insect. With these numbers 0 signifies exceptionally robust form. 1. Size very large. . Size large. . Size medium. . Size small. . Size very small. Or Co bo Much material is found not even to fit exactly any series of these symbols. To overcome this difficulty a few qualifying remarks will often be added or two instead of one of a set of symbols given. Thus a specimen recorded as AB, or VX, or 12, shows it to illustrate a condition intermediate between that signified by the two symbols of a single set given. The most frequently encountered variants of Gryllus assimilis. We would again caution the student that these variants are in no case fixed, all manner of intermingling i is found in large series. and the use of names to designate such is not warranted, as such use would on many occasions unquestionably result in conveying a false impression to subsequent workers. C, greatly suffused Z, (normally a or b, u) 012. assimilis Fabricius. This variant is widely distributed throughout tropical humid America at low elevations and throughout the West Indies. In the United States it appears only along the coast of extreme southern California. Though many series are quite uniform for this plastic species, specimens before us from Duran, Ecuador, show to varying 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301 degrees the cephalic color pattern found in the species. Other names: cubensis, aztecus, galapageius, barretti. D, suffused Z, (normally d to f, v) 3 (often weakly 0). mexicanus Saussure." This variant is widely distributed over Mexico and Lower Cali- fornia, it is the development toward an arid adaptation of the assimilis type and shows great variability. In the United States occasional individuals show a tendency toward, and a few specimens are typical of, this condition in our series taken along the Mexican border of Texas. In this variant the pronotum has the dorsum frequently narrowly bordered laterad by pale yellowish. Other name: chichimecus. EZ, (normally d to g, u), 2 (often weakly 0). personatus Uhler.” This variant, a desert adaptation, in which the extreme of recessive coloration and most strongly defined color pattern is reached, is known only from the United States from Kansas, Colorado and central Texas westward. Of all the variants of the species this one shows the most decided indications of a geographic race in process of evolution. It is interesting to note that this variant averages decid- edly heavier than the other desert adaptations of the species found in the southwestern United States. Other name: Stal’s much older name, linealiceps, appears to represent a transition between this and the mexicanus variant. A, suffused Z, (normally d to g, u), 3. armatus Scudder. In the same regions of the southwestern United States in which the personatus variant is found, the present variant also occurs, often very conspicuous on account of its dark head and pronotum which contrast strongly with the much paler remaining portions of the insect. Great variability is shown in the series before us, many differences being found in individuals of every large series, but none showing any approach to the personatus variant. Immature individuals of this variant might be mistaken for those of Miogryllus lineatus; they have, however, the abdomen broadly infuscated, giving them a barred _appearance, while the spines of the dorsal margins of the caudal femora are rarely less than 6 in number, in M. lineatus normally 5, and the young of the same are more uniformly yellowish. Other name: alogus. B, suffused Z, (normally d or e, w) 2 (usually weakly indicated 0). scudderianus Saussure. This variant occurs in sandy areas in the eastern United States, it See Plate IV, Fig. 4. 2 See Plate IV. Figs. 2, 5, 6, 7. 302 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |May, in the north not large or robust (scudderianus, 45), but in Florida larger and more robust (firmus, 2 weakly 0). It is an adaptation to arenaceous surroundings in these regions. Immature individuals could easily be confused with those of Miogryllus verticalis,® but in that species the young are more regularly marked with darker colors and normally have 5 spines on each dorsal margin of the caudal femora. Other names: rubens, firmus, arenaceus. AU, (normally ax) 4. neglectus Scudder. This is the darkest variant found in the present species, the maxi- mum development of the condition found also in the two following variants. It is found in the northeastern portion of the insect’s distribution, ranging southward in the high Appalachians to northern Georgia and is known from the Piedmont Plateau only ‘in Pennsyl- vania. Much variability exists and every intergradation with the next two variants is often to be found in the same series. AV, (normally a or b but ranging to f, x but often u), 3. pennsyl- vanicus Burmeister. This is the dominant variant of the species in the well watered regions of temperate North America and is found southward to the Gulf coast of eastern Texas. Great variability is exhibited and every intergradation with the variants termed neglectus and luctuosus is to be found. Other names: nigra, angustus. AW, (normally d but ranging from a to f, w but often u), 3. luc- tuosus Serville. This variant shows an intensification of the features of the last. It is found throughout the lowlands of the southeastern United States and inthe Middle West from Manitoba southward to the arid regions. It also exhibits great variability. The maximum of this condition is found in material from the pine woods of the southeastern United States. Other names: abbreviatus. AXW, (normally a, u but often w), 3. integer Scudder. This is an adaptation found in the mountains of the arid portions of the southwestern United States and also in California. Extreme variability is to be found. Other name: vocalis. Our series are not sufficiently numerous from temperate South America to show as definitely the variants there developed; quite as many probably exist as found in North America. Of these fulvi- 18 Under this name of Serville’s will be found both laplate Saussure and saussuret Scudder. See Hebard, Jour. N. Y. Ent. Soc., XXIII. (1915.) 14 This is the variant which the authors have previously consistently recorded as rubens from the southeastern United States. . ) 1915.} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 303 pennis appears to be an adaptation similar to the pennsylvanicus variant, but heavier, though no more compact, with larger head; under argentinus appear to be described numerous adaptations, though typically suggesting the luctuosus variant with tegmina f. Saussure’s argentinus variety c is, however, an adaptation similar to the per- sonatus variant, but with color pattern scarcely developed. We have not referred to Walker’s names here, as the majority have already been proven synonyms and the descriptions are worthless. We feel certain that the other described South American species have no further significance than the North American variants discussed above. We have noted that in the mountains, particularly those of arid or semi-arid regions, a degree of plasticity is found greater even than exhibited elsewhere by this most plastic species. Several South American names are doubtless applicable to such manifestations of the species. Females, as a rule, have the tegminal and femoral markings more decided than in the male sex, thus frequently in the same series the males will show VWa, while the females will average Wb. As in our other recent papers, the material collected by one or both of the authors is understood to be in The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia or Hebard Collection. Specimens Examined.—1504; 570 males, 857 females, 41 immature males and 36 immature females. Rhode Island. Providence, IX, 28, 1896, 1 9, (AXgx 2), [A. N.S. P.]. Wesquage Beach, IX, 8 to 10, 1913, (H; upland fields), 2 °, (AVgx 2; AVgw 2). Connecticut. New Haven, VI, 1, 1910, (H.), 17,1 9,"°(@ AVaw 4; 2 AVgy 4), X, 1909, (H.), 1 2, (AVey 2). New York. Peekskill, IX, 16, 1912, (E. G. Vanatta), 3 9, (AVbx 2), [A. N. OB AA Pennsylvania. South Sterling, [X, 14, 1906, (B. Long), 1 o&@, (AUaw 4), (A. N.S. P.]. Tobyhanna, IX, 1, 1903, (H.), 1 #7, 1 9, (# AUaw 3; e AU Vay 3). Lehigh Gap, VII, 12, 1897, 1 &, (AUXdw 3), [A. N.S. P.]. ' Recorded by Hebard as Gryllus neglectus. 304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |May, Ganoga Lake, IX, 2, 1900, 1 @, 1 2, (@#@AUax 3; 9 AUbx 3), [A. N..6..P.]. Harrisburg, V, 27, 1 9, (AVey 2); IX, 27 to XI, 5,167,9 9,1 juv. d', ljuv. 9, (oc AVaw 3; 1 Q AVby 4: 29° AV fy 2: 6 9 AVey 3), fall Pa. State Dept. Zool.]. Camphill, IX, 12 and X, 19, 2 9, (AVbx 2), [Pa. State Dept. Zool.]. State College, IX, 6, 1 o (head nearly black, pronotum, tegmina and caudal femora dark brown, w 3), [Pa. State Dept. Zool.]. Orrtanna, IX, 4,1 2, (AUVbw 2), [Pa. State Dept. Zool.|. Philadelphia, VI, 29 to VII, 8, 1897 and 1898, 2 #%, 1 9, (& AVdw 2; 92 AVau 2), [A. N.S. P.]. Se LX 7, 0914, (H.), E14, 2906(Re eB), oe, aes i AViw 2; 2c AVdw3; 9 AV to W, etog, wtoz, ei heen Hill, VIL, 7 to TX; (20, 1903 to. F911; .Ce ), 3 o',4 9, (of AUaw 6; 9 AU, a to b, x to y, 3 to 4). Mount Airy, IX, 12 | 1903. (E.), 1 o, (AVfx 2). Pink Hill, Newtown Square, VI, 19 to VII, 1, 1906 to 1910, (R. & H.; serpentine barrens), 1 o, 6 2, (oc AVau 2, 9: AV, a, b and e, u w and x, 3 to 4). Newtown Square, VI, 29, 1911, (H. Fox), 1 o&, (AVdw 3), [A. N. hs SF Castle Rock, (G. M. Greene), 1 o&, (AUax 3), [A. N.S. P.]. Berwyn, [X, 9, 1 9, (AUbx 2), (Pa. State Dept. Zool.]. Fern Hill, Chester County, VI, 11, 1911, (R. & H.; serpentine barrens), 1 2, (AVew3); IX, 19, 1908, (R. & H.: : serpentine barrens), ye eee (Z AUaw 3, 92 AUby 3). Addingham, VIII, 13, 1914, (D. Culver), 1 9, (AUbx 2), [A. N Bae; Tinicum Island, [X, 9 and 29, 1903 and 1904, (R. & H.; marsh land) 7 o’', 6 9, (3 A, V and X, dw, 3 to 4; 5 2 A, V and W, ex, 340-4; ioe weakly B, WGw 2). Port Allegany, VIL, 1 to 8, 1904, (H. W. Fowler), 1 o&, 1 9 (AVaw 4), [A. N.5 Pil. ee Valley, Huntingdon County, IX, 10, 1905, (R.), 1 2, 49,(c AVaw 3; 9 A, U to V, by 8). Mec onnellsburg, VI, 4, 1905, 1 o&, (AVfu 2), [A. N. 5. P.]. Meadville, XI, 11, 1 2; (AVbw 3), [Pa. State Dept. Zool.]. Beaver, VU, 0 3 9, (AVEx 3), [Pa. State Dept. Zool.]. ’ Beatty, (O. Brugger), 2 © (Ab, wand x, 3)).[Ay N. B.PR New Jersey. Riverton, IX, 8, 1901, (H. L. Viereck), 1 #1, (AVgx 3) ere 1904, (G. M. Greene), 3 9, (AWf, u and x, 2), (all A. N.S. ee Westville, LX, 25, 1901, (G. M. Greene), 1 Dy (Abu y) ee, Gan ks 1897, 1 o, (AWdw 2), fall A. WN, ae ee Clementon, X, 15, 1907, 1 o’, (AVix 2) [A. N.S. P.]. Sumner, [X, 15, 1906, (B. Long), 19,1 2, (co weakly B, Wew 3; 2 AVcx 3), (A. N. 6.-P.I. 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 305 Atsion, X, 8, 1903, (H.; pine barrens), 1 op’, 3 2,!°(o 1 9 weakly B, paler X, gw 2; 2 9 AVbw 2). Centre of East Plains, Ocean County, VIII, 24, 1914, (H.; ground oak and pine), 1 juv. o’, (BY). Staffords Forge, VIII, 29 and IX, 16, 1905 and 1907, (R. and R. & H.; pine barrens), 5 o’, 4 9, (40,3 9 A, Vto W; dtof, wtoy, 2 to3; 1o' 1 9 AYgw 83). Spray Beach, Long Beach Island, VII, 18 and IX, 6, 1906 and 1907, (B. Long), 1 7,1 9,(@ BYgx4; 9 AVfx 4), [A. N.S. P.]. Chairville, VI, 17, 1901, (R.), 1 9, (AVex 3). Ventnor, VIII, 26, 1914, (H.), 1 o&, 1 9, (AV, d and a, w 3). Formosa Bog, Cape May County, IX, 1, 1908, (H. Fox), 1 9, (AVbx 3), [A. N. S. P.]. Townsend’s Inlet, Sea Isle City, IX, 8, 1908, (H. Fox; grassy field), 1 9, (BYgx 2), [A. N.S. P.]. Sea Isle City, VI, 14, 1912, (H. Fox; washed up), 1 o&, 1 2,(¢ AVcu 2, 9? AWeu 02), [A. N.S. P.]. Swainton, VII, 20 to 27, 1914, (H.; trapped, molasses jar), 1 juv. o’, (BY). Dias Creek, VII, 27, 1914, (H.; trapped, molasses jar), 1 juv. erates ) Maryland. Chestertown, VIII, 20 and 26, 1899, (E. G. Vanatta), 1 o,1 92, (# wholly pale brown, w 3; 9 AVby 2), [A. N.S. P.]. Jennings, VI, 24, 1907, (B. Long), 1 o&, 1 2, (AUaw 3, AVbx 3), fa ts 8. ©.]: Washington, District of Columbia, VI, 25, 1 o, (AVau 3) [A. N. S. P.j; IX, 1883, 1 &, (AVaw 2), [Hebard Cln.]. Virginia. Roslyn, X, 22, 1900, (R.), 1 9, (AUVby 3). North Carolina. Edenton, VIII, 20, 1908, (R.; moist land), 1 o,'7 (Ydw 3). Newbern, VIII, 24, 1908, (R.), 1 918, (AVWeu 3). _ Raleigh, IV, 16 to IX, 13, 1904, (C. S. Brimley), 9 o&, 14 9," (7 o& AWew, 3 to 4; 1 oo AWaw 3; 1 o AVgy 3; 9 AW, gande, x and y, 3 to 4), [Hebard Cln.]. Sulphur Springs, near Asheville, V, 10 to VI, 13, 1904, (H.), 7 o%, 3 9,” (6 o AVaw 3; 1 o& AWfx 3; 9 AVbw 3). ‘6 Recorded as Gryllus luctuosus by Rehn. '? Recorded by the authors as Gryllus rubens. 18 Thid. 9 [hid. *» One male recorded by the authors as Gryllus rubens, the others as Gryllus pennsylvanicus. 20 306 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Mount Pisgah, 4500 feet, X, 1, 1904, (H.; summit bald), 2 o7, 2 9 ,?! (f# AUax 4; 9 AVby 3). Winter Park, LX, 7, 1911, (R. & H.; moist undergrowth of long- leaf pine woods), 2 o', 4 2, (c' AVaw 1; 2 AVb, w and u, 1). Lake Waccamaw, IX, 8, 1911, (R. & H.), 6 oc, 4 9, (AW, va 2 b, u and w, 3 and 4). : South Carolina. Florence, IX, 6, 1911, (R. & H.), 2 9, (AYfw 3; AWeu 2). Sullivan Island, Charleston County, IX, 5, 1911, (R. & H.; on sandy soil), 2 2, (BYe, w and x, 2). Yemassee, IX, 4, 1911, (R. & H.), l Juv. 9, (EZ 2). | Georgia. Rabun Bald, Rabun County, 4000 to 4600 feet, VIII, 21, 1913, (J. C. Bradley), 1 &, (AU), [Ga. State Cln.]. Black Rock Mountain, Rabun County, 3000 feet, V, 20 to 25, 1911, (W. T. Davis), 1 o&, (AVaw 3), [Davis Cln.]. Tuckoluge Creek, Rabun County, VII, 1910, (W. T. Davis), 1 9, (AVWbx 3), [Davis Cln.]. Clayton, 2000 feet, V, 18 to VI, 1909 and 1911, (W. T. Davis: J.C. Bradley), 2 7,4 2, (c'-A, V and W, aandd, y 7; 1 9 AUau 03; 1 9 AVax 3; 1 9 AVbx 3; 1 9 AEbz 4), [Davis Cln. and Ga. State Cln.]. Atlanta, VII, 10 to VIII, 30, 1910 and 1913, (J. C. Bradley: R. & H.; in pine woods), 1 o#',3 2,(e% 2 9 AW, d and e, u and w, 2; 1 9 AEgw 3). Vicinity of Stone Mountain, VIII, 3, 1913, (R. & H.; pine woods on edge of bog), 1 2, (AWaw 3). Augusta, VII, 29, 1913, (R. & H.; untilled field among grasses), 4 o', (A, WX and Z, dw 3). Jesup, IX, 1, 1911, (R. & H.), 1 9, (AWv 3). Waycross, V, 10, 1911, 1 9, (AVbu 2), [Ga. State Cln.]. Hebardville, VIII, 28, 1911, (H.), 1 o&, (AWdw 2). Billy’s Island, Okeefenokee Swamp, VI to IX, 5, 1912 and 1913, (J. C. Bradley), 1&7, 5 9, (1 #7 1 9 AWdw 2; 1 2 mouth parts pale, Wau 2; 3 2 B, Y and Z, f and d, w 3), [Cornell Univ.]. St. Simon’s Island, VIII, 30, 1911, (R. & H.; in live oak forest very common in areas of Helianthemum carolinianum), 23 oc, 23 9, 1 juv. 3, (AW, a but 2 occasionally b, z, 2 to 4; 1 9 BZgv 3); IX, 4, 1909, (J. C. Bradley), 2 7,1 9, (co AVfv 1; 9 BZdv1), [Ga. State Cln.]. Cumberland Island, VIII, 31, 1911, (R. & H.), 2 9, (A, V and W, b and d, u 3). Fargo, VIII, 31, 1913, (J. C. Bradley), 1 9,1 juv. #7, (9 BYdv3), [Cornell Univ.]. Chester, IX, 7, 1904, 1 o&, (AWau 3), [Ga. State Cln.]. 21 Recorded by the authors as Gryllus neglectus. ee SS 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307 Thomasville, III, 18 to XI, 30, 1903 and 1904, (H.: for H.), 20 #7, 17 2 ,* (# AW, a or d, u v and x, a to g, u to z, 2 to 4 averaging 6; 2 Ato B, W Y and Z, a to g, u to z, 2 to 4). Bainbridge, IX, 17 to X, 19, 1910, (J. C. Bradley), 1, (AWau 3), Ga. State Cln.]. Spring Creek, Decatur County, VII, 16 to 28, 1912, (J. C. Bradley), 1 of, 2juv. 9, (f# AWav 3; juv. BZ), [Ga. State Cln.]. Florida. Jacksonville, VIII, 10 and 25, 1905 and 1911, (R. & H.),1 #,% 2 2, (co AWdu 2; 1 9 AWbu 2; 1 2 BYdv 3). Atlantic Beach, VIII, 24, 1911, (R. & H.), 1 &#, 4 2, 1 juv. 9, (1 #7 1 @Q A, reddish Ydw 3,3 9 AWYdw 3; juv. BZ with dorsal postocular bar also). Pablo Beach, IX, 5 and 27, 1913, (W. T. Davis) 3 o,3 9, (AtoB, V to suffused Z, d to weakly f, v, 12 to 3), [Davis Cln.]. . Burnetts Lake, XI, 19, 1911, (W. T. Davis), 2 92, (A to AB, W, a and d, u and v, 2 and 23), [Davis Cln.]. Gainesville, VIII, 16 and 17, 1905, (R. & H.; pine woods) 2 o7,”4 1 juv. o&', (co A and AB, W and WY, d and df, u and w, 3; juv. EFZ). Live Oak, VIII, 26, 1911, (R. & H.), 1 @,2 9, (A, reddish Y and Z, d and f, w and u 3). Lakeland, XI, 8 to 17, 1911, (W. T. Davis), 3 0, 3 2,5 (of A, W Y and Z, a and d, u and v, 23 and 4; 9? A and B, W and Y, b and f, u and v, 2 and 3), [A. N. 8. P. and Hebard Cln.]. Tampa, I, 16, 1904, (H.), 1 @#, 1 9,76 (AWdv 3). Braidentown, 1 2, (B but head black, Zev 3), [A. N.S. P.]. Punta Gorda, XI, 13 to 16, 1911, (W. T. Davis), 1 o&, 4 9,?’ (o' AXdv 1; 1 9 AXby 1; 3 9 BZgv, 1 to 3), [A. N.S. P. and Hebard Ciln.}. Chokoloskee, IV and V, 1903, 2 @,1 9 28 (AWdu 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Everglade, V, 1912, (W. T. Davis), 1 9 ,” (BZew 1), [Hebard Cln.]. South Bay, Lake Okeechobee, IV, 30, 1912, (W. T. Davis), 1 9 ,® (AWau 3), [A. N.S. P.]. Miami, II, 6 to VIII, 21, 1904 to 1910, (H.: for H.), 11 o@, 11 9, 3 juv. o',*! (97 A, W to Z, a and d, u to x, 1 to 5; 9 A to B, W to Z, b to g, u to x, 2 to 3).” 2 The majority recorded by the authors as Gryllus rubens, the others as Gryllus pennsylvanicus and luctuosus. ® Recorded by the authors as Gryllus rubens. 4 Thid. % Recorded as Gryllus firmus and rubens by the authors. 26 Recorded as Gryllus rubens by the authors. 27 Recorded by the authors as Gryllus firmus. 28 Recorded by the authors as Gryllus rubens. 27 Recorded by the authors as Gryllus firmus. *® Recorded as Gryllus rubens by the authors. . * Recorded as Gryllus firmus and rubens by the authors. * The extremes of this series show, even for this plastic species, unusual con- trast. * 308 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Homestead, III, 17 to 19, 1910, (H.) 2 juv. o&, 1 juv. 9; VII, 10 to 12, 1912, (R. & H.), 2 71,8 (1 AWdu 3; 1 AZgu 2). Detroit, VII, 12, 1912, (R. & H.), 1 9,34 (BZew 2). Jewfish, VII, 11, 1912, (H.; in cracks of sun-baked marsh soil), 20,1 2,% (% AZd, u and w, 2 and 3; 9 BZdw 2). Long Key, III, 13, 1910, (H.), 1 juv. o7,8° (B with dorsal post- ocular bar, Z). Key West, III, 15 and 16, 1910, VII, 3 to 7, 1912,-(H.: R. & H.), 43,3 9,2juv. 9,3” (BZ, d tog, w, 3 to 2). Indiana. Crawford County, V, 26, 1902, IX, 9, 1903, (W. 8. Blatchley), 1 #, 1 2, (AWd, w and x, 3 and 4), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. Sta.); V, 27, 1904, 1 &, (AUax 4), VI, 20, 1902, (both W. S. Blatchley), oe gas of Gryllus americanus Blatchley, (AVax 3), [both A. N. a A Posey County, V, 12, 1903, (W. S. Blatchley), 1 2, (AUay 34), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. ’Sta.]. Michigan. Pequaming, VII, 22 to IX, 1, 1903, (H.), 3507, 219% ‘(Gag ng 4;1¢ AUbw 4: others, x AV, aord,w4; 9 AVb, w to A). iin Lake, VII, 13 to 26, 1912, (M. A. Carriker, Jr.), 1 9, 2 juv. oc, ljuv. 2, (9 "AZex 4), (Hebard Cln.]. Illinois. Chicago, LX, 9, 1903, (H.; in waste field), 2 o’, 2 9, (co AVaw 4; Q AVex 4). Moline, VI, 11, to X, 15, (J. T. McNeill), 1 o', 2 2, (oe AVaw 3; 1 9 AVbw 2: 1 9 Aeu 3), {[Hebard Cln.]. Dubois, VI, 21, 1905, (C. A. Hart), 1 9, (AUay 3), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. Sta.]. Missouri. St. Louis, VIII, 27, 1904, (H.; in waste field), 1 9 ,° (AVax 2); X, 22, 1905, (C. L. Heink), 1 9, (AWew 2), [Hebard Cln.]. ° Tennessee. Nashville, 1 2, (AVWdw 2), [Hebard Cln.]. ® Recorded as Gryllus rubens and firmus by the authors. *4 Recorded by the authors as Gryllus firmus. % Thid. 36 Thid. 37 [hid. 78 Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus pennsylvanicus. %° Recorded as Gryllus pennsylvanicus by the authors. 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309 Mississippi. Agricultural College, V, 1893, (H. E. Weed), 1 &, (A but margins of pronotum pale, Ygw 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Wiggins, IV, 18, (F. M. Jones), 1 o&, 2 9, 2 juv. 6, 1 juv. 9, (icc', 1 2 AYeow 3: 1 9 AWeu 3), [A. N.S. P.]. Biloxi, HiT, 2 to IV, 24, (F. M. Jones), 20, 4 9,(1 &o AWby 3; lg AWadw 4: 1 9 AYdw 3; 1 2 AWew 3; 2 2 AZgw 2), [A. N S. P.]. Manitoba. Aweme, VI, 21 and IX, 12 to 23, 1909, (N. Criddle), 8 #, 4 9, (co A, UV to VW, a, w to x, 4; 2 A, UV to strong W, a and b, x and y, 4), [Hebard Cln.]. Nebraska. West Point, V, 4 to LX, 1, (L. Bruner), 11 0, » (co AVa, v and w, 2 to 4, majority 3: 5 9 AY, a and b, w seats thet 2 9 AWgy 3), (Hebard Cln.]}. South Bend, V, 1 o’, 1 9, (A, UV, a and b, w and x, 3); VIII, 11, 1910, (L. Bruner), 1 2, (AWbw 3), [all Hebard Cln.]. Lincoln, V to IX, mainly 1893, (L. Bruner), 24 o, 14 2, 1 juv. o', (oo AV, a and d, v and w, 2to3; 2? A, Vto VW, atod,uvtoy, 2 to 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Valentine, 1 &, (AVay 4), [Hebard Cln.]. Dismal River, VII, 1 9, (AWXbu 3), [Hebard Cln.]. aa City, VI, 1 ¢#,1 2, (AUVa, w and x, 3 and 4), [Hebard Cln.]. Broken Bow, VII, 4, 1889, 1 ¢#, 1 9, (#@ AUVaw 3; 2 AVbu 3), {[Hebard Cln.]. Sioux City, V, 1 o&, (AWdy 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Squaw Cajfion, Sioux County, VII, 1892, 1 #7, 6 2, (c@ AVXaz 3; 9 A, V to W and to X, ab 3), [Hebard Cln.]. War Bonnet Cafion, Sioux County, 1 7,2 9, (@7AVdw4; 92 AV, a and e, y 4), [Hebard Cln.]. Towa. Iowa City, VIII, 1889, (B. Shimek), 1 9 , (AWey 2), [Hebard Cln.]. Kansas. Topeka, (F. W. Cragin), 3 o, 1 9, (A, W and V, a and b, w and x, 3 and 2), [Hebard Cln.]. Barber County, (F. W. Cragin), 1 o, 1 juv. 9, (co AWaw 3; juv. D, darkened Z, 2), [Hebard Cln.].. Dodge City, IX, 13, 1909, (H.; grass prairie), 3 co’, 1 9,(c@ A, V to W, ax,2to3; 9 A with ventral portion of face with pale markings, strongly W, ew 2). “Tn part resorted as Gryllus pennsylvanicus form neglectus by the authors. 310 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Garden City, (F. W. Cragin), 1 9, (AYgw 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Syracuse, 3230 feet, LX, 12, 1909, (R. & H.; grass prairie), 1 9, (AWaby 2). Wyoming. Pine Bluff, 1 &, 4 2, (A, V to strongly W, a, w to y, 4 and 5), {[Hebard Cln.]. Worland, VII, (L. Bruner), 1 9, (AVbx 2),,{[Hebard Cln.]. Sheridan, VII, 27, 1909, (R.; hills with secant grass), 1 o’, 5 9. (co AVaw 3; 9 A, Vto W, d tof, xy, 3 to 4). Mammoth Hot Springs, Yellowstone National Park, VIII, 5. 1904, (H.: in hot spring), 1 9 ,“! (AWfy 4). Idaho. Pocatello, 1 9, (AUdu 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Ceeur d’Alene, VII, 31, 1889, 1 @, (A, reddish Z, dx 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Colorado. Julesburg, 3460 feet, VII, 29, 1910, (R. & H.), 1 9, (AUVaw 3); VIII, 4, 1899, 1 o, (AV aw oy: [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. Sta.]. Merino, VIII, 6, 1902, 2 2, (AWby 34), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. Sta.]. Akron, VII, 1891, 2 9, (AVW, b and f, u 3), oe Cln.] Brush, VIII, 24, 1904, (H.; weeds on prairie), 1 2 ,42 (AWabz 3). Greeley, i. 4, 1902, 1 9, (AWbx 2), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. Sta.]. Fort Collins, VA, 10 to x, 6, 1898 to 1903, 9 o', 4 9, (A, very strongly W to WV, abd and e, w to y, 2 to 34), [Colo. St. "Agr. Exp. Sta.]. Boulder, VIII, 1908, (G. von Krockow), 1 o’, (AVaw 2), [A. M N. H.]; X, 29, 1904, (T. D. A. Cockerell), 1 9; (AWabz 3), [A. N ae ail 8 Denver, III, 21, (Beale), 1 #, 1 9, (oh AUVaw 2; 9 EZeu 23); 1 2, (AWeu 3), (all Hebard Cin]. C ‘olorado Springs, 1 co’, 2 9, (A, V and UV, a, w and y, 23 to 4), {[Hebard Cln.]. Holly, IX, 8, 1898, 1 9, (AWaw 2), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. Sta.]. Lamar, IX, 10, 1898, 1 9, (AWaw 2), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp.,Sta.]. La Junta, VII, 16, 1901, 3 9, (EZfu 5), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. Sta.]; 4045 feet, IX, 11, 1909, (R. & H.; at light), 2 7,2 9, (1 # AVdu 2; 1 o A, reddish Z, gu 3; 9 AVau 2). Pueblo, IX, 25, 1901, 1 2, (AWax 2), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. Sta.]. Antonito, VIII, 6, 1899, 1 9, (AVWex 4), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. Sta.]. Grand Junction, V, 25, 1900, 1 9, (AVgu 34), [Colo. St. Agr. Exp. Sta.]. “ Recorded as Gryllus pennsylvanicus by the authors. © Ibid. ; ; j 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 311 Texas. Galveston, VII, 19 to 21, 1912, (H.), 1 #7, 2 9, (& AWaw 3; @ AB and B, Y and Z, e and g, w, 2 and 23). Virginia Point, VII, 21, 1912, (H.; under boards in tall salt marsh grasses), 1 o’, 1 2, (o& AWax 2; 2 A but mouth parts pale, bx 2). Dickinson, VII, 20, 1912, (H.; undergrowth of pine woods), 1 o, (dark B, dark Y, dw 3). Rosenberg, VII, 25 and 26, 1912, (H.), 1 #, 1 9, (& AUaw 2; ° B, suffused Z, ew 2). College Station, VIIT, 22, 1903, 1 9, (A, suffused Z, eu, 1), [Hebard Cln.]. Washington County, IV, 1 2, (AWdz 6), [Hebard Cln.]. Victoria, VII, 26 and 27, 1912, (H.), 1 9, (AVbu 2). Beeville, VII, 28, 1912, (H.), 1 9, (AVWeu 3). Corpus Christi, VII, 29, 1912, (H.), 1 o&, (AVau 3). Brownsville, VII, 31 to VIII, 5, 1912, (H.; at light), 4 7,6 9, (1 oA, suffused Z, au 2; 1 &@ AVdu 2; 1 o& A, suffused W, du 3; 1 # EZgu 2; 3 2 weakly B, strongly suffused Z, bu 2; 2 9 AUbu, 3 and 34; 1 2 EZeu 2). Shovel Mountain, Burnet County, IX, 5 and X, 4, 1901, (F. G. Schaupp), 3 7,4 2, (A to weakly B, strongly suffused Z, d and e, u, 2 to 23); XII, 20, 1901, (F. G. Schaupp), 1 2, (AWax 4), [all A. N. S. P.]. Tiger Mills, (F. G. Schaupp), 1 2, (AX Vay 34), [Hebard Cln.]. San Antonio, IV to VI, 1885, (M. Newell), 1 #7, 9 2, 3 juv. J, (of AWXaw 3; 3 92 A, V to suffused W, b, u and v, 2; 1 @ weakly B, reddish Y, eu 2; 5 9 A, W to WX, a, y and z, 4), [Hebard Cln.]. Carrizo Springs, V and X, 1 to 25, 1885, (A. Wadgymar), 6 <, 7 2,3 juv. 7,3 juv. 2, (1 @ A but lateral lobes of pronotum pale, heavily suffused Z, du 2; 1 o A, heavily suffused Z, du 3; 4 o@ A, V to W,y 4; 2 B, reddish Z, e, uand x to y, 3 to 2; 1 juv. o, 2 juv. 9, AV; 2juv. o, 1 juv. 9, BY), [Hebard Cln.]. : Laredo, VIII, 10 to 12, 1912, (R. & H.), 1 9, (EZfu 2). Del Rio, VIII, 22 to 23, 1912, (R. & H.; at light), 5 o, 16 9, (27,3 2 EZfu 2; 3 #13 2 A with pronotum with lateral lobes occasionally slightly margined with pale, V to much suffused reddish Z,abdeand g, u, 23 to 34). Mission, VIII, 26 and 27, 1912, (R. & H.), 2 9, (1 2 D, suffused Y, du 3; 1 92 E, little suffused Z, cu 2). Hackberry Creek, Brewster County, IX, 2, 1912, (R. & H.), 1 o#, (AU Xax 3). Dog Cajion, Brewster County, IX, 3, 1912, (R. & H.), 1 co, (DE, suffused Z, dw 3). Moss Well, Chisos Mountains, 4500 feet, IX, 5 to 8, 1912, (R. & H.; occasional in grasses, 2 at light, song a quick, short chirping), l o', 2.9, (AVXa, x and y, 3). Cafion behind Pulliam Bluff, Chisos Mountains, 4600 to‘5000 feet, IX, 7, 1912, (R. & H.), 2 #, (AUXaw 3). 312 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Franklin Mountains near El Paso, VII, 11, 1907, (R. & H.; arid mesa slopes among stones), 1 o&, 1 9, 2 juv. 9, (co AVXow 3; 2 B, suffused reddish Z, by 23; juv. Z, 2 and 3); VIU, 20, 1905, (R. & H.), 3 2, (1 9 AWdu 3; 1 Q B, suffused reddish Z, du 3; 1 2 EZeu 2); IX, 16, 1912, (H.; at base, light at night), 8 7,10 9, 1 juv. o, (co A, suffused W to suffused Z, a and d, u, 3 to 34; 8 Q A, UV to strongly W and suffused reddish Z, a and d, u, 23 to 3; 2 2 EZfu, 3 and 23; juv. EZ with barred abdomen). El Paso, IX, 16, 1912, (R. & H.; river bottom lands), 2 7, (1 a A, much suffused reddish Z, du 23; 1 @ weak B, WZgu 3). New Mevico. Gallifas Cafion, San Miguel ee (EH. J. Oslar), f.c", bee (AVa, x and y, 4 and a4), [A. N. 8..P.]. Roswell, VII, 1902, (T: D. A, eel at light), 1 o, (AVdu 23), [A. N.S. P.]. Jemez Hot Springs, 6400 feet, V, 17 to VIII, 18, 1913, (J. Wood- gate), 3 0°, 9 2, (a A, UV to V, ax 4; 2 A, 'U to VW, a but le, y to yz, 34 to 4), [Hebard Cln.]. Albuquerque, 1888, (F. H. Wickham), 1 07, 2 2, (co AXd, y for this sex, 3; 1 9 AWby 3; 1 9 AWgz 34), [Hebard Cln.]; 1902, (T. D. A. Cockerell), 1 2, type of Gryllus alogus Rehn, (C but pro- notum all black, reddish Y, ex 3), (A. N.S. P’]. Fort Wingate, III, 27 to VIII, 14, 1908 and 1910, (J. Woodgate), 6 6, 12 9, 1 juv. J, 2 juv. @, (4 cA, Ute y, a and d, x, 23 to 3; lo A, strongly W, d, z for this sex,4; lo A but mouth parts pale, reddish Z, d, z for this sex, 4; Q A but mouth parts pale in 2 small pale specimens, V and W and X to reddish Z, X to extreme Z, 2 to extreme 5; juv. A, V and greatly suffused Z),44 [Hebard Cln.]. Cloudcroft, 8600 feet, VII, 15, 1907, (H.; under stone, stridulating at night), 1 o,* (AVax 4). Highrolls, 7000 feet, V, 31 to VI, 13, 1902, (H. L. Viereck), 3 o’, AD, 4 ay.i25% Cog AVa, x and y for this sex, 23; 9 A, V to WX, a, y and z, 2 to 23: juvy. AV), [A. N.S. P.]. Alamogordo, IV, 25, 1902, (R.), 1 juv. Cpe (EZ 5 but with body barred); VII, 12 and 13, 1907, (R. & H.; in dead yucca on desert and at light), 4 J,49,8(c7 A but mouth ‘parts slightly pale, greatly suffused reddish Z, d, w and x, 34 and 3; 3 @ similar but a,e and suffused g, y 3; 1 2 AVau 2); (G. von Krockow), 1 oy 1 9) (dark reddish brown, reddish Z, d and g, 3), [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus pennsylvanicus. 44In some features this series shows greater variability than any other before us from the southwestern United States. % Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus pennsylvanicus. 46 Recorded as Gryllus integer by Rehn. 47 Recorded as Miogryllus lineatus by Rehn. 48 Recorded by the authors as Gryllus alogus but one female as Gryllus pennsyl- vanicus. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 513 Las Cruces, VIII, 7, 1 &, (B, suffused Z, gu 3), [A. N.S. P.]. Aden, 4300 feet, VII, 21, 1907, (H.; under stones on desert hillside and on grass prairie), 1 o, 1 2, 1 juv. o&, (A but mouth parts reddish, suffused reddish Z, d and e, y 3; juv. EZ 3 but with body barred). Deming, VII, 19, 1907, (R. & H.; at light),27,3 9%*2cel 9? A, WX and suffused reddish Z, a and dg, u and x, 3; 2 9 B, suffused reddish Z, gu 3). Lordsburg, at 4500 feet, X, 15, 1910, (R. & H.; eroded cracks on bare plain), 1 2, (EZfu 23). Nevada. Las Vegas, 2026 feet, VIII, 9, 1907, (R. & H.; in crack in building), 1 &, (head dark brown with mouth parts paler, rest of insect uni- form pale brown, w 3); LX, 1 and 2, 1909, (R. & H.; at light), 13 7, 15 2, (11 #@ A but palest examples with mouth parts slightly pale, WX and reddish suffused Z, a to de, u, 3 to 34; 6 2 A, WX and reddish suffused Z, au 3; 4 2 A, suffused Z, dgu 3; 3 Q weakly B, weakly suffused Z, dg to g,u 3; 272 2 E, Zand Y, d and f, u 3). Arizona. Flagstaff, VII, 5, 1892, 1 9, (A, reddish Z, az 34), [Hebard Cln.]; VII, 12 and 13, 1902, (E. J. Oslar), 9 9, (1 9 AVWav 23; 1 9 EYecu 2; 7 9 EZ, f and g, u 2), [A. N.S. P.]. Pheenix, IV, 23, 1902, (E. J. Oslar), 1 #7, 2 9,2 (o% EZgu 2; 2° BZgu 3), [A. N.S. P.]; VI, 18 to XI, 18, 1899 to 1901, (R. E. Kunzé), 6 7,19 9,8 (1 # AVdu 3; 1 @ D but no postocular bar, Zdgu 3; 2 co Ydul; 2 & EZ, d and dg, u2; 2 9 AVdu 3; 5 9 weakly B, reddish Z, dg, u and be, y 3; 1 9 EYbu 2; 11 @ EZ, f and g, u, 2 to 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Florence, VI, 8, 1903, (C. R. Biederman), 4 juv. 7, 2 juv. @ 3! VII, 17 to IX, 15, 1903, (C. R. Biederman), 1 o', 4 9,= (1 oc A, reddish Z, du 3; 2 2 A with mouth parts slightly pale, X Yeu 3; 1 2 B, reddish Z, dgu 3; 1 9 EZgu 2), [fall A. N.S. P.]. Tueson, 2400 feet, VII, 23 to 26, 1907 and X, 4, 1910, (R. & H.; at lights in streets), 18 7, 16 2,59 (1 @ 1 9 B, reddish Z, d and e, u2; 1706015 9 DtoF, YZ to Z, d tog, u, 12 to 2). San Bernardino Ranch, Cochise County, 3750 feet, VIII, 49 Recorded by the authors as Gryllus alogus. © Recorded by the authors as Gryllus armatus. 5t Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus personatus, but one female as Gryllus pennsyl- vanicus. ® Recorded as Gryllus personatus by Rehn. ® Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus personatus, armatus and alogus. 5 Recorded as Miogryllus lineatus by Rehn. ‘ % Recorded in part by Rehn as Gryllus pennsylvanicus and personatus, 56 Recorded in part by Rehn and Hebard as Gryllus personatus and armatus. 314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |May, 1905, (F. H. Snow), 1 o, 1 92,57 (co B, weakly suffused Z, gu 3; 9 AWYdu 3), [A. N.S. P.]. Carr Canon, Huachuca Mountains, VIII, 1905, (H. Skinner), 20,7 29, (2 074 9 DE and E, suffused Z to Z, d and e, u, 3 to 2; 3 2 A but mouth parts pale reddish, reddish Y and Z, byz, 3 and 34), [A. N.S. P.]. Palo Alto Rancho, Altar Valley, + 3000 feet, X, 10, 1910, (H.; small meadow in tall grass clumps), 1 co’, (DEYdv 3). Sentinel, X, 2, 1910, 686 feet, (R. & H.; under boards at night), 3 o', 4 9, (D to DE, Y, d and e, u but 1 9 v, 2to3; 1o 1 QA, weakly reddish X, a and b, u 34) Yuma, VII, 27, 1907 and X, 1, 1910, (R. & H.; at lights in streets), 22 o, 84 2,» (22 & 81 2 weakly to very strongly B to a maximum condition in which the entire pronotum is pale, greatly suffused reddish Y to reddish Z, a to g, u but 1 &@ w, 23 to 4; 3 2 EZeu 23). British Columbia. (G. W. Taylor), 1 9, (AWay 4), [Hebard Cln.]. Washington. Yakima, (C. V. Piper), 1 9, 2 juv. 9, (1 9 AVbv 3; juv. AY), {[Hebard Cln.]. Oregon. (Washburn), 3 o', 4 2, (8 & 3 @ A, U to UV, a and d, u but 1 2 y, 23 to 4; 1 2 weakly B, yellowish Z, yellowish g, y 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Portland, VI, 19, 1882, 1 9, (AVW, weakly f, x 34), [Hebard Cln.]. California. Amador County, 2 &, (AVXdv 01), [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.]. El Portal, Mariposa County, 3200 feet, VIII, 30, 1907, (H.),1 0 (AVXav 3). : Sacramento, VIII, 26, 1910, (R. & H.; at light in streets), 11 0, 30 2, (A, U UX and VX, d but with extremes from a to dg, u, — 2 to 4). San Francisco, (L. E. Ricksecker), 1 9, (weakly B, VXev 02), [A. N.S. P.]. West Berkeley, VIII, 20, 1897, (A. P. Morse), 1 &, cotype of Gryllus integer Scudder, (AVXdu 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Santa Barbara, VIII, 21, 1909, (H.; in grasses at night and under stone, noisy singing day and night), 3 #7, 1 9, (2 7 AWXgu 3; > 1o¢1 9 D4Zu, 23 and 4). Santa Rosa Island, 1 #, (AVXdu 34), [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.]. 5? Recorded by Rehn, male as Gryllus personatus, female as Gryllus armatus. °8 Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus personatus and alogus. °® Recorded in part by the authors as Gryllus armatus. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 315 Los Angeles, VII, 1886, 1 &, 2 2, (A, VX and suffused reddish Z, dg and g, u, 23 and 4), [Hebard Cln.]. Pasadena, VI, 8, 1907, (F. Grinnell Jr.), 1 &@, (AWXadv 3), [A. N.S. P.]; VIII, 1, 1907, 824 feet, (R. & H.), 1 o&, (CZgv 23). Santa Monica, VIII, 1, 1906, (F. Grinnell, Jr.), 1 juv. 2, (B with abdominal segments suffused with buff, limbs all buff), [A. N.S. P.]. Avalon, Santa Catalina Island, VIII, 3, 1907, (H.; at light), 1 o&, (AVXdu 3). Claremont, (C. F. Baker), 1 o7,® (AVbdv 3), [A. N. 8. P.]. San Diego, VII, 28, 1901, (G. W. Dunn), 1 7," (CYdu 023), [A. N.S. P.]. Coronado Beach, VIII, 17, 1907, (H.), 1 o%, (AYdu 023). Tia Juana, VIII, 16, 1907, (H:), 1 &, (CYdu 02). Lyons, San Bernardino County, 2850 feet, VIII, 11, 1907, (H.), 1 J, (all reddish, reddish B, yellowish Z, du 3); IX, 1, 1909, (R. & H.; in bricks), 1 o&, (AVXbu 23). Palm Springs, VII, 13, 1897, (A. P. Morse), 1 , cotype of Gryllus vocalis Scudder, (AXdu 2) [Hebard Cln.]; IX, 28 and 29, 1910, 450 feet, (R. & H.; young everywhere in house between sheets, blankets, ete.,and very destructive), 2 %, 2 juv. &%, (co A, WX and UX, adv, 3 and 4; juv. D with body and limbs yellowish.) Tahquitz Cafion, San Jacinto Mountains, 500 to 1200 feet, LX, 30, 1910, (R. & H.), 1 juv. @, (B with abdominal segments outlined in buff, limbs all buff). Fort Yuma at Colorado, 1 @, (BZdgu 03), [Hebard Cln.]. Mexico. Torreon, Coahuila, X, 30 and XI, 4, 1909, (J. Friesser), 2 9, (1 9 AVau 3; 1 2 ABXdu 023), [Fie ld Mus. Nat. Hist.]. San Miguel, Sonora, IV, 1892, (G. Eisen), 2 9, 1 juv. 9, (AC, Y and Z, dg, u and y, 03 and 4), [Cal. Acad. Sci.]. Comondu, Lower California, III, 1889, (C. D. Haines), 1 @, 1 2 (#% CZgu 02; 2 A but mouth parts reddish, WXdgeu 02), [He bard Cln.]}. San Lazaro, L. Cal., IX, 1894, 1 9, (AC, reddish Z, ey 03), [Hebard Cln.}. San José del Cabo, L. Cal., (G. Eisen), 4 o, 21 9, 2 juv. o’, 2 juv. 9, (B to C, Y to Z, e and g, u, 012 to 03, but 1 o@ A with mouth parts reddish, reddish Z, dy 01), [Cal. Aead. Sci.]. Mazatlan, Sinaloa, (from H. Edwards), 2 9, (1 2 A with reddish mouth parts, Xdu 03; 1 9 BCZey 03), [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.|. Tepic, 1 o&, 2 9, 1 juv. 9, (1 9 1 9 D, yellowish Z, a and b, y and u, 4 and 01; 1 9 ADVYbv 03), [Hebard Cln.]. Guadalajara, Jalisco, VIII, 21 “ a 19, 1903, (J. F. MeClendon) 11 o', 6 9 ;* (D. L. Crawford), ,6 9, (all A to C, VW to Z, d and e, u, 03 to 02), [all A. N. S. ai @ © Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus pennsylv anicus. ‘ * Recorded as Gryllus assimilis by Rehn. 2 Thid. 316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Zapotlanejo, Jal., VII, 31, 1903, (J. F. McClendon), 1 o7,® (A, reddish Y, du 3), [A. N. S. P.]. Tuxpan, Jal., IX, 4, 1903, (J. F. McClendon), 1 2 ,*4 (D, suffused Zz, txy 3),-{A.-N.-5. Pi). Aguascalientes, Aguascalientes, XI, 1887, (L. Bruner), 1 9, (AWdu 03), [Hebard Cln.]. Querétaro, Querétaro, XI, 1887, (L. Bruner), 1 2, (A with mouth parts pa'e reddish, Yeu 3), (Hebard Cin]. Vera Cruz, Vera Cruz, I, 1892, 1 @, 1 2, (B, suffused Y, d and b, u, 03 and 023); (T. Heyde), Poii(B, suffused Y, du 03), {all Hebard Cln.]. Jalapa, V. C., V, 1 2, (DE, yellowish Z, dy 3), [Hebard Cln.]; VIII and IX, (O. W. Barrett), 1 #, 2 2,® (B and BC, suffused Z, de and b, u, 012 to 01), [A. N.S. Pi. Teocelo, V. ree Ix, (O. W. Barrett), 1 o,** (BC, suffused Y, du 012), [A. N.S. P.]. Cordoba, V. C., (H. de Saussure), 1 2, determined as Gryllus mexicanus Saussure by that author, (D, reddish yellow Z, by 3), LAS ps Po: Orizaba, V. C., I and XI, 1892,5 0, 15 9, 1 juv. 9, (A BC and D, VW suffused Y and Y, a b d and, w to u, 4 to 23), [Hebard Cln.]. Motzorongo, V. C., II, 1892 and V, 1893, 3 o’, 2 9, (A to CG, suffused Z, reddish Z V and W, v and u, 34 to 3), [Hebard Cln.]. San Rafael, V. C., (C. H. T. Townsend), 2 9, (D, suffused Z,- efy 3), [Hebard Cln.]. se Buena Ventura near Santa Rosa, V. C., VII, 1909, 2 2, (CDZeu ), {[Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.]. St iericchunia Puebla, II, 20, 1892, 1 9, (DZdy 23), [Hebard Cln.]. Distrito Féderal, VII, 1898, 1 7, 6 9, (A with mouth parts pale, reddish Z, du, 4 to 34), (Hebard Gln. Ip Tacubaya, D. F., II, 1899, 1 9, (AWXdfu 34), [Hebard Cln.]. San Angel, D. F., VII, 28, 1903, (W. L. Tower), 1 9, (A, buffy V, bx 34), [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.]. ‘Cuernavaca, Morelos, V,.22, 1905, (W. L. Tower), 1 9, (C, suffused Z, bu 01), [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.]; VI, (O. W. Barrett), 17,3 2, oS type and 3 2 paratypes of Gryllus barretti Rehn, (1 # A but mouth parts reddish, heavily suffused Z, du 02; 3 2 D, heavily suffused Z, bu 03), [A. Ny BSP: Iguala, Guerrero, IX, 1898, (O. W. Barrett), 1 9, (D, heavily suffused Z, bu 03), [A. N. S. P.]. Cocula, Gro., XII, 1898, (O. W. Barrett), 1 o, 1 2, (D, heavily suffused Z, d and b, u 03), [Ay Ge Sesk ® Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus mexicanus. *4 Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus barretti. > Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus assimilis. 86 [bid. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 317 Yucatan, (Schott), 1 o@, 1 2, (AD, heavily suffused Z, du 02), [A. N.S. P.], (dried alcoholic). Ticul, Yucatan, 1 juv: oc’, fF juv. 2, (juv: o& B), [A. See.) (dried alcoholic). Nicaragua. II, 1893, (B. Shimek), 1 2, (A with mouth parts pale, UXdx 3), (Hebard Cln.}. San Ramon, Rio Wanks, V to VI, 1905, (W. 8. Palmer), 1 =o, (C, suffused Z, dx 03), (Hebard Cln,]. Costa Rica. Caché, 1000 meters, V, 1905, (P. Biolley), 1 @, 1 2, (o& AD, suffused reddish Y, dx 02; Q A with mouth parts pale, Vbu 02), [A. N.S. P.]. San José, II, 1903, (C. F. Underwood), 1 o&, 2 2, (1 @ very strongly C, Z gu 02; 1 9 A with mouth parts pale, heavily suffused Y, bu 02; 1 2 weakly defined D, reddish Z, bxy 3), [Hebard Cln.]. Monte Redondo, Candelaria Mountains, III, 1902, (L. Bruner), 1 &, (B, suffused Y, dgw 034), [Hebard Cln.]. San Vicente, (J. F. Tristan), 1 @, 3 9, (B and weakly defined D, heavily suffused Y, d b and e, w and y, 3 to 4), [A. N.S. P.]. Tablazo, 1900 meters, VII, 1905 to IX, 1906, (P. Biolley), 4 7, 4 2,1 juv. 2, (AB and D, W reddish V and suffused Z, d and b, x and u, 4 to 03), [A. N. S. P.]. P6zo Azul de Pirrfs, (M. A. Carriker, Jr.),3 co, 2 2, (AD and AB, suffused Y, d, u and x, 03 and 023), [Hebard Cln.]. Gulf of Nicoya, 5 9, (AB, heavily suffused Z, ab, u and w, 034 to 01), [Hebard Cln.]. Pacayas, 1430 meters, III, 1906, (P. Biolley), 2 @, 2 9, (B, reddish Y, dv 34), [A. N.S. P.]. Bermuda. St. George Island, IT, 23, 1909, (F. M. Jones), 1 9 ,® (AC, heavily suffused Z, bu 023), [A. N. 8. P.]. Warwick Parish, IV, 11 to V, 9, 1909, (F. M. Jones), 7 o, 14 2,” (A to C, heavily suffused Z to Z, b and d to f, u to w, 45 to 023), [A. N.S. P.]. Paget West, XII, 14, 1908 to V, 9, 1909, (F. M. Jones), 10 o, ae 2," (A to C, heavily suffused Z to Z, d to f, u to w, 5 to 023), A. ie a F Hae Island, Sandys Parish, II, 21, 1912, (M. Hebard), 1 juv. o’, (CV), (Hebard Cln.]. e7 EES as Gryllus barretti by Rehn. *§ Recorded as Gryllodes toltecus by Rehn. * Recorded as Gryllus bermudensis by Rehn. 7 Thid. 1 Thid. 318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Bahamas. Grant Town, New Providence Island, II, 3, 1904, (M. Hebard), 1 #, 2 2,” (strongly C, Zdu 023), [Hebard Cln.]. Cuba. Vinales, Pinar del Rio, IX, 16 to 22, 1913, (Lutz and Leng), 2 9, (DZdu, 03 and 01), [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.]. El Guama, Pinar del Rio, (Palmer and Riley), 2 9, (C and D, Z, d and g, u, 3 and 03), [A. N.S. P.]. Guanajay, Pinar del Rio, V, 6, (Palmer and Riley), 1 2,78 (CD, suffused Z, du 01), [A. N. S. Pi. Havana, I, 1904, (M. Hebard), 1 2,74 (strongly D, Zey 03), [Hebard Cln.]. Francisco, Camaguey, (Mrs. J. 8S. Durham), 1 o, 1 2, (C, Z and suffused Z, ad and ab, u 02), [A. N. 8. P.]. Santiago, Hi 1903, 268), 2(C, suffused Z, du, 02 and 01), [A. N.S. P.]. San Carlos Estate, Guantanamo, X, 4 to 8, 1913, (F. E. Lutz), 3,1 9, (CZ, d and B, u 012), [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.]. Porto Rico. Mayaguez, II, 15 to 16 and VII, 24 to 29, 1914, 2 2, (AD, suffused Z, bu, 012 and ‘01), [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.]. Ponce, VII, 20 to 22, 1914, 1 9, (DZbu 02), [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.]. Jamaica. Montego Bay, X, 29 to XI, 2, 1913, (M. Hebard), 1 9, 1 Juv. 9; XI, 1913 to III, 1914, (C. G. Hussey: Lat light), 3 9, (all G, suffused Y to Z, b to g, u u 012), {all Hebard Cln.]. Lesser Antilles. Roseau, Dominica, VI, 22 to VII, 3, 1911, (Crampton and Lutz), 2 juv. o’, [Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.|, (dried alcoholic). Soufisse, St. Lucia, V, 7, 1903, (H. A. Ballou), 1 9 ,”8 Gam weakly D, suffused Z, dw 03), [A. N. S. Pi. Barbados, IX, 22, 1902 to VI, 2, 1903, (Ballou, Lefroy and Todd), 5 fie ab = | juv. 9.7 (A to C, UZ to Z, ab and d, u to w, 3 to 02), wih S. P.]. 7 Recorded as Gryllus assimilis by Rehn. 73 Recorded as Gryllus capitatus by Rehn. 74 Recorded as Gryllus assimilis by Rehn. 7 Recorded as Gryllus capitatus by Rehn. 76 Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus assimilis. 77 [hid. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 319 Halton, Barbados, X, 25, 1902, (C. Todd), 1 o', 2 9,78 (C and B, Z, d and e, u, 34 to 03), [A. N.S. P.]. Colombia. Cincinnati Plantation near Santa Marta, 4000 to 5000 feet, VII, 9 and 10, 1913, (M. A. Carriker Jr.), 1 ae (A, Roe VW, au 02), |Hebard Cin]. Trinidad. Caparo, VI and VIII, 1913, (S. M. Klages), 7 o#, 9 2, (BC to C, greatly suffused Z to Z, d a and b, u, 023 to 012), [A. N. S. P. and Hebard Cln.]. British Guiana. Bartica, IV, 4, 1901, Gi J. Crew), 1 o%, (A, greatly suffused Y, dx 02); (H.S . Parish), 1 o', (AC, greatly suffused Y, du 02), [all N.S. P.]. Brazil. Para, Parad, (C. F. Baker), 1 @,1 9, (C, Z and suffused Z, weakly f and b, u 02), [A. N. S. P.]. Igarapé Assu, Pard, (H. 8. Parish), 2 2, (A with mouth parts pale, weakly re »ddish W, intense b, u 023), [A. N.S Tijuca, Rio de Janeiro, IV, 9 to iL, 1913, (M. Burr), 5 2, (ADW, strongly b, u 03), [A. N.S. Pil. Rio Grande do Sul, (Dr. Ihering), 1 &, geen Ae Gryllus argentinus Saussure by that author, (AWgv 023), RE Ps ay ge! Paraguay. Sapucay, II, 17 to VII, 1902 and 1905, (W. T. Foster), 3 <7, 592,%(1 01 2 FZgu 023; 1 9 DZgu 02; 2o¢°' 1 9 A with mouth parts weakly reddish, W and X, d and b, @ v 2 u, 023 to 02; 2 9 weakly and strongly C, suffused reddish Y and suffused reddish z, ev, 03 and 02), [Hebard C!n.|. Argentina, Misiones, XII, 30 and I, 1910 and 1911, (P. Jorgensen), 2 9 ,%° (1 ? A with Pees mouth parts suffused reddish Z, eu 03; 1 @ AVbu 02), [A. N. S. P.]. Salta, Salta, 1 ef ; 2, (weakly C, V and WY, d and b, u, 02 and 01), [A. in Pig — Be AP Jujuy, Jujuy, IV, 1911, (P. Jorgensen), 1 9, (AUVbu 02), [A. N. S. P.]. Buenos Aires, (M. G. Claraz), 1 92, cotype of Gryllus argentinus Saussure (AVXcu 012), [A. N. S. P.]. 78 Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus assimilis. ‘ 7? Recorded as Gryllus assimilis and argentinus by Rehn. *© Recorded by Rehn as Gryllus argentinus. 320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, La Combre, Cordoba, (C. Lizer), 2 9, (1 9 AXdw 03; 1 9 AVXew 012), [A. N.S. P.]. Chi eg de Coria, Mendoza, 936 meters, (P. Jorgensen), 1 %, 3 .2,% (1 @ A with mouth parts reddish, dark reddish Z, gw 023; 1 9 AX. intense f, w 02; 2 2 AVXfw 023), [As Wc ells Mendoza, Mendoza, 767 meters, (P. Jorgensen), 1 o7,8* (AUVbu 02), [A. N.S. P.]. Galapagos Islands. Chatham Island, 1 juv. o, 1 juv. 2, (greatly suffused Z), [Hebard Cln.|, (dried alcoholic). Ecuador. Duran, VI, 14 to 24, 1914, (H. S. Parish), 5 o’, 7 9, (C to D with color pattern further defined by longitudinal median occipital lines, greatly suffused Z to Y and Z, d and b, u, 023 to 012), [A. N.S. P.]. Peru. Contamano, Rio Ucayali, X to XII, 1912, 2 9, (1 2 A with mouth parts reddish, VX, intense C, u 02; 1 2 C, reddish Z, dfu 02), [A. N.S. P.]. Chanchamayo, 1 o&, 1 2, (A with mouth parts reddish, dark reddish Z and V, d and b, v and u, 02), [A. N. 8. P.]. Lima, VIII, 19, 1914, (H. S. Parish), 1 co, (pale D, Zdx 02), [A.N. = cel P Chile. Rancagua, O’Higgins, XI, 1903, (C. S. Reed), 5 #7, 3 2, (A, W to deep reddish Z, dg and weakly f, v, 03 to 012), [A. N.S. P.]. Rengo, Colchagua, XII, 1903, (C. S. Reed), 3 #, 2 9, 2 juv. 9, (A, V to suffused Z and reddish Z, df and g, u to x, 03 to 02), [A. N 5S. 24. Concepcion, XI, 1903, (C. S. Reed), 1 #, 2 2, (A, suffused reddish Z, g and fg, v, 03 and 02), [A. N.S. P.]. Gultso, XI, 1903, (C. S. Reed), 1 #, 1 @, (A, X and V, dg and f, v 012), {A. N.S: P21. Gryllus domesticus Linnzus. 1758. [Gryllus (Acheta)] domesticus Linnzeus, aa Nat., ed. X, I, p. 428. (Europe, in walls of houses.] The present species is readily distinguished from all manifestations of G. assimilis by its more slender form and distinctive color pattern. The titillatores of the male are also distinctive and may be described as follows: the corneous portion constitutes a thin plate, semi- circular in transverse section, with distal margin weakly produced meso-dorsad and broadly obtuse-angulate with weakly concave 31 Recorded # Rehn as Gryllus argentinus. 82 [hid. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 321 sides; below the ventro-lateral margins of this portion on each side, rests a somewhat more thickened, narrow, corneous plate which is exteriorly. nearly horizontal at the base, but produced and upeurved with blunt apex reaching a little distad of the apex of the dorsal portion, inside at the juncture with the dorsal portion this ventro- lateral portion is strongly concave thus forming claw-like projections which hold in the seminal sac without pressing upon it at any point. (See Plate IV, figs. 11 and 12.) The species has been accidentally introduced by man from Europe and is now widely distributed through temperate North America. It has in the past been recorded from Montreal, Quebec; Connecti- cut; New York, New York; New Brunswick, New Jersey; Ohio; Lexington, Kentucky; West Terre Haute, Indianapolis and Putnam County, Indiana; Moline and Urbana, Illinois; Minnesota, and Omaha, Nebraska. The insect inhabits dwellings, greenhouses, etc., where it is some- times found in large numbers. The species is decidedly more alert and active than assimilis, in its movements more nearly resembling the extremely rapid Gryllodes sigillatus, which tropical species also appears to prefer the proximity of man. The series recorded below are in general coloration yellowish brown, the specimens from Chicago, Illinois, and Albany, Georgia, are slightly darker than normal with caudal femora weakly suffused. Specimens Examined: 27; 7 males, 14 females, 2 immature males and 4 immature females. West Farms, New York, 1 9, (U.S. N. M.]. Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, XI, 18, 1 juv. o, [Pa. State .Dept. Zool.|. Pitladelohia, Pa., IX, 30, 1914, (E. R. Casey; on Logan Square), 1 9, (Casey Cln.]. West Philadelphia, Pa., IX, 14 and 16, 1901, (W. Stone; in house) eo’, 2°78, ojyuv. 2, (A. N.S. P.]. Carolina, 1 9, [(U. S. N. M.]. Roswell, Georgia, (King), 1 o&, [U. S. N. M.]. Albany, Ga., VIII, 1, 1913, (H.; under sign on oak tree), 1 juv. 9. Thomasville, Ga., [V, 1901, (H.; in house on lamp shade at night), 1 9. Utaw, Alabama, 2 9, [(U. S. N. M.]. Chicago, Illinois, (W. J. Baumgartner; in greenhouse), 1 @, 1 9, A Deb St. Anthony Park, Minnesota, IX, 9, 1896, (O. Lugger), 1 9, ({Hebard Cln.]. i Lincoln, Nebraska, 1 9; V, 18, 1901, (M. Cary; at light), 1 9, {both Hebard Cln.]. 21 ’ 322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, San Antonio, Texas, 1885, (M. Newell), 2° 2, [Hebard Cln.]. Laredo, Tex., VIII, 12, 1912, (H.; very common in town and exceedingly active, always in inaccessible holes and dark places in — stores, walls, etc.), 2 co’, 1 juv. of. PLaTE IV. _The outlines are very greatly enlarged, the stipple figures over twice natural size. ° 1. Gryllus assimilis (Fabricius), assimilis variant. Tia Juana, California. Male. Dorsal view of head. 2. Gryllus assimilis (Fabricius), personatus variant. Tucson, Arizona. Male. Dorsal view of head. 3. outs creme Linnzeus. San Antonio, Texas. Female. Dorsal view of head. 4. Gryllus assimilis (Fabricius), mexicdnus variant. Chalchicomula, Mexico. Facial aspect. 5. Gryllus assimilis (Fabricius), personatus variant. Sentinel, Arizona. Male. Facial aspect. 6. Gryllus assimilis (Fabricius), personatus variant. Tucson, Arizona. Female. Facial aspect. ; ; 7. Gryllus assimilis (Fabricius), personatus variant. Tucson, Arizona. Male. Facial aspect... 8. Gryllus assimilis (Fabricius), pennsylvanicus variant. Raleigh, North Carolina. Lateral outline of male titillatores. 9. Gryllus assimilis (Fabricius), pennsylvanicus variant. Raleigh, North Carolina. Ventral outline of male titillatores. 10. Gryllus domesticus Linnzeus. San Antonio, Texas. Female. Facial aspect. 11. Gryllus domesticus Linnzus. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. Lateral outline of male titillatores. 12. Gryllus domesticus Linnzeus. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. Ventral outline of male titillatores. The similarity between the mexicanus variant and darkest examples of the personatus variant are shown by figs. 4 and 5. In the personatus variant every condition between figs. 5 and 7 is found in the material before us, though the great majority of specimens show the strongly defined color pattern. The male titillatores are, in all the variants of assimilis, as shown in figs. 8 and 9. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 323 MOLLUSCA OF THE SOUTHWESTERN STATES, VI: THE HACHETA GRANDE, FLORIDA, AND PELONCILLO MOUNTAINS, NEW MEXICO. BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. l. Tue Bic Hacuer Mowunrains. The Big Hachet (or Hacheta Grande) Mountains are a short range in southern New Mexico in sight of the Mexican boundary. They may be reached from the station of Hachita, on the El Paso and Southwestern R. R., where provisions can be obtained. Water must be hauled in, unless the prospecting in progress at the time of our visit resulted in a successful well. There are no trails in the mountains. The extreme northern end of the range remains to be worked conchologically, as we could not reach it from our camp. A visit should be planned much earlier or later than ours (August), in order to have the advantage of what rain there is and also to avoid the excessive heat. The highest peak, Hacheta Grande, has an elevation of about 8,500 ft., and is considerably higher than any other in the group. Several large canyons dissect the range, two of them forming broad basins. There are no springs in the range, but sometimes after the infre- quent rains a little water remains for a time in rocky basins in narrow canyons. We found one such hole containing about half a barrel. It was foul with drowned insects, yet most welcome, as our canteens were dry, towards the end of a two-day trip to Big Hachet Mountain. The colonies of snails here as in other desert mountains are usually of small area. As the mountains are uninhabited and too dry for cattle ranges, there are few local place names and no roads or ranches to aid in locating collecting points. In the absence of any topo- graphic map, wereproduce a rough map made from our field notes, which should enable anyone to exactly locate nearly every colony of snails found. For convenient reference we have named several promi- nent landmarks, such as Daniels Mountain,' the highest peak north- ward as seen from Sheridan Canyon, and Teocalli Butte, west of our camp, both being inhabited by special races of snails. o = — —_ — 1 Named for the writer’s companion on this somewhat arduous trip. 324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, The Big Hachets are without timber. Only the higher peaks are in the pinyon zone. ‘There are some scrubby cedars and old gnarled pinyon pines, nowhere numerous. On some of the higher slopes of Hacheta Grande Mt. there is a growth of very small scrub oak, sometimes so close as to impede travel, as it is mingled with a broad-leaved, black-spined agave. Elsewhere a small agave with white filaments is very abundant. There is also an agave zone surrounding the mountains, bounded outwardly by the zone of giant yuceas, both usual on the slopes leading to the mountains in this part of New Mexico. South of Daniels Peak the higher hills and buttes usually have Fouquieria and its characteristic society. The rock is hard limestone worn into holes and points, and containing few ill-preserved fossils, among which a Zaphrentis-like coral, crinoid stems and a spiral univalve are most abundant. Rattle- snakes, large centipedes, tarantulas and small brown scorpions are reasonably abundant. Birds and mammals are scarce, and owing to the absence of springs, the mountains are not available for cattle range. During the time we were there (August 20 to 26, 1910) the heat was intense from sunrise until after 9 P.M. Sky cloudless until midday, when small clouds gather, possibly covering 10 p. c. of the sky. There was very little wind. The annual rainfall is not known, but must be less than 9 or 10 inches, recorded from the region immediately northward. Previous to the visit of Mr. L. E. Daniels and the writer, in August, 1910, the mollusks of these mountains had been collected by Dr. Edgar A. Mearns, U.S. A., while serving on the survey of the Mexican boundary. Dr. Mearns started from Mesquite or Mosquito Springs, Chi- huahua, 6 or 8 miles east of the mouth of Sheridan Canyon. Enter- ing Thomson Canyon, he turned southward to get a practicable grade for mules up the steep ridge terminating in Daniels Peak. Passing near or over the summit he camped at its north end. From here his route lay along the ridge to the summit of Big Hachet Mt.; thence eastward to near our Station 9, south past our Station 8, and back to camp, as plotted on the map, where his route is approximately indi- cated by small crosses.2_ On this trip collections were made between camp and the first rise indicated on the map, on the out-journey to the peak, and somewhere between our Stations 9 and 8 on the return. * We would here acknowledge Dr. Mearns’ kindness in plotting his route on our map and giving the above details of his visit. From the data it is now easy to determine the type localities of the species he found. 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 325 BIG HAGHET MTS 7 Brom field sketches of, Seak abrut 3 miles one Vv trehe JZ 10 11 Big Hachet Mt: Y tlacheta Grande) . Aa i 4 NAY “OX A SY \ 4 - we few 2 ee ‘ . Sh 7 / , ! A / - . ~{U/ ‘ ‘ \ } ‘ ’ ee f / * .\ \ ’ » \ ' V / 2 . : | ‘ ‘ ! ‘ . r) ( ; fs 4 . ‘ . ‘ ‘ i 6 . 4 ’ ’ . 5 . . \ ’ ’ rte ‘ ' \ ; . eee | } NE ALA A \\ ey tH] I SoS \ y/o VT TNT Teocalli Gutte ENG Wy) NY: 1 {hh 1 NOCENARNIAN VA LE: iM \ \ *~S NN 4 | | = ee a) x \ \ x : 2 (=) 2 | 3 , Fig. 1.—Sketch of the Big Hachet Range, showing collecting stations. 326 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Dr. Mearns returned to Mesquite Springs along the ridge running from Daniels Mt. towards our camp in Sheridan Canyon, and along the wash running out of this canyon. Dr. Mearns found the following seven species, which were deter- mined by Dr. Wm. H. Dall:* Patula strigosa Gould, var. concentrata Dall. [Specimens reported from summit of Hacheta Grande =Oreohelix hachetana.| Epiphragmophora hachitana Dall {= Sonorella hachitana}. Polygyra mearnsii Dall [= Askmunella mearnsi). Thysanophora hornii Gabb. Holospira crossei Dall. Holospira bilamellata Dall. Holospira mearnsi Dall. The relationships of the Big Hachet fauna are closest with the Florida and Organ ranges. Near related species of Sonorella and Ashmunella inhabit these three ranges, and Sonorellas very close to hachitana have been found in the Carrazolillo and Peloncillo Moun- tains. The Oreohelices stand nearest to Chiricahua species. The Holospiras and Vallonia are special to the range, but the other small shells are common to most mountains of southern Arizona. Holospira is the most generally distributed snail in these moun- tains. Its abstemious nature is evidently satisfied with the scanty moisture supplied by the rare rains and light snow, which is said to whiten the mountains for brief periods in the winter. No doubt a great many colonies and other local races of Holospira remain to be found. Holospira lives only where there is limestone. We never found but one colony on igneous rock, and this was on a dyke in a limestone region. They are usually found on the hot slopes, east and south, where other snails are.totally absent or very rare. The subgenus Radiocentrum of Oreohelix is represented by two new species, making five now known. The new forms agree in genitalia and sculpture of the embryonic shell with those already known. In the large number examined‘ no embryos were found, so that there can be very little doubt that the species of this group * Diagnoses of new mollusks from the survey of the Mexican boundary, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XVIII, 1895; Report on the mollusks collected by the Inter- national Boundary Commission of the United States and Mexico, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIX, 1896. * Besides dissecting several individuals each of four of the species, we have pulled hundreds in cleaning the shells, without finding any embryos. Among ordinary Oreohelices it is rather exceptional to find an individual not gravid. 4 > ] 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 327 are oviparous—a further character distinguishing them from Oreo- helix, which is viviparous. It is also a more primitive feature. Sonorella hachitana (Dall). Plate V, figs. 4, 4a, 46. Epiphragmophora hachitana Dall, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XVIII, p. 2, 1895; _ XIX, p. 338, 1896. Sonorella hachitana (Dall), Pilsbry, Proc. A. N. 8. Phila. for 1900, p. 556, _ 1901; 1905, p. 257 (in part). Sonorella hachitana (Dall), Bartsch, Smithsonian Misc. Coll., vol. 47, p. 190, Pl. 31, fig. 2 (shell of type); Pl. 29 (apex), 1904. As this species is type of the genus Sonorella,> the investigation of its soft anatomy had become a matter of importance, and to obtain living material was one of the chief objects of our quest in the Hachetas. We found it at Stations 7,8, 10 and 11. All of these stations are near or on Dr. Mearns’s route to the summit of Hacheta Grande. Station 7, on the western slope of a hill at the head of the northern branch of Western Canyon, was the most prolific locality. Here the Sonorellas may be found in some numbers under large stones on the steep slope near the hill-top, where there is some shade from the pifion pines. Twenty-one adult shells from this station measure as follows: Diam. in mm J ey.) OS 22 Zip 23 Poi 24 Number of shells ... S 8 2 7 l 1 The shells vary somewhat in the degree of deflection of the last whorl, but very little in other respects. The last whorl descends more than in most related species. The color is pale fawn, fading to whitish in the middle of the base, and having a cinnamon-brown, shading into chestnut-brown, band above the periphery; this band is bordered with white on both sides. The aperture is rather small, its greatest diameter (including peristome) being 50 to 54 per cent. of the diameter of the shell. At Station 8 only dead shells were found, but these are more variable in size, the extremes in a lot of 8 measuring: Alt. 13.5, diam. 25.5 mm.; aperture diam. 13.6 mm. ae rt ae F134 ae ce iad 10.8 ia ’ Epiphragmophora hachitana Dall was originally designated as the type of Sonorella, but the soft anatomy of the genus was described from New Mexican specimens of what was subsequently determined as a small form of S. ashumnt acta a species which at that time had not been discriminated from S. hachi- tana. The dissection of topotypes of hachitana shows that the New Mexican form is specifically distinct, though closely allied. 328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, At Station 5 two broken examples, much weathered, were dug out of the soil. Though practically adult, the largest measures only 18.2 mm. diam- eter, the shell being quite as solid as in large individuals. It was probably dwarfed by the arid conditions be- fore it became extinct in this place. The genitalia are remarkable for the small size of the male organs. The penis is very slender, diameter 1 mm., tapering downward, and en- circled at the base by a short sheath. The penis-papilla is very slender, Sa 3 gradually tapering, and annulate. The z retractor muscle is terminal, long and : slender. Epiphallus a little shorter Fig. 2.—Genitalia of S.hachi- than the penis. The vagina is slightly et ee oe ee longer than the penis. Other organs papilla. ge pen 8 as usual. Measurements of the organs of two individuals are given in the following table, with those of allied forms for comparison. / / ome ae TSS E | 3 3 a. 1 Sig fee ent, te = = ma a | = ag 5+ = x _ =) i > |ma | 2 = S. hachitana.................., 6.25) 4 AZT Ue DD), 7:00.) oa Lacenes 103,098 “3 Sm ae NE MR 3 2 i War EM Al Beers Fearn mnt 103,098 Sh: flora ists 10 453:| 6,2 |, 120) 12.3} 36" | aaber 94,329 HD) Se Bales 5.5 | 5 a) Baars Mereareetee eS ef | 94,329 ae 9 4 6.5) O25) -1056:)) 29° sets 86,496 S. h. peloncillensis......... 11 6 6.2) 1.5%) 10.3) 29 9.5 94,513 10 6.2| 7 IAs) a I PES ese Ae 94,513 The well-arched jaw has 7 or 8 ribs. The radula has about 22, 16, 1, 16, 22 teeth, both cusps becoming split on the marginal teeth. In my former work on S. hachitana (1905) I referred shells from the Organ and Florida Mountains and from central Arizona to S. hachi- tana, which at that time was not known anatomically. While it must be admitted that the shells are very similar, I find differential 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 329 anatomical characters, which, though not great, seem to be constant in a considerable number examined, and which favor the more analytical treatment of the hachitana group effected by Dr. Bartsch, —a view I formerly opposed. After examining many fresh specimens from both ranges, I separate the Florida and Hacheta Sonorellas subspecifically. Whether the typical form of S. nachitana occurs outside of the Big Hachet range is doubtful. The Peloncillo range Sonorella (S. h. peloncillensis) is not easily distinguishable by the shell alone, but the proportions of the genitalia differ. On the Carrizolillo Mts., top of two peaks near the boundary line, numerous ‘‘bones’”’ were collected by Dr. Mearns (No. 126,596, U. S. N. M.). They agree with S. hachitana in the rather wide umbilicus, small aperture and deeply descending last whorl, but differ by the average smaller size, from alt. 10.8, diam. 19.3 mm., to alt. 12.4, diam. 21.4 mm. It is apparently a small race of hachitana. The locality is about 30 miles east of Big Hachet Mountain. Specimens reported as S. hachitana from the Chiricahua Mountains will doubtless turn out to be one of the species already described from there. Several resemble hachitana more or less in the shell, but all differ in genitalia. The specimen reported from the Santa Rita Mountains (No. 105,385, U.S. N. M.) is dead and broken. It is not hachitana, but probably an undescribed species near S. clappi P. & F. Ashmunella mearnsii (Dall). Plate V, figs. 1 to 1b. Polygyra mearnsii Dall, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., XVIII, p. 2, 1895; XIX, p. 343, Pl. 32, figs. 7, 8, 11, 1896. Up to this time A. mearnsii has been known from the original lot collected by Dr. Mearns about twenty years ago.° We found it * The figured type of A. mearnsii and nine specimens in various conditions of perfection are Cat. No, 130,012, U.S. N. M., said to be from the Huachuca Mts. In the adult shells of this lot. the parietal wall of the aperture is built up and disjoined from the preceding whorl. In another lot, No. 130,013, U.S. N.M., three specimens, Hacheta Grande Mt., the parietal callus is appressed. This difference in the parietal callus is exactly what we have noticed between the specimens from our Station 5 (near Dr. Mearns’s camp site) and those from our Stations 10 and 11, near and at the top of Hacheta Grande Mt., a place also visited by Dr. Mearns. We conclude, therefore, that there was a mistake of ‘‘Huachuea” for ‘‘Hacheta” in the label of No. 130,012; and that A. mearnsii does not really live in the Huachucas. This seems the more likely because in several camping trips to the Huachueas this species was not found. A record of A. mearnsi from the Organ Mountains, N. M., has been published, on the authority of Professor Cockerell. We have not seen the specimen, but suspect that they are A. kochi Clapp. ‘ We suggest that our Station 5 in the Hacheta Mountains be accepted as type locality for A. mearnst. 330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |May, in great profusion at Station 5 on the east side of Daniels Mountain, near the summit, with Holospira bilamellata. Also at Stations 7, 10 and 11, the latter at the summit of Hacheta Grande. The specimens from Station 5 (not far from the site of Dr. Mearns’s camp) agree well with the original specimens, description and figure. Usually the parietal callus is raised from the surface as a thin, straight lamina, and in almost all of them the edge is more definite than in shells from other stations. The axial end of the parietal lamella is abruptly bent towards the columella and is more or less tubercular; Rarely the tubercle is almost free from the lamella. The spire is occasionally almost flat. The color in shells taken alive is translucent sayal brown. The diameter varies from 11.5 to 14.5 mm. In specimens from the summit of Hacheta Grande the parietal lamellze are a little shorter; the axial end of the longer branch is often straight, but more fre- quently is bent, or the bend is represented by a tubercle con- nected with, or almost free from the lamella. The edge of the parietal callus is appressed to the surface, and is often arcuate. The aperture varies in obliquity, as the figures show. The penis is stout, bipartite. The epiphallus is strongly con- voluted just beyond the insertion : of the retractor muscle. It is Fig. 3—Genitalia of A. mearnsi. epi., very long. No flagellum seen. he eee fo as SLi mo ra The spermatheca is largest in the atarns: Ae ; ’” middle, thin-walled. Length of penis 4.5 mm.; epiphallus 30 mm.; vagina 4mm.; spermatheca and duct 19 mm. A. mearnsi lives in the earth under stones, like A. walkeri in the Floridas, both being burrowing species. It is closely related to A. kochi Clapp and A. walkeri Ferriss, but quite distinct from both. A. ‘levettei bifurca in the Huachucas is a less depressed shell with more whorls. Oreohelix (Radiocentrum) hachetana n. sp. Plate VI, figs. 1 to 1d, 6. The shell is depressed, umbilicate, the umbilicus about one-fourth the diameter of the shell; moderately solid, but thin, opaque whitish, obliquely streaked or smeared with various shades from light cinna- 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 331 mon-drab to pale ecru-drab, often having a band of the same below the periphery; embryonic whorls fawn color. Spire convex or very low conic, 12 embryonic whorls convex, sculptured with delicate, retractive radial rib-striz, a few very fine spiral lines in the intervals (fig. 6); following whorls irregularly marked with weak growth- lines, less convex, a little flattened or impressed above the suture, the last whorl convex, very indistinctly angular at the periphery, slowly descending to the aperture, convex beneath. The aperture is very oblique, about as high as wide. Peristome thin, the upper _and basal margins somewhat prolonged and a little straightened, converging, joined by a thin, adnate parietal callus. Alt. 9, diam. 15 mm.; 53 whorls. Fig. 4.—A. Genitalia of Oreohelix hachetana. B, Oreohelix ferrissi. Genitalia (fig. 4,A). The penis is very short, its distal half en- larged. The walls of the rather large cavity are densely papillose, the papille long, arranged in oblique rows in some parts. Epi- phallus about equal in length to the penis, its distal half enlarged. Vagina equal to the penis in length. Length of the penis, epiphallus and vagina 5 mm.; length of spermatheca and duct 15 mm. Summit of Hacheta Grande Mountain, at Station 11, collected August 25th, 1910, by H. A. Pilsbry. Also Station 10, Pilsbry and Daniels. This species was collected in considerable quantity—several hundred living specimens. The “bones” are seen all over the upper four or five hundred feet of the peak, between Stations 10 ‘and 11 of the map. Living snails were all taken on the west side and were most 332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, abundant at the summit near and north of the small stone ‘‘monu- ment” or cairn which marks the summit, on and under stones. Also on the precipitous western slope at Station 10. The species is very uniform in.all its characters. The size varies from 14 to 16 mm. diameter, and in some shells the last whorl descends more than in others. Very few have the parietal callus thickened and a little raised. It differs from all forms of O. strigosa by its convex, radially costellate embryonic whorls, but in many adult shells this sculpture is effaced. O. ferrissi is probably the most nearly related species, though very different. Oreohelix hachetana cadaver n. subsp. Plate VI, fig. 2. The shell is larger than hachetana, the periphery rounded in adults. except near the aperture in front, where it is distinctly angular. Umbilicus smaller, one-sixth the diameter of the shell. Alt. 11.5, diam. 18.5 mm.; barely 5 whorls. Station 5, below the cliffs on the north side of the summit of Daniels Mountain, Daniels and Pilsbry, August 22d, 1910. Only a few long-dead shells were found in this thirsty place, where, at the base of the cliffs there are a few small pinyon pines, mostly dead or moribund. Holospira and Ashmunella mearnsi live here in ° abundance. A young shell, long dead, found at Station 6, may belong to the same variety. Oreohelix (Radiocentrum) ferrissin.sp. Plate VI, figs. 4 to 5d. The shell is openly umbilicate, umbilicus conic, over one-fourth the total diameter; slightly convex above, base strongly convex; thin, light dull brown. The embryonic shell of 13 convex whorls is finely lamellose striate radially (fig. 5d). Post-embryonie whorls have the surface densely lamellose along growth-lines, the lamellze rising in triangular cuticular processes where they cross the spiral ridges of the shell. When denuded, the shell has a blunt, projecting peripheral carina; the upper surface has a wide, somewhat angular spiral ridge upon all the post-embryonic whorls, sometimes with one or two minor ridges; the lower surface has three to five low spiral ridges and some minute, weak spiral striz; the whole shell being closely thread-striate along growth-lines. The last whorl usually does not descend in front. Aperture oblique, irregularly rounded, lip simple, the margins rather widely separated, parietal callus thin. Shells denuded of the cuticular processes measure: Alt. 6.5, diam. 14.5 mm.; 43 whorls. Bo HE ge) aa ae 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 333 Genitalia similar to O. hachetana, except that the lower third of the duct of the spermatheca is more enlarged. Length of penis 5mm.; epiphallus 5.5 mm.; spermatheca and duct 9 mm. (fig. 4 B). Hacheta Grande Mts. at Station 3, on ledges of high cliffs opposite the mouth of Sheridan Canyon, under stones, Pilsbry and Daniels, August 21, 1910. Cotypes. No. 112,276, A. N. 8. P. Also at Station 1, Teocalli Butte. 0. ferrissi has much the appearance of the Chiricahuan O. barbata Pils., but this resemblance is superficial. When denuded of the cuticular fringes, the two are quite different, the Chiricahuan species being much smoother, without the strong spiral ridges of O. ferrissi. Moreover, the sculpture of the embryonic shell is different. The shape of penis and epiphallus in O. ferrissi is like O. chiricahuana and O. clappi, both organs being enlarged distally, while in O. barbata the lower half of the penis is enlarged, the distal portion slender. In well-developed shells the last whorl scarcely descends anteriorly, the upper margin of the lip being inserted on the peripheral carina. In some of the smaller adults, diam. 13 mm., the last whorl is bent downwards; the upper and columellar margins of the lip converge and are connected by a raised parietal lamina, the mouth having a somewhat triangular contour. These are to be regarded as decadent (gerontic) individuals. At Station 1, Teocalli Butte, the shells are all convex above, with a noticeably smaller umbilicus. The largest measures, alt. 7.8, diam. 15 mm., with 5 whorls (Pl. VI, fig. 46)... This small colony is probably extinct or nearly so, as no living shells were found. Our Station 3 is on ledges of high cliffs facing the mouth of Sheridan Canyon, and especially on a bench about half-way up. Here Ferriss’s Oreohelix lives on an almost inaccessible cliff looking out over the mesa into Mexico. There is little vegetation on the ledges. On the talus slope below the cliff there is a growth of dwarf oak about knee-high, charming big wild roses of a species which we saw nowhere else, Cylindropuntia, Opuntia, bisnagas, ete. On top, above the cliffs, the Fouquieria, sotol, mescal society is found. The Oreohelix colony is of small extent; the ledges where they were observed living are probably not over a couple of square rods in area, with perhaps an equal area on the talus below the cliffs, where dead shells were found. These estimates are from memory, as I neglected to note the figures at the time. The locality on the east side of Teocalli Butte is more restricted, and if possible more arid. 334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Oreohelix ferrissi morticina n. subsp Plate VI, fig. 3. Differs from O. ferrissi by the more convex spire and by the weak- ness of the spiral sculpture, there being no such pronounced spiral ridge on the upper surface of the whorls, and only very weakly sketched spirals on the base, whilst in O. ferrissi these ridges are very emphatic. Alt. 7.2, diam. 14.2 mm.; 4? whorls. Station 5, below the cliffs on the north side of Daniels Mountain, near the summit, with Holospira, ete. Only a few long-dead shells were taken, but these surely indicate a local race which has finally succumbed to the increasing aridity of their station. Of large shells only Holospira and Ashmunella survive on this mountain, both of them being burrowing animals. Thysanophora hornii (Gabb). Found at Stations 3 and 5. It is an almost ubiquitous Lower Sonoran snail. UROCOPTIDA. The study of a very large series of Hachita Holospiras has fully confirmed the results reached in our study of Chiricahuan species, that the number of internal lamellz is variable in each species and colony, among perfectly mature or even aged individuals. They vary in a way it was impossible to foresee at the time when Holo- spiras were so rare that only one or two of a lot could be opened. Very naturally, the number of internal lamellze was thought at that time to be of specific and even subgeneric value. In some colonies it appears that the largest shells have in the average the greatest development of lamelle, so that it might be thought that only the most vigorous individuals attain the full number; yet other races or colonies give a contrary result. No external character is correllated with the number of lamella. Usually most of the shells of any one colony resemble each other in size, shape and sculpture, so that each lot has a certain individuality, though all of the characters vary more than is usual among the land snails. We have never found two species of Holospira living in one colony, either in the Hachitas or in any other district, in the course of several years, collecting, in many places in Texas, New Mexico and Arizona. A comparison of the Holospiras of the Hachita Grande range with those of the Chiricahua range shows some interesting resemblances and differences. In both localities the internal lamellz present (in 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 335 almost every form known by large lots) may be (1) Superior, axial ‘and basal, or (2) axial only. In Hachita forms we have also the combination (3) axial and basal, which is never found in the Chirica- huan series, where it is replaced by the combination (4) superior and axial. Every Hachita species has, therefore, in different speci- mens of the same colony, the characters of the supposed subgenera or sections Bostrichocentrum, Haplostemma, Distomospira, and Tri- stemma, while a Chiricahuan species will belong to Bostrichocentrum, Eudistemma, and Tristemma. In external form and sculpture there are no differences greater than specific between the Hachita and Chiricahua species. The Hachita Holospiras belong, if we accept the criterion of intergradation, to only one species, for which the prior name is H.crossei. Between this species and H. bilamellata there is a perfect series of intergrades in size, sculpture and number of whorls. We mean by this that some individuals of an H. crossei colony could not be distinguished from mearnsi; some mearnsi can be exactly matched in a colony of bilamellata, or of media; and certain slender shells of bilamellata would pass as longa. The other named forms are more distinct, probably because we did not happen to collect where the intergrading colonies live. The races are therefore based upon the forms dominant in each colony. One might easily define a half dozen species, if only a few shells from each place were in hand; or if the internal lamellae were taken to be of specific weight, it might be thought that there are between two and three times that number. There are many colonies, most of which have some special char- acters. A thorough exploration of the northern end of the range will undoubtedly bring to light very many more forms, so that any treatment of the group must now be tentative. For our present purpose we consider the smallest form (crosse’) and the largest (bi- lamellata) as species, ranking the others as subspecies, though in some cases they are more distinct than these two are from one another. Several thousand shells were collected. The colonies at Stations 1, 2, 3, 12, are of very limited extent, physical features restricting them. Station 5 is much larger. The other Stations, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, merely represent collecting points in large areas where Holospira may be picked up almost anywhere over considerable tracts, while at the same time there are large areas in the region over which these stations are scattered where no shells can be found. 336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Holospira bilamellata Dall. Plate VI, figs. 1 to 1d. Holospira Spe calcgge bilamellata Dall., Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., XVIII,- 1895, p. 4; XLX, p. 896 ’ P. 349, Pl. 31, fig. 3. Pilsbry, Man. of C Conch., RY. it 902, p. 82, Pl. 16, figs. 5, 10, ia: Bartsch, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. eo ei 1906, p. 134. Daniels, Nautilus, XXVI, p. 41, PL. 5, fig. 9 (normal) and fig. 8 (abnormal) shells. The first four references cited above pertain to specimens of the original lot, of which there are 8 perfect shells in Coll. U. 8. Nat. Mus. and 2 in Coll. A. N. 8S. Phila. The species is distinguished from H. crossei chiefly by its greater size. It was found by Mr. Daniels and the writer in great abundance at Station 5, on the east side of Daniels Mountain under the cliffs close to the summit, with Ashmunella mearnsi and Oreoheliz, in the pifon zone. In most of the shells the external ribs weaken or dis- appear on the penultimate and one or two earlier whorls, but in some they continue to the last, as in the type lot of bilamellata. Sixty examples from Station 5 opened, most of them measured give the following data: (1) One lamella, the axial. 13 specimens = 213%. Length 23, diam. 5 mm.; whorls 19 21.3 ay © 182 Sy MD noon hee pees Gs ire | bene ia eee I “ec 18 “ee 5 “se a 16 ‘ 18 ce 5 “ee ce 16 tn rn eae Sat TD Ae toh «RAS Cael Tie 45 “14d las ee ‘oy sete (2) Two lamellz, axial and basal. 41 specimens = 683%. Length 2.2, diam. 4.9 mm.; whorls +18} “cc 20) “ee ce ce 165 “cc 20 “ce 4.9 “ce “ec 163 “cc 19.9 “ce 4.6 ce “ce 163 ec 19 “ 5 “ e 16 ac 19 a3 5 as “ 153 ‘é 19 “ 5 “ ce 163 “ec -19 “ce 4.6 “ce “ce 163 “ee 19 “c 5 “ee cc Ws “ ne 6 5 “ “ 154 “ec 18.5 “ce 5 “ce “ 153 “ce 18.2 “ee 5 “e “cc 163 er iger arch) a.gat A> ge oe 18.2 cc 5 “ “ee 15 “c 18 “c 5 ae “ce 153 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 337 Length 18, diam. 5. mm.; whorls 16 eet a. ee acme 15° “c 17.5 “ee 4.2 as ce 15 “ 17.2 * 5 “ “ 153 “cc 17 “i 48 “ “ 153 -. tee Ae “154 Sr aaw. LAA “143 Sa ei LS ‘“ 16 “ 5.5 “ “ 133 ““ 16 “ 4.5 “ “ 143 oe 16 “ce 4.5 ve “eé 15 oe, tara a “144 Spat eet lS Pi aticuer nts, Aare “145 coh git or Eg ame: Yl eae ba gine | 7 E> AO pM 5 Mn muy ee “e 15 ‘é 4.2 “e ce 14 she tes © Fee: St i G5. 183 (3) Three lamelle, superior, axial and basal. Six individuals = 10%. Length 20.5, diam. 4.9 mm.; whorls 17 20) “ee 5 “ee ee 173 “é 20) ee 4.9 ‘as ee eZ SCAG a AG ete se 19 oe 5 a “ee eg In size, sculpture and shape, we can find no external character correllated with the differences in internal structure. The speci- mens from Station 5 are from one colony. It will be seen that the typical bilamellata axial structure pre- dominates, nearly 70% having that arrangement of lamellae. The dimensions of this lot agree well with those given by Bartsch for 8 specimens in the U. 8. Nat. Mus., but our lot, being larger, includes shells both larger and smaller than any in the original lot. Holospira bilamellata longa n. form. Plate VII, figs. 2 to 2b. Slender and pillar-like, the diameter contained four times or more in the length; whorls of the cone and last whorl costulate, 3 to 5 inter- mediate whorls usually smooth or nearly so. Aperture projecting laterally and forward; usually 3 internal lamella, in the beginning of the penultimate whorl, therefore ventral in position, the superior lamella generally very strong, and larger and longer than the basal. Length 19.6, diam. 4 mm.; whorls 17 a eS % e 188 ge |) Raa F) ree 22 \ 338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Length 17.9, diam. 3.9 mm.; whorls 17 yak 4 17 “ 17, ““c 4.25 “ “ec 153 “cc 17, “cc 3.9 “ ce 154 ees | A Me re. Ce ae ac 16.3 ac 4 “ “ 153 Station 4, on the south slope of Daniels Mt. near the summit. Types Nos. 112,269, A. N.S. P., collected by Pilsbry and Daniels, August 22, 1910. Out of 20 shells opened, 16 have three lamellz and 4 have two, the axial and basal. The pillar-like shape, numerous whorls, and prevalence of a superior lamella, as well as the deeper position of the lamelle, are individually variable characters, yet in the aggregate they may suffice to define a race in this group. These Holospiras live among rocks. where there is very little xerophytic vegetation and the heat is terrific. The type lot was picked up at about the same elevation as Station 5, but there the exposure is less calorific, the sparse pifions and the cliffs afford shade, so that the soil retains some moisture. Holospiras were seen scattered over a large area below and around Station 4. Holospira bilamellata heliophila n. subsp. Plate VII, figs, 3 to 3c. The shell is small, rather slender, with a long cone; strongly costate throughout; usually having axial and basal lamella within the middle part of the penultimate whorl. Peristome well expanded in the basal and columellar margins, but scarcely so near the upper angle. (1) One lamella, the axial. 3 specimens = 15%. Length 14.2, diam. 3.8 mm.; whorls 16 “cr 13.3, oe Saar A cc ins of “ 13 “ec 3.9 “ce “cc 143 (2) Two lamell, axial and basal. 13 specimens = 65%. Length 14.8, diam. 4 mm.; whorls 153 ea. a ee ene te jg lane Soa AE "N65 “ 14.2 ““ 39 *§ 7: 154 ~~. 34 eee eee cae SS, “cc 14 “ ote “ “e 153 4 13.8 “ce 3.9 “ec “cc 144 “cc 12.6 “ce 3 8 “ec > “cc 133 “ce 11.5 ‘ec 4 “ce “<“ 124 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 339 (3) Three lamelle, superior, axial and basal. 4 specimens = 20%. Length 13.9, diam. 3.7 mm.; whorls 155 oe 13: a 4 ia oe 14 Station 1, northern and eastern sides of Teocalli Butte, at the base of the cliff. Types Nos. 112,265, A. N.S. P. Twenty shells opened out of a series of over 250 show that the bilamellate form predominates. The largest shell noticed is 14.9 mm. long, the smallest 11.5 mm. There is rather wide variation in sculpture, but a large majority of the shells conform to fig. 3a in this respect. Holospira bilamellata insolata n. subsp. Plate VII, figs. 4 to 4a. The shell is slender, with a rather long terminal cone; very strongly ribbed throughout; composed of many (133 to 173) short, convex whorls, the last very shortly free in front. Peristome narrow, only very slightly. expanded. Only the axial lamella developed in 14 out of 16 individuals opened, the other two having axial and basal lamelle. Length 15.5, diam. 3.6 mm.; whorls 173 “ 15, “ec 3.8 “ec “ec { 3 ee: SSA > a “163 AY. 'S2 ae, - a “163 cae OIE ae Vs een “45h Reeth gun Soria, “45h i oe Ry iti, 2 lr <-- Oko “ce 13, oe Bw “cc ae 144 lien! t.P Mit TOWN es te. 454 sg agi ys le 2) aes ‘sé 12, ‘é 3.9 “‘ “é 1: } Rete ae OR ‘134 (axial and basal lamell). Station 6, on the southeastern slope of the mountain south of Big Hachet Mt. This form differs from crossei and mearnsi by the more slender shape, long terminal cone, more numerous whorls and strong sculp- ture. It agrees with bilamellata in having many whorls, but differs by its slender form, longer cone, the prevalence of unilamellate shells, ete. H. b. heliophila stands nearest to insolata, but in that race the bilamellate form predominates. It is more conspicuously ribbed than any of the other Hacheta races. ‘ Holospira bilamellata media n. subsp. Plate VII, figs. 5 to Se. The shell is cylindric with a long terminal cone; composed of many closely coiled, convex whorls, all after the embryo rather strongly, 340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, sharply costulate; buff-whitish except where darkened by the presence of the soft parts, the last whorl shortly projecting; peris- tome narrowly expanded. Internal lamellee one to three, but axial and basal most frequent. 75 individuals opened from the type locality. Southern and western portions of Sheridan Canyon, at Stations — 2,12 and 3. Types Nos. 112,268 A. N.S. P., from Station 3, at the base of a cliff near the mountain top, facing the mouth of Sheridan Canyon, in company with Oreohelix ferrissi. Specimens from the type locality measure as follows: (1) An axial lamella only. 22 individuals = 293%. Length 16.9, diam. 4 mm. ; ; whorls 16 16.6, 4 17 a 15, ae 4 ce “ 153 ae 14.2, “cc 4 cc “e 15 o“ 14, “ce oily “e ce 134 ae 13.9, “ 4 ce ia 143 ae 13.5, “ee 3.9 ee ce 14 CAPy i Ris Big Pe Ad “ce 12.2, oe 4 “ce ‘as 123 “ee 12, “ 4 “ee ‘ag 123 (2) Axial and basal lamelle. 48 shells = 64%. Length 18.5, diam. 4.25 mm.; ; whorls 173 16.5, eg 15} “ 16.5, “ 4 “ “c 163 A BB yey ado “ee 16, “ce 4 “ “ 16 eA Dy se 4 «153 “ce 15.1; “ 4 a3 “ce 153 “ec 14.2, ae 4 “ “ce 15 “cc 13.5, “e 4 ce “cc 14 “ec 13, ee 4 ifs as 14 “ is, “ 4 “ cc 133 “ee 13, “ee te. “ ifs 14 ccd Si AOR eee vate ie st OO ince OO me EADS “ce 12.1, “ 4 “ce a3 ibe: ce 12, ce 4 “ “cc 133 (3) Three lamellz, superior, axial and basal. 5 shells = 63%. Length 18, diam.4 mm.; whorls 173 ay, A Os dams id “ 16.5, cc 4 as “cc 163 “ 16.4, “ 4 “ ce 16 sé 13, “c“‘ 4.1 a3 “cc 14 VS CC 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341 Also one shell which has two basal lamellae. The upper partition was broken away in opening, so that the presence of a superior lamella is uncertain. This form stands nearest to H. b. mearnsi, but the striation is sharper, not partially effaced on the later whorls and the cone is in the average longer. The habitats of mearnsi and media are rather remote from one another, and several other forms inhabit territory between them. The specimens from Station 12 are more like mearns?, the sculpture being weak on the penultimate and next earlier whorls. Out of 11 opened— . 2 have one lamella, axial. 9 have two lamelle, axial and basal. 1 has three lamellz, axial, basal and superior. Station 2 is on the northern slope of one of the ravines east of and running from Teocalli Butte, at the foot of an irregular pro- jecting bench of limestone. It is much the lowest station where shells were found in the Hachetas. The shells are partly as rough as those from Station 3, but some approach those of Station 12. Out of 21 shells opened— 15 have two lamellse, axial and basal. 6 have three lamell, axial, basal and superior. In size the shells from Stations 12 and 2 are about equal to those from Station 3. Holospira bilamellata mearnsi Dall. Plate VII, figs. 6, 6a. Holospira (Haplostemma) mearnsi Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XVIIT, 1895, p. 4; XIX, 1896, p. 350, Pl. 31, fig. 1. Holospira (Distomospira) mearnsi Dall, Bartsch, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.. XXXI, 1906, p. 134. Six shells of the type lot, the measurements of which are given by Dr. Bartsch, measure 14 to 15.8 mm. long, 4.2 to 4.5 wide, with 14 whorls. Twenty shells were taken at our Station 8, on the eastern slope of Hacheta Grande Mt. (see map, p. 325). Ten were opened, 3 having only the axial lamella, which is very weak in two of them; 7 have axial and basal lamellae. Measurements follow. Length 17, diam. 4.5 mm.; whorls 15; an axial lamella. ira wer ‘* 15; axial and basal lamella. BAG. fs £53.44 «44 ET eee‘ ee ame oe ao " ** 14; axial and basal lantella. ro ae " cae pi fi = “ 13; ai 4 “ “ 13, ai “ oe “ec 13, sé 3.9 “ sé 123; ae ‘ ic 342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, Length 12.6, diam. 4 mm.; whorls 134 a zi “123 ih. mi ** 12; an axial lamella. These shells connect H. crossei and H. bilamellata. Specimens of intermediate size agree exactly with one of the type lot of mearnsi, kindly lent from the National Museum. The smallest shells are indistinguishable from crossez, while the largest could not be separated from small bilamellata. Yet the colony as a whole has a certain individuality by its intermediate size, and as the form has been named, we let it stand as a convenient place for crossei-bilamellata inter- grades. It is attached to H. bilamellata rather than to H. crossei, because the prevalent form, in the small lot opened, is bilamellate. All of the shells were collected in one spot where the writer sat resting. A large quantity could have been gathered had time and strength permitted. A few specimens, are quite finely striate, while others are rather coarsely ribbed, like the type of mearnsi; still others being intermediate in sculpture. The sculpture in some shells becomes very much weaker on the penultimate and next earlier whorls. H. mearnsi served as monotype of the subgenus Haplostemma Dall, characterized by the possession of an axial lamella only. Bartsch, opening another specimen, found a basal lamella also, and concluded that that lamella had been broken away in opening the original specimen. Since some fully adult examples are known to have an axial lamella only, it is likely that Dall’s original diagnosis was correct for the specimen he opened, while Bartsch was also right as to the shell he examined and which we have seen. Holospira crossei Dall. Plate VII, figs. 7 to 7c. Holospira crossei Dall, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XVIII, 1895, p. 3; XIX, 1897, p. 348, Pl. 31, fig. 2. Pilsbry, Man. of Conch., XV, p. 92,. Pl. 23, fig. 75; Moll. S. W. States, ii, Proc. A. N. S. Phila., 1905, p. 217, Pl. 26, - fig. 8. Bartsch, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XXXI, 1906, p. 137. All of the above references were based upon the original lot, of which there are 11 perfect specimens in Coll. U.S. Nat. Mus. and 2 in Coll. A.N.S.P. One of these two has a very weak, hardly notice- able fold on the axis, the other has a very strong but short fold there. The writer collected H. crossei at the type locality, the summit of Hacheta Grande. The exact spot, Station 11, is just off the western edge of the small level tract at the summit, which is marked by a small stone monument. Being much higher, this station is less dry than Station 5, where the large H. bilamellata abounds, and 1915.] there is decidedly more vegetation. NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343 A few were picked up on the slope towards Station 10, dead shells being scattered all over the upper 500 ft. or more of this ascent. Sixty specimens were opened, measurements of 31 being given below. (1) No axial lamella, merely a callous or very inconspicuous node on the axis in thespenultimate whorl. 15 individuals 25%. ; Whorls 13; penult. whor! smooth. ae 13; 123. “ ce ce Length 14, diam.4 mm. 12.8, ais Fla james Se Ur aes ee Oi GaSe. ak eS ee eh i See neg 2 pecs 2 All Poem Lh a, eee aoe A) 6 a tes (2) lamellae. 30 individuals = 50%. Length 13, diam.4 mm. 12, ee ¢ nepal V8 Ss On, cai: &: PS > Visine 3 a vie) 4; Pec adits: Sea ioe BS SES ialis 3: Mileoad ee way ry eRe oe = Ay aca: Pais ga 2 A 2 oy ti): ei 1 Ais Pees > Ba | * ee 12: oe ae 12: ee “ 113; ‘e ‘ 114: “ ‘ec 12: ‘ce bee SS “ 11: “ a iti Ie a ‘e 102; “ “ce 11}; “cc (3) Axial lamella short and strong or rarely weak; within last half of penultimate whorl. Length 13, diam.4 mm. 13, ale 7 oe a Eade 7 LIe'© et. OF oe of) S'": Ae =. Salads ets OK aL an 5 ie cpa Ae Pee: Snake ee aE es a ee (4) mate whorl. 3 individuals Length 14, diam.4 mm.; “ 13, “ee 4 “ et as et >? Gy ble - Axial, basal and superior lamellae 12 specimens “ a ae weak ribs. smooth. strong ribs.” weak ribs. “ee ce smooth. ae Axial lamella in penultimate whorl short and strong; no other ; whorls 122; penult. whorl weak ribs. ae ce ae ee smooth. “é ae ae weak ribs. smooth strong ribs. | | “fhe ce basal lamella 20%. Ww horls 13}; penult. whorl smooth. “ ee 5 O07 5%. ae ia ee ic Lad e ae weak ribs. ‘e ‘a smooth. ae strong ribs. oe ae weak ribs. 1 the last half of penulti- ‘ whorls 13; penult. whorl weak ribs. “ ee 123; 123; oe ae a te strong ribs, smooth. 344 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, The embryonic shell, of slightly over 2 whorls, is smooth and projects nipple-like. The following whorls of the cone are strongly ribbed, but the ribs weaken more or less on the cylindrical part, so that on the penultimate whorl they are often inconspicuous or almost wanting (for brevity called “smooth” in the above tables). There is of course complete intergradation in this character, so that the classification in the table is more or less arbitrary. The size averages larger in shells with 2 or 3 lamellae, but there are exceptions. It will be understood that the measurements were based upon shells which to all external appearance are adult or old. After a careful study of the aperture and lip, I think that it may be accepted as certain that the variations in lamelle recorded above are not depend- ent upon age of the individual. At Station 10, on the northern slope of Hacheta Grande Mt., a small series was taken. All of them have the whorls of the cylindric portion smooth or nearly so, glossy, the cone and the last whorl, or its last half, being ribbed as usual. Ten specimens opened measure as follows: Length 14.2, diam. 4 mm.; whorls 14; axial and basal lamelle. oe RaAtegs 125; ° “ce 13, “ce 4.4 “ee ee 123; “ “ce ae “ ia 13; cc 42 “ec “cc 123; “ec “ce % “ “c 12.9, ae 4 “ee “ 123; “ “ “ e pane ba eine: ay 3 “12; axial lamella only. ce 11.5, ce 4 tas “ 12; as ce “ce “cc 11.5, “ee 4 “ce “e LZ “cc ce “ec ce Tic: ae 3.9 “cc “ec 113; “c “ce “ ac 10.3, ac 3.3 “ec “ee 113; “ “ “ee This lot, by the size of some individuals and the large number (50%) of bilamellate example, is intermediate between crossei and mearnsi, as it also is in the elevation of the station. It has a feature of its own in the smooth median whorls, parallelled, however, by some individuals of crossei from the mountain top. None of the mearnsi seen are so smooth. ZONITIDA, Vitrea indentata umbilicata (CkIl.). Stations 3, 5 and 8. Zonitoides minuscula alachuana (Dall). Stations 8 and 11. FERUSSACIDZA. Cochlicopa lubrica (Miall.). Station 8. Searce. ~_—_—rTo”6hCUCT CT hhC«~< 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345 PUPILLID. Pupilla sonorana (Sterki). Station 11. Abundant on the summit of Big Hachet Mt. Bifidaria pellucidafhordeacella (Pils.). ’ Stations 3, 5,78 and 11. ; A peculiar short cylindric form, having less convex whorls, less tapering spire and blunter summit, was taken at Stations 3 and 5. Bifidaria pilsbryana Sterki. Stations 8 and 11. Bifidaria ashmuni Sterki. Stations 3, 5, 8 and 11. VALLONIIDZ. Vallonia sonorana n.sp. Fig. 5. The shell is very broadly, openly umbilicate, width of umbilicus contained about three times in the diameter of shell; whitish corneous. First 13 whorls smooth, corneous, glossy; following whorls with sculpture of rather delicate riblets about 38-40 on the last whorl, in fresh specimens bearing irregular cuticular extensions; the spaces between ribs delicately striate, the strie irregularly anastomosing. Whorls 33, strongly convex, rather. slowly widening, separated by a deep suture; the last whorl deeply descending close to the aperture. Aperture small, nearly circular, very oblique. The peristome is expanded and reflexed, slightly thickened within (in old specimens strongly thickened); the margins converge strongly and qre con- nected by a very short parietal callus or are continuous, joined by a thin, slightly raised callus. The ample umbilicus is somewhat oblong. 346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |May, Alt. 1.1, diam. 2.7 mm. (type, fig. 5A). 125° Ss ZB oO Cig one Summit of Big Hachet Mountain, Station 11. Type No. 112,012, A. N.S. P., collected by Pilsbry, August 25, 1910. This species is abundant at Station 11, in the dirt under stones. It is more closely related to V. perspectiva Sterki than to any other, but it is a very much larger shell. V. cyclopherella has far finer striation. V. gracilicosta has closer riblets and a much smaller umbilicus. V. albula has a smaller umbilicus. Having collected and identified some thousands of the Vallonias of Arizona and New Mexico in the last ten years, it was a surprise to find a species which differs conspicuously from the three mountain species mentioned above. As we have not found V. sonorana else- where in our work in southern New Mexico and Arizona, it seems likely that it is a southern species which barely crosses the inter- national boundary. As a rule, Vallonias are rather widely dis- tributed snails. : The Holarctic genus Vallonia now comprises about 25 recent and pleistocene and a half dozen tertiary species, besides about a dozen named varieties. It is likely that some of these are mere synonyms. We have nine recent species in the United States, all of them readily recognizable, except V. excentrica, which is often hard to tell from pulchella. Vallonia perspectiva Sterki. Station 11, a few specimens taken with the preceding species. Il. THe Fiorma Mountains. The Florida range (accent on the 7) is about twelve miles long, with a maximum elevation slightly exceeding 7,000 ft. It runs from | north to south. A partially detached but adjacent continuation northward is known as the “Little Floridas.”’ As in neighboring ranges, there is a long ascent or mesa before reaching the base of the mountains proper (5,000 ft.), characterized by a zone of tree yuceas. The mountains are arid and rather barren, of limestone in the middle towards the top, granitic southward and_porphyritic northward. Vegetation scrubby. We noted as common two small species of oak, hackberry, sotol, cylindropuntia, a broad-leaved agave, ete. Barrel cactus (bisnaga) was seen at the foot. In November, 1906, Mr. Ferris and the author drove out from Deming 18 miles to Mr. Priser’s cabin, where there is a small spring, in ee 1915.]| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 347 Spring Canyon.” This is above the middle of the west side of the range. The summit here projects as a limestone butte, bounded by cliffs on the east, north and west sides. Access was gained to the top on the south side. The flat summit is covered with grass, Fouquieria, Cylindropuntia and other cacti, Agave, etc. No shells. There is a fine outlook, the jagged Organ Mountains silhouetted eastward. Around the base of this central summit we found Ashmunella walkeri and Sonorella by digging in the soil among the rocks, where there was shade. We found only seven species of snails in all. Sonorella hachitana flora n. subsp. Plate V, figs. 3 to 3c. Sonorella hachitana. ... Florida Mountains, Pilsbry, Proc. A. N. 8. Phila., 1905, p. 257, Pl. 17, figs. 1-6 (shell), Pl. 20, fig. 12 (genitalia), Pl. 23, fig. 20: (jaw). The shell is in the average larger than S. hachitana, with less dis- tinct white borders along the shoulder band. Penis decidedly Fig. 6.—A-E, Sonorella hachitana peloncillensis. A, genitalia; B, C, penis- a and end of same, enlarged; D, BE, ar a two other individuals. , G, S. A. flora, terminal ducts and penis-papilla. ? This spring is not indicated on the U. 8. G. 8. Topographic Sheet (Deming Quadrangle, edit. of Feb., 1899), and as our visit to these mountains was unfore- seen, we did not have the map. From memory we would say this dpring is opposite Arco del Diablo of the map. Mr. Ferriss had made a flying visit to the range a year earlier, collecting ferns and a few snails on the slope facing the Little Floridas. 348 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [May, longer, but the papilla and epiphallus only slightly or not longer than in hachitana. Alt. 16, diam. 27, umbilicus 4 mm. 120 specimens measure as follows, the upper line being diameters in mm.,$ the lower line the numbers of specimens of each size: 22.7 23.7 24 24.5 25 25.5 26 26.5 27 27.5 28 28.5 29 29.7 1 S> DY “Sy ote ea oy ie ig 3 > eS 1 The genitalia of S. h. flora (fig. 6, F, G) resemble the same organs in S. hachitana, except that the penis is decidedly and constantly longer, as are also the vagina and spermathecal duct. The penis- papilla is indistinctly annulate and tapers slowly to the apex. The penis-retractor is long and slender, attached to the apex of the penis, and enveloping the base of the epiphallus. Measurements of the organs have been given on page 328. The pallial organs are much as in Sonorella optata, but there is no white thread defining the secondary ureter. The sole, in aleoholic examples, resembles that of Sonorella bicipitis. It is ochraceous in the middle, pale gray at the sides. Back and flanks dark slate-gray, the tail fleshy-gray above, having an indis- tinct median line. E Jaw and teeth were described in a former paper of this series. Ashmunella walkeri Ferriss. Plate V, figs. 2 to 2e. This species was originally described from a few dead shells. We- found it living in abundance by digging in the soil among the rocks where there was shade. It lives in families or ‘“nockets.”” The snails are very hard to pull, scarcely any coming out entire. When they do, the shell is very light colored, pale ochraceous salmon or pale brown or entirely white. Old ones are dull, but the best-preserved adults have Fig. 7.—sp., spermatheca. a little lustre. The genitalia (fig. 7) have no peculiar features. The ducts are rather short. Length of penis 3 mm.; epiphallus 14 mm.; vagina 2.56 mm.; spermatheca 10 mm. The atrium is-well developed and the flagellum distinct, though short as usual in the genus. | ‘Except the largest and smallest, the measurements disregard fractions less than half a millimeter, being designed only to show the general size. 1915.]} NATURAL SCIENCES O¥ PHILADELPHIA. 349 Oreohelix strigosa var. Two broken and very old “bones”? were found near the central peak above the spring, where we found Ashmunella and Sonorella. The largest one, evidently adult, has the periphery bluntly angular in front, becoming rounded on the last half whorl. There are faint traces of bands above and below it. Spire rather elevated. Height 10.6, diam. 17.5, umbilicus 4 mm. It differs from O. s. depressa by the angulation of the periphery. Possibly an exploration of the southern end of the range, which from a distance looks rather good, would reveal living Oreohelices, but we looked for them in vain in the central and northern parts. ? Thysanophora hornii (Gabb). Vallonia perspectiva Sterki. Bifidaria pilsbryana Sterki. Bifidaria ashmuni Sterki. Ill. PeLoncitLo Mountains. Sonorella hachitana peloncillensis n. subsp. The shell is a little less depressed than hachitana, with the last whorl not so deeply descending, the aperture not so oblique and a trifle larger. Alt. 13.5, diam. 23.7, umbilicus 3.8 mm. ieee, » eens DAM. Le es Peloncillo Mountains: Skull Canyon, Grant Co., New Mexico. Types, No. 94,513, A. N.S. P., collected by J. H. Ferriss, 1907. The genitalia (figs. 6A to 6C, and figs. 6D, E, penis-papille of other individuals) resemble the same organs in S. flora. The penis is encircled by a sheath which reaches nearly to the middle. The penis- papilla is slender, tapering, and subannulate or rather strongly annulate. Epiphallus and flagellum as usual in the group of hachi- tana, It differs from S. hachitana by the decidedly longer penis, which has a much longer basal sheath. The vagina is slightly shorter than the penis, while in S. hachitana and flora it is slightly longer. Measurements are given on page 328. The sole is fleshy-buff, of nearly uniform tint, the side areas not distinct. Back ashy; sides and tail flesh-tinted. EXPLANATION OF PLATEs V, VI, VII. ‘ Puate V—Figs. 1, la, 1b, 1f.—Ashmunella mearnsi (Dall). Station 5, Big Hachet Mts. Figs. lc, 1d, le—Ashmunella mearnsi (Dall). Station 11. 350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |May, Figs. 2-2e.—Ashmunella walkeri Ferriss. Florida Mts. Figs. 3-3c.—Sonorella hachitana flora n. subsp. Florida Mts. Figs. 4—46.—Sonorella hachitana (Dall). Station 7. Piate VI—Figs. 1-ld.—Oreohelix hachetana n. sp. Cotypes. Station 11. Fig. 2.—0. h. cadaver n. subp. Type. Station 5. Fig. 3—Oreohelix ferrissi morticina. Type. Station 5. Figs. 4, 4a, 4c.—Oreohelix ferrissi Pils. Shells denuded of the cuticle and cuticular processes. Station 3. Figs. 5-5c.—0. ferrissi Pils. Cotypes. Station 3. Fig. 5d.—0O. ferrissi Pils. Young specimen, showing the embryonic and 14 neanice whorls. Station 3. Fig. 6.—Oreohelix hachetana. Embryonic and part of the first neanic whorls of a paratype. Station 11. Pirate VII—Figs. 1-ld.—Holospira bilamellata Dall. Station 5. Topotypes. Figs. 2-2b.—H. b. longa n. subsp. Cotype. Station 4. Figs. 3-3c.—H. b. heliophila n. subsp. Cotypes. Station 1. Figs. 4, 4a.—H. b. insolata n. subsp. Cotypes. Station 6. Figs. 5-5c.—H. b. median. subsp. Cotypes. Station 3. Figs. 6, 6a—H. b. mearnsi Dall. Station 8. Figs. 7-7e.—H. crossei Dall. Station 11. Topotypes. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 351 THEORIE DU GNEISS ET DES TERRAINS CRISTALLOPHYLLIENS EN GENERAL. PAR STANISLAS MEUNIER. r Les études que je poursuis depuis de nombreuses années sur le régime géologique des profondeurs de |’écorce terrestre et qui m’ont amené & une conception personnelle du mécanisme volcanique! m’ont mis progressivement dans la nécessité de formuler quelques conclusions sur les traits les plus généraux du métamorphisme sédimentaire, ou normal, et sur le mode de formation des roches cristallophylliennes. La distance qui sépare le voleanisme du méta- morphisme est d’ailleurs, selon moi, beaucoup moins considérable qu’on ne |’imagine quelquefois, au point que j’y vois avant tout deux formes d’une méme disposition générale naturelle. Dans mon opinion, en effet, le voleanisme et le métamorphisme sédimentaire résultent l’un et |’autre de la collaboration de deux facteurs également indispensables: d’un cété le pénétration sou- terraine de |’eau et des matiéres comparables, en circulation dans des régions 4 température convenablement élevée; et d’autre part, la réduction des roches imprégnées, en fragments de toutes grosseurs, par le moyen de réactions mécaniques engendrées dans la substance de la crofite par la contraction spontanée du noyau fluide sous-jacent. Le développement simultané de ces deux actions et la combinaison, 4 chaque instant réalisée, de leurs effets procure |’explication de tout ce qui concerne la maniére d’étre, la composition et la variété des roches métamorphiques, en méme temps qu’ils rendent compte de tout ce qui a trait au phénomeéne éruptif. A cet égard, et pour préciser la discussion, il est indispensable ‘d’éliminer un point de vue qui a cependant, un temps, rallié tous les suffrages et dont il sera facile de démontrer |’inexactitude. C’est de faire des roches cristallophyliennes les produits d’une fusion ignée, toute pareille 4 celle qu’on réalise en chauffant des creusets dans les fourneaux. Dans le nombre des travaux de ce genre, nous devons faire une place aux recherches que MM. Fouqué et Michel Lévy ont pour- suivies de 1878 4 1891 et dont ils ont exposé la signification dans 1 La Nature du 24 mai 1992, p. 386, Paris. 352 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, leur ouvrage intitulé Synthése des Minéraux et des Roches, p. 45 (Paris, 1882). ‘Nous avons entrepris,’’ disent-ils, “une série d’expériences dont le résultat est d’augmenter considérablement le domaine de la fusion purement ignée. Les conclusions & tirer de nos recherches peuvent en effet se résumer comme il suit: un grand nombre de roches éruptives anciennes et modernes doivent leur origine A l’action exclusive d’une fusion, suivie d’un lent refroi- dissement, les fumerolles et les agents volatils ne produisant que la décomposition ultérieure des minéraux primitifs de ces roches, leur action est purement secondaire.’’ Conclusion formelle qui repose sur ce raisonnement que, si une expérience donne naissance & un produit semblable 4 un minéral naturel, la méthode mise en ceuvre par |’expérimentateur coincide nécessairement avec le mode opératoire de la nature. Or, c’est 14 une incontestable imprudence, Je sais bien que la fusion ignée a fourni maintes “synthéses”’ de haute valeur pour la chimie et méme pour la minéralogie; je sais bien que Mitscherlich a démontré l’identité, avec la fayalite ou péridot ferrugineux, de certains cristaux contenus dans des laitiers métallurgiques; Ebelmen a imité, dans leurs composition et dans leur forme, le rubis balai et les autres spinelles, en faisant évaporer la solution de leur constituants dans |’acide borique, fondu au feu des fours 4 porcelaine; que Hautefeuille a préparé des cristaux de feldspath orthose de la méme fagon, en employant comme dissolvant le molybdate de potasse liquéfié. par la chaleur rouge; que bien d’autres succés ont été obtenus dans la méme voie par bien d’autres expérimentateurs et pour bien d’autres minéraux. Mais ces résultats “ne comportent aucune conséquence dont puisse profiter la Géologie. En conclure que les minéraux mentionnés sont des produits de fusion séche naturelle c’est une erreur contre laquelle je n’ai jamais cessé de protester, bien que la plupart des géologues aient continué longtemps 4 croire 4 l’origine des roches cristallophyl-_ liennes par la voie purement plutonique. Quelques-uns cependant y admettent un tempérament? par la collaboration de ‘‘vapeurs montant de l’intérieur, véritables colonnes filtrantes apportant, avec divers gaz, des silicates et des borates alealins.” L’auteur ne dit pas d’ot viennent ces col- laborateurs si opportuns, ni comment ils se sont conservés en profondeur jusqu’au moment d’intervenir, ni par quel procédé ils peuvent traverser les roches fondues superposées et y remplacer 2 M. Termier, C. R. du XI* Congrés géol. intern. PP. 592 et 593 in 8° Stock- holm 1910. 1915.]} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 353 d’anciens éléments par des ‘‘éléments juvéniles.”” Ajoutons qu’en 1899, MM. Fouqué et Michel Lévy sont revenus sans paraitre l’en apercevoir eux mémes sur leurs assertions précédentes, en relatant des résultats procurés par le recuit de verres de granit dans l’eau suréchauffée. Sans contester la ressemblance des résultats artificiels avec des minéraux natifs, il reste indispensable de constater que la structure microscopique des roches cristallophylliennes est en réalité, et quoi qu’on ait souvent supposé, incompatible avec |’hypothése de la fusion ignée. Nous savons par les expériences de Sénarmont* et de ses succes- seurs que, par l’effet combiné de la chaleur et de la pression, |’eau remanie la substance terreuse des sédiments et la convertit en minéraux cristallisés semblables 4 ceux dont sont faits les terrains cristallophylliens. Nous savons aussi que, pour obtenir ces résultats, il suffit que l’eau suréchauffée soit portée A une température incom- parablement plus faible que celle ot fondraient les matiéres modifiées: c’est A 300° seulement que Daubrée, par la décomposition du verre dans |’appareil de Sénarmont, a fait cristalliser le pyroxéne diopside, comme Sénarmont avait déja fait cristalliser le quartz. Nous savons enfin, par |’étude des bloes de calcaires stratifiés, rejetés en mélange avec les produits voleaniques de la Somma,—aprés leur séjour éphémeére en certains points du laboratoire souterrain,—que le régime de celui-ci y a engendré des séries de minéraux comparables A ceux que |’eau suréchauffeé sait produire. Toutefois, il faut convenir que les résultats de Sénarmont, -con- sidérés en eux seuls, et quelque admirables, qu’ils doivent nous apparaite, ne sont pas suffisants pour rendre compte de la différence ordinaire de composition entre les roches sédimentaires et les roches cristallines. A la place d’assises formées, chacune pour son compte, de caleaire, ou, de sable, ou d’argile, ou de gypse, ou de limonite, ou de houille, etc., nous trouvons des masses dont chaque centimétre ‘cube est d’une complication minéralogique extréme, od des minéraux trés divers sont associés intimement, témoignant avant tout d’un régime ot devaient prédominer les causes de mélange, au lieu des actions de triage, génératrices des dépéts stratifiés. Pour concevoir dans ceux-ci le point de départ de la dérivation des roches cristallines, il faut évidemment faire intervenir des Actions mécaniques rapprochant les uns des autres des matériaux tout d’abord trés distants et Uésor- 4 Bull. Soc. Géol. Fr. (4) XXIV, 129. 4 Ann. Chim. et Phys. (7) XXX, passim, 23 354 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, ganisant des accumulations homogénes, pour en éparpiller les débris plus ou moins loin. Il ne faut pas oublier A cette occasion que le mélange en propor- tions convenables des roches sédimentaires. les plus communes, fournit A l’analyse la méme composition chimique que les roches cristallines. Et c’est pourquoi nous assistons parfois et, par exemple, dans |’epaisseur de houilléres, qui, comme 4 Commentry ont éprouvé sufisamment longtemps un embrasement accidentel, des produits imitant, en tout ou en partie, pour leur composition minéralogique, des roches éruptives de la catégorie des laves.® Or, c'est précisément cet ensemble de réactions qui parait avoir laissé ses traces dans la substance des formations métamorphiques et cristallophylliennes. Malgré la dimension gigantesque de ces formations, c’est dans |’intimité de leur structure qu’on doit espérer retrouver, comme 4 la piste, les conditions mémes de leur élaboration. D’ailleurs, tout le monde est d’accord 4 ce sujet, au point qu’a premiére vue, la remarque semble bien inutile. Elle n’est cependant pas aussi banale qu’elle peut le paraitre tout d’abord, car il n’y a certainement pas de chapitre des sciences géologiques qui ait été aussi activement étudié que |’examen microscopique des roches cristallines préalablement réduites en lames minces. Les savants les plus distingués, voire les plus illustres, ont 4 1’envi col- laboré 4 ses progrés et les résultats acquis sont de premiére valeur pour |’analyse des roches et pour leur détermination minéralogique. Mais au point de vue géogénique, ils ont été déformés par |’idée précongue de Ja fusion ignée. Il peut sembler étrange qu’on vienne dire en face & la légion innombrable des lithologistes: ‘‘ Vous décrivez inlassablement les roches les plus variées et cependant, tout en y récoltant des moissons infiniment précieuses de faits capitaux, vous ne les avez pas comprises. Vous avez méconnu le caractére essentiel de la substance minérale, qui est d’étre en proie, de la maniére la plus continue, 4 des modifications de composition et de structure; qui se défait et se refait sans cesse par des phénoménes si internes quils ne peuvent étre comparés qu’a ceux d’ot résulte la biologie des tissus des plantes et des animaux. .” C’est pourtant ce que je viens faire aujourd’hui, aprés avoir hésité des années. On reconnaitra, en effet, que les masses ramenées a la surface du sol par les bossellements généraux, aprés avoir subi le régime des * Etudes sur Commentry, par Henri Fayol. Livre I* 4° partie, p. 618. Roches altérées par les incendies de mines, par Stanislas Meunier. Saint-Etienne, 1887. 1915.| NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 355 laboratoires souterrains, sont avant tout, et au pied de la lettre, des produits de trituration, résultant des fins débris de matériaux trés divers, malaxés et pétris les uns avec les autres, puis cimentés entre eux par une substance conjonctive de composition variable. Aussi a-t-on, certe, bien le droit de s’étonner qu’une pareille structure, si bien reconnue et si bien décrite par tous les lithologistes du monde entier, n’ait pas fait rejeter depuis longtemps une hypothése trés antérieure 4 toute notion histologique des roches. Notons cependant en passant que des faits, bien anciennement apergus proclamaient, jusque dans les laves volcaniques, et au moment méme de leur extravasement sur le sol, un état différent de la fusion proprement dite. On avait constaté, dans le sein de la masse fluide, des grains déja parfaitement solides, cristallins, ayant méme subi des détériorations, 4 la suite de chocs et de froissements. C’est pour consacrer cette circonstance si imprévue que Haiiy a appliqué au plus visible des minéraux dont il s’agit, le nom caractéristique de pyroxene: étranger au feu. Pour nous, ce nom exprimera le mode de formation du minéral par voie mixte (eau suréchauffée) et nous le traduirons par: étranger 4 la fusion du creuset (voie séche). C’est comme si Haiiy avait eu intuition de la vérité qui éclate aujourd’hui, et le microscope nous montre maintenant que les minéraux plus fins que les gros pyroxénes n’ont pas, plus qu’eux, été formés par fusion séche. Comme eux, ils ont été amenés en grains plus ou moins fragmentaires, anguleux ou émoussés, associés 4 des fluides, liquides, vapeurs et gaz com- primés, qui imprégnaient le magma général. Non seulement la structure des roches cristallines résulte du mélange de minéraux dont le point de fusion, généralement trés élevé, est trés variable de l’un A l’autre; non seulement elle admet en contact les substances qui, comme le quartz et le péridot, auraient par fusion réagi les unes sur les autres et donné du pyroxéne par la transformation du proto en bisilicate de magnésie; mais encore elle s’accommode, comme nous venons de le dire, de la réduction de immense majorité des minéraux constituants en fragments souvent anguleux, 4 cassures vives et non émoussées, si énergiquement séparés les uns des autres que l’on n’y voit que trés exceptionnelle- ment des formes qui, 4 la rigueur, pourraient se raccorder. En outre, de tous cdtés, se présentent des plages, de quartz, par exemple, dans la substance desquelles de trés petits débris de minéraux concassés sont trés exactment empaétés,—adA peu prés comme les éléments des bréches des filons concrétionnés. 356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, La raison de cet état de choses nous apparait comme trés compré- hensible, par |’examen de phénoménes que nous ne pouvons con- sidérer comme transitoires, puisque leur série compose précisément un acheminement vers lui. Ils sont procurés par des roches sédimen- taires peu métamorphisées et dont les couches ont été seulement contournées, comme il en existe beaucoup dans les régions mar- ginales des montagnes. Dans le canton de Vaud, par exemple, 4 Brent, auprés de Montreux, j’ai recueilli des crochons de caleaire argileux du lias, ot l’on voit nettement que la torsion des couches, du reste A trés petite courbure, a été réalisée, malgré le manque absolu de plasticité du ealeaire.6 Le caleaire a été broyé par la déformation, mais les débris, parfois trés petits, ont été exactment maintenus en place par leur emballage entre les couches voisines et la circulation des eaux souterraines dans le réseau des fisssures produites, a comblé ces derniéres par la concrétion lentement opérée, de calcite et de quartz cristallins. Le phénoméne s’est sans doute reproduit une série de fois et c’est ainsi que la roche s’est progressivement repliée d’une maniére trés serrée, jouissant d’une fausse plasticité, de tout point comparable a celle qui permet 4 la glace des glaciers de se mouler sur-la forme des vallées, dont ceux-ci occupent le thalweg. Le résultat, produit sur une échelle relativement faible dans la roche argilo-calcaire de Montreux, s’est developpé avec une intensité incomparable dans le gneiss et dans les roches analogues, ot le développement de la schistosité, comme la production de plis et de contournements inextricables, s’est accompagnée de la pul- vérisation et de la cimentation alternatives des fragments produits et de plus en plus écartés les uns des autres, par le mouvement véritablement péristaltique qui accompagne la progression souter- raine des lames de charriage. En général, les géologues qui ont étudié les lames de charriage ne se sont guére préoccupés d’expliquer leur mise en mouvement, de définir |’origine de la force qui les a déplacées, ni de préciser si leur progression a eu lieu en profondeur ou & la surface du sol. M. Termier, sans décider la question, laisse cependant soupgonner sa préférence pour cette derniére alternative’ ‘‘ Pour mon compte,” dit-il, ‘““jJe ne puis pas ne pas croire au passage sur le Briangonnais, aprés la constitution de l’éventail, d’une masse pesante allantdel’E.a1’0.... ® Le Naturaliste du 15 aoftit, 1897, p. 185, Paris. 7 Quatre coupes A travers les Alpes franco-italiennes, pp. 427 et 428, in Bull. Soc. Géol. Fr. (4) Il. 1902—Paris. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 357 La masse pesante qui aurait ainsi rampé sur le Brianconnais, faisant l’office d’un traineau écraseur . . . etc.”’ Je me borne A noter que la coupe, que j’ai insérée en 1902, dans le journal La Nature, con- formément a |’indication donnée au début du présent travail, ne laisse aucune incertitude quant & mon opinion personnelle. Elle met sous les yeux du lecteur, le développement d’un phénoméne souterrain, dont la cause dynamique est toute trouvée dans la con- traction méme du noyau terrestre. Par cette coupe, on s’explique comment Ja superposition de terrains anciens sur des terrains plus récents, est le régime ordinaire,—parce qu'il est nécessaire,—des régions montagneuses; comment des paquets de roches supportés, par une géoclase faiblement inclinée sur |’horizon et surmontée de massifs énormes et puissamment pesants, out si gravir peu 4 peu la rampe qui se présentait devant eux et, au moins en certains cas, abandonner leurs ‘‘racines’’; comment ils ont d0 infliger 4 leur sup- port, et subir eux-mémes, des plissements, des ruptures et des écrase- ments, mélangeant des débris de leure parties séparées. En général aussi, on raisonne comme si le phénomtne mécanique était complétement distinct du phénoméne métamorphique et comme si, par conséquent, une masse gneissique charriée 4 un nombre quel- conque de kilométres de son point de départ, pouvait étre restée identique 4 ce qu’elle était 4 ses débuts. M. Termier a écrit.* “Les actions mécaniques déforment; elles ne transforment pas. Si l’on veut, comme moi, réserver le nom de métamorphisme 4 une cause capable de changer sur d’énormes épaisseurs et d’immenses étendues, un terrain quelconque en une véritable série cristallophyl- lienne, il n’y a pas de métamorphisme purement dynamique, il n’y a pas de dynamo-métamorphisme.”’ Tout le monde sait bien que les actions mécaniques qui déforment, en méme temps échauffent et, dés lors, elles peuvent et doivent déterminer des effets chimiques au sein des masses ot elles s’exercent, de telle sorte que |’assertion que nous venons de citer nous apparait comme la méconnaissance absolue du phénoméne naturel. C’est de la méme cause que résulte l’erreur, encore professée généralement, quant aux conditions chi- miques dans lesquelles ont été élaborées, et s’élaborent encore, les roches métamorphiques, aussi bien que les roches volcaniques. Rappelons que les unes et les autres constituent une longue série de types, réunissant les masses initiales de condensation gazeuse aux dépéts sédimentaires méme les plus récents. Cette liaison qui, § Sur la genése des terrains cristallophylliens C. R. XJ* congr. géol. intern. p. 588, Stockholm 1910. 358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, en écartant la tentation d’admettre des interruptions dans |’évolution planétaire, comporte la plus haute signification philosophique, permet de suivre pas 4 pas les transformations d’une vase sablo- argileuse en schiste ardoiser, en micaschiste et en gneiss: évolution qui n’est qu’un détail du développement normal de la terre. Ainsi apparait la finalité du métamorphisme, qui permet |’évolution plané- taire sans altération des conditions de continuité 4 la surface, et par une circulation verticale ou orogénique de la matiére des roches. La pénétration de |’eau en profondeur résulte surtout de |’en- sevelissement progressif de chaque sédiment sous |’empilement des dépéts qui lui succédent. . Les matériaux de recouvrement exercent en effet, sur le sédiment choisi comme exemple, des effets complexes: par leur poids, ils lui donnent, suivant les cas, plus ou moins de compacité et le privent d’une fraction plus ou moins grande de son eau d’imbibition initiale; par leur faible conductibilité calorifique, ils lui conservent un échauffe- ment qui va en augmentant au fur et & mesure des progrés ‘de |’enfouissement. Mais il importe extrémement de constater, et nous ne saurions trop y insister, que le milieu rocheux sur lequel va s’exercer la collaboration des solutions souterraines et de la chaleur, est soumis A un régime essentiellement mécanique. Par suite des circonstances déja indiquées, il éprouve des compressions inégales suivant les point et diversement orientées. La pesanteur, qui détermine la compacité, purement sédimentaire, et qui agit de haut en bas, doit se composer avec les poussées tangentielles dérivant de la contrac- tion du noyau et dont la direction peut étre considérée comme horizontale. En outre, les réactions internes développent, soit des contractions, soit des dilatations, localisées les unes et les autres et variables selon les moments. De telle sorte, qu’indépendamment des déplacements en masses, dont la progression des lames de charriage est la forme la plus visible, il faut considérer le déplacement relatif des éléments rocheux. II] n’y a pas d’autre raison a chercher de l’état, avant tout craquelé, des fissures microscopiques qui se croisent en tous sens avec des largeurs et des longueurs diverses. On explique de méme |’état fragmentaire de tous les minéraux et la relation de contacts, souvent imprévus, des éclats dans lesquels ils ont été réduits. En un mot, la pression mécanique vient s’associer, de la facgon la plus nécessaire, 4 la pression physique des fluides d’impré- gnation soumis A la température des profondeurs, pour constituer le milieu piézothermique, ou s’accomplissent tous les travaux du méta- 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 359 morphisme et oti a lieu, comme cas particulier, la genése des terrains cristallophylliens. L’ensemble des fissures microscopiques, qui constitue le fait le plus frappant des roches qui nous occupent, est comparable & un réseau capillaire, dans lequel les fluides de profondeur, eau suréchauffée et autres, circulent avec une activité incessante et variable suivant les points et les instants. Parmi les réactions qui s’y développent et qui font assister l’esprit 4 une sorte d’intussusception rappelant celle des tissus organiques, on doit mentionner les précipités de matériaux, en lacis conjonctifs, des débris dérivant de |’écrasement. Et ¢c’est pour cela que, dans les granits, par exemple, les gneiss, les micaschistes, on voit de toutes parts de petits éclats de mica, inclus dans des plages de quartz et d’autres substances, sans que la netteté de leurs cassures ait été en rien altérée par un émoussement ou par un bourrelet, tels qu’en produirait la situation dans un bain de cristal de roche en fusion. Il va de soi qu’il faut compter, dans les causes de modification de ces phénoménes,—outre la variation de composition des courants minéralisateurs, provenant de localités changeantes,—les déplace- ments verticaux déterminés par les bossellements généraux, ¢’est- a-dire la progression souterraine des lames de charriage. Pendant |’ascension vers la surface, les conditions du milieu ambiant s’adoucis- sent et les travaux minéralogiques internes se restreignent jusqu’aé s’arréter. Mais la subsidence compensatrice de segments voisins, transporte dans ceux-ci les conditions mémes que nous venons d’indiquer. De sorte que nous ne pouvons douter de |’existence au moment précis oi nous sommes, et dans des lieux convenablement situés, de toutes le sconditions nécessaires A |’élaboration des gneiss et des roches connexes. On voit done que la “cataclase”’ intense et ininterrompue des masses cristallophylliennes présente une importance véritablement _dominatrice dans toute |’économie planétaire. Celle-ci a, comme moteur décisif, l’association des actions mécaniques aux influences chimiques et thermiques qu’on a considéres jusqu’’ ce moment comme seules indispensables, niant complétement la part du dyna- misme. Répétons que c’est seulement 4 cause du broyage et du rebroyage incessants des roches en voie d'évolution, que des agents chimiques, véritables fluides interstitiels des éléments minéralogiques, peuvent, par une circulation quasi-moléculaire, aller extrairé peu a peu des roches les principes caractéristiques des dép6ts sédimentaires comme le caleaire, pour y engendrer et y substituer, par une véritable 360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, synthése, les minéraux cristallophylliens, comme les feldspaths et les autres silico-aluminates alcalins et terreux. En 1893, M. Lepsius prétendait,® distinguer des Klastogneiss des gneiss ordinaires; cette division est complétement illusoire; en doit y renoncer: il n’existe que des gneiss de dislocation. En définitive, on est en mesure maintenant de suivre toutes les phases de 1’évolution lithogénique, depuis le dép6t qui s’accumule au fond d’un bassin sédimentaire, 4 travers tous les types métamor- phiques, jusque au gneiss et au granit. Le travail souterrain, contrepartie exacte des fonctions super- ficielles, reconstitue ainsi la mani¢re de minerai d’ot celles-ci tirent les substances simples des assises stratifiées. C’est la constatation d’un cycle continu, déjA soupgonné par Lyell, et les géologues qualifiés d’actualistes, et auquel le point de vue activiste’? donne une allure et une portée toutes nouvelles. Il importe d’ajouter que la Ganisnee est un phénoméne beaucoup plus considérable encore que, les faits précédents malgré leur ampleur, ne le feraient supposer. Je tiens, en terminant ce travail, 4X préciser le réle de ce phénoméne dans |’histoire des roches extra- . terrestre, tenant A ne pas laisser passer cette occasion de souligner, par un exemple spécialement frappant, la portée philosophique et la fécondité éducatrice de la Géologie Comparée. La structure bréchiforme d’un grand nombre de météorites a frappé tous les observateurs, qui cependant n’en ont pas compris la haute signification. .MM. Fouqué et Michel Lévy ont pensé en dévoiler la cause: ‘‘La fréquence de ce phénoméne (les bréches microscopiques) dans les météorites peut étre, disent-ils,"" rapportée, soit A un mouvement explosif, qui les a lancées dans |’espace, soit & l’énorme pression qu’elles subissent en traversant 1|’atmosphére terrestre, soit méme a ace cea de parties individuellement formées par l’action ignée.”’ Voila, on en conviendra, un bien grand luxe d’explications pour un seul phénoméne. Chacune des trois hypothéses péche cependant par la base et leur réunion témoigne surtout chez leurs auteurs d’une ignorance absolue de |’économie générale des météorites, dont ils n’avaient sans doute étudié que quelques spécimens séparés et pris au hasard. Pour ma part, et aprés les notions que je viens de résumer, sur l’histoire des terrains cristallophylliens, je n’hésite pas a declarer ° Ein Beitrag zur Lehre von Metamorphismus des Gesteines, in 8° Berlin. 1 Stanislas Meunier: l’Activisme: in Le Naturaliste du 1° avril 1902 (Paris). 1 Synthése des Minéraux et des Roches, p. 41. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361 que la constatation, si banale, de la cataclase chez les météorites doit étre rangée parmi les faits les plus éloquents qui conduisent & reconnaitre, dans les blocs de roches tombant du ciel, des débris provenant d’un seul et méme organisme planétaire ayant évolué exactement comme notre globe lui-méme. Seules, en efet, les réactions actuellement en cours dans la masse terrestre sont capables d’ex)li- quer les détails de |’histologie météoritique. La cataclase, étendue 4 l’histoire des météorites, est un argument nouveau et décisif pour démontrer la réalité des initiales relations stratigraphiques des divers types de roches cosmiques. Il y a méme plus encore; si |’observation de la crotite terrestre éclaire ainsi leur histoire, ces roches a leur tout permettent de préciser, dans le mécanisme du broyage orogénique, des détails que les roches terrestres étudiées seules sont en général impuis- santes 4 nous révéler. Ce sont certaines météorites métalliques, dont la malléabilité a permis |’inscription, dans leur substance, de réactions mécaniques dont s’est accompagné leur broyage durant les efforts tangentiels de la contraction, ou systole planétaire. Sans m/’arréter au cas bien connu de véritables failles avee rejets, comme en montrent les fers de Mukerop (Afrique Australe) et d’Arispe (Sonora), j’ai en vue des masses, d’apparence continue 4 l’ceil nu, et dont la structure est cependant comparable A celle de nos roches cristallophylliennes. Telle est la syssidére de Kodaikanal (Indes Anglaises) dont le témoignage est probant. L’expérience de Widmanstatten y fait apparaitre une structure que M. le docteur Latteux a rendue plus facile A interpréter par des photographies 4 25 diamétres. Elle consiste dans un agrégat, ou bréche, de grains métalliques empdtant des enclaves lithoides, dont nous ferons abstraction. Les grains métalliques appartiennent A deux espéces, lithologiques bien carac- térisés par la disposition relative des alliages, ou sidéronickels, qui y sont associés et qui manifestent de toutes parts des déformations internes rappelant celles que le martelage ou le laminage infligent aux fers météoriques préalablement chauffés. Ces déformations sont pour nous des stéréogrammes des compressions et des étirements éprouvés, que fait ressortir leur liaison intime avec un réseau de micro-fissures rappelant de trés prés celui des roches terrestres décrit précédemment. Le plus souvent courbes et anastomosées de la facon la plus capricieuse, elles sont tantét fines et sellement remplies de matériaux charbonneux, graphite ou cohénite, tantét plus larges et occupées par des veines complexes et rubanées. Les 362 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, délinéaments, rendus visibles sur les sections polies par l’action des acides, nous font assister 4 toutes les étapes de la désorganisation mécanique des “figures” et nous permettent d’imaginer dans les grandes lignes |’allure du broyage orogénique. J’arréterai ici, pour ne pas abuser de la bienveillance de |’illustre Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, la série des faits qui appuient la conclusion de mes études sur les actions mécaniques dont |’épaisseur de la crotite planétaire est le théAtre d’une maniére inin- terrompue. Comme on vient de le voir, les effets en sont prodigieuse- ment différents par ijeurs dimensions d’un point 4 un autre, depuis le charriage en masse dont le massif du Mont-Blanc tout entier parait ne représenter qu’un résidu fort diminué, jusqu’au craquellement presque moléculaire, en tout cas microscopique, des éléments min- éralogiques des roches de tous Ages et de toutes catégories, qul parviennent progressivement a la condition cristallophyllienne. L’admission de l’activité mécanique parmi les facteurs essentiels de la vie planétaire, est d’autant plus nécessaire que la cause méme de cette dépende d’energie éclate 4 nos yeux avec plus d’évidence. Le refroidissement spontané du noyau terrestre ne peut pas se pour- suivre sans déterminer le retrait, 4 tendance centripéte mais 4 mani- festations tangentielles, qui refoule sans relache la crofite 4 peine formée. Les conséquences de ce remaniement n’acquiérent la totalité de leur signification qu’au prix de la collaboration des pres- sions engendrées par le réchauffement souterrain de régions rocheuses, préalablement pourvues, comme on |’a dit, de matériaux élastiques qui savent faire de celles-ci, par |’élévation de leur température, des agents d’actions mécaniques centrifuges. Ces travaux se réalisent selon un mode opératoire harmoniquement cordonné avec toutes les nécessités de la vie planétaire, abstraction faite, bien entendu des conséquences individuelles qui en résultent fatalement. Car nous devons chercher 4 nous dégager du point de vue personnel, pour admirer |’ordonnance majestueuse de ces choses, dont seuls, parmi toutes les créatures, nous Sommes admis 4 contempler |’ensemble. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363 MOLLUSCA OF THE SOUTHWESTERN STATES, VII: THE DRAGOON, MULE, SANTA RITA, BABOQUIVARI, AND TUCSON RANGES, ARIZONA. BY HENRY A. PILSBRY AND JAMES H. FERRISS. This paper and the preceding one (VI) contain the account of mollusks collected in course of our explorations in 1910, from the middle of August to the middle of October. The forms obtained in the Santa Catalina Mountains will be described in connection with the collections made there by one of us (Ferriss) in 1913. We were ably assisted in the field by Mr. L. E. Daniels.'. Besides the ranges enumerated in the title, some account is given of several minor hill groups, all in the region south of the Southern Pacific Railroad. While this paper, with those already published on the Chiricahua and Huachuca Ranges, is monographic for the mollusks of Arizona south of the Southern Pacific, yet the field is far from exhausted. Our work is a reconnaissance rather than a complete malacological survey. Further species will reward search in the southwestern end and outliers of the Chiricahuas, the southern Dragoons, the Whetstone Range, and the mountains around and south of Tombstone. Further west we have explored only small middle sections of the Santa Rita and Baboquivari Ranges. Many hill and mountain groups between Tucson and Nogales remain untouched, most of them doubtless inhabited by endemic species of Sonorella. In the nearly waterless region westward between the Baboquivari Range and the Colorado River, almost nothing has been done aside from some account of the snails of the Comobabi Mountains, which we are now giving. Going westward in southern Arizona from the eastern limit of the State, the general level falls and the mountains become lower and smaller. There is a gradual elimination of snails requiring a reason- able degree of humidity. Ashmunella and Oreohelix extend west to the Huachucas. Beyond that range they disappear. The small shells also abruptly diminish in number of genera and species, by 1 We are indebted to Mr. J. C. Blumer, of Tucson, for several species from the Comobabi and Cababi Mountains, which we did not visit. 364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (June, elimination of the Transition Zone forms. Holospira, too, becomes rare. In the Santa Cruz River Valley it is known by one species— at the present time, one specimen; and none are known from further west. The spread of this genus is not controlled by humidity. It lives in the driest and hottest situations, often at low elevations, but it is confined to limestone tracts, and limited by volcanic or metamorphic rock. The mountains westward, in the region under consideration, are mainly voleanic, and the stony tracts are therefore unsuitable for Holospira. The progressive impover-:shment of the fauna leaves, in the Santa Cruz Valley and westward, a few Lower Sonoran Pupillide, Zonitide, Thysanophora (hornii), arid the true desert snail, Sonorella. Sonorella will live in the most arid places, where the rainfall does not exceed 5 or 6 inches, so long as there is abundant rock shelter and a certain. amount of shade, such as the shadow of a cliff or a small bush. Northern slopes are preferred. In exploring a new mountain or hill in the really arid country one aims for the northern or northwestern slope under the highest crags. If coarse talus or rock “‘slides”’ are found, persistent quarrying should produce Sonorella. In less arid mountains, such as the Santa Ritas, the most productive collecting stations are in the deep, verdant canyons. The exact location of collecting stations, and especially of type localities, which we attempt in these papers, may seem meticulous to many zoologists. In humid areas, or in dealing with less sedentary animals, such exactness would hardly be worth while; if a type locality is fixed within a few miles, it is near enough. But here we deal with a region of intense local differentiation and with creatures which are often confined within narrow bounds by physical conditions. The hunt is difficult and laborious. The colonies are often so small, the country so vast, that, without careful directions, one might make a season’s campaign in the more complex ranges without relocating some former find which it might be important to investigate further. It is, moreover, important to show exactly what ground has been covered, in order that further exploration can be made to the best advantage, that the unexplored parts of the ranges may be gone over. In future it will be of interest to be able to trace the changes and fate of the smaller and more isolated colonies, such as that of Sonorella eremita, which covers an area of only a few square rods, many miles from any other snail colony. We suggest that future collectors continue our serial station numbers in each range, instead of beginning again at No. 1. — = -— ” ~~ w 1915.} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365 I. THe Dracoon MovunrtralINs. This range stands 25 or 30 miles west of the Chiricahua Mountains in Cochise County, Arizona. The well-known double-headed peak of Dos Cabezas is seen northeastward and the Whetstone Mountains westward, but the Dragoons are entirely isolated from other ranges. The Pearce mining district lies on the east side. To its proximity and the demand for mine timber the deforestation of the mountains is due. All of the timber was cut about 25 years ago, but the range, now forming the Dragoon Forest Reserve, shows good repro- duction in places. At present the mountains are almost as bare as the Dos Cabezas. The range is reached from Dragoon Summit, a station on the Southern Pacific R. R. at the northwestern foot of the mountains. North of the railroad the “ Little Dragoons” form a low continuation of the range. There is a depression at Middle Pass (Middlemarch Canyon), where a road from Tombstone to Pearce crosses the range. We did not explore the southern half of the range, below Middle- march, nor the Little Dragoons north of the railroad. The mountains are formed of a complex of limestones and igneous rock, the granites forming wild labyrinths of narrow gorges abounding in cliffs and falls, separated by inaccessible crags and spires, which gave a refuge to the Apaches thirty or forty years ago. The lime- stones, forming a large part of the range, are accessible enough, though rather abrupt, and as usual they proved much more prolific of snails than the granitic and andesitic rocks. The range was visited by us (Ferriss, Daniels and Pilsbry) in October, 1910. A week was spent in Tweed Canyon, where there is a small stream. The map (p. 366) showing collecting stations from Stations 7 and 8 northward was sketched from high points around Tweed Canyon and its northern amphitheatre. After Pilsbry had left, Ferriss and Daniels moved south to Middlemarch Canyon, and the stations (28-36) south of Station 8 are located by notes and a sketch made by them.’ * The map is intended solely to show the positions of our collecting stations, many of which can probably be located exactly, and the others approximately, by the landmarks given. The contour lines merely show local relative elevation, not absolute altitude, and are not consistent on different parts of the map. The summit midway between Stations 5 and 12 on the northern ridge of the amphitheatre above Tweed Canyon is visible from the railroad at Dragoon Summit. 366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, y : 234 3 2 & TWEED.CANYON efeesag eee 29 RX 30 CAVE CANYON SKYSCRAPER PEA PART OF THE bb REN'S _ 35 DRAGOON MTS. (OX g | 2 3 32 ee MILES “oop, Via 33 S1MIDDLEMARCH mee 37. CANYON, %, 36 Fig. 1.—Collecting stations in the Dragoon Mountains. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367 The fauna of this small range is strongly individualized, since all of the Holospiras and larger Helices are very distinct from species of other ranges, even the Sonorellas having well-defined conchological features. Like the Huachucas, there is (or was) an Oreohelix of the strigosa group, but hairy forms and the Radiocentrum group ‘are wanting. The minute shells are all species common to the Chiri- cahua, Huachuca and other larger ranges, but the Transition and Canadian Zone species are very sparsely represented by Pyramidula cronkhitet, Cochlicopa lubrica and Vertigo coloradensis arizonensis only. Otherwise the fauna is purely Lower Sonoran. The collecting stations are as follows: Station 1. Slide of heavy, angular rock on west side of cataract branch of Tweed Canyon, below the crags of this side. Station 2. Near the foot of small ravine next west of the granite defile forming the outlet of the Tweed amphitheatre. Station 3. Near and at top of ridge above Station 2 Station 4. Rim of amphitheatre, western side. Station 5. Immediately north of small peak at N. W. of amphi- theatre. Station 6. Crag about half way up mountain on east side of cataract branch, overlooking part of Cochise Stronghold. Station 63. West of Station 6. Station 7. Limestone ridge at the head of Cataract Branch. Station 8. Higher up on the same ridge eastward. Station 9. East side of the rocky bed of Cataract Branch, near the foot of the (dry) “‘falls.” Station 10. Bottom of eastward ravine in Tweed amphitheatre. Station 11. Part way up ridge northwest of 10. Station 12. High peak at summit of preceding ridge. Station 13. High peak southeast of 12. Station 14. Middle of ridge running from 13 to mouth of amphi- theatre. Station 15. Near bottom of ravine north of 14, and further up than 10. Station 16. Arroyo in mesa in the mouth of Tweed Canyon. Station 17. Third small ravine west of the large granitic spur in Tweed Canyon. Station 18. Above Station 17, and separated from it by granitic dyke about 50 yards wide. Station 19. Below Station 17. Stations 20-22. Second ravine from large granitic spur in Tweed Canyon. Station 22a. Second ravine west from Station 2, lower, part of mountain. Station 23. Second ravine west from Station 2, near summit of ridge. This station and the preceding one were not visited by 368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |June, Pilsbry and are not plotted on the map. They are believed to be east of the granitic spur (dyke) on the north side of Tweed Canyon. Station 23a. Small hill in bottom of Tweed amphitheatre near an abandoned arrastra. Station 24. Gully on mesa, running westward out of Fourr ranch. Station 25. Foothill west of Fourr ranch. Station 26. Gully at south fence of Fourr ranch. Station 27. First ravine west of Cataract Branch in the igneous southern side of Tweed Canyon. Station 28. Bear Gulch, half way down. Station 29. Bear Gulch, near its head. Station 30. Ridge west of Bear Gulch. Stations 31, 32. East side of Soren Gulch. Station 33. West side of Soren Gulch. Station 34. Small limestone hill in Middlemarch Canyon. Station 35. Cochise Peak. Stations 36, 37. Small limestone hills eastward on mesa at mouth of Middlemarch Canyon. Station 38. North side of north hae of Tweed amphitheatre, + mile west of Signal Peak. Stations 39-42. Successive stations between the northern crest of Tweed amphitheatre and the northern foothills of the range. HELICIDA. Sonorella ferrissi Pilsbry, n. sp. Pl. VIII, figs. 3, 3a, 3b. The shell is strongly depressed, umbilicate (the width of umbilicus contained six times in the diameter of the shell), rather solid; of a pale brown tint, between cinnamon and wood-brown, fading around the umbilicus, having broad white bands above and below the narrow chestnut-brown shoulder band and crossed by one or several whitish streaks, reminiscent of former peristomes. The surface is semimat. The initial one-fourth whorl is smooth; a’brief stage of coarse radial wrinkles ensues, followed by fine, short, interrupted radial wrinkles, so short as to be papillae near the upper suture, and sparse, short elevations, arranged in spiral, forwardly descending series. On the second whorl these elevations become distinct, rather regular papille, which persist, in some examples, upon the third whorl. The last whorl has fine stri# and microscopic wrinkling. The spire is but slightly convex. The whorls increase slowly, the last descends a little in front and is rounded at the periphery and base. The peristome expands very slightly in its lower half, and its edge has a rusty tint. It is thickened within by a rather wide but thin white callus, which shows as an opaque buff border behind the lip. The columellar termination is slightly dilated, and the parietal callus moderately thick in fully mature or old individuals. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 369 Height 7, diam. 14.2 mm.; 43 whorls. Genitalia (Plate XI, figs. 3, 3a).—The penis is somewhat slender, slightly shorter than the vagina, and a trifle longer than the epi- phallus. It contains a cylindric papilla nearly as long as itself, trans- versely wrinkled in the distal third and rounded at the end (fig. 3a). The retractor muscle is inserted on the epiphallus near its base. There is no flagellum. Length of penis 4 mm.; penis-papilla 3+ mm.; penial retractor 6 mm.; epiphallus 3+ mm.; vagina 5} mm. Dragoon Mountains, from the northern ridge of Tweed Canyon to the ridges facing the northern slope of the mountains; types No. 103,097, A. N.S. P., from Station 38. Also taken at Stations 3, 4; 5, 10, 12, 18, 14, 15, 21, 22, 38-41. The shell in this extremely distinct species reminds one a little of Trichodiscina. There is no other Sonorella like it. The embryonie sculpture is a modification of the hachitana pattern. In the genitalia it resembles S. bicipitis of the Dos Cabezas range as much as any- thing. It is abundant in the northern part of the Dragoon Range, but Tweed Canyon apparently forms an impassable barrier to its spread southward. We rarely found Sonorella ferrissi sealed to stones, forming small rings. Most living ones were seen loose under stones or in the earth, lying with the aperture up, like Eastern Helices, and sealed with a somewhat convex white epiphragm. It belongs exclusively to the limestone terrain. Sonorella dragoonensis n. sp. PI. VIII, figs. 1, 1a, 1b. The shell is rather depressed, umbilicate (the umbilicus contained 6} times in diameter of the shell), thin, somewhat translucent, pale buffy brown, with whitish bands on both sides of a chestnut-brown band at the shoulder. The spire is low, conic, whorls 42, moderately convex. First one-third whorl smooth, followed by a brief stage of coarse radial wrinkles, continuing longest near the lower suture, and succeeded by papille and short, vermiculate radial wrinkles, interrupted by short wrinkles in a spiral direction, which on the lower part of the whorl bear epidermal bristles, beginning on the latter half of the first whorl, and continuing throughout the embryonic and neanic stages as far as the end of the third whorl. It is sue- ceeded by an excessively minute vermiculate sculpture, which rapidly becomes fainter and disappears on the last two whorls, which are glossy and nearly smooth except for faint growth’ lines. Last whorl wide, descending in front. Aperture very oblique, round-oval. Peristome thin, very narrowly ‘expanded throughout, 24 370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, a little recurved below; the margins approaching, parietal callus short, thin except in old shells. Alt. 11.25, diam. 19.5, alt. aperture 10.5, diam. 9.25 mm. ae ed |: RS i; SO Back dusky, tentacles dark, sole pale yellowish, with faint longi- tudinal lines, demarking the areas, near the tail. Genitalia (Pl. XI, figs. 4, 4a, No. 103,093, from Station 29).— The penis is large, cylindric, encircled by a small muscular sheath at the contracted base, its retractor muscle inserted upon the apex of the penis and the base of the epiphallus. The walls of the penis are thin. Papilla (fig. 4a) nearly as long as the penis, stout, cylin- dric, having obliquely longitudinal corrugation near the end, the apex being obtusely conic with terminal pore. The flagellum is longer than usual. Epiphallus is about equal to the penis in length. The vagina is decidedly shorter than the penis. The duct of the spermatheca is very long. Length of organs in mm.: No. 103,093.—Penis, 10; epiphallus, 10; flagellum, 1.3; papilla, 8; vagina, 6; spermatheca and duct, 39. No. 103,094.—Penis, 11; epiphallus, 9; flagellum, 1.3; papilla, 7.5; vagina, 7. The jaw is highly arched, with five broad, unequal ribs. Dragoon Mountains. Types from Station 28, Bear Canyon, No. 103,094, A. N.S. P., colleeted by Ferriss and Daniels, November, 1910. Also at Station 29, south of the Huzzar Mine, in the same vicinity. This species is related to Dos Cabezas species by the position of the insertion of the penis-retractor, the cylindric penis-papilla and the short vagina. It differs from all of these in its very large and differently sculptured penis-papilla, and the thin shell, with rounded aperture and minute granulation and hairs on the neanie whorls, and a different pattern on the embryonic whorls. It is not closely related to any species of the ranges further west. Other specimens, topotypes, from Station 28 measure: Alt. 11, diam. 21 mm. Oy AMS. 2, mene a ne gen Fe Bag ea GR ees ABBY Specimens from Station 29 measure: Alt. 10.9, diam. 20 mm. e AUS pe eo #4 ce 10, “ec 20) “e “cc 9, 6“ 173 6“ 1915} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 371 Sonorella apache n. sp. Pi. VIII, figs. 2, 2a, 26. The shell is depressed, with low, conoidal spire, umbilicate (the width of umbilicus contained nearly 9 times in the diameter of the shell), extremely thin; mat isabella color above, paler below, glossy and diaphanous in the central half of the base, encircled by a narrow chestnut-brown band above the periphery. Whorls 43, the embryonic shell comprising 13; sculptured like that of S. dragoonensis. The neanic whorls are very minutely crinkled and closely set with short bristles in irregular oblique lines. About 110 of these bristles stand on one square millimeter, on the upper surface of the last whorl in front of the aperture. The bristles are rather delicate on the last whorl, and in cleaning the shell they are likely to be removed in large part. The last whorl is wide and descends rather deeply in front. The aperture is very oblique, subcircular. Peristome thin, the upper and outer margins very narrowly expanding, basal margin slightly recurved, columellar margin dilated, running forward. The ends of the peristome converge strongly, and are connected by a very thin, short, parietal film. Alt. 10.25, diam. 16.8, width of umbilicus 1.9, aperture 8.5 x 9.7 mm. a age Wes B Genitalia (P|. XI, figs. 5 to 5c)—The penis is short and very thick, cylindric, obtuse at the ends, much shorter than the vagina. It has very thin walls, and is filled by a thick, fleshy papilla (fig. 5a). This is thick-walled with a rather large cavity having plicate walls so that it is star-shaped in section (fig. 5b). At the upper end of its cavity there is a short, conic nipple (fig. 5c); at the distal end of the papilla the cavity opens by a transverse slit. The retractor muscle of the penis is inserted on the epiphallus near the penis. The epiphallus passes imperceptibly into the vas deferens. There is no flagellum. The lower end of the vagina is swollen, having thick, fleshy walls. The organs measure as follows: Penis 7, penis-papilla 5, retractor muscle 8, vagina 11 mm. Dragoon Mountains, the types from the southern or Cataract. branch of Tweed Canyon, at Station 9, on the east side of the rocky bed near the foot of the ‘“falls,’’ No. 111,529. Also found at Station 1, a large slide of heavy, angular stone further north on the same branch, rather high on the west side of the ravine, under the great crag. A few dead shells were found at Station 27, in a gulch of the rugged south wall of Tweed Canyon, and at Station 10, on the eastern ridge of the amphitheatre of upper Tweed Canyon. 372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, This species is somewhat related to S. dragoonensis, but differs by its smaller size, thinner shell, decidedly smaller umbilicus, and by having the last whorl densely hairy, the hairs extremely short and close. S. apache differs from S. dragoonensis rather conspicuously in soft anatomy. The penis is shorter with a differently constructed papilla; there is no flagellum; the vagina is much longer and is strongly swollen at the base. The anatomical characters of both have been examined in several specimens from different stations. The delicately hairy periostracum will serve to separate S. apache from other species of the genus. It is an extremely distinct species. Its home is among the great crags around Cochise Stronghold, a favorite resort of the Apaches. Station 10 is some miles northward of the other stations and at a somewhat greater elevation. S. apache was found only in igneous or metamorphic rock, never in the limestone. It was not found sealed to the rock, nor were any white circles seen on the rocks it inhabits, thus differing from nearly all other Sonorellas collected by the authors. Other specimens, from Station 1, measure: Alt. 10.5, diam. 17.5 mm. i adhe oe 9.2, ae 15 “ee age) Station 1 is conspicuous from the hillside on the east side of the mouth of Cataract Branch, as a long, bare streak in the dense brush which clothes the slope below the crag at the west side, some distance up the ravine, and rather high on the side. One living shell and numerous “‘ bones” were found by quarrying in the heavy rock of the slide. More living shells were taken at Station 9, the type colony. - The largest shell seen is a dead individual from Station 27, measur- ing 18.5 mm. in diameter. Oreohelix strigosa var. A young dead specimen was found at Station 2, under a stone, and two fragments of the last whorl at Station 13; both in the limestone region, but at very different elevations, Station 2 being only a hundred feet or so above the bed of Tweed Canyon, 13 on the highest peak of its rim. The largest fragment, half of the last whorl of an adult shell, has a diameter of 18.5 mm. It shows a slight peripheral angle, otherwise resembling O. s. depressa CkIl. This Dragoon species seems from the fragments to be a more depressed shell than the extinct Oreohelix of the Florida Mountains, but it may be the same as the Huachucan race. 1915.]} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 373 As we searched the range carefully for Oreohelix after finding one on the first day, it is probably extinct, not surviving the destruction of the woods. There remains a possibility that it may survive in some part of the mountains not covered by our collecting stations. Thysanophora hornii ‘Gabb). Stations 2, 3, 6, 63, 10, 11, 18, all in the limestone region north of Tweed Canyon. UROCOPTID As. Holospira is rarely if ever found on igneous or metamorphic rock; and as the Dragoons are traversed by many dykes, the limestone areas where Holospiras live are divided by tracts barren of these snails. This has resulted in the differentiation of several species which though variable do not intergrade, so far as we know. In the Hacheta Range the limestone is continuous, and while there has been a good deal of differentiation, the several extreme forms are connected by those intermediate in structure and location. It must be admitted that our knowledge of the Dragoon Holospiras is fragmentary. The whole foothill region, where they abound, needs attention. They are easily found, and in large numbers. Holospira danielsi n. sp. Pl. XIV, figs. 1 to 3a. The shell is cylindric, the upper fourth (or third) tapering to the slightly mamillar, obtuse summit. Tilleul-buff, becoming darker towards the summit. Nearly 23} embryonic whorls are smooth; then slightly retractive axial ribs appear, rather low and delicate on the first neanic whorl, after which they become strong, widely separated, oblique (retractive) on the conical portion, still more widely spaced and vertical on the cylindric portion of the shell, where the summits of the ribs are more or less irregular from breakage due to being in part hollow there. On the penultimate whorl there are 13 ribs (more or less). On the last half of the last whorl the ribs become closer (or many mdy be interposed). The whorls are rather strongly convex, the last one tapering downwards, being compressed below the periphery; base rimate but not perforated. The last fourth of the last whorl is somewhat straightened but not built forward beyond the level of the ventral face of the shell. Aper- ture rounded-ovate. Peristome narrowly expanded except at the upper outer angle, where it is simple and obtuse. The axis is rather slender, subequal except at the ends. In the last part of the penult and first part of the last whorl there is a strong, short, obtuse colu- mellar lamella close to the base; a parietal lamella, much longer and usually strong (and frequently a smaller basal lamella). 374 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, Length 11.5, diafn. 3.5 mm.; 123 whorls. Dragoon Mountains, Cochise County, Arizona, from Tweed Can- yon to the northern end of the range, on limestone, under stones, dead agaves, sotols, ete. Type locality Station No. 2, Tweed Canyon, No. 112,199, A. N.S. P. They live on the most exposed, hottest slopes, often in great profusion, but are not found on the mesa, where H. campestris occurs. This beautiful snail is very distinct from all of our species by its strong, rude, widely spaced ribs. One of the northwest Mexican Holospiras, H, minima, has the same type of sculpture, though less coarse than in the typical H. danielsi, which is the most strongly costate species known. Like other Arizonian Holospiras, the internal lamellz are variable, two or three (parietal and axial, or parietal, axial and basal) being developed. Otherwise the chief variation is in the number of ribs, and also in size. Twenty specimens of the type lot, opened, taken at random, measure as follows: Length 12, diam. 3.6 mm.; whorls 13; lamelle 2. ae ey 23 oe SL oe “ce iS: “ee 3. 4 ER oo eae poe): beeen fe “Pha Opies ee eee ; ee eee chek pl 4 eRe ; yo i ad vs Wg " 12; come / ee ae paiement Lie. (ave a oo Ae Ce Se rad tt cc 2 “ec ce 12; cc Ae ‘é 1, a“ Bee! “e “ 123; “ee am sé rT; “ 3.3 “ec “cc 12: “ce 3° ; Te he Si at Lie eon ose OS OB ee SEDs ES Oe 1020 Sere, 6 Kear: Fe ee TOF | tare 1 ATEN tae eas MOS BO nena, one: Tee ee IC eee oa See na ee : 102, cee ce ire 4 arc: 73 10, “ec 3.2 “cc “e 113; “ec 23 se Rhee eae SY fhe = re oe ae The smallest shell noticed in the type lot measures 8.2 x 3.2 mm., with 10 whorls. The trilamellate shells are slightly outnumbered by those with two lamellew, forming 45 per cent. in the lot measured; but this may be accidental. Three lamellae predominate in the larger shells, two in the smaller. > 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 375 The sculpture is less variable in this lot than in some others. Ten specimens, taken at random, have 10, 12, 12, 13, 13, 13, 15, 17, 17, 17 ribs on the penultimate whorl. These fairly represent the lot, so far as can be told without extensive counting. None counted have more than 17 ribs (see Pl. XIV, figs. 1, la, 10). Station 3 (summit of ridge above Station 2), but west of where the trail crosses ridge). Shells exactly like those of Station 2, but pethaps a little more variable in size, length 9 to 123 mm. in extreme specimens. Station 4 (summit of ridge further northwest, several hundred feet higher than Station 3). These shells are conspicuously larger than at Stations 2 and 3. Part of the shells are typical in sculpture, but in most of them the ribs are much more numerous, closer, smooth, and more regularly spaced. These close-ribbed shells agree with those from Station 5 and from Station 12, a peak on the opposite (east) side of the rim of the amphitheatre of Tweed Canyon. Proba- bly the close-ribbed type of shell extends around the whole rim from Station 4 to Station 12. Two out of fifteen opened have 3 lamelle (both having many ribs), and three have only the columellar lamella (ribs few). The rest, including both many- and few-ribbed shells, have 2 lamellae. This lot was picked up in several places along the summit of the narrow ridge, perhaps in an area of 20x 100 yards. It therefore may com- prise several colonies, and we cannot now tell whether fine- and coarse-ribbed shells occur actually together or not. There may be 12-15 ribbed colonies and 20-30 ribbed colonies, or possibly. both sorts may live together. The measurements give extremes of size and are from “‘selected”’ shells. Length 12.5, diam. 4.1 mm.; whorls 12%; lamellae ‘ ribs 21. 12.3, 4 123; , 24. ge a a 3; 2; i y wre |; oe se 12: “se Zz: “ce 95. 2; 2; 2; Le sé 11.8, “ 4 ‘ “e 11}; “e “e oy: oh 2 ©. eae ae pat ial Mier: I Sian weak” | ial 38. “ee ll, ae 4 se “ 11}; “a “ec 94. ae 10.7, “ee 4 “cc “e 11}; “a ae 30. ORE EY eG uae 5 a an |} + 12. ES Ttcah = @ Mihi, os olaas ) & : en kale Station 5 (north of summit of peak north of Station 4). Shells are - like the fine-ribbed ones from Station 4. No really coarse-ribbed forms were taken. Extreme and average shells measure as follows: 376 _ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, Length 12.3, diam. 4 mm. ; ; whorls 123; lamellae 1; ribs 27. 2: 11.5, 3.7 «qh! ; 16. (ALS, OBS aaa ee ee ee “a 11.2, 4 “ce “ 12; “ 2; “ce 38. pa SSO mihi Cae! pre tue ee ae 10, ac 3.9 “ce ae 114; ce 1 ie a pet fs Station 18 (Pl. XIV, figs. 3, 3a). In the third ravine west of the granitic spur on north side of Tweed Canyon, above a dyke of igneous rock about 50 yards wide. Below this dyke, at Station 17, Holospira campestris cochisei is found. A deep gulley or “wash” extends from the ravine upon the mesa. The shells at Station 18 are a little more finely ribbed than typical H. daniels and to that extent approach H. campestris cochisei. Out of 16 opened, 9 shells have 3, and 7 shells have two internal lamellae. Measurements follow. Length 11.3, diam, 4 mm. ; ; whorls 123; lamellae 2; ribs 22s 1 11.3, 3.7 2: 3: © 98. as 1 “ 4 “ “ Lis “ 2° “ce Se ‘“c ik ‘“ 3.9 “ ““ 121: cc ye ““ 16. ae 10, “ce 3.5 ins “ce 1s “ vp ics Ds cc 10, as 3.3 is “ 113; cc 3; “cc 26. “cc 10, sc 242) “cc “cc 112; “ce aa “ce 18. “cc 9.7, “ee 3.5 “ce “ce "wie “ 3; “ce DPA. 3 5, 3.3" ae! Ps Aes ae 2, Specimens from the southeastern part of the upper amphitheatre of Tweed Canyon have only one or two lamelle (parietal and axial), those with one slightly predominating. The parietal lamella is moderate or small when developed. They are also perceptibly stouter in figure than the types, and the number of ribs is, in the main, greater. Station 10 (floor of the upper amphitheatre of Tweed Canyon, southeastern branch). Not a favorable station for Holospira, being shaded by a dense growth of shrubs and trees. A few specimens taken have one or two lamelle, and the aperture is built forward further than in the types. Ribs as in the following. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 3l7f Station 15 (further east on the same branch, a little higher). Rather stout shells, with the mouth built out shortly (nearly 1 mm.) ; about 15 ribs; lamelle one or two. 12x4 mm. Station 13 (eastern peak of the rim of Tweed Canyon). Fine- ribbed, like Pl. XIV, figs. 5, 5a. Station 11 (steep, stony, arid, southern slope of ridge projecting into amphitheatre, vegetation xerophytic). The shells are greater in diameter than the types, very uniform in sculpture, having 16 or 17 ribs on the penultimate whorl, the peristome built forward further than usual in the type lot. 10.5 x 3.7 mm. axial or axial and superior lamelle. Another lot, taken a couple of hundred feet higher, are similar in form, sculpture and lamelle; ribs 15 to 19. Station 12 (peak on eastern rim of amphitheatre). The shells are larger than at the preceding stations, with more ribs, 26 to 28 on the penultimate whorl. Half of those opened have one, half two lamelle, the superior lamella not very strong. These shells are like those from Station 4 and 5. See Pl. XIV, figs. 4 to 4b. Length 13.7, diam. 4.2 mm.; whorls 13. A wae yr. OBRUSSA Say. BULIMOIDES COCKERELLI P. and F. PLANORBIS TENUIS Phil. sy CARIBAHUS Orb. PARVUS Say. ARIZONENSIs P. and F. Puysa virGata Gld. PALUDESTRINA PROTEA (Gld.). PIsIDIUM PAUPERCULUM (Sterki).® Hs COMPRESSUM Prime (KIRKLANDI Sterki). ANODONTA DEJECTA Lewis, fossil and recent, fragmentary. “ a “cc ac In the drift débris of the Santa Cruz River at Amado’s Ranch (not far from the mouth of Sopori Creek) we took the following: ZONITOIDES SINGLEYANA (Pils.). “; MINUSCULA (Binn.). PUPOIDES MARGINATA (Say). BIFIDARIA PELLUCIDA HORDEACELLA (Pils.). ry PERVERSA Sterki. PROCERA CRISTATA P. and V. (one specimen). PENTODON (Say). VERTIGO OVATA Say. VALLONIA PERSPECTIVA Say. Puysa HuMEROSA Gld. ‘¢ _vireaTta Gid. ce oe On Sopori Creek, five miles west of Amado’s Ranch. THYSANOPHORA HORNII (Gabb). PUPOIDES MARGINATA (Say). Puysa sp. undet. Sonorella arizonensis (Dall). Epiphragmophora arizonensis Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XVIII, p. 1, 1895. Sonorella arizonensis (Dall), Bartsch, Smiths. Misc. Coll., XLVII, p. 198, Pl. 33, fig. 6. This is a rather globose species with narrow umbilicus, quite unlike anything we found. The type is a bleached specimen found in the Santa Cruz River at Tucson, which no doubt drifted down from above. As no Sonorella lives at or near the river level, it must have been washed down from some mouhtain or rocky hill in the 5 The species of Pisidium in these lists were determined by Mr. E. G. Vanatta. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 401 river valley, and will eventually be found again. Great quantities of the drift débris of the Santa Cruz which we looked over did not produce a second specimen, though minute shells were abundant. Only by a rare chance would so turbulent a stream as the Santa Cruz in flood carry Sonorella very far. In its ordinary condition there is a succession of small pools connected, in places, by a slender rivulet; but after heavy rain we have seen turbid water from bank to bank for a brief time. Sonorella tumamocensis n.sp. PI. X, figs. 4, 4a, 4b. The shell is depressed, umbilicate (umbilicus contained about 6 times in the diameter of the shell), thin, light pinkish cinnamon, fading to whitish on the base, and having indistinct whitish borders above and below the rather narrow chestnut-brown shoulder band. Apical sculpture is of the hachitana type, but usually very weak, the initial half-whorl smooth, without the usual radial ripples; the rest of the embryonic shell is marked with a few delicate, interrupted tangential (protractive) threads, on a nearly smooth ground, having weak growth ripples only. The subsequent neanic and last whorls have weak growth lines. Whorls 43, convex, the last slowly de- scending in front. Aperture rounded, nearly as high as wide. Peri- stome thin, the outer and basal margins very narrowly expanded. The columellar lip, in basal view, shows very little dilation. Alt. 10.5, diam. 17.5 mm.; aperture 8.7 x 9.5 mm.; umbilicus 2.8 mm. wide. Other specimens measure: Alt. 10.5, diam. 18 mm. ce 9, oe 17 ce “ec 9, ‘se 16 “e Genitalia (Pl. XIII, fig. 5).—The penis is about as long as the vagina, slender in its lower part, somewhat swollen above. Around the base there is a very short sheath of very loose open texture. It contains a slender, slowly tapering papilla about one-third as long as the penis, its surface closely grooved spirally, the apex obtuse but small. The epiphallus is slender, terminating in a vestigeal, bud- like flagellum. The retractor muscle is inserted on the epiphallus, Other organs as usual. Top of the head and back are slate-colored, shading into gray on the sides, whitish towards the edges of the foot. Tail and sole white. Faint lines define the three areas of the sole. Jaw (PI. XIII, fig. 8) has 3 or 4 very weak ribs. 26 402 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [June, Tumamoc Hill, near Tucson, Pima Co., Arizona. Types No. 112,245, A. N. S. P., collected by Ferriss, Pilsbry and Daniels, October 1, 1910; topotypes in collections of Ferriss and Daniels. Specimens were taken by Mr. J. C. Blumer under volcanic cliffs on the northeast side of Cat Mountain, in the Tucson Range. The shell closely resembles S. eremita of the Mineral Hill group, but it is much thinner with the peristome decidedly less expanded and the embryonic whorls smoother. The penis is very much longer than in eremita. A comparison with the unique type of S. arizonensis Dall, kindly made by Dr. Paul Bartsch, shows that that species is quite distinct. . We would be disposed to consider twmamocensis a subspecies of S. rowelli were it not that in individuals having the shell about the same size as rowelli the penis, penis-papilla, epiphallus and vagina are about twice as long; the spermathecal duct remaining about equal in the two species. The shape of the penis-papilla is different, that of twmamocensis being longer, slender and tapering. For comparison we have added measurements of the organs of S. rowelli to the table on p. 408. The columellar lip dilates much less than in S. comobabiensis or S. sitiens. The penis is very much longer, its papilla both absolutely and relatively much shorter than in S. papagorum. The Tumamoc Hills are an outlying spur of the Tucson Range, about a mile from Tucson west of the Santa Cruz River. There are three hills: Tumamoc, 3,092 feet, on the northern slope of which the Desert Botanical Laboratory of the Carnegie Institution of Washington stands; Sentinel, 2,885 feet, and a lower nameless hill of 2,672 feet elevation. The hills are volcanic, formed of an old andesite flow, largely covered by rhyolite (which is the characteristic rock of the Tucson Range) and later flows of basalt.? Sonorella occurred in great piles of black basalt, on the north slope of Tumamoce Hill, from just below the flat summit down half way to the Desert Laboratory. Most of them were taken not far from the 2,750-foot contour (our Station 35). Living snails are very scarce and hard to get. None were found on the other slopes of Tumamoc Hill, nor could we find them on Sentinel Hill. On the 2,672-foot hill, at the end of Congress St., we took only Bifidaria tuba. ? Topographic and geological maps of these hills, with accounts of their physical features and vegetation, may be found in the following publications of the Carnegie Institution of Washington: D. T. Macdougal: Botanical features of North American deserts, 1908. Volney M. Spalding: Distribution and movements of desert plants, 1909. —_—se 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 403 Except for the specimens of S. tumamocensis, taken by Mr. Blumer at Cat Mountain, the Tucson Range, about 25 miles long, is not explored for shells. Sonorella papagorum n. sp. PI. VIII, figs. 8, 8a, 8b. The shell is depressed, umbilicate (the umbilicus contained about 9 times in the diameter of the shell), rather thin, somewhat glossy, light pinkish cinnamon, fading to whitish around the umbilicus, and a trifle pale at the edges of a dark chestnut-brown band at the shoulder. Apical sculpture is of the hachitana type, but very weakly developed, the initial half-whorl smooth, the rest of the embryonic shell similar to that of S. tumamocensis. Subsequent whorls are lightly marked with growth lines. Whorls 4%, convex, the last descending slowly in front. Aperture oblique, rotund-oval: Peristome slightly ex- panded above, the outer and basal margins well expanded, thin; columellar margin broadly dilated, partly covering the umbilicus. Alt. 14, diam. 23 mm.; aperture, alt. 11.8, diam. 13.6 mm.; width of umbilicus 2.7 mm. Genitalia (Pl. XIII, fig. 4).—Penis small and slender, about equal in length to the vagina and of equal calibre throughout. II. 1. D. a, b. 1.3.8; Apophyllite: I. 1. C. b. Aragonite: I. x = b.: I. 3..¢; Lig, eae “IL. TED. Ardennite: ? Arfvedsonite: I. 1. B. a.; Argentite: I. 3. a, b. Argyrodite: I. 3. a. Arsenic: I. 3. a, c. Arseniopleite: IL. 1. C. b. Arseniosiderite: I. 3. ¢.; II. 1. C. b. Arsenolite: I. 3. ¢. Arsenopyrite: I. 2. A. a.; I. 3. a. Artinite: ? Asbestus: I. 1. D. b. Asbolite: II. 1. C. a. Ascharite: II. 1. D. a. Asphaltum: II. 1. F. b. Astrolite: ? Astrophyllite: I. 2. B. a. Atacamite: 1. 3. ¢ Atelesite: 1. 3. ¢. Atopite: ? Augite: I. 1. A. a.; I. 1. C. 1 ee ys Oe ae : 12, C. a.; sy SEDs ie Ee: 448 Aurichalcite: i. o0G: Autunite: I. 2. A. ec. Axinite: I. 2. x a: IL-3. 8. b. Azurite: 1. 3. ¢. B Babingtonite: I. 1. C. a.; II. 1. B. b. Baddeylite: I. 2. B. a.; II. 1. A. a. Bakerite: II. 1. D. a. Barite: I. 3. a, c.; Il. 1. B. ¢.; Lt. a... Dee. Barkevikite: I. 1. B. a. Barrandite: II. 1. C. b. Barysilite: II. 1. C. b. Barytocalcite: di. j Bd Ba Bastnisite: I. 2. A. e. Bathvillite: II. 1. F. b. Baumhauerite: I. 3. a. Bauxite: I. 1. A. c.; I. 1. B. c.; L136 bes SET a. Bayldonite: a Bechilite: II. 1. D. a. Beckelite: ? Beegerite: I. 3. a. Belonesite: ? Bementite: II. 1. C. b. Benitoite: I. 2. B. a. Beraunite: II. 1. C. b. Berthierite: I. 3. a. Bertrandite: I. 2. A. b. Beryl: I. 2. A. a. Beryllonite: 2! AL; Berzelianite: I. a a. Berzeliite: II. 1. C. b. Beudantite: II. 1. C. b. Beyrichite: I. 3. a. Bieberite: I. 3. ¢. Bindheimite: I. 3. e. (Binnite: doubtful species.) Biotite: I. 1. A. ah r Ne Ni ap 1 GE Ia toe een ee anh Ripe AS og Te 32:8:: aa ee IL BE. Bischoffite: IL. j el BART Bismite: I. 3. ¢. Bismuth: I. 2. A. a.; a 3. a, Bismuthinite: a Ds Pic oe 3. a: Bismutite: I. 2. A. aie 215 Bismutospherite: I. ee LSC, Bixbyite: I. 2. A. a. Bloedite: II. 1. D. a. Bobierite: II. 1. E. b. Bombiccite: II. 1. F. b. Boothite: I. 3. ¢. ~* Boracite: II. 1. D. a. Borax: II. 1. D. a Borickite: II. 1. 6. b. Bornite: I. 2. A. a.; I. Botryogen: I. 3.¢. Boulangerite: s a a, Bournonite: I. Botinsniie: i ‘4; 3. a, b. ] Wie tae BAS PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF | Cassiterite: I. 1. A. a.; I. 2, A. a; Celsian: II. 1. C. b. Cenosite: I. 2. B. a. _ Cerargyrite: I. 3. ¢ | Cerite: ? | Chabazite: I. 1. C. b.; I. 2. A. a. | Chalcedony: I. 1. A. ¢.; I. 1. D. ¢.; _ Brugnatellite: ? _ Brushite: II. 1. E. b. [Aug., Brackebuschite: I. 3. ¢. Brandtite: II. 1. C. b. Braunite: II. 1. C. a Breithauptite: I. 3.:a Brewsterite: I. 1. C. aN Brochantite: I. 3. e. Bromlite: I. 3. a. Bromyrite: I. 3. ¢. Brongniardite: I. 3. a. Brookite: I. 1. A. b.; I. 2. A. a. Brucite: I. 1. D. ¢. _ eS — Bunsenite: I. 3. ¢. Bytownite: I. 1. C. a.; I. 1. D. a. C Cabrerite: I. 3. e. Cacoxenite: II. 1. C. b. Calamine: I. 3. c.; II. 1. C. ec. Calcioferrite: II. 1. C. b. Calciovolborthite: ? Calcite: TI, 12°C) b.) Ld Dab, Ge B2. AL as 2B. ap eee May es oe VU eet esl oF 15: Dele Daa Caledonite: Callainite: I Calomel: I. Cancrinite: Canfieldite: Capellenite: Caracolite: I. 2 Carminite: II. Carnallite: IT. Carnotite: II. Carpholite: I. Carphosiderite: II. Carrolite: I. 3. a. Caryinite: II. 1. C. b. Caryocerite: I. 2. B. a. Caryopilite: see Karyopilite. iN FE 3. i i i 1. il if 2. "Eb oa a Bogn ey. ore Castanite: I. 3. ¢. Catapleiite: I. 2. B. a. Celadonite: ? Celestite: I. 3. a.; II. 1. D. a. Cerussite: I. 3. ¢. Cervantite: I. 3. ¢. Ceylonite: I. 1. A. a.; I. 1. B. a.; Lie Ba Chaleanthite: I. 3. ¢. I. 2, Ge. 4..3.-053, 1 1 Aaa TT. 126: c: 1915.] Chaleocite: I. 3. a, b. Chalcolamprite: I. 2. B. a. Chalcomenite: I. 3. ¢. Chalcophanite: I. 3. ¢.; I. 1. C. e. Chaleophyllte: I. 3. ec. Chalcopyrite: I. 1. A. a.; I. 1. C Mylets.-Dis: 1 eD. a 8 2 5S ee Chaleosiderite: I. 3. c. Chalcostibite: I. 3. a. Chalmersite: I. 3. a. Chenevixite: I. 3. ¢. Childrenite: I. 2. A. a. Chilenite: I. 3. a. Chiolite: I. 2. A. a. Chiviatite: I. 3. a. Chloanthite: I. 3. a. Chiorite: I; 1. Ab, ¢.5 I. 1: Be b:; Ras p.:- 38D bes 3 2 Bs es L2 Bob; th. 2: -C.-b.: “Includes aphrosiderite, clinochlore, deles- site, diabantite, penninite, pro- chlorite, strigorite. Chloritoid: II. 1. A. b. Chloromagnesite: I. 4. Chloromanganokalite: ? Chloropal: I. 1. A. ¢.; If. 1. C.¢. In- cludes nontronite. Chondroarsenite: II. 1. C. b. Chondrodite: II. 1. B. b. Chromite: I. 1. D. a.; II. 1. A. a. Chrysoberyl: I. 2. A. a. Chrysocolla: I. 3. ¢. Chrysolite: see olivine. Chrysotile: see serpentine. Churchite: ? (Cimolite: doubtful species. ) Cinnabar: I. 3. a.; I. 4 Cirrolite: II. 1. C. b. Claudetite: I. 3. ¢. Clausthalite: I. 3. a. Clinochlore: see chlorite. Clinoclasite: 1. 3. ¢. Clinohedrite: IL. 1. C. b. Clinohumite: IL. 1. B. b. _ Coal: IL. 1. F. b. Cobaltite: I. 3. a. Colemanite: II. 1. B. b. Collophanite: I. 1. E. b. (Collyrite: doubtful species.) Coloradoite: 1. 3. a. Columbite: I. 2. A. a. Conichaleite: I. 3. ¢. Connarite: ? Connellite: L. 3. ¢. Cookeite: I. 2. A. e. Copiapite: 1. 3. ¢. Copper: I. 1. C. b.; [. 3. a, ¢.; Lis he Aa Re Coquimbite: L. 4. Cordylite: I. 2. B. e. 29 NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. | Diopside: I. 1. C. a.; IL. 1. _ Dioptase: I. 3. ¢. 449 | Cornwallite: I. 3. ¢. (Corundophyllite: doubtful species.) ' Corundum: I. 1. A. a.; I. 1. D. a, b.; Toe aera ler 2k De aes le. ee oe 19. 7. Blk Corynite: I. 3. a. . Cosalite: I. 3. a. Cotunnite: I. 3. ¢.; I. 4. Covellite: I. 3. a, b. Crednerite: ? Cristobalite: I. 1. C. a. Crocidolite: II. 1. A. b. Crocoite: I. 3. ¢. Cronstedtite: I. 3. a. Crookesite: I. 3. a. Cryolite: I. 2. A. a. Cryolithionite: I. 2. A. a. Cubanite: I. 3. a. Cuprite: I. 3. ¢. Cuprobismutite: I. 3. a. Cuproiodargyrite: I. 3. e. Cuprotungstite: I. 3. a. Cuspidine: II. 1. B. b. Cyanite: I. 2. A. a.; II. 1. A. a, b. Cyanochroite: I. 4. Cyanotrichite: I. 3. e. Cylindrite: I. 3. a. Cyprusite: ? D Dahllite: ? Danalite: see helvite. Danburite: II. 1. B. b. (Daphnite: doubtful species.) Darapskite: II. 1. D. a. Datolite:.5.-4.-C: bic: To 204A x: Be ites Daubreeite: ? Daubreelite: meteoritic. Daviesite: 1. 3. ¢. Dawsonite: ? Delessite: see chlorite. Delorenzenite: ? Derbylite: II. 1. A. a. Descloizite: 1. 3. ¢. Deweylite: I, 1. D. b. Diabantite: see chlorite. (Diadochite: doubtful species.) Diamond: I. 1. D. a.; ID. 1. A. a. | Diaphorite: I. 3. a. Diaspore: I. 1. A. b.; L. 1. B. b. Dickinsonite: I, 2. A. b. Dietrichite: ? Dietzite: Il. 1. D. a. Dihydrite: I. 3. ¢. Dolerophanite: I, 4. Dolomite: 1. 1. D. b.; 1. 3. a.; Ee 3.8, by 6:5 Li. 1; Dyas, Domeykite: I. 3. a. 450 Dopplerite: II. 1. F. b. Douglassite: II. 1. D. a. Dufrenite: II. 1. C. b. Dufrenoysite: 1. 3. a. Dumortierite: I. 2. A. a Durangite: ? Durdenite: I. 3. e. Dysanalyte: ? Dyscrasite: i ae: Dysodile: LT. 123. -b: 1h 2. Bees E Ecdemite: II. 1. C. b. Edenite: II. 1. B. b. Edingtonite: I. 1. C. b Egglestonite: I. 3. c. Elaterite: II. 1. F. b. Elpidite: I. 2. B. a. Embolite: I. 3. ¢. Emmonsite: I. 3. e. Emplectite: I. 3. a. Enargite: 1. 3. a. Enigmatite: I. 1. B. a.; I. 1. C. « Doe Bek. Enstatite: I. 1. C. Woe! (a DAY Eosphorite: I. 2. A. ee Epiboulangerite: I. 3. a. Epididymite: I. 2. B. a. Epidote: I. 1. A. a.; I. 1. C.a, b:; RA Debs LZ. A. a ee. eo, JURE OE i FR ce Epigenite: I. 3. a. Epistilbite: I. 1. C. b. Epsomite: I. 1. D. c.; I. 3. ¢.; I. 4.; LI. 1. Does Eremeyevite: I. 2. A. a. Erionite: ? Erinite: I. 3. ¢. Erythrite: I. 3. ¢. Erythrosiderite: I. 4. Eschynite: I. 2. A. a. Ettringite: ? Eueairite: I. 3. a. Euchroite: I. 3. ¢. Euclase: I. 2. A. a. Eucryptite: I. 2. A. b. Eudialyte: I. 2. B. a. Eudidymite: I. 2. B. a. Eulytite: ? Euxenite: I. 2. A. a. Evansite: II. 1. C. b. FP Fairfieldite: I. 2. A. b. Famatinite: I. 3. a. Faujasite: I. 1. C. b. Fayalite: I. 1. A. a. Felsobanyite: I. 3. ¢. Fergusonite: I. 2. A. a. sipylite. ‘ Includes PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Aug., Ferronatrite: ? Fibroferrite: I. 3. ¢. Fichtelite: II. 1. F. a. Fiedlerite: I. 3. Cc. Fillowite: I. 2. A. b. | Fischerite: Ul. LG Flinkite: II. 1. C. b. Florencite: ? Fluellite: I. 2. A. c. Fluocerite: I. 2. A. a. Fluorite: I..1. A. a.; I. 1; Boag l.2. Ava: 12. Bee eee ae Ia Ltd Boas Te eee Forsterite: I. 1. C. a.; i. {Boe Forbesite: I. 3. ¢. Franckeite: I. 3. a. Franklinite: II. 1. C. b. Freieslebenite: I. 3. a. Friedelite: II. 1. C. e. Fuggerite: II. 1. B. b. G Gadolinite: I. 1. A. a.; I. 2. A. a. Gahnite: I. 2. A. a.; II. 1. C. b. Galena: I. U.C7 bs 274 alae Galenobismutite: I. oa Ganomalite: II. 1. C. b. Ganophyllite: II. 1. C. b. Garnet: see almandite, andradite, grossularite, pyrope, spessartite, uvarovite. Garnierite: I. 1. D. ec. Gaylussite: II. 1. D. a. Gearksutite: I. 2. A. b. Gehlenite: II. 1. B. b. Geikielite: II. 1. A. a. Genthite: I. 1. D. ¢. Geocerite: II. 1. F. b. Geocronite: IL. 3. a. Georgiadesite: ? Geomyrite: ? Gerhardtite: I. 3. ¢ Gersdorffite: I. 3. a Gibbsite: I. 1. fee L.. Bues Tes Crib: Gismondite: I. 1. C. b. Glauberite: II. 1. D. a. Glaucochroite: II. 1. C. b. Glaucodotite: I. 3. a. Glauconite: II. 1. A. a.; IL. 1. C. a. Glaucophanite: I. 1. c. be; IT, 1. As Glockerite: I. 3. ¢. Gmelinite: I. 1. C. b. Goethite: II. 1. C. a. Gold: Ti Av ass Te?) Boas ” (1 Wi De ge Gonardite: ? Goslarite: I. 3. ce. Goyazite: ? Graftonite: I. 2. A. a. Grandidierite: I. 2. A. a. a, ¢.} 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES esas: bey Ons) 2. Ly a D.a.; 12. A: a ia tint Pt Ab: Es LB. b.; Tieter. b.. Greenockite: I. 3. a. Grossularite: II. 1. B. b. Griinerite: I. 1. C. b. Guano: II. 1. E. a. Guanajuatite: I. 3. a. Guarinite: II. 1. B. b. Guejarite: I. 3. a. Guitermanite: I. - a. Gummite: I. 2 ear e Gypsum: em Ae Mt Eo a, ie ia Gy ta eS ve Gyrolite: L. 1. Cb. H » 2 °) ( D.a Hackmanite: ? Haidingerite: I. 3..¢c. Hainite: I. 2. B. a. Halite: I. 4.; II. 1. D. a. (Halloysite: ‘doubtful spec ies.) Halotrichite: I. 1. Ae Ge NLL: he A, Hambergite: I. ase a. Hamlinite: I. ‘ = By Hancockite: iT : 'C. b. Hanksite: II. 1. D. a. Hannayite: IL. 1. E. b. Hardystonite: II. 1. C. b. Harmotome: I. 1. C. b. Harstigite: II. 1. C. b. Hartite: II. 1. F. a. Hatchettite: II. 1. F. b. Hatchettolite: I. 2. A. a, Hauchecornite: ? Hauerite: I. 3. a.; I. 4. Hausmannite: IL. 1. C. a. Hauynite: I. 1. B. a.; I. 2. B. a. Hedenbergite: I. 2. B. a.; IL. 1. B. b. Heintzite: II. 1. D. a. Hellandite: I. 2. A. a. Helvite: I, 2. A.a.;1.2.B.a. Includes danolite. Hemafibrite: Il. 1. C. b. Hematite: I. 1. A. a.; 1. 1. C. b.; Da Was Gut Ls Op a, rag aE De Be. 6 ie a. 2. CyB, D: Hematolite: Il, 1. C. b. Hercynite: II. 1. A. b. Herderite: I. 2. A. b. Herrengrundite: I, 3. ¢. Hessite: I. 3. a. Heulandite: I. 1, C. b. Hibschite: ? Hieratite: IL. 4. Hillebrandite: II, 1. B. b. Hiortdahlite: I. 2. B. a. Hisingerite: ? Hoernesite: ? Homilite: I. 2, B. a. OF PHILADELPHIA, Hopeite: I. 3. ¢. Hornblende: I. 1. A. a.; I. 1. C. a.; 2 AL a. 2 GC. a; Te A: a, b.; Horsfordite: I. 3. a. Hortonolite: ? ve Howlite: IT. 1. D. Hiibnerite: I. Ac oe ono Humboldtine: “a “SB. bs Diol ae: Humite: II. 1. B. b Hureaulite: I. 2. A. 3 Hutchinsonite: I. 3. « Hyalophane: I. 3. a.; Hyalotekite: II. 1. C. b. | Hydroboracite: II. 1. D. a Hydrocerussite: I. 3. ¢. Hydrocyanite: I. 4. | Hydrogiobertite: 2 W's Hydromagnesite: I. 1. D. ¢. Hydronephelite: I. 1. B. ¢.; 1. [i '2:-Bae. Hydrotaleite: I. 1. Dz b. Hydrozincite: I. 3. ¢. 5 UL. Py 8 Hypersthene: I. 1. C. a. ot oes D.: Neate C. a. I Idocrase: see vesuvianite. Ihleite: ? llesite: I. 3. ce. Ilmenite: I. 1. A. a.; I. 1. B. peat Ly 2eees, a be ee Cua TEOMA. b:: Ilvaite: Inesite: lodobromite: ? lodyrite: I. 3. ¢. Tolite: T7125 A. ase I. 2: Asa Lis TA. BD: Iridium ya a; 'D.. 1. Ae a ae 1A eel OEY ta Ra a. o,. 2.36.8, ? ey Pg Cay Tee | Kp a.5 IL. 1. A. a, b Osmium: J. 1. D. a.; Il. 1. A. a. Oxammite: I]. 1. in ib P Pachnolite: I, 2. A. b. Palladium: I. 1. D. a Palmierite: 1. 4. Paragonite: I. 2. A. a.; II. 1. A. b. Parahopeite: 1. 3. e. Paralaurionite: I. 3. ¢. Paraluminite: ? Paratacamite: ? Pargasite: LI]. 1. B. b. Parisite: I. 2. A. a. Partschinite: ? Pearceite: Ag 3. a. P Peat: I. 1. F. Pectolite: L 1. CG. b. Peganite: Il. 1. C. b. Penfieldite: Toa & Penninite; see chlorite. 454 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Aug., Pentlandite: I. 1. C. a. Pyroaurite: I. 1. D. b. Percylite: ? Pyrochlore: I. 2. B. a. Periclasite: II. 1. B. b. Pyrochroite: II. 1. C. e. Perovskite: I. 1. B. a.; I. 1. C. a.; Pyrolusite: II. 1. C. a. see Bak Pyromorphite: I. 3. c. Petalite: I. 2. A. a. Pyrope: I. 1. D. a.; I. 2. A. a. Petroleum: II. 1. F. b. Pyrophyllite: I. 2b. Petzite: I. 3. a. Pyrosmalite: II. 1. C. b. Pharmacolite: I. 3. ¢. Pyrostilpnite: I. 3. a. Pharmacosiderite: I. 3. ¢. Pyroretinite: I. 1. F. b. Phenakite: I. 2. A. a Pyroxene: see augite, diallage, diop- Phillipsite: I. l. c 7 side, hedenbergite, jeffersonite, Phlogopite: I. 2. C. a.; Il. 1. B. b. schefferite. Pheenicochroite: I. 3. ¢. Pyrrhotite: I. 1. C. a.; I. 1. D. a.; Pholidolite: II. 1. B. b. Lag; 120.0. Taleo Phosgenite: I. 3. ¢. Phosphorite: II. 1. E. a. Q Phosphosiderite: I. 1. C. b. Phosphuranylite: 1. 2. A. c. Quartz: I. 1. A. 'a,:¢;5- 1. i. Boa; Pickeringite: II. 1. D. a. els Ca. 1. 1. Des 1.2 Aves Picotite: I. 1. D. a. 1, 2..B. aj 1. 2. Goa, 0:53.18. ays Picromerite: I. 4.; II. 1. D. a. LT AS a, bath Bias Picropharmacolite: ? PU. C.a, Wues Piedmontite: I. 1. A. b.; I. 1. C. b.; | Quenstedtite: ? Bod. Ach Gd kb. Quetenite: I. 3. ¢. Pinakiolite: II. 1. C. b. Pinnoite: II. 1. D. a. R Pirssonite: II. 1. D. a. Pisanite: 1. 3. c. - Raimondite: ? Pistomesite: ? Ralstonite: I. 2. A. b. Pitticite: I. 3. c. Rammelsbergite: I. 3. a. Piagionite: I. 3. a. Raspite: I. 3. e. Platinum: I. 1. D. a.; II. 1. A. a. Rathite: I. 3. a. Plattnerite: 1. 3. c. Realgar: I. 3. a.; I. 4. Plumbogummite: I. 3. c. Reddingite: I. 2. A. b. Polianite: II. 1. C. a. Reinite: ? Pollucite: I. 2. A. a. Remingtonite: I. 1. D. e. Polyargyrite: I. 3. a. Retzian: II. 1. C. b. Polybasite: I. 3. a, b. Rezbanyite: I. 3. a. Polycrase: I. 2. A. a. Rhabdophanite: ? Polydymite: I. 3. a. Rhagite: I. 3. ¢. Polyhalite: II. 1. D. a. Rhodozite: I. 2. A. a. Polylithionite: see zinnwaldite. Rhodochrosite: I. 2. A. a.; I. 3. a.; Polymignite: I. 2. B. a. Bp i, Be Powellite: I. 3. e. Rhodonite: I. 1. A. a.; I. 2. A. a; Prehnite: I. 1. C. b. Lo. a7 Ll. -1L Be b. iaee e Prochlorite: see chlorite. Rhonite: I. 1. C. a. Prolectite: II. 1. B. b. Rickardite: I. 3. a. Prosopite: I. 2. A. b. Riebeckite: I. 1. B. a Proustite: I. 3. a, b. Rinkite: I. 2. B. a, Pseudobrookite: I. 1. A. a. Rinneite: II. 1. D. a. Pseudomalachite: I. 3. ¢ Rittingerite: I. 3. a. Psilomelane: II. 1. C. b. “Includes wad. | Rochlederite: II. 1. F. b. Psittacinite: I. 3. ¢. Roeblingite: II. 1. C. b. Ptilolite: I. 1. C. b. Roepperite: II. 1. C. b Pucherite: ? Rogersite: I. 2. A. e. Purpurite: I. 2. A. ¢. Romerite: I. 3. ¢. Pyrargyrite: I. 3. a, b. Roscoelite: ? Pyrite: I. 1. A.a.; I. 1. C. a, b.; Roselite: I. 3. ¢. L2A- a; L224 Ses Rosenbuschite: I. 2. B. a. 11.1. A.b.; 11.1, B.b;1L1.F.b. | Rumpfite: ? 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 455 Rutile: 1. 1. A. b.; I. 1. B. b.; Spherocobaltite: I. 3. ¢. PE Ca isd. A ac: Spinel: I-39. A. a: |W Ba Ir do E27 B Day or Cn: II. 1. B.b. See also ceylonite, I ay Ao, Bi: picotite. Spodiosite: ? S Spodumene: I. 1. A. a.; I. 2. A. a. Safflorite: I. 3. a. ee By hi = He aera I. * Staurolite: IT. 1. A. a, b. Steltznerite: ? ‘ Ta: ; Saponite: { Stephanite: I. 3. a, b. Sapphirine: ? : ae Stercorite: II. 1. E. b. aban 3 2 7 F P Sternbergite: I. 3. a. ras ts 3 thors Stibiconite: i. ee 2 sor yaaa Stibnite: I. 2. A. a.; I. 3. a. Sassolite: I. 4.; IT. 1. D. a. Sithites F 9 . “f neta |. Seacchite: 1.4. Stilpnomelane: ? Seapolite: see wernerite, etc. Sealattos T. Bin Schapbachite: I. 3. a. : ro Strengite: II. 1. C. b. a sata II. : a ay eat ten Strigovite: see chlorite. Schee tar IL 1. rE om Stromeyerite: I. 3. a. Se eee ay Di Strontianite: IT. 1. D. a. Schirmerite: 1. 3. a. Seine WN Gb Schizolite: I. 2. B. a. : ee an Stutzite: ? Stylotypite: I. 3. a. Succinite: II. 1. F. Schorlomite: I. 2. B. a. Schwartzembergite: I. 3. ec. Scolecite: 1. 1. C. b. : ae Saag : Sulfoborite: IT. 1. p. a. ee I. 3.0.5 1. 4. Sulfohalite: II. 1. D. a. Steaattar: <4 poy 4 Ay 3 I; 4.5 Td. Bey Selentellurium: ? Salvaniins 1) Sa Sellaite: II. 1. D. a. Sussexite: II. 1. C. b. Semseyite: I. 3. a. 1 PRET RE Senaite: II. 1. A. a. Rteaceat ae Senarmontite: [. 3. ¢. Reletha: 7 7h ll “LD A Sepiolite: I. 1. D. b. on, Nealitc)- 40 Aa. cee Serendibite: II. 1. B. b. 7 ce rae Ab Synadelphite: IT. 1. C. b. Serpentine: I]. 1. D. b. Roc nhinta: Serpierite: I. 3. ¢. Seybertite: ? bi aicaaree I. i. BD. a. Siderite: I. 2. A. a.; I. 3. a, e.; Szaibelyte: y , Me Szmikite: ? Rie dh Oy abs be dy OC. a Sideronatrite: ? , Sillimanite: I. 1. D. ¢.; I. 2. A. a.; te ay Tachhydrite: IT. 1. D. a. Silver: I. 1. C. b.; I. 3. a, ¢.; Teenolite: IL. 2. 5 fh. Tin ls-Ava; Tagilite: ? Sipylite: see fergusonite. Tale: I. 1. D. b. Skogbolite: ? Tamarugite: ? Skutterudite: ? Tantalite: I. 2. A. a. Smaltite: 1. 3. a. Tapalpite: L. 3. a. Smithite: [. 3. a. Tapiolite: I, 2. A. a. Smithsonite: I. 3. Gar, i. C.\a, Taramellite: ? Soda nitre: II. 1. D. a. Tarbuttite: ? Sodalite: I. 1. B. a.; I. 2. B. a, e. Tasmanite: II. 1. F. b. Spadaite: ? Tavistockite: ? 4 Spangolite: I. 3. e. Taylorite: IL. 1. E. b. Sperrylite: I. 1. * a. Teallite: I. 3. a. Spessartite: I. 2. A. a.; IL. 1. C. b. Tellurite: I. 3. ¢. Sphalerite: I. 1. C. b.; L. 2. A. a. Tellurium: ? I.3.a Temiskamite: I. 3. a. Spherite: TL. 1. C. b. Tengerite: I, 2. A. e, 456 Tennantite: 1. 3. a. Tenorite: I. 3. ¢.; 1. 4. Tephroite: II. 1. C. b. Terlinguaite: 1. 3. ¢. Teschemacherite: II. 1. EB. b. Tetradymite: 1. 3. a. Tetrahedrite: I. 3. a. Thalenite: I. 2. A. a. Thaumasite: I. 1. C. b. Thenardite: II. 1. D. a. Thermonatrite: II. 1. D. a. Thomsenolite: I. 2. A. b. Thomsonite: I. 1. el | oh Thorianite: 1.2 op he Thorite: I. 2. A. a. Thulite: II. 1. A. b. Thuringite: I. 1. B. b. Tiemannite: I. 3. a. Tilasite: II. 1. C. b. 1. 2, B:%: Tinta Titanite: I. 1. A. a.; I. 1. C. a.; i 2 Ase 729: Boe} Bn ape A. a.; Il. iB bs: Topaz: I. 1. A. he I. 2. A, a. Torbernite: I. * 2 A. c.; Sra Gs Tourmaline: I. ae Aa a D2 Ac a 1 nn OF ated WES Paar ia O Dae eae ee ‘< bs Il. 1. B. b. Trechmannite: I. 3. a Tremolite: I. 1. D. ‘ee {Hh ai gl OH) op Trichalcite: I. 3. ¢. Tridymite: I. 1. A. a.; I. 1. C. a. Trimerite: I. ACs 2. A. a. Trosert Hite: ty 3, Cc. Troilite: meteoritic. Trona: II. 1. D. Tscheffkinite: ? Tschermigite: Tungstite: I. 3. ¢. Turgite: I]. 1. C. : Turquois: 1. 1. re C. Tychite: II. 1. D. ¢ Tyrolite: I. 3. ¢. Tysonite: I. 2. A. a. U Ulexite: II. 1. D. a. Ullmannite: I. 3. a. Umangite: I: 3. a. Uraninite: I. 2. A. a.; I. 3. a. Uranocircite: I. 3. C. Uranophane: I. 2. A. e. Uranopilite: I. 2. A. ¢. Uranospherite: I. 3. ¢ Uranospinite: I. 3. ¢. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF |Aug., Uranothallite: 1. 2. A. Cc. Urbanite: IL. 1. C. Utahite: I. 3. ¢. Uvarovite: I. 1. D. a. V Valentinite: I. 3. ¢. Vanadinite: I. 3. ¢. Vanthoffite: IT. 1. D. a. Variscite: ? Vauquelinite: I. 3. ¢. Vermiculite: I. 1. A.c.; I. 2. A.c. cludes jefferisite. Vesuvianite: II. 1. B. b Veszelyite: ? Villiaumite: I. 1. B. a. Vivianite: I. 3.c.; If. 1. C.b. Voglite: 1. 3. ¢. In- — Volborthite: ? Voltaite: I. 4. Voltzite: I. 3. ¢. W - Wad: see psilomelane. Wagnerite: ? Walpurgite: I. 3. ¢. Wapplerite: ? Wardite: II. 1. C. b. Warrenite: I. 3. a. Warwickite: I. 1. B. b. | Wattevillite: ? | Wavellite: I. 3. ¢.; II. 1. C. b. ~ Wollastonite: I. 2 Wehlerite: I. 3. a. Wellsite: ? Wernerite: I. 2, A. a.; I. 2. C. a; ie Ale Bp) Whewellite: II. 1. F. ec. Whitneyite: I. 3. a. Willemite: II. 1. C. b. Willyamite: I. 3. a. Witherite: I. 3. a Wittichenite: I. 3. a. Wohlerite: I. 2. B. a. Wolfachite: I. 3. a. Wolframite: I. 2. A. a.; 1. 3 ~B: a: : Il. i B. b. Wulfenite: I. 3. c¢. Wurtzite: I. 3. a. x Xanthoconite: I. 3. a. Xanthophyllite: ? Xanthosiderite: II. 1. C. a. Menotime: 1) LA: 9.71.27 Awa, | a Caer y Yttrialite: I. 2. A. a. Yttrocerite: 1. 2. A. a. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 457 Yttrocrasite: ? Zinkosite: ? Yttrotantalite: I. 2. A. a. Zinnwaldite: fa oo Es In cludes polylithionite. Z Zircon: I. 1. A. a.; Sees Zaratite: I. 1. D: ec. T:2; An dee ri = Bie ta Ol ae Zeophyllite: Et. G. b. It, 1. Aja oil. 1. 3. b: ’ Zepharovichite: II. 1. C. b. Zirkelite: II. 1. A. a. Zeunerite: I. 3. c. Zoisite: iI. 1. A. b.; I. 1. C. b.; Zine: ? 322, Ae IL. i: Bb. Zincaluminite: I. 3. ec. See also thulite. Zincite: II. 1. C. b. Zorgite: I. 3. a. Zinkenite: I. 3. a. Zunyite: I. 3. a. 30 458 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., NEW OR LITTLE-KNOWN CRANE-FLIES FROM THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA: TIPULIDA, DIPTERA. PART 2. BY CHARLES P. ALEXANDER. INTRODUCTION. In the present paper, the author has undertaken a consideration of the American crane-flies contained in the collections of the Boston Society of Natural History and the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Cambridge. These collections are of peculiar interest to the student of crane-flies since they include the numerous types of Johnson, Osten Sacken, and Loew, in addition to a considerable amount of unclassified material. The paper has been divided into two parts, the first being a designation of the single-type specimen of the species of Tipula described by Loew, the second part a con- tinuation of the first paper under this title. I wish to express my deep appreciation to all of the persons who have kindly assisted me in this study, most of whom are designated in various parts of the paper. I am especially indebted to Mr. Charles W. Johnson and to Mr. Samuel Henshaw for the great privilege of examining and studying the invaluable collections in their custody. Part 1. DESIGNATION OF THE SINGLE-TYPE (LECTOTYPIC) SPECIMEN OF THE NortH AMERICAN SPECIES OF TIPULA DESCRIBED BY HERMANN LOEW. The North American crane-flies described by Hermann Loew were included in a series of papers published between the years 1861 and 1872 under the general title of Diptera Americ’ septen- trionalis indigene and appearing in the Berliner Entomologische Zeitschrift. This remarkable series of articles was in ten parts or centuries, each containing the description of a hundred species of flies. The references will be merely to the ‘‘Century,” with the number of the species in the century and the original pagination. The date of the five centuries in which the crane-flies were described is as follows: | ProceEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, October, 1914, pp. 579-606. 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 459 Century IV, vol. 7, Nos. 1-42; 1863. Century V, vol. 8, Nos. 14-32; 1864. Century VI, vol. 9, Nos. 2, 3; 1865. Century VIII, vol. 13, No. 2; 1869. Century X, vol. 16, Nos. 2, 3; 1872. All of the North American crane-flies described by Loew in this | series of articles belong to the subfamily Tipuline and include the following genera: Clenophora (1 species); Longurio (1 species); Holorusia (1 species); Stygeropsis (3 species); Pachyrrhina (19 species) and T7pula (41 species). The Loew material is all cotypic, there being no designation of a single-type specimen, and conse- quently the choosing of a lectotype at this time is deemed advisable. Concerning the Loew collection, as it is now preserved, it should be understood that the type-series for any species very often includes many specimens that were not mentioned by Loew in his original description, and yet there can be no doubt but that the material formed part of the type-series, since the specimens often bear the written label in Loew’s script and the text of certain of the deserip- tions indicates that this material was before the author at the time that the description was drawn up. It has often seemed advisable to select one of these latter specimens as type, but this has not been done unless the actual specimen mentioned by Loew could not be located, as in the case of Tipula angulata. In all cases the male sex has been given preference over the female because of the varied characters of the hypopygium of this sex. Specimens that were placed in the series by Osten Sacken at the time that he arranged the material in the museum, but from the place and date were obviously not in Loew’s hands at the time of the drawing up of the descriptions, have been ignored. It may be stated that the material in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, as regards the species of Tipula, is still largely unarranged except to the major divisions based on the wing-pattern, there being three large cases devoted to the striate, marmorate and subunicolores. When one studies the descriptions of the Tipule described by Loew it is at once noted that only about six of the forty or more characterized are of the sub- unicolores, and this was explained when the collection was studied. The majority of the species described as new in the present Jaaper, as well as most of the Eastern species named by Doane in 1901, were found in the collection, bearing manuscript names in Loew's writing but for some unexplained reason having never been described. In cases where this was feasible the name suggested by Loew is the 460 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., ‘one that has been adopted. These manuscript names of Loew have appeared in various collections, or, in some cases (bicornis, brevicollis), even into the literature, and consequently it is deemed advisable to mention the name applied by Loew to the different species discussed in the second part of this paper. TIPULA. T. angulata, Century V, No. 22, pp. 61, 62. The type-material was stated to have come from Massachusetts, but the only specimen now appearing in-the collection is a male from New Hampshire, bearing the number 258, with the name-label. in Loew’s writing. It is this specimen that is designated as the type; there is a possibility that the locality labels were later confused or that Loew wrote down the wrong State in his original description. There is no reason whatsoever for doubting that the specimen was before Loew at the time he drew up the description. The paler specimen mentioned in a note by Loew is not of this species, but of T. penobscot, described later; the sex is not female, but male. Lectotype, o&, New Hampshire. T. angustipennis, Century IV, No. 19, pp. 286, 287. Seventeen specimens in the type-series; (1), o’, Winnipeg (Kenni- cott); (2), o&, No. 396, Labrador (Schneider); (3), 2, No. 129, Connecticut; (4), &@, Maine. Others in the series from Illinois; Hudsons Bay Territory (Kennicott); Lake Superior; Texas; Bruns- wick, Maine (Packard). Lectotype, co, Winnipeg (Kennicott). T. apicalis, Cautard IV, No. 2, p. 277. Three specimens in the type-series; (1), 2, bearing the name-label, Maine; (2), &, No. 254, without locality; (3), &, Dobbs Ferry, N. Y. The male sex is not included in the original description and therefore is not mentioned as type. Lectotype, 2, Maine (Osten Sacken). T. appendiculata, Century IV, No. 20, p. 287. The monotype only, a o’, Saskatchewan (Kennicott). T. balioptera, Century IV, No. 15, p. 284. Three specimens in the type-series; (1), @ and 9, together on the pin, the 2 almost entirely destroyed by museum pests, only one wing remaining, English River, Canada (Kennicott); (3), 0%, labelled only “R. A. (Kennicott).” Lectotype, @, English River (Kennicott). 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 461 T. bella, Century IV, No. 29, pp. 291, 292. Nine specimens in the type-series; (1), o& 9, No. 99, Connecticut, bearing the name-labels; (4), most of the specimens now without locality-labels (including the District of Columbia material mentioned in the original description). Lectotype, o, Connecticut (Norton). T. caloptera, Century IV, No. 30, p. 292. Four specimens in the type-series; the specimen from Rhode Island mentioned in the original description of the species could not be traced; (1), o&, No. 128, Massachusetts; (2), 9, Illinois. Lectotype, o&, Massachusetts (Scudder). T. canadensis, Century V, No. 19, pp. 59, 60. The monotype only, a o, Fort Resolution, Hudsons Bay Territory (Kennicott). T. casta, Century IV, No. 25, p. 289. Two specimens in the type-series, from Pennsylvania. Lectotype, o, Pennsylvania. T. centralis, Century V, No. 21, pp. 60, 61. The monotype only, a o&, Hudsons Bay Territory (Kennicott). T. cincta, Century IV, No. 24, pp. 288, 289. Six specimens in the type-series; (1), o&, No. 96, District of Columbia; (2), 2, District of Columbia; (3), co‘, New Hampshire, bearing the label in Loew’s writing; (4), one o’, two 9’s, New Hampshire. Lectotype, @, District of Columbia (Osten Sacken). T. discolor, Century IV, No. 12, p. 282. The monotype only, a 2, now without locality-label, but according to the original description, Massachusetts (Scudder). T. eluta, Century IV, No. 27; p. 290. The type.is apparently no longer in existence. It was described from the District of Columbia (Osten Sacken). T. fallax, Century IV, No. 10, p. 281. The type-material is from California. Lectotype, o’, California (Agassiz). T. fasciata, Century IV, No. 6, p. 279. Six specimens in the type-series; (1), o, Sharon Springs, N. Y.; (2), one &, two 2’s, No. 247, New York; (5), co”, Palisades, N. Y.; (6), 2, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Lectotype, o&, Sharon Springs, N. Y. (Osten Sacken). 462 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Sept., T. fragilis, Century IV, No. 7, pp. 279, 280. Two specimens in the type-series; (1), o, No. 7, Maine. Lectotype, co’, Maine. T. fraterna, Century V, No. 14, pp. 56, 57. The type is apparently no longer in existence. A label pinned in the case states: ‘I found the label loose in the drawer and could not refer it to any species. O.Sacken.’’ The species was described from the District of Columbia (Osten Sacken). T. grata, Century IV, No. 11. pp. 281, 282, Six specimens in the type-series; (1), two o’s, District of Columbia (Osten Sacken); (3), o% 9, New York. Lectotype, o, District of Columbia (Osten Sacken). T. hebes, Century IV, No. 18, pp. 285, 286. Six specimens in the type-series; (1), o, the specimen bearing the name-label in Loew’s writing lacks the locality-label, but is presumably the Connecticut specimen; (2), o, Wisconsin; (3), 2’s, Illinois. The Maine material was not found. Lectotype, o, Connecticut (Norton). T. ignobilis, Century IV, No. 9, p. 280. Two specimens in the type-series; (1), 9, without locality-label, but presumably the specimen from the District of Columbia; the specimen is pinned with the cast pupal skin; (2), 2 , New Hampshire. Lectotype, 2, District of Columbia (Osten Sacken). T. infuscata, Century IV, No. 26, pp. 289, 290. Two specimens in the type-series; (1), the specimen bearing the name-label is broken and the sex is uncertain, but from the text of the original characterization it is presumed that the specimen is a female; (2), 9, New York. Lectotype, 2, New York. T. latipennis, Century V, No. 20, p. 60. Three specimens in the type-series; (1), two o’s, one 2, No. 249, New Hampshire. . Lectotype, &, New Hampshire (Osten Sacken). T. longiventris, Century IV, No. 5, pp. 278, 279. Five specimens in the type-series; (1), @, No. 6, Illinois, bearing the name-label; (2), a broken specimen from English River, Canada (Kennicott); (3), @, almost totally destroyed by Dermestids, the wings and a fragment of the thorax all that is left; the label says “Osten Sacken’’ without locality; (4), 9, New York (Edwards) 1915.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 463 with the apex of the abdomen broken off; the specimen bears the name-label in Loew’s writing; (5), 2, Maine. Lectotype, <, Illinois (description says Osten Sacken, but probably Kennicott). T. macrolabis, Century V, No. 17, p. 58. Two specimens in the type-series; (1), &, No. 136, Fort Resolu- tion (Kennicott) (2), &, labelled “‘Hudsons Bay Territory.” Lectotype, <, Fort Resolution, Hudsons Bay Territory (Kenni- cott). T. pallida, Century IV, No. 16, pp. 284, 285. Six specimens in the type-series; (1), &, No. 251, pinned above the cast pupal skin, Massachusetts; (2), co, Massachusetts; (3), 2, New Hampshire; (4), sex uncertain, New Hampshire; (5), two